《Naruto Hiden》 Volume 1 - Prologue Pages 3-4 [T/N] ɷ is to be alright, okay, safe, fine. When Naruto says ʤĤ顢Ƭ֤ǴɷäƤФ衹, he literally says, For such guys, with one arm, its fine/alright ttebayo. But the meaning here matches better that hes implying that he can handle his business with just one arm, so what I have is enough. ɽ is like a pin-holder, the kind where its a base with needles/long things standing upwards like blades of grass that you stick flowers into. Imagine a pincushion filled with pins, basically. * is Garyo His name is made of kanjifrom Self/Obstinate+Dragon. He is the leader of װͬ , which is the Ryuuha Busou Doumei = Dragon Wave Weapon Alliance. More about this later. His group name was mentioned in the cover page of the novel, but it hasnt been fleshed out in this part of the book yet. Pages 5+6 [T/N] һ can also colloquially mean Some time ago instead of One year, but I left it literally because it probably means to include the mini-time skip of 699 where the village is being rebuilt, funeral services, Sasukes departure, etc. Sai means to say that just because the last war ended, it doesnt nessisarily mean that humanitys conflicts were solved/ there no more conflict to be had. Its all from one hand, the raw actually does mean that Naruto came up with a new way to do his jutsucrossing his fingers with one hand. o__o;;~~ Yӷ is literally to tie a knotor means of union/end, which I take has to do with fingers being crossed on the same hand. Pages 7-8 [T/N] Pages 9-10 [T/N] ?iB was given this furigana: Ҥ礦Ȥ󣺤Ҥ礦 Earth/Ground+Chain+Length(?)+Ice. As for B, Weblio says: shot of chain cablebayshackle of chain cablestringlength of chain cableruncable length. Basically something long. So I think we officially hit non-canon territory now lol~ Haku was the best! X means more like lightly but it made more intuitive sense for it to mean numbing. ӥ (biki) is SFX for fleshy innards moving (like muscles moving), IIRC. I have no idea what this sounds like in English TBH. Basically his cells are freezing, so maybe it should sound like ice cracking? Pages 11-12 [T/N] Pages 13-14 [T/N] The enemy really does say Τޤʥ. That Uzumaki Naruto. ä or ä is an expression at the end of a sentence when youre trying to recall info. Like it comes off as What was that again? Im trying to remember xxx I did my best to fit that nuance in as vaguely recall, though it could also be like I guess that xxxxx ֤ʤ is like Response/reaction---not overly doing. Basically saying You didnt react at all/much/enough. As the enemy implies that since hes Naruto (who struck down Madara), he expected more from him/him to not get fro-yoed. Hence when the shadow clone died, hes pointing out that it sorta seemed a bit too easy to kill Naruto just like that~ ǤͥՄäƤФ is like I cant have that sort of discussion or Were not even going to talk about something like that. It was too weird to leave literally. So it became more like Thats out of the question! because Naruto is just saying that there no bargaining talk with him. ΤȤ⤷ʤ is one whole expression. Meaning youre purposely ignoring something. Page 15-16 [T/N] Im actually not very sure about that muddy eye thing. Its just describing his appearance, so w/e ;__;;;~~ If its important later on as I read the novel, Ill clarify it. He means that because Sasuke is probably not going to hop on the train to try another Infinite Tsukuyomi, that idea is no longer a possibility because he needs him in order to activate it again. Yeah, this section gets into some deep philosophy, and not gonna lie, I had to look up some of the words on good old Jisho and Weblio. I think I made sense of it overall into English though~ Pages 17-18 [T/N] Take this time to read back up on the Wave Country on the Naruto Wikia, or think way back to the Zabuza arc, and the fact that they have to outsource to other villages like Konoha to protect themselves. Shock refers to the medical emergency denotation. In this case, most likely anaphylactic (a severe allergic) shock. So his son probably had a fatal reaction that to the sting ;__;;~~~ Pages 31-32 [T/N] ݤʳʤ is an expression that means something like I cant stomach thatSorta like if you dont like what someone said, or you have a bad feeling about it. So Naruto is asking Inari if hes satisfied with the claims like Eh, are you really that confident in the safety?! Because we know Naruto is incredulous~~ The reason why Inari goes Eh? is because of Naruto read what was on his mind. Inari was worried about something else. äѤ= a cup of, but also means like to the utmostor fullyjust a lot of money. Pages 33-35 (Last three pages~) [T/N] = Houzukijyou = Hzukijou = Hzuki Castle=Blood Prison. Its a reference to a previous Naruto movie~~ 褯֤ͥ= I dont know what would be good. Naruto is referring to the problem of how to solve the employment qualm because of how the Tobishachimaru will affect the economy and livelihood of the shipping industry. Because of course, it would dominate in terms of shipping speeds and take out the competitorslike monopolizing the trade. And so everyone else will strugglebus and not be happy about it. So the idea is that it will accidentally impoverish others. So when they talk about how tools can be used for good or bad things, its about how to solve something like that with the conflict surrounding the new ship. //END OF TRANSLATION //PROLOGUE END Volume 1 - CH 1 [Page 1 & 2] Translator Notes: he wasnt the kind of person who understood the sentiments of another person, no matter what. It should be "Kakashi wasn''t the kind of person who xxxx". Above meaning that Naruto is among the other people who don''t seem to understand Kakashi''s feelings regarding not becoming Hokage right away. It shouldn''t be interpreted as that he doesn''t understand other people''s emotions at all. Naruto is like everyone else who''s a bit confused by Kakashi''s actions for now. So Kakashi doesn''t understand those kinds of people who are pressuring him~ 㥤//Icha-Icha= Flirting, making-out aäƥˤĤƤ//Shut up and come along with me is sort of like a crude and archaic kind of proposalfrom a rough guy, never to be used IRL! Oh myyy Jiraiya. ޤ hʤrͥ//The comment about Kakashis hearing was literally like (Youre) not at the age when youre (supposed) to be hard of hearing. Except that was weirder to phrase. x֤ǤΤ//How is your prosthetic arm doing?= Was literally Can your artificial arm do (that)? Thats obviously not natural so it was made more colloquial. [Page 3 & 4] Translator Notes: ٘gԤäƤͥäƤФ= Literally its like I wouldnt call it a luxury, but the usage of the expression is sorta like Without asking for too much (in return for xxx)but not quite like settling for it likeI wasnt expecting that much of it. The point is that Naruto is being grateful that its functional. ϤȤ֤= Can also mean like I dislike things like thator the feelings likeIm bad at that stuff. Basically Kakashi is saying hes just not that into doing the Hokage official business just yet. ӰˤʤQĤϤ = Determined (mentally) to become Hokage. Colloquially like to make up ones mind ݤˤƤ carries a negative connotation. Like people are worried or anxiously conscious that even though Kakashi''s face is on the cliff, he''s not actually the Hokage yet. [Page 5 & 6 ] Translator Notes: = is like no good, useless, hopeless. Naruto is basically saying that Tsunade isnt fit for the role of Hokage anymore, so I have unsuitable because it seems to capture that a bit better. I explained the nuance for this section [HERE] because apparently people are taking it far out of context. Naruto is speaking in a joking manner, a light tone. He is not saying it seriously or maliciously as anti-fans are claiming~ So please read my [T/N] about the nuance~ ɤʤѩ`äȤä㤨ߤʣ= is literally like You might as well go all-out if youre trying to say something like thatsarcastically. It didnt capture the rage very well, so my version sounds more like berating Naruto. ЦɤǤϤʤ= to be far from laughing, being too caught up in the moment to even think about laughing. It got clunky to me, so I have it to mean more like, Its not something to joke about = thirst for blood, bloodlust, seething in anger [Page 7 & 8 ] Translator Notes: ɤ= Where, but the usage here is like How far/long or To what extent. Τफ顢⤦Υ]Ƥ죡= By (my) request (/Im begging you), please close (/shut) your mouth already.Like a more polite way of Kakashi thinking SHUT IT, NARUTO. = Gogogogo, like the SFX of something ominously looming. 󤭤ʤԤͥ= Im not sure if the second time Naruto means that he cant talk about Tsunades booming voice, or just that he shouldnt be saying his criticisms of Tsunade in such a loud voice. I think its the latter. The SFX is // Gonnbut I think you can substitute it with any other English punching noise. [Page 9 & 10 ] Translator Notes: I think ڥ is supposed to be , to be startled. Y= Voice turned inside-out. It means like it switched into like a falsetto squeak. I think the English equivalent is more like when a voice breaks. I think the Gokage conference that they are referring to is the one after the Pein arc, where Kakashi is almost named Hokage after Danzou died, but then Tsunade woke up before the appointment. It says and the given furigana here as Raikiri, not Chidori. [Page 11 & 12 ] Translator Notes: ҕ= moving body eyesight. Though I had to look it up on Weblio because this compound word wasnt used in the manga. Dictionary says dynamic vision or kinetic vision. Kakashi means the ability to foresee counterattacks. So theres new names here and it gets awkward if you dont remember Blood Prison. This is what is given in the Furigana.= ۤ礦= Houzukijyou= Blood Prison=Demon Lantern Castle. And o=Mui. You can read up about them on the Wikia [here] and [Here] to refresh yourself on Blood Prison. New name: wU= ȤӤޤ= Tobishachimaru. The online reader has it a bit blurry whether or not its bi () or pi (), but more likely bi. I realize it gets a bit murky at the end, and TBH I dont remember the plot of Blood Prison enough to distinctly know about these characters anymore. But since this is the beginning of the novel, the book will probably clarify and go over about them more thoroughly in detail later. Youll see in the next section, theres some background to it that sort of recaps the movie. [Page 13 & 14 & 15 (END of Excerpt)] Translator Notes: I thought the Blood Prison was supposed to be inL (Kusagakure, Grass Country) based on the movie, but it seems that its actually in the Wave Country, or they switched which village owned it since then. Im slightly confused about ĿǤ because it thought it was dismissal from duty. The Wikia has [Heavenly Prison No Jutsu] as an entry. Im not sure if the one that they are talking about here is the same one from the movie. It seems so. I have no insight about this flying ship thing. The book will probably go over it later If youre confused, Im right there with you, lol~ Recall that wU= ȤӤޤ= Tobishachimaru, The kanji is made up of Flying + Orca (/killer whale). The ending Cmaru is a suffix for names of a ship. [Jisho] tells me that U can also be amythical carp with the head of a lion and the body of a fish (auspicious protectors of well-being). So imagine a flying majestic, but awkward-bodied whale? This seems to be the name of the flying ship itself. Ӥ= adding one thing to another. But Kakashi is just putting his ideas together like how we say Putting two and two together Basically, Kakashi concluded that shinobi will try to take advantage of the technology for evil if it falls into their hands. People will try to rule the sky with it, pretty much. End of Translation Volume 1 - CH 2 Chapter 2:o˲g// Moment of the Century Pages 1 and 2 are title pages. Pages 3-4 Even though it was supposed to be a secret event, they held a grand ceremony for the sight-seeing flight on the beach. They break open a kusudama, release white doves, have a parade, throw confetti, and congratulatory speeches are given. Everyone is dressed up in honour of the moment of the century. The Tobishachimaru is 223 metres long, 34 metres in diameter, and has a maximum speed of 70 km/hr (about 44mi/hr). It has six sets of propellers, a streamlined gondola, and guest quarters. The name of the Tobishachimaru is from the huge orca (shachi) with pectoral and dorsal fins carefully depicted on the balloon portion. Its perfect weather. Tazuna tears up at the sight of seeing his own work come to fruition. Kakashi congratulates Tazuna. Pages 5-6 Tazuna says that the balloon is filled with helium for buoyancy, which is lighter than air and flame-resistant. The sight-seeing flight is going to be 2.5 hours, only up to 5,000 metres in altitude, where other countries cant see it along its flight course. The fuselage/airframe colour is to assimilate to the light blue of the sky. This info is only known to Konoha. Even though Garyo has been sent to Hyouzukijyou, the remnants of his group are still everywhere. Thats why Konohas skills are employed for the mission and will be monitoring the ship. The voice from the platform interrupts Tazuna and Kakashi talking, and tell them that the 57 lucky people with invitations should be heading towards Tobishachimaru for boarding. Pages 7-8 Tazuna is overcome with emotion and smiles. Its the moment of the century at last! They laugh together as they watch over the stream of dressed-up people starting to board Tobishachimaru. People are taking photos to commemorate the occasion, but then they suddenly hear panicked footsteps running up from behind. A woman in a long blue dress is running at full speed, waving her gold ticket in hand, telling them to wait up for her to board. Right when she is next to Kakashi, she stumbles on something and starts to fall, screaming. Pages 9-10 Kakashi asks if shes okay. She replies that shes sorry for troubling him because she was in a hurry, and thanks him. She shouts again and starts to rush at the ship, telling them to wait up for her so she can board. Kakashi notes to Tazuna as he watches her run off that she seems to be really anticipating the sight-seeing flight. He also says that it must be wonderful business to be a carpenter. Tazuna responds instead by saying that she was a really beautiful woman, and speaking of occupations, he inquires about Kakashis formal inauguration ceremony. Kakashi shakes his head vaguely. He glances back at the woman, and they are now are awaiting takeoff. Tazuna then says this while Kakashi stares absentmindedly at the tail propellers: Pages 11-12 Kakashi vaguely responds that it might be something like that. Tazuna thinks that he shouldnt be worried, even if everyone has huge expectations. Suddenly, Kakashis eyes catch something in the shadow of the ship. Tazuna doesnt notice, he keeps going on about the lady, asking Kakashi for example, if she tried to persistently press him for marriage. Kakashis ignoring him for the most part. Tazuna continues about the what-ifs of an assertive woman, and says that when he was young, he was like a hungry dog, chasing after the buttocks of women. Kakashi interrupts him as he concentrates on a suspicious man who just jumped from the stern of the ship. Kakashi then rushes towards the Tobishachimaru and the ramp where the last passengers had boarded, leaving behind a confused Tazuna. The staff of the ship are preparing for take-off. Pages 13-14 Kakashi calls out to the man wearing a black hooded cloak, who stops for a bit. Kakashi gets the impression that the man is uninvited. The man dashes away as Kakashi tells him to wait up. They start exchanging blows, and Kakashi does a consecutive combination of attacks. Kakashi feels that the person hes fighting against is considerably good: there are no wasted movements. They exchange more taijutsu blows and they are reading eachothers movements. It was an attack pattern that Kakashi seemed to know well, and Kakashi doesnt feel any bloodlust. Pages 15-16 Kakashi realizes that theres no indication at all that the opponent would use ninjutsu . He double-checks his intuition and looks at the man in the black hood and his stature. Kakashi lands a blow on the opponents chest. They continue to exchange consecutive combos of taijutsu. The enemy gets knocked to the ground, and Kakashi is exposes him and says: Its Rock Lee! (.:D~) Kakashi goes through the crowd of other passengers and people taking photos. He heads towards the last rope at the hull that connects the Tobishachimaru to the ground. [T/N] No, there arent names of the taijutsu specified in this section. Just fists/elbows/legs moving around that arent too interesting to translate. Same thing as in the prologue between Naruto and Sasuke, Τ= Guy no yatsu= That guy, Guy. Pages 17-18 As Kakashi crosses by the window of the gondola, he catches a glimpse of the people inside, but no one notices him at all. He goes on the side of the air sac and runs up to the tail of the ship. Kakashi starts thinking about how Lee had escaped the watchful eyes of the Jounin who were distributed around the venue. He muses that perhaps they were bribed. Kakashi struggles to the stern of the ship, hanging with one hand. Inside theres a five metre long propeller. He guesses that they would have trespassed from here. The propellers start to turn, and the speed increases with a low roar. As they increase altitude, strong winds start blowing, and the temperature is colder than expected. Kakashi gathers chakra at his hands and feet to not be blown away by the wind. Pages 19-20 Kakashi continues to crawl to the propulsion section. The Tobishachimaru seems to have finally decided on its course, and stops for a moment in midair. Kakashi braves against the wind and crawls into the interior just before the propellers start to rotate again, and braces himself. Hes fortunate that the propeller speed wasnt too high, otherwise he would have been minced meat. Kakashi is relieved. But hes still in danger of being sucked in, so he gathers chakra again to cling onto the ship. Little by little, he makes progress towards escaping that interior section and checks his surroundings. He notices that the front buoyancy air sac is blocked off, but its connected to where he is by a ladder that he can climb down. It seems to head to the engine room. Kakashi hears a strange noise, so he scans the scaffolding that is running in every direction. [T/N] Pages 21-22 Kakashi notices that it seems to be the shadow of Lee, whos still wearing the black hood escaping. Kakashi jumps over iron railing and the scaffolding. On the bottom of the ships hold, there were many wooden boxes. The man in the wheelchair was staggering on the scaffolding that was running parallel to Kakashis footing. Kakashi hops over and says What is the meaning of this, Guy!Guy suddenly stops his wheelchair. Kakashi demands an explanation and sighs. He asks if Guy coerced Lee into giving him a ride to the Tobishachimaru, as it seems that its as if he threatened to cut off their student-teacher bonds. And then Kakashi notes Guys condition: Pages 23-24 And so Guy responds: Kakashi then glances at Gais right foot, which is in a cast, and asks him if thats why he purposely trespassed onto Tobishachimaru. Guy responds: [T/N] Kakashi stares at Guy, but Guy keeps on talking. He says that he wasnt particularly interested in the ship at all, or for the scenery at 5,000 metres in sky. As for the ship thats 223 metres long and over 200 tons, he doesnt care how it can fly. In Kakashis head, hes thinking, This guy no matter what, he just wanted to get aboard the ship. [T/N] Pages 25-26 Kakashi reminds Guy about his terrible seasickness. Gai tries to brush off his chances of vomiting, He says that a ship is a ship, but this is an airship, implying that its a different situation. Kakashi reminds him that its still a ship nevertheless. Guy persists that hell be fine, but then his face suddenly gets pale and feels nauseated, as hes obviously queasy. Kakashi wonders what Guys going to do about it. Then they change the subject have this funny chat, starting with Kakashi: Ahh, I see [T/N] Pages 27-28 Guy laughs with a Wahaha!, saying it was all premediatedbut then lurches again. He asks that apart from that, what happened to his favourite pupil? Kakashi says that hes fine and returned back to guard Hyouzukijyou (Blood Prison). Guy says that hes probably channeling his power of youth to watch over the prisoners by proxy. He feels sick again. He tells Kakashi that since he put forth the effort into sneaking onto the ship, he ought to push him around in his wheelchair so that they can look around a bit. Suddenly, Guys expression changes grimly and stops talking, looking downward at the lower part of the ships hold. Kakashi notices as well: there are shinobi. Aside from the Jounin inside the ship that have been approved, there shouldnt be any others. The steady their balance on the ship and study the situation. [T/N] Pages 29-30 Guy and Kakashi erase their presence and watch over the people below. From above, their faces arent clear, and their clothing doesnt seem to be different than those of other passengers. They dont notice Guy and Kakashi and the shinobi squat down near the side of some wooden boxes, and then hastily leave. Guy and Kakashi exchange glances. Kakashi heads over to check the surroundings and find what hes looking for immediately. Guy asks what he found. Kakashi groans back that things are going to become difficult; he found kunai with exploding tags. Then immediately from the dining room lounge, they hear screaming. //End Translation + Summary Volume 1 - CH 3 Chapter 3դuġ Sky Raid (Attack of the Sky) Pages 3+4 Guy begins to complain that its irritating how they werent faster, and how the shinobi should have already been apprehended. Guy urges Kakashi to hurry up as he pushes his wheelchair through the scaffolding thats hanging in midair, and pass by a warehouse. Guy attempts to get Kakashi hyped: [T/N] I bleeped out Kisama...you can pick your own expletive. Kakashi notes that Guy clearly doesnt understand the irony of the situation. They abandon the wheelchair in the kitchen. Firstly, Kakashi boosts Guy up and into the ventilation duct. He then jumps up himself. The two of them proceed to crawl through the duct. Pages 5+6 From the lattice grid cover in the ceiling, they overlooked the lounge. Next to the lattice grid cover, a large chandelier is dangling. At the corner of the lounge, there is a white grand piano. Theres a neat arrangement of sofa and tables, and even an alcohol bar near the window. They wonder what the shinobi are up to. There are several shinobi who are gaining control of the passengers. They are thrusting kunai at the passengers, jeering, and prodding them in order to gather up them one by one. [T/N] Pages 7+8 Before Guy finishes speaking, the jounin move. One of them is disguised as a passenger, and jumps up from the crowd. He hurls kunai from both hands at the enemy shinobi. Two of the enemy shinobi suddenly collapse. Glancing towards the screaming, which is beneath the splendid chandelier, theres a different jounin crossing swords with the enemy. Since a counterattack from the passengers was unexpected, the enemy shinobi simultaneously get riled up. Because of their good aim with shuriken, several passengers collapse. A jounin who was kicked by an enemy shinobi gets blown into the group of passengers. A man with a large-build from the center of the lounger barks and asks what a fellow shinobi, A (Kahyo), is doing. Pages 9+10 It seems like that man is the leader, whos wearing deep blue clothing and chain mail with a beard. Kakashi keeps Kahyos name in mind. The third jounin jumps from the grand piano, both hands grasping tightly on kunai, and leaps at the leader. The man draws out a long sword that is concealed beneath his overcoat, accepting the jounins challenge. Both of them do not carelessly use ninjutsu, probably since they are 5,000 metres above the ground in the sky. If they make a wrong move and damage the hull of the ship, they cant avoid a huge disaster. The jounin from Konoha and the leader of the enemy group clash and sparks fly from the kunai. Guy says that he and Kakashi should go aid them. Kakashi asks what he can do with that body, and to listen up and wait for a second. Kakashi feels an unpleasant uneasiness and apprehension. He had an impulse to want to rush to the aid of his comrades, but suppressed it. Immediately, he understood why. Its about Kahyo: There might still be a trump card for the enemy among the passengers. [T/N] A (Kahyo)s name is composed of Flower and Ice. There are no jutsu names specified and the jounin are not given names. It wasnt very interesting to translate~ Pages 11+12 [T/N] For some reason, ʤˤʤ֤ʤä (Nani ga nandaka wakaranakatta= Didnt know what was what) was really cool to readI think if youre inexperienced with reading long strings of hiragana, youd be confused, lol~~ Bikibiki is the same sound as in the prologue, the sound of fleshy bits freezing. Pages 13+14 Moreover, approximately four new people hurriedly rushed into the lounge. Kakashi muses that perhaps they are responsible for setting the traps of the exploding tags on-board the ship. The perpetrators of the attack then spread out in every direction, and assume positions for monitoring all the passengers. [T/N] װͬ = Ryuuha Busou Doumei =Ryuha Armament Alliance. The first two kanji are Dragon and Wave. ־ can be volunteer or sympathizer. Essentially an auxiliary member by association. Page 15 //End Translation + Summary //End of chapter 3 Volume 1 - CH 4 Chapter 4줿å`// Conveyed Message Chapter lengths vary in the novel. Its seriously only three pages long (pages 60-62)! So thats why I might as well just translate the whole thing directly Pages 60+61 Page 62 [T/N] Reminder: Team Ino-Shika-Chou and Team Guy are out guarding Houzukijyou, as mentioned briefly in the prologue. It doesnt explicitly say who Ino is trying to get in touch with for now. //End Translation + Summary //End of chapter 4 Volume 1 - CH 5 Chapter 5I̡Execution (Part 1~!) This will be the first half of it, then my next post will cover the second half of the chapter~~ Im starting to read the novel aloud to my friend over Google Hangouts, so I guess when I mean Summary it actually means more like I am paraphrasing the light novelor moreso what I would say out loud? I just dont have to worry about translating the words exactly as given as much. I hope you dont mind thats its a bit verbose to readI try to include as many details as possible, because I cant imagine another translator is casually going to take the plunge and provide further minor details. .So if this is the one translation that survives on the internet, at least I tried! (*0)??? Taking one for the team fandom here. Pages 64-65 There are less than 20 minutes until the beginning of the executions. For the past ten minutes, Guy and Kakashi have been observing the enemy from the ventilation ducts. It seems that the enemy has a comrade on the ground who has already conveyed the circumstances of the situation to Konohagakure. Not only that, but now the enemies have destroyed the door to the pilothouse (/steering room) and have the pilots under control. In a barking voice, the leader asks if hes speaking to the Hokage, and demands for the release of Garyo. It seems as though they have begun negotiations with Tsunade. He says that they are not going to wait, and in twenty minutes, they will seriously begin the executions. If Garyo is not released by noon, then every ten minutes, a passenger will be killed. The man leaves the pilothouse and then announces the same information to the passengers. The passengers huddle up, and an unrest travels among them. Guy asks Kakashi what they should do. Kakashi says that if they make a wrong move, the enemy will blow up the ship. But they cant lower the altitude of the ship The ventilation duct continues towards the pilothouse. Kakashi asks Guy if its okay to entrust a responsibility to him because he seems to be able to crawl. Immediately, the enemies fling several kunai at the ceiling, breaking through it. One grazes the tip of Kakashis nose. Kakashi and Guy (whos face is drained of colour) dodge left and right. A lance gets thrust through the ceiling, grazing Guys face and through their hair. Pages 66-67 Kakashi asks Guy if hes okay. Guy replies by asking whats happening. They then notice that these are not ordinary spears. They were like icicles, swords of ice. The daggers were tearing the ventilation duct into pieces, persisting in pursuit of Kakashi and Guy. Kakashi beckons Guy towards the pilothouse, and Guy agrees. They orient themselves back-to-back continuing to crawl along the ventiliation duct, twisting their bodies several times while avoiding the swords of ice. [T/N] ľ΢m= Woodchip/splinter + atom/particle = to break something into tiny fragments. Kakashi will use the jutsu quite a few more times in the novel. This is only the first usage. Ch. 7 you will see him using it in battle. Kakashi fell into a restroom. When he noticed, he was entangled with the woman in the blue dress. The woman opens her mouth to scream, but Kakashi quickly stops her from doing so. He shushes her, and stops up her mouth. She struggles, trying to escape from him in some way while making muffled groans. Kakashi tells her that he is not a suspicious person. He recognizes her as the women from that moment before. She has flowing, long curly hair with large pupils. Its fresh in his memory. He tells her that they met a while ago. He asks her if she remembers him from when he caught her as she was falling (=from the scene from Ch.2). The woman then seems to remember him. Kakashi asks her that if he releases his hand, then would she please be silent. With frightened eyes, she nods affirmatively. As he releases his hand from her mouth, Kakashi introduces himself as a shinobi from Konohagakure. Pages 68-69 Kakashi explains that hes part of the guards for the sight-seeing flight. He then asks her why the woman is in this sort of place. She catches her breathe and replies that when the enemies were raiding, she went into the restroom. Kakashi asks her if she just hid like that. She nods again. In the bathroom stall, their bodies are nestled close to eachother, and then they stand up. A faint lavender scent tickles Kakashis nose. He tells her that at any rate, they should leave there. He looks up at the hole in the ceiling, and sees evidence of the swords of ice has disappeared. He wonders if Guy had managed to skillfully escape. He tells her to escape through the hole in the ceiling, and though she hesitates, she feels relieved. Kakashi smiles sweetly at her, telling her that its fine, because the exit will be immediately next to the kitchen. She blinks her eyes in surprise. He asks her whats wrong, but she averts her eyes in a hurry. He tells her Lets go!. Kakashi lifts her up, and pushes her into the ventilation duct. He follows after her, and they proceed to crawl inside of it. They jump down from it once they reach the kitchen where Kakashi and Guy had initially gotten inside of the ventilation duct. In the kitchen, Guys abandoned wheelchair is still there. The woman started to say something, but then Kakashi quickly gnaws at his thumb and presses his palm into the floor: Kuchiyose no Jutsu! With a boom, white smoke emerges. Pakkun, Buru (Bull), Urushi, Guruko, Shiba, Bisuke, Uuhei, and AkinoHis eight Ninken (Ninja Dogs) appear. The woman is surprised and asks what are they. Buru asks where they are: Isnt it Kakashi? Its been a while! Kakashi shushes them, gesturing with his index finger to his mouth. He tells Buru that his voice is too loud. Akino, whos wearing sunglasses, notes that it seems like its a shabby place. He also says to Kakashi that it seems as though hes still hesitating about formally becoming Hokage. Apart from that, Kakashi asks them to lend him some strength. Pages 70-71 Pakkun asks Kakashi whats happening, as its unusual for him to seem so flustered like this. Kakashi responds that theres no time to talk about the details. He tells his Ninken that they are 5,000 meters above the ground in the sky. The facial expressions of the Ninken become tense immediately. Kakashi quickly continues and informs them that in various places onboard the ship, there are exploding tags that are set as traps. He asks them to please find all of the exploding tags without being noticed by the enemy. Pakkun leads the pack of Ninken, and they disperse. Kakashi then asks the woman to please stay hidden where they are, as he tries to turn back towards the ventilation ducts. But the woman pulls on his clothes, and Kakashi asks what shes doing, especially since the executions are almost about to start and hes trying to stop it from happening. She repeats that the demands of the raiders is for the release of Garyo, as she heard the rattling voice when she was hiding in the bathroom. Kakashi nods. She asks why its not the case that they are complying to the demand. If they continue to hesitate, then the victims will only increase. Kakashi responds that its impossible do such a thing, even if they wanted to. The woman asks why. Kakashi responds that if they obey those sorts of people even once, then order will collapse. She laughs scornfully, stating that just a year ago, they were at war, but yet talk about such order now. She then apologizes and lowers her eyes, and then continues: Kakashi says that he understands what she means. However, as for the Ryuuha Armament Alliance, they have their own form of justice. Pages 72-73 Kakashi says that nevertheless, they still cannot release Garyo. The woman presses him again, not even in exchange for the life of all the passengers onboard? Kakashi shrugs and responds that no matter what, he will protect everyone. He concedes that there may be a few victimsbut as for the lives in front of his eyes, he would like to rescue as many as he possibly can. The womans eyes get moist, and her lips tremble. Then Kakashi continues: Kakashi returned to crawling along the ventilation duct. He smashes open the lattice cover and jumps down and into the dining room lounge. Emerging from the ceiling, the Ryuuha Armament Alliance shinobi immediately rush at him and hurl several kunai. Kakashi bends at the waist, and while upturning the arm of an enemy whos holding a kunai, he nimbly deals a blow to him. One person is blown away. Without any delay, he kicks the next guy. Without leisure to take a breath, he unleashes a barrage at the third enemy. In the blink of an eye, three enemies lay collapsed at Kakashis feet. The remaining enemys eyes become bloodshot. The leader bellows at the subordinates to wait, and so their movements stop. He orders them to return to their post, and not to carelessly leave their duty, which is observing the passengers. In addition, since they are fighting the Copy Ninja Kakashi, and they are no match for him. Kakashi scans his surroundings: including the shinobi that he defeated, theres nine people. The passengers are all gathered in the center of the lounge. Their faces are mixed with fear and anticipation, attentively watching over the situation. [T/N] This is all taijutsu, no names are given. Pages 74-75 [T/N] Kakashi says that Konoha will not negotiate with outlaws like them. The leader says he wonders about that claim. The enemy boldly smiles, points, and casually chooses one of the passengers. Just like that, the victim begins to moan. The body of the passenger suddenly is encased in ice, frozen with a face filled with dread. The remaining passengers scream. The leader asks again if Kakashi is willing to negotiate. Kakashi shouts for him to stop, but the leader takes it as if it was pleasant compliment. With a satisfied look, the man closes his eyes and raises his arms again like a conductor of a symphony, and then casually points to the next victim. The passenger tries to escape, but is frozen mid-attempt. The lounge falls silent, and only the sobbing of a woman can be heard. The leader turns to face Kakashi, and says although it was a bit hasty, at any rate, time would have been up. He says that he intended to only kill one of the passengers, but because of Kakashi, he killed two of them. Kakashi curses at him. The leader says that if he felt like it, he could freeze all of the passengers in the room at once. Kakashi glares at the enemy, and says that if he does that, then they would lose all of their negotiation hostages. Page 76 The leader asks again, will Konoha negotiate with terrorists like them? Whether or not they have the hostages as part of their negotiation tactics, they have nothing to do with it if Konoha''s stance will not change anyway. If thats the case and Konoha does not accept the arrangements of the negotiation, then they are willing to continue killing everyone on the sight-seeing flight. Kakashi grinds his back molars. The leader faces towards Kakashi as he orders one of his subordinates to take a passenger to the pilothouse and report to Konoha what had just transpired. The leader tells Kakashi that if he obediently surrenders to being captured, then he will allow the passengers to survive for another ten minutes. If he opposes that suggestion, then they will continue to kill them off as planned. Kakashi and the leader exchange glances. Chapter 5I̡Execution (Part 2//Remainder of the Excerpt~!!) Must keep typing on my laptop ~~~_(??`) My hand is going to start cramping soon OTL. I''m kinda slow at answering messages for now. Sorry if you don''t get a response~~ o(ini)o Page 77 The man really seems intent on doing it. Kakashi sees both of the enemys hands preparing like hooked talons, and has another intuition. If Kakashi moves even a finger, they will surely massacre the hostages. Sighing, Kakashi releases fighting spirit throughout his whole body in resignation. Immediately, the enemies leap towards Kakashi, and bind his arms behind his back. The shinobi that Kakashi had defeated a while ago rise up from the ground, and then proceed to severely beat Kakashi in the face. Pages 78-79 From behind, Kakashi hears a satisfied voice, saying this predicament is fine. He shouldnt be able to escape. Cold sweat is gushing down his face, and he crumbles down to his knees. He tells them that if theyre going to kill someone, to kill him first. He shouts at them multiple times, but they laugh scornfully at him. The value of his life is a hundred times more valuable than that of a passenger. Kakashi might be useful in negotiations with Konoha. Thats why about ten minutes later, they kill a woman. She was wearing a radiant gorgeous black dress with jewelry. They repeat again that its one of two options: the release of Garyo, or they kill another hostage. The passengers can all hear the angry voice from the pilothouse. They are demanding that Konoha gets into contact with them within ten minutes, or else they kill two more people. He tells them that its because of Konoha that people are continuing to die. Kakashi curses and deeply regrets his decision. Theyre running out of patience. If the altitude was lower, they could do something. Kakashi wonder what should be done. His irritation at the situation is so intense that it erases the pain caused by his broken fingers. His mind fully operational, he hears a small voice that is directly addressing him. Three minutes until the next execution. Suddenly, he hears a voice. Kakashi-sensei, can you hear me? If you can hear me, please reply. Kakashi responds to Ino from her Shindenshin no Jutsu (/Mind-Body Transmission Technique). He asks Ino how she knows that hes on the Tobishachimaru. She tells him that Lee admitted to it. Pages 80-81 Kakashi realizes whats happening. Ino asks if hes okay, and if hes been captured by the enemy . Kakashi asks her if shes able to contact Guy and that hes alright. More importantly, in three more minutes, another execution will happen. In order to not be detected by the enemy, they had travelled inside an opening in the ventilation ducts in the ceiling. Ino tells him that Pakkun and the Ninken have successfully gathered all of the exploding tags and given them to Guy (who is all thumbs-up about it). She says that Guy will engage the leader in battle, and that will give Kakashi the opportunity to usher the passengers towards the warehouse. Tsunade has confirmed with the Wave Country that theres a huge box there, and the contents inside of it are giant parachutes. Kakashi disagrees with the plan. After all, among the passengers, there are disguised enemies. Ino informs him that Sai is currently on standby in the office of the Hokage. He asks for them to send over Sai, since with his Choujyuu Giga, he might be able to rescue them. He tells Ino how the members of the Ryuuha Armament Alliace have boarded the ship: by replacing the original passengers. At any rate, Kakashi says that he will cause an uproar and attempt to stall for more time. Its almost time for another execution. Inos voice then vanishes from inside his mind. Spotting Guy in the opening in the ceiling ventilation duct, he firmly gives another thumbs-up and smiles. Kakashi thinks hes an idiot, as thats unnecessary right now. They can hear the loud footsteps of the leader returning from the pilothouse. Guy ducks back into the darkness of the ventilation duct. The leader bellows that its about time for another execution. He tells the passengers that they should bear a grudge against Konohagakure Village for this situation: since instead of protecting all of their lives, they defending the life of a criminal (Garyo). Pages 82-83 The leader approaches and the passengers shut their eyes, shrinking away. He slowly raises his arms, saying its pathetic, but one of them is next. But thenBoom! Theres a roaring sound from the stern of the ship, and the rest of his words are cut off. The hull inclines to a huge slope, so the passengers scream and tumble on the floor. Of course, the enemies also lose their balance, and needed something to support themselves up. A shrill sounds emits from an alarm buzzer. The leader shouts, asking what happened. There seems to be an outbreak of a fire at the stern of the ship. Shinobi leap out of the pilothouse. Someone seems to have blown up the propulsion component. Kakashi rolls his eyes, thinking Guy did it. He must have used all of the exploding tags that Pakkun had gathered. The leader approaches, and then grips Kakashis hair, demanding to know if he has an accomplice and what he has done. Kakashi gives him a cold glare, telling him that he doesnt know. But at any rate, they ought to extinguish that fire (the earlier the better, right?~). The air sacs buoyancy component is right above the propulsion segment. At first, Kakashi expects the enemy to be flustered. However, the rage and impatience has vanished on his face. The enemy seems to be enjoying this turn of events. An intense uneasiness runs through Kakashis spine. The ringing of the alarm buzzer ceases. The passengers timidly get back up. The shinobi have returned and have reported that the fire has been extinguished. About two of the propellers were damaged, but the buoyancy component was unharmed. Repair of the hole that the explosion had caused has already been tended to. They announce that they are still able to glide through the air. Pages 84-85 The leader is enjoyably smiling from the depths of heart at Kakashi. It seems that they had anticipated such event that Konoha shinobi would infiltrate the ship. Why wouldnt the enemy anticipate it with prepared countermeasures? He calls out to Kahyo, and the grin on his face vanishes. Kakashi asks if thats what their trump card is. It seems that with hyouton (ice release), the fire was extinguished, and the hole was patched. Afterall, Guy and Kakashi had already discovered their first trump card, which was exploding tags. Kakashi looks up at the ceiling, and tells him to look upwards too. The heel of Guys foot dropped, and theres an explosion on the crown of the enemys head. The hull of the ship trembled. The force was tremendous, and creates giant hole in the floor. If it wasnt for the plumbing space beneath the floorboards, the enemys body would have pierced through the bottom of the ship. He probably would have been struck out and into the sky. Pages 86-87 In the darkness of the floor beneath them, the electrical cables that were cut are crackling and sparking. Guy coolly tells Kakashi that hes been keeping him waiting. Guy addresses the passengers. Hes in pain because of his foot, and has teary eyes. However, he strikes a Nice-Guy Pose. He tells them to be relieved and to feel secure, since Konohas Noble Green Wild Beast of Prey has arrived. However, he cuts himself off... Uppu! He then crawls on all fours, gags, and vomits. His seasickness is horrible. A second later, Kakashi calls out to him to watch out from behind. Guy raises his upper body, and swerves around to headbutt the enemy in the face. The enemy is blown away. Looking at the fallen enemy, Guy mindlessly forgets about the pain in his leg, with a blank look on his face. It seems that the attack also stopped the movements of the other enemy shinobi. Guy readies himself, and hes surrounded by the careful enemy shinobi. Guy tries to play it cool, saying that it was all calculated, all while hes hopping on one leg. He places both hands on his hips, and sticks out his chest (Guy gets a Don! sound effect for his proud posture). Kakashi calls him out on it, as its an obvious rouse, since Guys face is ghastly pale. Anyway, Kakashi tells Guy that he ought to cut the ropes that are binding him. As Guy steps towards Kakashis side, suddenlyBoom! The floorboards exploded. A giant fist from beneath the floor is punching upwards. Page 88 Guy leaps backwards. Rubbish is blinding his field of vision. Splinters are raining incessantly above Kakashi. The enemy shinobi shout with joy for their leader, as it seems that hes okay. Advancing through the rubbish, it is indeed their leader. The man tells them that his name is _//Rahyo , as he''ll be the guy who will obliterate them. //End Translation //End Chapter 5 Volume 1 - CH 6 Chapter 6:ؚ! Eȭ Deadly Blow! Seasickness Fist Pages 90-91 Guy yells an expletive at Rahyo, who squints his eyes back at him. Guy says hes upset, and begins to address the passengers and Rahyo: Kakashi wonders what Guy is up to at a time like this. Guy declares that he will stop Rahyo-kun ([T/N] I dont know why Guy bothered to give him an honorific lol~), and wont allow for further crimes. He tells the passengers not to hold a grudge against the world, nor should they resent it. Kakashi notes that Guy usually gets drunk on his own words, but this time Guy is overcome with emotions, and endlessly streaming hot tears. Guy is encouraging them to speak candidly about their troubles. Guy will take care of them with his Full Power of Youth! However, the passengers have already taken refuge in the corner of the room. And then Rahyo drops at the waist, and tells Guy to take his attacks instead, as he forms seals. ? Z鳣 * Hyouton: Saihyoudzuchi! (Ice Release: Ice-Breaking Sledgehammer!) Kakashi shouts at Guy that this is no time to be intoxicated on his own words. Rahyo instantly takes the open opportunity, and catches Guy off-guard. His fist goes through Guys abdomen. Guys eyes widen. However, at the next instant, the spot where the enemys fist should have penetrated Guys body ..is actually empty! Guys body has vanished like a flickering mirage. Guys real body has already gone behind the enemy, and rotated to unleash a kick. ľ~L! * Konoha Senpuu! (Konoha Whirlwind) Rahyo immediately draws back, and leashes the next punch. Zȭ * Saihyouken! (Ice-Breaking Fist) Guys kick and Rahyos strong fist violently clash. Pages 92-93 Boom! A flash of light glints upon impact. The walls of the cabin rattle and tremble. The pair of them simultaneously leap backwards. Kakashi, who is intently watching over the battle, swallows his katazu (= saliva that you hold in your mouth when times are tense. Theres not really an English word for it. Gulps hard?) Guy begins to yell in pain because of his leg thats in the gypsum (plaster) cast, as he skips and hobbles about. He then says that nothing is impossible with the Power of Youth! Rahyo notes that this situation seems befitting for him with that leg. Guy responds: [T/N] is ambiguous kanji for either heart or mind Rahyo yells back that their interference is futile, as hell kill them. Both of Rahyos arms change into a lead colour. They transform into steel. From where Kakashi is, even he can feel the tremendous amount of chakra that was gathered. His Saihyoudzuchi (Ice-Breaking Sledgehammer) certainly could crush a block of ice. If Guy is struck with it, even he will be helpless. Suddenly, Guy waves his arms, and as if completely by magic, he takes out his Soushuuga (==˫u// "Twin Attacking Fangs"), which are his nunchaku. Guy says there isnt anyone who has attacked him successfully while hes wielding these Soushuuga. He starts to show off his skills a bit by swinging them around. Two sets of them fly by, cutting the wind, and coil around Guys body. The weapon seems like its an animal, as if its an extension of Guys own body. They tear through the air, scissoring his sides, and are entwining around his head and torso. Guy is freely and easily manipulating the Soushuuga. As expected, Rahyo is gazing at Guy in amazement. Kakashi is thinking, Alright! Lets go!. With the speed of the Soushuuga with Guys skillful manipulation, Rahyo is hesitant to attack Guy. Kakashi notes in his head: Pages 94-95 Guy starts moaning, turns to stare at Kakashi, and then Guys eyes begin to tear up in anguish. He tells him that he feels sick, and that his foot is in pain. Kakashi is horrified that Guy is withstanding these two pains. Since as Guy was watching himself swinging his own Shoushuuga around, his seasickness probably became even more severe! On Rahyos brow, a vein emerges. He firmly steps towards Guy, and unleashes a kick into Guys poor leg. Guy grimaces. Rahyo aims a Saihyouken (Ice-Breaking Fist) at Guys head, shouting at him to die! However, luck is again on Guys side! Because of his seasickness, his legs were having complications. By chance, they were bent behind his body. His right leg had accidentally sprung up in time. Somehow it struck Rahyos jaw. On his right leg, there is a large and heavy plaster cast. Receiving that firm kick, Rahyo is blow away. He couldnt understand what has just happened. His eyes could only blink in surprise. Kakashi couldnt help but consider this odd turn of events, and thinks to himself that Guy should just do as he likes. Rahyo tells Guy that he shouldnt mess around, grinding his teeth. He unleashes an attack with a temper like a raging fire. Since Guy has just thought up a new technique, as expected, he actually was too preoccupied to even think about fighting. As one leg was not functional, and because of his severe seasickness, it seemed like the world around him was distorted. He was unable to stand at times. Sometimes, he crouched down to gag and vomit. Guy was able to dodge the next attack that was on the verge of hitting him in the face. Kakashi thinks that this is completely by chance. However, Guy then parries a second attack. And then a third. Pages 96-97 Contrary to Kakashis expectations, Guy continues to dodge even the fourth and fifth assault. On unsteady feet, Guy occasionally squats down to vomit. Hes staggering, and his eyes are wide opened and peeled back to where the whites as visible. His body is swaying back and forth and twisting. Rahyo is unable to even land a hit on him. From Kakashis perspective, this is the second time hes been astonished at the situation. Hes thinking to himself: Did Guy just master Seasickness Fist!? Rahyo has a heart seething with anger. Gradually, his attacks are getting sloppier. One out of three of his Saihyouken almost graze Guy. Rahyo smashes through a shelf of alcohol. The bottles fall on the floor and are broken. Suddenly in a low voice, Kakashi hears a calling. Before he knew it, Pakkun was by his side. Pakkun announces that all the exploding tags have been collected. Now, hell chew through the rope thats binding Kakashi. While Pakkun grapples with the rope, Rahyo and Guy continue to battle. Guy slips on the spilled sake, and dramatically falls down. Rahyo takes this opportunity to mercilessly unleash another Saihyouken. Guy falls and tumbles, and then Rahyo misses his mark and leaves a hole in the floor. Guy springs back up and unleashes a counterattack, but over-swings his fist. Not only was it entirely dodged, but it left him with a vulnerable opening that Rahyo then leapt towards. Rahyo yells that this battle will be decided with his next move. His eyes glimmer as he sinks his Saihyouken into Guys abdomen. A dull sound resounds. Guys body is suspended in the air. His eyeballs are protruding, and air is escaping from his lungs. Rahyo believes that hes victorious, and broadly grins and laughs. [T/N] Guy says twice. You can use it as an informal apology like My bad, whoops! instead of it literally, like Its difficult/poor/bad. Pages 98-100 Rahyo yells, and proceeds to unleash a tempest of barrages, and attacks Guy. Kick. Thrust. From the bottom of his palm. Elbow. Knee. Fist(//Its just listed in the light novel as ꡢͻƵס⡢ϥ ȭ) Rahyo is mercilessly and endlessly hitting Guy. Kakashi calls out to Guy. By now, Pakkun has gnawed through almost all of the rope, so Kakashi breaks free. Pakkun asks if their task is completed already. Kakashi thanks Pakkun, and tells him that next time, he will treat all of the Ninken to delicious meat! Pakkun smiles and laughs, and then vanishes in a puff of white smoke. Kakashi kicks the floor and soars upwards. And then: [T/N] Chidori from the novelization of The Last sounds like ,,,. (Chi Chi Chi Chi//Chirp Chrip Chirp Chirp). But Sasukes Chidori in the manga is given the SFX Х(Bachichichichi). Yondaime Raikages Raiton Chakra Mode makes the latter sound effect as well, for example. ХХХ (Bachibachibachi) is typically SFX for crackling electricity. I will have to look up old chapters to think about what else might make this noise. So Shiden doesnt sound like Chidori (At least, it doesn''t seem to chirp like a thousand birds). It sounds like sparks? However, they werent kunai. While keeping his posture low, Kakashi glared at the new enemy. The ice assailed him from within the ventilation duct. It was the same as the fangs that had attacked both him and Guy earlier! Rahyo shouts at his comrade: Kahyo, what are you doing!. Its not part of the plan for Kahyo to show up. Kahyo casually responds that if the ice swords (ꄇ= Hyouken) werent thrown, then older brother (addressing Rahyo with honorific ) would have been killed. Kahyo is wearing white shinobi garments with a mask with a hook pattern on it. Kahyo turns to face Kakashi, declaring intent to fight him. //End Translation //End Chapter 6 Volume 1 - CH 7 Chapter 7:ƤĤסFrozen Lightning Pages 102-103 The grand piano gets blown away by the blast. It heads toward a child who has failed to escape its trajectory. Luckily, Guy quickly soars into the air to rescue the boy, holding him in his arms by a full-throttle of his Power of Youth (=literally ഺѥ`ȫ_). The piano crashes into the wall, which greatly shakes the chandelier on the ceiling. Guy returns the sobbing boy to his mother, and then glares at Rahyo. Rahyo then laughs while rushing at Guy. Fist after fist and kick after kickevery five minutes, it seems as though the intensity is increasing for their battle. They continue to clash for ten, twenty, and then thirty more fists. Meanwhile, Kakashi is eyeing his enemy. He asks if Kahyo is indeed Garyos personal bodyguard from two months ago. Kahyo dodges the question, saying that they shouldnt have thought of that as a victory for Konoha. Kahyo is calmly responding, saying that their message should have reached someone already. Someone ought to make the next move. So in that respect, their groups will would continue to be inherited by others, especially since they are sacrificing their lives for their ideals. Pages 104-105 Kakashi responds first: Beneath the mask, Kakashi senses that Kahyos eyes are reacting to his statement. Kakashi continues that he heard from Naruto that because of the Wave Country, they lost a child. He says that if thats the case, then its natural and understandable to feel like that about the world. Pages 106-107 Kakashi stoops lower, as he parries a rotating kick from Kahyo. Kakashi continues: Kahyo screams again and cuts off Kakashis words. Kahyo strikes both palms at the floor again. ?iB꣡ Kahyo generated an even more enormous icicle, one that could not even compare to the ones from before, which then surrounds Kahyo. Its as if Kahyo wanted to freeze all the pent up emotions: the attack was like a blooming flower of ice. To escape the fangs of ice, Kakashi retreats with a backflip. Not only him, but Rahyo, Guy, and the passengers must all escape from the attack. The ice petals gradually continue to spread. The swords of ice pierce the ceiling, lift up the floorboards, and penetrate the walls of the ships hull. Rahyo shouts at Kahyo to stop. Theyre still flying above the sea. The voice doesnt reach Kahyo though (=whos pretty much mentally lost it as this point), as Kahyo further emitted even more chakra and vigorously augmented the force that was put forth into the flower of ice. Boom! Rahyo jumps over the icicles, and is then forced to strike Kahyo in the abdomen. Kahyo then collapses into Rahyos arms. Boom! ...But its too late. Pages 108-109 The jutsu ends simultaneously as Kahyo loses consciousness. Before the ice flower had vanished into a mist, it had created a gigantic hole in the hull of the ship. Theres a sudden difference between the air pressure aboard the ship. Air flows from a situation of high pressure to a lower one. Its a thin atmosphere at 5,000 metres above the ground. Theres a thunderous roar. Instantly, the air within the dining room lounge is getting aspirated out! One by one, passengers are getting sucked out of the hole in the ships hull! Plates, forks, knives, spoons are scattered about. Theres woodchips of shrapnel and bottles of sake among many articles of furniture brought onboard for the sight-seeing flight. The chandelier is barely dangling by a few wires on the ceiling. The wind is erasing the screams of the passengers. Rahyo continues to grasp onto Kahyo, as he''s holding onto a nearby pillar. Guy is yelling, as hes floating in the air. Kakashi calls out to him, and stretches out his arm. He manages to catch Guys hand, but with his broken index finger, hes unable to exert much power against the air current (=he says Shit!). Somehow, hes able to catch a powerline thats protruding through the hole in the wall. Theyre both now dangling on the exterior of the ship. Kakashis grip on Guy is loosening, same as with his hand and fingers on the powerline. No matter how much power hes putting forth into his effort, theres a 륺 (zuruzuru) sound of dragging from his failing grip. There wasnt anything Kakashi could do about it. Pages 110-111 Ino is able to connect to Kakashi! However, the sight of falling passengers are grazing at the edge of Kakashis eyes. Ino tells him that the people who were attacked at the commemoration ceremony are under their care. Something akin to a leaf blows by. Its like a white petal. Ino repeated again, asking if Kakashi can hear her. Tsunade-sama informed the Wave Country about the attack on their citizens a few moments ago. Kakashi focuses on what just blew by. It looks like a mask with a hook pattern on it. He realizes that its the mask of Kahyo. Kakashi somehow is then able to detect Kahyo in the middle of the crisis. Inside the ship, still in the dining room lounge and in Rahyos arms, Kahyo is completely limp. He can see long, curly hair being tussled by the wind. Ino continues asking questions. Among the people in the Ryuuha Armament Alliance, whats the breakdown of the twelve people? Its eleven men, and one woman Ino seems to pick up on Kakashis tone in his response. She asks him again, is he listening? Can he confirm their numbers? //End Translation //End chapter 7 Volume 1 - CH 8 Chapter 8:οFޤǧ`ȥ롹5,000 Metres Until the Edge of Death Pages 114-115 Pages 116-117 [T/N] The novels gives things embedded between quotes xxxx as internal communication with Ino. xxxx means spoken dialogue. Everything else is Kakashi narrating/talking to himself. = West-Northwest is a direction in between going West and Northwest. I didnt know this terminology was a thing. OTL~ Pages 118-119 //End Translation //End Chapter 8 Volume 1 - CH 9 Chapter 9:V֤ΛQϡ// Tsunades Decision Pages 122-123 [T/N] is an expression that is literally like three faces, six arms. Like the feeling of someone in the middle of doing a variety of tasks (hardcore multitasking?). Gais gibberish while hes stalling Tsunade is my best approximationlol~~~ Like is kinda like repeating thats right! over and over again in quick succession. So the best I can really make of it into an exasperated English translation is like if he says something like Yeahyeahyeahyeah. A bit like if youre in another scenario and you got too excited and said omgomgomgomgomg. Thats what hes doing. Ǥ is hard to explain. This is a suffix appended to the end of a sentence that means that youre asking a rhetorical question. But the nuance is that the person whos saying it knows that they are making an excuse/lying. (So the converse of their sentence is actually whats true). Pages 124-125 [T/N] Iwagakure is the Hidden Rock (/Hidden Stone) Village. Kusagakure is the Hidden Grass Village The (Aobiko/ Blue Fire Powder) is a reference from the authors other Naruto light novel that was published from around 2012, called Jinraiden: Ookami no Naku Hi. This novel was really well received among fans in Japan, so inside references like this are generally understood. The light novel follows Sasukes adventures into investigating where Itachis eye medicine comes from, thinking through his thoughts about what has transpired after killing him, etc. Anyway, this powder is a weapon that is exclusively used by the Howling Wolf village and has massive explosive power. So even inexperienced/ non-shinobi can use it and cause some serious damage. (PS. That novel was quite well-written too. I just dont have to translate it in depth~ OTL) This is the little excerpt from page 87 of Sasuke Jinraiden light novel that explains the gist : () ۤˮ˴ȱk ()ˤ¤Ϣ˺ޤƤˮ֤DZk() (...) When Aobiko comes into contact with water, it detonates () the moisture that comprises the breath of a person (can also cause) an explosion(...) Pages 126-127 [T/N] Pages 128-129 //End Translation //End Chapter 9 Volume 1 - CH 10 Ch. 10: // Heart Pages 132-133 While Kakashi continued to crawl along in the ventilation duct, Ino reports to him about the intentions of the Tsuchikage. He has almost arrived at the opening of the ventilation duct at the pilothouse. In approximately two minutes, the executions are set to resume. In addition to considering that, Kakashi must keep in mind the Aobiko that is loaded aboard the ship. Kakashi is thinking to himself, Damn it, where the heck did those guys stow the Aobiko?. And then Ino resumes communications with him: Kakashi then jumps down from the opening of the ventilation duct. He soundlessly knocks out the enemy who is watching over the pilothouse. Both of the pilots, who are astonished, turn around to look at what has transpired. With a finger to his mouth, Kakashi shushes them. He then introduces himself as a shinobi from Konoha. The pilots nodded. At the window in front of them, they can see a sea of grey clouds that extend around them. He tells them to calmly maintain the current altitude of the ship as much as possible. He tells them that even if the enemy orders them to lower the altitude, somehow the pilots should deceive them: No matter what, please maintain the current altitude! The reason for Kakashis request is because of the Aobiko. If there truly is Aobiko stowed aboard the ship, the enemy probably wants to detonate it at Houzukijyou (Blood Prison). The enemy ought to have prepared ahead for that scenario. There are members of the Ryuuha Armament Alliance who are on alert on the ground. They will take advantage of the chaos, and then use that opportunity to extricate Garyo. Thus, they will probably attempt to drop the Aobiko from the sky, from above Houzukijyou. In other words, in order to raise their accuracy rate of success, they must lower the altitude of the ship by any means. Pages 134-135 Kakashi then hears a commotion from the direction of the dining room lounge. Its a woman screaming and crying for someone to please help! She says that her child has suffered from asthma since birth. Kakashi silently approaches the lounge, and hides next to a pillar. The child and lady have both been looking forward to boarding to Tobishachimaru, despite his condition. She begs them : If they are to continue with executions, then please choose her next. In exchange, she wants for them to please save the boy. The mother is holding him in her arms. Kakashi notices that the boy is the same person whom Guy had saved from almost being crushed by the piano. (=If you remember this minor detail from the beginning of Chapter 7: [Frozen Lightning]~) Since Kahyo had created a hole in the hull of the ship, the onboard atmospheric pressure had suddenly dropped. The air had thinnedKakashi then understood: that was the cause of the asthma attack and spasms. Kakashi scans his surroundings in every direction. It seems from the previous commotion, about one-third of the passengers were ejected from the ship. There should be twelve enemies, but now they have decreased to only seven personnel. Kakashi had just knocked out another enemy a little while ago. If that guy wakes up, then there are eight enemies (the one who was guarding the pilothouse). The mother is frantically appealing to the enemies . From the previous disturbance, the boys medicine was lost. At this rate, the boy will not be able to breathe anymore. He will die! Rahyo exhibits no emotions, and has cold eyes. He only looks down upon the mother and child. The mother continues to plead with him. However, Rahyo declares that they cannot land the ship just for the sake of that brat. He asks her if they are from the Wave Country, and what her occupation is. She responds that her husband is a doctor. Rahyos face then sparkles with cruel delight, repeating her answer. Rahyo says that his nephew died because he was abandoned by the doctors of the Wave Country. He tells her to look at the woman standing nearby. Its Rahyos younger sister, Kahyo. He tells her thatits Kahyos child who had passed away. The mothers eyes are welling up with tears, and looks at Kahyo. Kahyo lowers her face downwards. Rahyo laughs, and says that this will also be a form of retribution. Except this time, it will be their child who will be abandoned. Rahyo boisterously laughs, such that it hurts Kakashis ears. Kakashi then fixes his half-opened eyes back at Kahyo. Pages 136-137 Kahyo didnt budge. Since she wasnt wearing her mask, her long and curly hair had cast a deep shadow over her face. Before stepping out from the shadows of the pillar, Kakashi looked outside the window. He recognized the shadow of the bird that had passed by. [T/N] Pages 138-139 Rahyo becomes miffed at Kahyo because she took Kakashis words personally. She interrupts him and tells him to shut up anyway, as its not their objective to indiscriminately massacre people. She then peers into Kakashis eyes. She tells him that there is nothing he can do anymore. Kakashi carefully kneads chakra. He asks Kahyo since when did she apply her jutsu on him? She responds that she did it when they first met. In order to board the Tobishachimaru, she was racing towards the platform, hiking up the hem of her long blue dress. ..Kakashi surmises that since he caught her when she had stumbled, Kahyo meant for him to fall into her trick. Kahyo then approaches the mother and child. The mother was about to nod, and held up her son with her arms. At that moment, Kakashi saw Kahyo reflected in his eyes, who was embracing the child as if he was her own. Seeing her face in profile, he looks at Kahyos sorrowful face. The young boy is gasping for breath. Kahyo swung her arm, and created a crack in the ice that had stopped up the hole in the hull of the ship. Its enough for one person to pass through. Since the onboard air pressure is the same as the atmospheric pressure outside, no one is getting sucked out of the ship. As a cold wind blows inwards, Sai approaches the ship while riding on the back of a giant bird made from Choujyu Giga (Super Beast Imitation Drawing). Sai had assumed an offensive posture, preparing himself in order to attack at any moment if needed. While holding out the boy, Kahyo addresses him: if she sees Sai again, she will kill a hostage. Sai expressionlessly stares back at Kahyo. He leans forward to silently collect the boy. Kahyo then turns back towards the mother, and addresses her. She tells the woman that she can go with her son. The mother is crying with tears streaming down her face, repeating Thank you over and over. She takes Sais outstretched hand, and heads out of the ship. However, there is discontent and grumbling among the passengers who are left behind onboard the ship in the lounge. One is yelling that this exception is unfair to them. Pages 140-141 The man is angry that the mother and child are getting preferential treatment. He scoffs that he ought to have brought onboard an ill child as well, then. Kahyo then blocks off the crack again with ice. Kahyo declares that its time for another execution anyway. She freezes the man who had complained. Afterwards, no one dared to open his or her mouth anymore. Pages 142-143 Pages 144-145 Pages 146-147 //End Translation //End Chapter 10 Volume 1 - CH 11 Ch. 11: Tears of Ice~~ Pages 150-151 Kakashi was taken into the ingredient and food storage area of the kitchen. The two shinobi violently kick him into the room, and with a kachan (door locking sound), they close the door. The shinobi were guffawing and sneering: Can you believe it? We captured Cthat- Hatake Kakashi!. They keep shouting and guffawing. The other comrade chimes in with even more boisterous laughter: Yeah! The Ryuuha Armament Alliance is the best!. Meanwhile, the atmospheric pressure onboard the ship is declining. Its evident that the oxygen is becoming insufficient. If oxygen is not getting diffused in the brain, humans experience further abnormal behavior and sensations. The enemy shinobi continue to mock Kakashi, kicking and pounding on the door. Anyway, Kakashi continues to think about the situation. After experiencing an uplifted mood, both the ability to concentrate as well as aptitude in making judgments will begin to decline (due to the insufficient oxygenation=hypoxia). And so, there wont be energy in the muscles. Youll lose your mind. Before long, youll fall into a comatose or lethargic state. Worst case, youll die. [T/N] Pages 152-153 [T/N] The Armstrong limit, often called Armstrong''s line, is the altitude that produces an atmospheric pressure so low (0.0618atmosphere or 6.3 kPa (1.9 inHg)) that water boils at the normal temperature of the human body: 37 C (98.6 F). The altitude is variously reported as being between 18,900C19,350 meters (62,000C63,500 feet, or about 12 miles (10 nmi). Pages 154-155 Kakashi knocks out both of the enemies. A minute later, Kakashi imprisoned the two fainted shinobi into the food storage area. He then leaves the kitchen. He jumps down from the scaffolding thats hanging in midair at the ships hold. Once again, he wanted to summon Pakkun and his Ninken. However, the way he could knead chakra had changed. He will be frozen from his feet upwards if he tries to do that. (==His chakra must keep circulating in order to stop the progression of Jisarehyou. He cannot knead chakra for jutsu because its preoccupied with keeping him from being frozen). He has no choice but to go on the search for the Aobiko on his own. There are wooden boxes piled up in the ships hold. But whatever was inside of them would probably not be suspicious things. Theres alcohol and groceries, as well as parachute vests When Aobiko comes into contact with water, it detonates. In a normal container, moisture could leech into it. Water and the Aobiko should mix together at an opportune time. So there must be a special container for the Aobiko. However, a vessel like that is no where to be found. An unpleasant sensation travels through Kakashis chest. He thinks to himself, If I were Rahyo, where would I probably conceal the Aobiko? He couldnt think of it. Kakashi looks up at the buoyancy component. On the scaffolding thats hanging in midair, he was thinking about the bottom of the air sac of the Tobishachimaru. If Rahyo intends to ram the ship into the Houzukijyou, perhaps he has prepared and hidden the Aobiko in the air sac. It would likely be the most efficient and probable scenario. For moisture, they could use Kahyos ice. With the impact of the crash, the air sac will explode. The ice will dissolve, and then the Aobiko will detonate. Houzukijyou would then be completely destroyed. Kakashi backpedals. He thinks to himself again. That sort of scenario cant be correct. He had been denying an ominous feeling from the beginning. If the Tobishachimaru crashes into the Houzukijyou, then Garyo might inadvertently die if he gets mixed into the scenario. However, they intend to rescue him. On the ground, the accomplices of the enemy are on standby. Perhaps Rahyo intends to throw the Aobiko from the sky and onto the Houzukijyou. Pages 156-157 And so, while Shikamaru and the other shinobi are dealing with the chaos, the enemy should be trying to rescue Garyo. Kakashi then mentally gets into contact with Ino again. He tells her that he thinks Rahyos plan involves dropping the Aobiko from the ship. In that case, a signal is needed to cue the attack. He warns that they should be cautious and watchful of their surroundings. Perhaps something like a beacon will be that signal. Then, Kakashi hears footsteps descending from the ramp. They resounded through the emptiness of the ships hold. Kakashi promptly concealed himself behind some wooden boxes. Two shinobi are visible. They are trying to lift up a wooden box, which seems to have an unknown seal on it. The ships hull slants because of the wind. One of the shinobi, who is holding one side of wooden box, suddenly falters. The other one who is supporting the other side then scolds his comrade: Be careful! Do you want to die?!. With that threatening attitude, the one who almost dropped the wooden box then turns ghastly pale. Perhaps because they are experiencing hypoxia (due to the altitude), their concentration is lacking. They continue to carefully carry the wooden box. They are turning back towards the dining room lounge. Kakashi promptly inspects the remaining wooden boxes. It seems that they had carried away a box that was packed with parachute vests. Its difficult for Kakashi to follow after the shinobi, since he cant knead chakra. He runs up the ramp. Going by the scaffolding, he heads back to the kitchen. He was going to use the ventilation ducts, but reconsidered. He needed to stealthily approach the dining room lounge again. If he cant properly knead chakra, then if Kahyo attacks him with icicles again, he would be helpless. Fortunately, the kitchen and lounge are connected by a doorway. Near that entrance, the grand piano had toppled over. Quickly jumping into the shadow, he watched over the situation. Rahyo was near the doorway of the pilothouse. Some time ago, the wooden boxes had been opened. Pages 158-159 Overhead, the slanted chandelier is dangerously swaying. The passengers have been rounded up by the enemies. They are grouped near the ice that was blocking up the hole. The figure of Kahyo is also there. Rahyo tells them that the Ryuuha Armament Alliance does not like senseless slaughter. From now on, theyll release the hostages. The passengers glance at each other. The enemy shinobi are presenting them with parachute vests. There were shouts of joy. Kahyo tells them that they are sorry. She even helps a passenger with wearing the vest. Outside the ship, the wind is roaring. The Tobishachimaru is shaking and rattling. The ship was currently going through some turbulence. The passengers were completely fascinated by their sudden release from their nightmare. They dont seem suspicious about it. They are all scrambling to get to the vests first. Rahyo shouts at them to not panic. There should be enough parachutes for all of them. Meanwhile, Kakashis intuition is telling him that this is strange. He wonders why Rahyo is releasing the passengers so easily like this. However, Kahyo is even gallantly lending a hand to the passengers. It didnt seem to be out of wicked thoughts. It seems as though they are truly sorry, from the bottom of their hearts. Rahyo asks if everyone is already wearing a vest. If they jump, they ought to pull the string thats in front of their chest beforehand. If they do that, then the parachute will open. Kahyo swings her arm, and the ice that was stopping up the hole in the ships hull melted. The ice vanished instantly. From outside, wind and clouds were blowing by. Theres a commotion among the passengers. They crouch down on the floor. The enemies lend each of them a hand. One by one, the passengers are jumping out of the ship. Rahyo is asking his subordinates what the wind speed is, in addition to what the drop point of the passengers will be. Kakashi did not move his eyes away from observing them. Kakashi is thinking to himself: Why are they freeing the hostages? Why at this moment? He looks at the surroundings outside the window. Theres only grey rainclouds. Kakashi continues to think about the situation: Furthermore, why is Rahyo concerned about the drop point of the passengers? Oh no In an instant, a bit of insight spread through Kakashis body. When they were carrying out the parachutes from the storehouse, the enemies had carelessly dropped a wooden box. At that time, those guys seemed flustered. Kakashi then realized what Rahyo was planning Pages 160-161 Kakashi moves his body without even thinking. He yells at the passengers to stop what theyre doing. They must not wear those vests! Rahyo is surprised when Kakashi leaps out from the shadow of the piano. He implores to Kakashi: What the heck are you doing? Kakashi yells back to them: Υ٥ȤˤۤzޤƤ룡 ŵؤnĤDZk뤾 (= Recall that Kakashi noted grey rainclouds outside the window earlier in this chapter. If any moisture contacts the Aobiko, it explodes! So it must be packed carefully... and so you have to avoid puncturing into the packs, or else you''ll be exposing it to moisture.) Kahyo opened her eyes wide. She then stares at Kakashi, and turns her head to look back at Rahyo. She turns and fixes her gaze on Kakashi again. The passengers then say that the vests wont come off: theyre physically unable to remove them from their bodies. Rahyo laughs, and tells them that its too late for them already. On Rahyos command, the enemy subordinates seize the passengers who are trying to escape. One by one, the enemy is throwing the passengers off the ship; their screams dwindle until they vanish. Meanwhile, Rahyo scowls at Kakashi. Rahyo yells at them once again: If they had released Garyo-sama, this situation could have been avoided. The responsibility falls on Konoha. Pages 162-163 That was a huge gamble for Kakashi. If his aim had been off by even a little bit, the Aobiko might have exploded. One by one, the clasps of the vests disperse into sparks. The passengers are then able to take off the vests, and back away from the hole in the ship. Kakashi is watching over their progress with a sidelong glance. Kakashi braces himself with one knee on the floor. Hes breathing hard through his shoulders. Pages 164-165 Pages 166-167 So because of that damage to the ship, several of the enemies were thrown out of the ship. The border between the air sac of the buoyancy component and the drawing room gondola made an ominous moaning sound. Then, they tore apart. The dining room lounge inclined, and the ceiling was torn. Kakashi yells for everyone to escape to the stern of the ship. The passengers have fallen onto the slanted floor and were tumbling around. ?iB꣡ Kahyo created icicles in order to hold back the fire coming from the hole. However, the wind coming in from the hole is agitating the fire and feeding the flames. The blaze suddenly becomes a pillar of fire, and reaches the bottom portion of the air sac. The crimson fire is spreading. Kahyos Jisarenhyou is pushing back the flames, preventing them from spreading further. Her ice covers the air sac, as she wont allow the fire encroach upon it. Kahyo is frantically making seals. She then takes a backward glance at Kakashi. Meanwhile, Kakashi is guiding the passengers towards the kitchen. He tells them to continue straight ahead, and then theyll reach the stern of the ship. From the pilothouse, they can hear the frantic pilots. They have fallen and are also trying to escape from the area. The pilots tell Kakashi that the gondola is falling! Kakashi grabs their hands, and then pushes them from behind into the kitchen as well. They need to hurry! But out of the corner of Kakashis eye, he spots Rahyo. Hes running. However, when the floor sank, he slipped. The grand piano then slides out of the hole in the ship, taking with it even more enemies. Pages 168-169 [T/N] Kakashis quote is kinda hard to get into English concisely. But it means like you cant be excused from the things that you do, just because you think its for a good cause. No matter what, you should always do good things. So even if the end-game is a good thing, dont do a bunch of horrible things as a means to achieve that end-game. =Horrible things are not permissible, even if the intentions are good. So just keep doing good things all the time. = Rahyo shouldnt execute people (thats bad!) on his way to achieve their groups goal of equality for everyone (which is presumably good!). He shouldnt do whatever he wants and justify those means for his end. He should figure out a way to do good things on his way towards making equality happen. //End Translation //End of Chapter 11 Volume 1 - CH 12 Pages 172-173 Pages 174-175 Pages 176-177 Pages 178-180 [T/N] //End Translation //End of Chapter 12 Volume 1 - CH 13 Pages 182-183 Kakashi embraced Kahyo to his chest in order to shield her field of view (from the sight of Rahyo falling from the Tobishachimaru). Grief-stricken that she had lost her older brother, Kahyo beat her fists onto Kakashis chest. Kahyo buries her face into Kakashis chest, freely screaming and crying out. Her wailing then changes into sobbing. Kakashi holds her close and tightly. He must tell her something, so he starts to speak: Kahyos face is still buried into Kakashis chest. She murmurs back in response: What should we do? Kakashi responds that they will create a hole in the air sac of the buoyancy component. Since he heard from Tazuna, the old man who manufactured the ship, Kakashi knew that the air sac was filled with helium gas. Its non-flammable and non-combustible. And so, even if theres a fire, there will not be a huge explosion. If they can skillfully create a hole in the air sac, perhaps they may be able to land the Tobishachimaru. Abruptly, Kakashi stopped speaking. Kahyo bawled her eyes out, and then raised her face. She asks him whats wrong. Kakashi waved his hand at Kahyo to motion her to be quiet, as he couldnt hear Ino very wellin his head. Kakashi asks Ino if Garyo has been secured. Ino answers that hes been taken care of, but Shikamaru and the others are still pursing the other escaped prisoners. Just a few moments ago, Ino was in contact with Tsunade. She was told that the Tsuchikage is heading towards them. Kakashi looks out from the tear in the ship. Beneath the swirling grey sea of clouds, Kakashi can see their preparations as well. Theres three objects that are emitting light, which are approaching at a staggering speed. Pages 184-185 Kakashi reminds Ino that before the Tobishachimaru enters Iwagakure, the Tsuchikage intends to shoot it down. Kakashi urgently thinks to himself while looking down at Oonokis comrades below: If thats the case, then creating a hole in the air sac may backfire. The gas will escape the hole, and should push the ship. If he creates the hole at the front of the ship, then the power should work in the opposite direction. It should push the ship back the other way The wind is tussling Kahyos long, curly hair. Seeing that, Kakashi realizes that the wind is blowing from an East to West direction. Kakashi must reconsider creating the hole at the front of the air sac. The Tobishachimaru will be going against a stream of wind. In the worst case, they might be jostled by the air current. If such a thing happens, they would be thrown about and possibly die, as if they were in a washing machine. The speed of the points of light have declined, and seem to be standing still from below. Kakashi doubts for only an instant, but then he understands the situation. The Tobishachimaru is not within the limits of the Tsuchikages flying range. In fact, the ship has risen higher in altitude than they can reach. Kakashi then resumes contact with Ino: Kakashis eyes travel to inside the kitchen area, to the people who are crouching on the floor. Several people have already collapsed. Their mouths are open wide, struggling to breathe. There was a sudden decline in temperature, so everyone is shivering and shaking. Kakashi then asks the pilots what the altitude is right now. One of the pilots, whos squatting and holding onto his knees, raises his face. His lips have changed colour to purple. He responds back that they dont have the instruments necessary in order to read exactly how high they are So he isnt able to say much for certain. However, judging from the thin atmosphere, he thinks that a while ago, they have already exceeded 13,000 metres in altitude. It hasnt even been ten minutes since the Tobishachimaru had suffered extensive damage. Pages 186-187 Originally, the ship had been flying at 5,000 metres in altitude. But because of the previous chaotic situation, their flying altitude had risen. During that time, Kakashi assumes that the altitude was 7,000 metres. And so, he assumes that they have risen 6,000 metres in ten minutes, if the pilot estimated that they are currently flying at 13,000 metres. In ten more minutes, they should rise another 7,000 metres in altitude. In other words, if they continue to rise at this rate for the next ten minutes, the ship will reach an altitude of 19,000 metres. The blood within their bodies will boil! He cannot allow such a thing to happen. Kakashi is frantically trying to think up a solution. Firstly, due to the difference in atmospheric pressure, the air sac will explode. To prevent that, they should just create a hole in the air sac by their own means in order to lower the altitude. At least in that case, the air sac will not suddenly explode on its own and take them by surprise. Pages 188-189 As Kahyo was speaking, Kakashi faced towards the stern of the ship. Across the scaffolding that was suspended in midair, there was an iron ladder. Its the one that he had initially used to sneak aboard the Tobishachimaru in the propulsion component. He finally managed to reach the area. Because the pilothouse and the guest room gondola have both fallen down, the propellers in the propulsion component have stopped rotating. He climbs up the ladder and scaffolding that the workers typically use for maintenance inspections. From there, he was close to touching the air sac in the buoyancy component with his hand. Page 190 Page 191 [T/N] Pages 192-193 Pages 194-195 Pages 196-197 Pages 198-199 [T/N] ǰ= Natural/ordinary+ face/countenance, but it made less sense in English on context if I left it literally so I have Natural instinct. Like an intuitive reaction to something, or a usual task. This last section was an absolute killer to try and fit it all into comprehensible Englishand yet I still think its semi-awkward OTL~~~ It was quite the strugglebus to attempt to retain the original meanings without sacrificing the nuances too much. //End Translation //End of Chapter 13 Volume 1 - CH 14 Pages 202-203 Pages 204-205 Pages 206-207 Pages 208-209 Pages 210-211 [T/N] //End Translation //End of Chapter 14 Volume 1 - Epilogue Epilogue: ĿӰ// [Dear Rokudaime Hokage-Sama,] Pages 214-215 [T/N] Pages 216-217 [T/N] „褬 is for when youre intentionally saying something with the clear purpose of letting the intended person overhear you. So its like a loud-whisper in that you want the other person to hear whatever sarcastic or mean comment that you have to throw. Guy is so sassy~ ŮӤÒ줱 means to pick up a girl~ So ΤһҤäƤ = picked up an enemy kunoichi. Though the root verb is sorta like to catch/cheat/ensnare/trap. ŮÒ줱 basically means colloquially that Guy thinks that he seduced her :P Pages 218-219 Pages 220-221 Pages 222-223 Pages 224-225 [T/N] Even though Kakashi is saying ֤ä = I know/ I understand over and over again literally, he means more like Urgh, I get it already! or Okay, okay, enough! because hes just frustrated at everyone for trolling him and chastising him about hitting Naruto. The last line has a subtle connotation to it. Usually when Spring is just around the corner is mentioned, it can sometimes be a metaphor for blossoming love (=the romantic kind because of the blooming sakura trees in the spring). It dont interpret it to mean that (I think they have a friendly/platonic work-relationship going on). But this line made 2ch explode on this light novels release day because of the way that you could read it. The other way to interpret the last line (the way I would put it?) is that it refers to the ways things will be changing and looking up from there onwards (like a refreshing new start on something). The time-skip in this chapter is March, so you could also take the Spring is coming soon to be literal~ //End Translation //End of the Epilogue //End of the entire light novel~!! (And Kakashi getting hardcore trolled~) Volume 2 - CH 1 Konoha - Since when did I stop saying things were troublesome? That was the thought passing through Shikamarus head as he gazed up at the blue sky. Even though the wind wasnt that strong, thin clouds were hurrying along one after another, passing in and out of his line of sight.Their flustered state seemed similar to Shikamarus own. He laughed derisively at himself for the thought. At any rate, he was busy. Two years after the Fourth Shinobi World War, the world was finally starting to regain its stability. The Kage Alliance that had come into existence when the war broke out had continued to this day, and the world of Shinobi was drastically different than it used to be. The alliance might have started between the five hidden villages, but after the war, small neighbouring countries started to declare their participation in the alliance as well. It had come to the point the organisation that had started out as an alliance was developing into a Shinobi Union, one that involved every shinobi in each participating nation. Contracts that had been undertaken individually by villages prior to the unions existence were now being brought towards the Shinobi Union collectively. Each village who participated in the union had shinobi representatives assigned to every other village for discussing negotiations over contracts. In this way equilibrium of labour between villages was guaranteed, the disparity between villages was revised and the Shinobi World could finally greet the era of peace with open arms. Haa Shikamarus sigh disappeared up into the sky. His back was absolutely freezing thanks to lying down on the cold stone floor beneath him, and if he stayed like this, then he was probably going to end up catching a cold. But he had his reasons for not getting up. Work was waiting for him. So much work it wasnt even funny. It was only because Shikamaru was intending on a short break that he was allowing himself to laze around in the afternoon like this to begin with. But he also knew that the moment he so much as sat up, his mind would slip back into work mode. And when that happened, Shikamaru was perfectly aware that he wouldnt get another chance to rest like this again. And so, he refused to move despite the cold, stubbornly intent on resting as long as he could. Until somebody found him out, Shikamaru didnt intend to move an inch from this spot. This spot was the roof of the Hokage Residence. You could see generations of Hokages faces carved into the mountain parallel to the round roof Shikamaru was sprawled out on. In order from the left, there was the first generations Hashirama, then his brother Tobirama. There was the Third who had died during Orochimaruis Konoha Crush plot, Hiruzen, and then the Yellow Flash Namikaze Minato. The Fifth was a legend along with Jiraiya and Orochimaru, one of the three Sannin, Tsunade. There were all past Hokage. Now, the face of the man who was the current Hokage could be found carved next to Tsunades. A pair of sleepy looking eyes peeking out from underneath wire-like hair could be seen, as well as the bridge of his nose, while the rest of his well-defined features were hidden under a mask. The Hokage was a symbol of Konoha. It was a position that couldnt be obtained unless you were acknowledged by every single shinobi in the village. Even though that symbols face was supposed to be carved into the mountain as a commemoration, to still keep the bottom half hidden under a mask Hatake Kakashi. That was the name of the current Hokage. The teacher of the two who had lead the way to victory during the war, there wasnt a single person in the Shinobi World who didnt know his name. Shikamaru on the other hand, knowing both the man and his students personally, was far from star-struck. There were fans who adored and fawned over the three, saying they were heroes of legend but in reality none of the three were really types to fit the term legend. Kakashi, while certainly a man who got things done during a crisis, turned back to his usual role when it came to everyday life: a no-good adult who didnt feel like doing much of anything. The other two heroes had similar problems as well. One was an abysmal idiot. The other, abysmally stubborn. It was because the rest of the world didnt know about the hopeless sides of those three that they were being hailed as living legends. What am I even doing? The words left Shikamarus mouth without him really thinking about it. He himself was the type of person who would never become anything close to a hero. He never wanted to be one in the first place. If you said he wanted to be one of those ninja who practiced vigorously to improve their ninjutsu, youd be wrong. He certainly never thought about studying medical ninjutsu and becoming a specialist in the vanguard back-up, either. If you said he wanted to be someone with a high rank in encryption or in medical surgery, youd be wrong too. He justwanted everything to be average. That was Shikamarus dream. He wanted to be an average ranked ninja whod have an average job, marry an average wife and have an average child, and then, after an average elderly prime Well, everything came to an end one day. Was there any greater happiness to be found than in a life plan like that? He didnt think so. On days with good weather, lying down like this and watching the sky, seeing the clouds floating past and taking your thoughts with them. On rainy days, having shougi pieces as your company would be more than enough. There would be no pressure from peoples expectations. No stress, either. Wasnt that a wonderful sort of life? Haaa It was a deep sigh, issued right from the bottom of his stomach. The bastard called reality was a really tough opponent. If the thing you were fighting was a human being, then at least thered come a day where you would win against them. Even if they were a god-like person, they had to have a weakness somewhere. The enemies in the war had been abominations, and yet all the shinobi had focused their powers together and won against them, hadnt they? You can win against an opponent in front of you. However Reality is an opponent without substance that you can never, ever defeat. No matter how Shikamaru kept wishing and wanting otherwise, reality callously kept sending him towards the exact sort of fate he did not want. Shikamaru, who had wished so badly to be average, was now someone the Shinobi Union couldnt do without. He had so much work. All the jobs taken on by each nations Daimyo and citizens had to be classified from A to D rank, and then each villages characteristics had to be carefully taken into account to figure out which one was most suitable for the allotment of labour C and then there were the Chiefs of the Union, the Five Kages consultations. They used him for everything, to the point where he even ended up being a shougi partner for the old Tsuchikage. The Shinobi Unions Shikamaru of Konoha. There were people who even went around calling him that now. Even though Shikamaru didnt want to stand out, even though he didnt want to succeed at anything, even though he fought and fought against it, his surroundings kept pushing him until he rose above others. His first mistake had been at the Chuunin Promotion Exams. The Chuunin Exams, started by the villages of the Five Kage and including even the genin of other small countries. In the midst of the chaos of Orochimarus plotting and the Thirds death, for some reason Shikamaru was promoted to the rank of chuunin. Amongst all the applicants, he was the only one to get that promotion. It was the kind of situation where Shikamaru felt that yelling what have you done?! would have been more than appropriate. His fatal mistake had been in the part of the exam where genin were paired off to fight against each other. His kagemane jutsus success had greatly shocked his opponent, a sassy kunoichi carrying an absurdly large fan that created giant gusts of wind, but at the end of their stalemate, it was Shikamaru himself who threw in the towel. It was this forfeit of Shikamarus that was so highly valued. Being a Chuunin included leading subordinates. That was why the ability to precisely analyse ones situation was the one most highly valued. The examiners approved of Shikamaru accepting that he was cleanly defeated, and gave him the highest evaluation. It was a really unwelcome evaluation. It was an examination he hadnt wanted any part in, one that hed been forced into entering by his teachers, Sarutobi Asumas, insistence. He hadnt intended on such on evaluation, hadnt felt the slightest desire for one either. But reality had still lead Shikamaru to becoming a chuunin, as well as to everyone in the village looking at him differently. And ever since then, Shikamarus life plan had started to slip out of his grasp. When Sasuke left the village, Shikamaru was assigned as a Team Leader working together with his classmates to try to bring him back, and after that as well, he was given the most missions out of all his classmates. He resisted and protested, but reality just kept bringing Shikamaru higher and higher up in rank. Since the Fourth Shinobi World Waritd been two years. Shikamaru had become 19 years old. It was an age where he could no longer be called a child. He wondered just how grateful you should be for people expecting great things from you. Was being someone who others depended on really such a wonderful achievement? The answer went without being said. There was a plain example in Shikamarus friend, Naruto, and how his desire to be relied on by everyone had turned him into the whole villagesC no, rather, the whole Shinobi Worlds hero. Shikamaru knew very well that people were living things who would end up depending on one person or another. Thats why despite his misgivings, he didnt feel any hateful feelings such as if only you didnt exist towards the people who relied on him. And no matter how much he was against the idea of being depended on, he had never once cut corners on missions. It had been 19 years since hed been born into this world, and yet he already had so many obligations and entanglements hed gotten himself involved in. The group who had intended to take over the world, the Akatsuki, had killed his teacher Asuma. Asumas girlfriend Kurenai had been pregnant with Asumas child. That child was now two years old. Her name was Mirai. To become Mirais teacherit was a promise that he absolutely had to keep. Shikamarus father, Shikaku, had been tasked with being the Alliances main strategist at the time of the Fourth Shinobi World War. When Obito used the destructive power of the resurrected Ten Tailed Beast to aim for the Alliances Headquarters, his father had died alongside Inos father, Inoichi. Even now, his fathers and Inoichis last words were still ringing clearly in Shikamarus ears. [We are always within you. Never forget that!] To become as great a man as his fatherit was a promise hed made to the man who had helped to bring him into this world. And then, there was Naruto. Honest to a fault, the hero of Shinobi who believed wholeheartedly that hed become Hokage, who never doubted the fact for even a moment During the fight with the Ten Tails, Shikamaru had been on the brink of death. While he was being healed by Sakura, Shikamaru had this thought: Nobody is more suited to being his advisor than me! If Naruto became the Hokage, then Shikamaru would be his right hand man. It was his dream. He had so many obligations already, he didnt even want to count them. There was no mistake that it was all because of that same force that kept pushing him forwards. It was a good thing to be needed, and he should be grateful for everyones opinion of him allowing him to live as he was. He should be grateful, but He got tired sometimes. Shikamarus real self wasnt the man everyone thought he was. His real self was a man who thought everything was troublesome, who wished for an average life. The kind of man that could be found anywhere. And the greater peoples expectations of him became, the more he wanted to run away. That was the truth behind the man that was Nara Shikamaru. In the old days, all his comrades had fully understood how full of complaints he was, how much he didnt feel like accomplishing anything. Since when had they started to misunderstand him? Since when had he stopped calling things troublesome? Logically, both of those things must have started around the same time. When did it start? As he gazed up at the clouds, deep furrows came into Shikamarus brow. His eyes narrowed as he thought hard on the subject, until he could only see a little bit of the sky. A single hawk came into his line of sight The hawk was flying West, where parts of the sky were already beginning to be dyed a light pink from the setting sun. It spread out its wings and slowly started to circle. Shikamaru happened to be right in the middle of the hawks arc. No C the correct thing to say was that the hawk was circling around the Hokage Residence. Shikamaru didnt just sit up. He leapt right to his feet. His mind that had been dwelling in depths as deep as the sea was sharpening again, and his eyes locked onto the hawk, not glancing away for a moment. Jet black The hawk was so pitch black, it couldve been painted with ink. No C it really was a hawk painted with ink. Super Beast Imitating Drawing Sais jutsu. Sai was the man who had joined Naruto and Sakura on team 7 as a replacement for the missing Sasuke. His specialty was the Super Beast Imitating Drawing Jutsu, painting ink animals and giving them life and movement. The hawk flying overhead Shikamaru was definitely from Sai. Its finally come In Shikamarus field of vision, he could see the hawk stop going around in circles and start to descend. Shikamaru ran towards the stairs that went down from the roof. As soon as he reached the bottom of those, hed be at the Hokages office. The hawk would definitely end up going there. The moment Shikamaru had reached the stairs, the hawk also disappeared behind the side of the Hokage Residence, as a shadow would flit over ones face. Shikamaru leapt down the stairs, running down the hall to the Hokage Office. He opened the door without even bothering to knock. Oh, Shikamaru. It was Kakashi who spoke. He was standing behind a desk cluttered with piles of books and documents, reading an open scroll. Did Sais hawk just? Thats right. Kakashi turned the scroll over to Shikamaru so he could see. The messily written sentences on the white paper of the scroll flitted in and out of Shikamarus sight. It looked like a very hastily written message. The situation seems to be even graver than wed thought. Kakashis gaze met Shikamarus as he spoke, the look in his eyes even more solemn than Shikamaru had dreaded it would be. Even the usual vague way of speaking the Hokage had was now entirely replaced by a sombre tone. Kakashis whole attitude was giving him an awful sense of foreboding. Shikamarus eyes followed the handwriting on the scroll. While most of Sais message was written with very small, delicate writing from a fine brush, the last sentence alone stood out, thick and violently written: I dont know who I am anymore. Volume 2 - CH 2 Addressed to the Sixth Hokage, There is not much time, so I must write briefly. Our investigation into the matter of your concern has been completed up to the degree you specified.However none of my 10 comrades have returned, and I have been left on my own. I do not know if they are dead or alive. However, I think that theres no mistake the enemy has sensed us. I will get straight to the point. The internal affairs of this country are far, far worse than you had feared them to be. If we leave it be, then the Shinobi Union is going to end up in a predicament. No, in fact, I believe that the very framework of the world could end up changing. There is a man who is shaping this country. His name is Gengo. This country is here because Gengo is, and Gengo is here because of the country. It wouldnt be an exaggeration to say this entire country only exists for the sake of Gengo. Enchantment. That is the word that describes Gengo the most suitably. Gengo may end up becoming an existence that will change the world. Im not sure if I dont want it to change. The living things called Shinobi dont really have a saving grace to them, do they? Because we endure, we are shinobi. But is that really a good thing? Hokage-sama. No, Kakashi-san. I dont know who I am anymore Lifting his head from reading Sais letter, Shikamaru let out one small exhale Kakashi was seated at his desk in front of him, his elbows leaning against the surface. He was wearing the hat that all Hokages must wear during official business or otherwise. It weighed down on his hair that had grown out in the last few years. Every part of his face that lay below his nose was hidden behind a mask as always. Cradling his jaw with both hands, he was quietly watching Shikamarus reaction. What are you thinking? He asked, with a very clear voice. There was no one other than them inside the Hokages Office. Im thinkingwhy would Sai send back a Beast Imitation, instead of returning himself? That is indeed a thing to wonder. Letting go of his chin, Kakashi leaned back thoughtfully. Tilting his jaw to look up at the ceiling, he let out a louder and bigger sigh than Shikamaru had. And Im thinking that, looking at the letter, it seems that all except Sai have fallen into the enemys hands and been killed, doesnt it? It does look like that. Sai was leading a team made up of ten of Anbus most skilled members. I dont think any of them could have made a foolish move that would expose themselves to the enemy. So it seems that the enemy is very skilled as well. Yes Saying so, Kakashi began to slowly spin around in his chair. He spun around once, so Shikamaru was faced with the back of his chair, before slowly turning around again. Kakashi was the kind of man who kept his shoulders slouched in even the most serious of circumstances. Normally, when a person was faced with this kind of a situation, their body would freeze up along with their thoughts. Kakashi was purposely making such seemingly carefree movement to stop his thoughts from freezing up. He had learned to always keep his body moving from his years as a capable Shinobi who saw so much shocking, bloody carnage. Shikamaru was looking at Kakashi with an anxious expression on his face. He opened his mouth to speak. At the moment Sai realised he had lost all of his comrades, theres only one course of action he could have picked. Escape, right? Kakashi said, still watching the ceiling. Yes. Kakashi gave a nod to Shikamarus immediate reply. Although he should have been directing his face to look at Shikamaru, he was still staring up at the ceiling. And yet he sent this kind of letter, instead of coming back to the village and reporting directly to you, Hokage- How many times have I told you that just Kakashi-san is fine? Kakashi said, finally turning to look at Shikamaru. Since when have you gotten so stiff? It was nice when you used to have your shoulders slouched all the time. I wasnt going to stay a kid forever. Even now, Naruto still acts like a kid. Narutos Naruto. Oh, I see Somewhat of a sad look entered Kakashis eyes. He spread out Sais scroll on his desk, eyes going over it again. Sai could transform his handwriting into an ink beast and send it to far away locations, where the ink beast would turn into handwriting again when it come into contact with a blank scroll. The hawk that Shikamaru had seen on the roof was the ink beast form of Sais handwriting he saw now. The situation is far worse than Id thought, huh It sounds like itd be reasonable to say that the shinobi who went missing in action during the war, as well as those whove been disappearing lately, are all in that country. That does seem to be what Sais confirmed. The Country of Silence The whole matter had been snowballing since two years ago. Many lives had been claimed during the Fourth Shinobi World War started by Uchiha Madara and Uchiha Obito. Faced with the power of abominations outside the category of people, the shinobi of the Five Great Countries had gathered all their power and stood together. Finally, the person manipulating Madara, Ootsutsuki Kaguya, had been defeated and the war ended. As every village entered into a period of peaceful recovery from the war, the details of figuring out who had been killed in battle and who was missing in action had turned into an urgent matter. The war had been a fierce battle that even ripped apart the continents terrain. If someones corpse could be found, it was considered a stroke of luck. Compared to the number of shinobi that were concluded to have died in battle, the number of shinobi that were unaccounted for was far larger. The Five Great Shinobi Countries had lost roughly 10,000 shinobi 10,000 shinobi were the victims of the Fourth Shinobi World War. Their enemies in the war could have wiped out the whole world. Many said it was a great stroke of fortune for them to have ended the war with only this many lost. But that wasnt how Shikamaru saw the matter. Even one victim was one victim too many. In the last war, he had his lost his friend Hyuuga Neji. Shikamaru didnt think the pain of Nejis loss was the only case out of ten thousand. A similar pain to losing Hyuuga Neji must have been felt for every other one of those victims. In the death of only one person, there were emotions you couldnt separate yourself from by simply by saying they were just one sacrifice. It was for that reason It was for that reason that war couldnt ever be allowed to break out again. I wonder just how many of those missing shinobi couldve gone to the Country of Silence Kakashi muttered the same thoughts that were going through Shikamarus mind. It was exactly as Kakashi said. Within all the shinobi who had been lost during the last war, there must have been a small amount who had survived but stayed out of reach. The Shinobi Unions Headquarters had been the first one to notice that. Since it was Headquarters who handled all forms of requests for help and such, they were the first to notice any patterns. One such pattern had started to emerge about a year ago. The requests for Shinobi dispatches had sharply decreased. Since the Five Great Shinobi Coutries had decided to from a union, the Daimyo had had remarkably less fighting in the outer lands they ruled as well. Thus, it was a very natural thing for dangerous A-rank or B-rank mission requests to decrease. However, the matter didnt end there. Even the relatively easy C-rank and D-rank mission requests had decreased in exactly the same way. Shikamaru had heard of this matter relatively quickly, since he had a place at the Shinobi Unions Headquarters as well. But it wasnt like there was something they could do to solve the sudden decrease of missions. The Union had said it was a brief change brought along by the times, and closed the matter. However, there was a man who said he could put an end to the problem of the declining missions, as well as one other problem that had popped up since the end of the war. That man was Kakashi. The other problem Kakashi was intent on solving: the cases of missing nin within the Five Great Shinobi Countries that had been going on for a year. Since about a year ago, every village had been losing one Shinobi per month. That made 12 missing-nin for every village up to now. The Five Hidden Villages had had 60 shinobi disappear in total. Furthermore, they were all young, single, male Shinobi. Abandoning your village was a grave crime. Of course, each village had sent people in pursuit of the deserters, but somehow, not a single one had been found. I probably did the wrong thing asking Sai to continue the investigation when he asked for back-up. Kakashi said. I shouldve pulled him out of the situation and gotten him mentally prepared before sending him to the Country of Silence. Regretting it now isnt going to change anything. Thats true. Sai, who had been sent to investigate the cases of the missing-nin, had sent them notice of finding a lead about a month ago. Kakashi, who believed the increased missing-nin and the decrease of mission dispatches were related, had told Sai to continue the investigation with the anbu as back up. The lead Sai had found was the Country of Silence. The Country of Silence could be found in the far west of a continent that rivalled the Five Great Shinobi Countries as well as the countries surrounding them. It was a country that had never made contact with any of the Shinobi Villages C or any other foreign country, for that matter. It was thus called the Country of Silence by outsiders. The only details known about it was that it was a country with samurai who kept its citizens in line, and a Daimyou who ruled over the samurai. However, anything further than that was a complete mystery. According to what Sai had relayed, it seemed that somehow Konohas missing-nin had run towards this country. And those werent the least of their concerns. There was also the matter of the Konoha Shinobi who had gone missing in action during the war. The Country of Silence was collecting shinobi who had gone missing in action as well as shinobi who had deserted the village For what reason? Kakashi could see the reason as clearly as he could see the answer to the decrease of dispatches coming into the Shinobi Union. What do you think happened to Sai? Kakashi asked. Hes alive. Well, I agree with that. The bottom of Kakashis mask moved as if he was smiling. When you look at his obsessive sounding praise of this Gengo he mentions in his letter Kakashi touched the fine, delicate handwriting on Sais message. Seeing what he was thinking, Shikamaru kept speaking. Its not something I want to believe, but we cant discount the possibility that Sais been taken in by this man called Gengo. Sais so pure, after all If Sais alive, we cant just not save him. Thats true Kakashis left scarred eye seemed to darken with despair. Shikamaru could tell precisely what he was going to say without needing to hear it out loud. This situation had a greater and more important matter than that of saving a comrade. Shikamaru himself forced out the words. If the internal affairs of the Country of Silence are really as Sais reported, if the goings-on within are as youve guessed, then we have to take action immediately. I know that. Shikamaru didnt stop talking. Its been two years since the war. All the villages have finally regained their stability, but the status of the country as a whole is still less than half as strong as it used to be. We couldnt possibly withstand another war. Exactly. Letting out another huge sigh, Kakashi stood up from his chair. He stepped around his desk covered with scrolls and books and came to stand next to Shikamaru. It seems like youve come to the same conclusion that I have. Kakashi said. Yes. Then do you understand what I think of it? You want to go and do it yourself, dont you? Kakashi had a lot of experience from his youth spent in the anbu. He stood out amongst the anbu, whose specialty were shady missions, as a very capable soldier. Shikamaru could see those thoughts on his face, and let out a sigh. Hokage-sama. I understand your feelings more than enough, but you must already know that what you want isnt going to happen. Heh. Your thoughts flash through your mind almost at the same speed as Minato-senseis jutsu, do you know that? Shikamaru simply gave Kakashi a long stare as an answer. Kakashi continued speaking in the face of Shikamarus silence. Anyway, going on what Sai said, the leading force behind that country is this man called Gengo. Yes. As long as we do something about him, then there wont be any further problems. Thats what Im thinking as well. Well then Putting his hand at the middle of his back and giving a great stretch like an old man, Kakashi said, Who do you think should be sent? Ill go. Huh? Kakashis eyes widened. Youre Konohas representative. You have a lot of duties to the Union as well. Theres no need for you to go on an assassination mission at this time. Assassination Kakashi had finally put it into words. The thought that had been going through both of their heads was now out in the open. If the Shinobi Union and the Country of Silence went to war, then the Union theyd spent so long maintaining would be disrupted, and possibly even rupture. Each nation was still exhausted despite all their recovery so far C there wasnt a single person who wished for a war. If Sais letter was to be trusted, then assassinating this Gengo would be quickest and most effective way of stopping the Country of Silence from disrupting the worlds hard-attained peace. We have to keep the circle of people who know about this matter as small as possible. Shikamaru said. But Im telling you, for you to go is One of my comrades has been taken. Please allow me to go. Kakashi stopped talking when he saw Shikamarus determination. As Kakashi said, there was no real need for Shikamaru to go. It wouldve been more proper to find another capable person and entrust the matter to them. And yet, Shikamaru himself volunteered. He himself didnt understand why he did it. But he just couldnt stay still. Volume 2 - CH 3 - And with that, this months meeting is over. Does anybody have any questions? Shikamaru closed his eyes as he listened to the dispassionate voice addressing the gathering. The bespectacled man speaking was Chojuro, a shinobi from Kirigakure. Shikamaru knew him from the war as one of the Mizukages bodyguards. If nobody has anything to ask,then, Shikamaru-san Chojiuro spoke with an imploring tone from where he was seated next to him. Shikamaru opened his right eye to glance at Chojuro, then slowly opened both. Ten shinobi were seated around the circular table; both men and women could be found, all generally around Shikamarus age. They were in the Country of Iron;the Shinobi Unions Headquarters. The country had a multitude of strong samurai, and thus, not one single shinobi was needed. Before the war,the Kages of the Five Great Hidden Villages would comfortably hold meetings in the Country of Iron, and now it was the Headquarters for the Shinobi Union founded by those Five Powers. The roots of the Unions headquarters had been set in the same Country of Iron where the alliance had initially begun. All the leading villages of the Five Great Nations had some of their shinobi gather at the Unions Headquarters and, whether night or day, continue their hard work for the sake of the expansion of the Shinobi World overall. This meeting was full of people who would bear the burden of the next eras world of shinobi. It was a place where the future of Shinobi was discussed. Shinobi sent to this meeting were the most capable ones in their villages, considered as candidates for kage as well as other positions. Of them, Shikamaru and Chojuro were the youngest. Besides Shikamaru, and Chojuro, who was chairing the meeting, there was Temari of Sunagakure, and Omoi of Kumogakure as well. Shikamaru had been charged with being the leader of this gathering of shinobi. Obviously, he hadnt volunteered. This was the result of everyone recommending him for the job. Shikamaru-san? Chojuro sounded like hed become worried by Shikamarus long silence. Shikamaru cleared his throat, and looking at all the members, opened his mouth to speak. I believe we dont have any new topics of discussion for this meeting. I hope for more meetings at a comfortable pace like this. With that, see you next month. As he said that, Shikamaru rose to his feet and gathered all the scrolls and documents that had been spread across the table. Folding them under his arm, he turned to leave. Confused by their leaders cold attitude, the other members got ready to leave at haphazard paces. Everyone milled out into the two hallways leading left and right out of the room. Even though so many shinobi were restlessly walking down the hallways, not a single echo of their footsteps was heard. They were shinobi, after all. Other peoples footfalls could be heard, but not a shinobis. That had been one of the basics of the basics, back at the Academy. Oi. A voice called out to him from behind. Shikamaru anxiously clicked his tongue. Right now, the owner of that voice was the person he didnt want to talk to the most. He stepped forward as if he hadnt heard. Hold it, Shikamaru! The voice that hit his back felt like a flying kick. What is it? Shikamaru turned his head to look over his shoulder at the woman behind him. Temari of Suna. Her hair had gotten shorter since two years ago, and was now tied into two bunches on either sides. Her face looked a little bit more like an adults, and her eyes were even calmer than theyd been in the old days. She was older than Shikamaru. Rather than say she looked like an adult, it was more like she had already grown into a splendid adult. Whats wrong with you? She asked. I dont know what you mean. Youve been acting strange lately. Temaris hands reached out to Shikamarus shoulders, turning him to face her. Troublesome The word rose up to his throat, only for him to frantically swallow it down. Like your cold attitude at the meeting. she said, Youve been making decisions without saying a word or giving an explanation, and its made everyone nervous. The atmosphere was so strained. Oh, did that happen? You didnt even notice that? Temaris eyes widened slightly. Whats happened? Nothing Its something youre not going to tell anyone about? Not even me? Temaris gaze was pained. Since the war had concluded, hed been working with Temari at the Union for two years now. She was an understanding, good partner. They both shared the sentiment of not wanting all the shinobi who had been gathered together during the war to separate again, as well as the intention to work together and make the Union as good as it could be. When you added that to the strong bond between Naruto, who intended to become Konohas Hokage, and Gaara, Sunas present Kazekage, that easily made the bond between Suna and Konoha the strongest amongst all the villages united under the Union. With such external forces at work as well, it was natural that Shikamaru and Temari had reached a stage of existence where both was the others biggest support within the Union. Since youre like this, something bad must be happening in Konoha. Temari had made a very good discernment. However, shed missed the mark a little. The situation wasnt in Konoha, though the situation did affect all of Konohas shinobi. Temaris theory was half-right, half-wrong. If there was one thing that never changed about the life of shinobi, it was that anything which passed the borders of your own village had to be jointly carried out with other villages. This was a basic principle of the Union. The course of action that Shikamaru and Kakashi were taking was a blatant violation. And yet, Shikamaru still had no intention of telling Temari the truth. It wouldnt be a wise move to get the whole of the Union involved with the business of the Country of Silence. Hed firmly resolved that Konoha would handle it by themselves Youre saying theres nothing going on that you can depend on me for? Nothing. Shikamarus firm tone made Temari close her eyes. Is that so The punch came in the next moment. It had been one split second where the hurt look on Temaris face had morphed into righteous fury. There had been no time to avoid it. Before Shikamaru even knew what was happening, his body was already flying. He rolled onto the hallways floor before coming up into a sitting position. He silently raised a hand to touch his stinging cheek, already red. Before him, Temari was glaring at him with an outraged expression on her face. I never could have believed that Id misjudged you this much! She shouted, her words turning to wind that slammed against his face. I- Im sorry The apology came without conscious thought. His father would come home as late as sunrise on some days, and get yelled at in the houses entryway by his mother. Somehow, Shikamaru had found himself suffering that same scolding from Temari. She strode past him with swift, large steps, and disappeared over his shoulder. Those eyes of hers had looked slightly wet * Youve stopped eating. The voice came from Chouji who sat in front of him, both of his cheeks puffed up with food. Ino was sitting next to him. They were at Yakiniku Q. In the two years since the war, his two friends had become quite the adults. Chouji was still as chubby as ever, but there was a masculine look in his eyes now, and he now had a goatee. Ino had been growing out her hair more and more, abandoning her ponytail for leaving it loose, and looked more like an adult compared to before as well. Did you eat something before you came here? Chouji opened his mouth wide to drop in even more meat, chewing and swallowing it down. Shikamaru and Ive stopped growing a long time ago, so were not eating ridiculously the way you do, Chouji. Hey! Choujis eyes widened in indignation. Shikamaru laughed without thinking. A calming breeze was blowing through his heart. Itd been a while. I came specifically to eat lunch with you two, so how could I have eaten something beforehand? So saying, Shikamaru extended his chopsticks towards a piece of beef that looked like it was about to burn. Another pair of chopsticks intercepted him. Hey, thats the meat that I put on the grill! Chouji protested. Alright, alright. Theyd gone through this many times before. Shikamaru let go of the beef, and turned his gaze on the piece next to it. He glanced at Ino, who gave a nod of permission. Its been a while since you invited us out, Shikamaru. She said. Yeah, Chouji chimed in, Lately, I havent been able to see you unless we set a time to meet like this. Shikamarus got his job at the Union and well as being the Hokages Support. Hes super busy, Chouji, he cant always hang out with us anymore. I understand that, but Chouji laid his arms on the table, his cheeks puffing out as he pouted. While there was a part of Shikamaru that was happy theyd noticed his absence, another part of him also felt lonely, like a new distance had come with their separation. If he wanted to be an adult, then he had to stop thinking like a child. They were long out of the Academy. Things werent the same as those days when he could while away time playing with his friends till dusk. The same way Shikamaru was swamped with work from both the Union and his responsibilities in Konoha, Ino and Chouji had struggled through the last war and become fine, reliable chuunin. While they said it was because Shikamaru was so busy, his two friends had just as little free time as he did. And yet, theyd come to meet up with him without a word of complaint, simply because he said he wanted to see them. They were his oldest, closest friends. Whats up? Ino asked when she saw how Shikamarus chopsticks hovered in the air, not moving. Its nothing. Ive just wanted to see you guys for a while. Shikamaru put a tiny pit of meat into his mouth. Ah, kay. Ino didnt ask whether there was anything more to it. Chouji continued happily stuffing his mouth with meat. Then, the three started to talk. It was a light-hearted, silly conversation. Choujis eternal love of food. Inos usual talk about her love life. And then, the memories about Asuma Shikamaru could feel the distance between him and his friends shrinking. It was almost like hed gone back to that moment when Asuma had first brought them here. That time, hed been full of complaints about how things were troublesome Looking at how Chouji and Ino had grown up, Shikamaru could feel his heart grumbling about how theyd never be able to return to those old days. - Shikamaru went home alone. At the end of the day, he hadnt been able to tell them. Hed thought that if hed go to the Country of Silence, then hed go with the two of them. Hed invited them out to eat with that purpose in mind. But seeing their smiling faces had somehow made him unable to say anything. The road he was taking was a dark one. For Konohas sake, for the Unions sake, for the sake of every single shinobi, one man had to be killed. It wasnt a victory that could be gained from playing fair. And so, he had to be killed in secret. Assassinated. It wasnt like assassination was anything new to shinobi. Growing up, you realised sooner or later that things like that were necessary in this world. But, still It was still good to have as few people as possible get their hands dirty. He didnt have the heart to drag Chouji and Ino into the darkness too. So, its the Anbu after all Shikamaru looked up at the night sky, and couldnt see a single star. Volume 2 - CH 4 - Shikamaru was in Kakashis office.The Sixth Hokage was surrounded by mountains of documents as always, his hand hurriedly signing papers as if it was just waiting for the time it could go slack with exhaustion. The window across the room had been thrown open, and you could see the streets of Konoha outside. The city seemed to glow under the sunshine of the bright morning, all wrapped up in a gentle, peaceful atmosphere. Ive made you wait. Kakashi said as he straightened out a sheaf of papers on his desk. What business do you have with me today? The Country of Silence. Ah, that Shikamaru still hadnt finished his report about the Unions meeting the other day. There wasnt anything particularly special to report, so hed left it alone. Everythings the same as ever at the Union. Its made up of a collection of capable people, theres nothing to worry about. Youre one of those capable people too. Was he really? Was he really someone who was fit to represent Konoha? Do you really intend to go? Kakashi asked. Yes. Kakashi let out a great sigh at his answer. Is it really necessary for you to go? Sais been captured. Our village has lost a large number of shinobi, both those who went missing during the war and those who ended up disappearing after. Whether they really left the village of their own free will, or ended up being captured by Gengo is something that we have to verify. Youre really determined, huh. Shikamaru silently nodded. Kakashi closed his eyes and shook his head. He looked at Shikamaru again. I get it. I wont say anything more. Who are you thinking of taking? Youre not planning on going all by yourself, right? Could you spare me two people from Anbu? Huh Kakashi was cradling his chin in one hand, his elbow resting against his desk. There was a serious look in his eyes. Wouldnt Ino and Chouji do? The InoShikaChou combination can be used for sneak attacks, however I dont think it fits the requirements for this mission. Because its assassination, right? Furthermore, infiltration is a great part of this mission. I want people who can hide chakra. Hmm Kakashi closed his eyes and thought. He was taking Shikamarus proposal and comparing it to all the other options inside his head. The one who deals the killing blow wont be you, right? I intend to use my jutsu to bind the target. Then youll need someone for the killing blow. Kakashi concluded ahead of any explanation. He understood what Shikamaru was thinking. Two Anbu One that could manipulate chakra, and conceal their presence. Another that held a jutsu which could deliver the killing blow. I have suitable people. Kakashi said. Thank you. Ill make the arrangements. You dont have anything to tell me about my other duties? Shikamaru asked. None of your other duties are more urgent than this matter. Kakashi said, and you could feel in that moment that he really was the Hokage. He calmly assessed the relative importance of various matters, and made quick, firm decisions on which were to be carried out. It was because he was capable like this that shinobi could work under him without worry, and give their all for the village. Shikamaru thought they wouldnt be able to function without him. He didnt have any thoughts like I want to be Hokage. But, it wouldve been a lie to say he didnt feel the slightest bit motivated to grow. In front of a man like Kakashi, Shikamaru was still young and inexperienced, unable to compare to him, and it felt frustrating. Ill tell the two I have in mind to return quickly. You can wait a little longer, right? Please do it as quickly as possible. I get it. Kakashi smiled under his mask and stood up. He turned his back to Shikamaru to gaze out the open window. You dont have to burden yourself so much, you know. Kakashi murmured. Shikamaru didnt answer. Burdening himself Perhaps he was. In a way even he himself couldnt understand, Shikamaru had somehow ended up carrying many, many burdens. Even though he found things bothersome, hed somehow ended up behaving unlike himself, and carrying so many things. Even though all these burdens were getting far too heavy for him to bear, he couldnt throw any of them away, either. Shikamaru was scared to. He got the feeling that he could end up throwing everything away, and losing himself in the process. Hed started out as someone who found everything bothersome. If he put down all his responsibilities and burdens for just one moment, then wasnt it highly possible that he wouldnt ever pick them back up? And when that happened, then wouldnt it be the case that nobody would need him anymore? The thought alone was unbearably frightening. Im going to tell you what I really think now. Kakashi lifted his left hand into the air, letting tiny bolts of lightning crackle in and out of existence. Right now, I really want to abandon all my duties as the Hokage and go to the Country of Silence. Shikamaru could clearly hear the screaming frustration of Kakashis heart: how the man wanted to abandon everything to go and kill Gengo with his own two hands. But the responsibilities of a Hokages position couldnt be abandoned so easily. Honestly, Kakashi said, I think its inexcusable of me to burden you with this. Naruto and me, and every other one of our peers, weve already all attained positions with burdens and responsibilities. Theres no need for you to carry them all by yourself. Is that so The lightning in Kakashis left hand melted away into nothing. Shikamaru. Kakashi looked over his shoulder at the Nara. I wonder what it means to be an adult, sometimes. Please dont look to me for the answer to that. Shikamaru sighed. - Ill come back again. Shikamaru said to the gravestone. Turning away, his eyes caught on the name engraved into the stone: Nara Shikaku. Naturally, hed wanted to visit his fathers grave after his meeting with Kakashi ended. What did it mean to be an adult? It felt like he could find the answer to Kakashis question here, if anywhere. In the Fourth Shinobi World War, his father had been with the Five Kage at the alliances headquarters. After the Five Kage had gone to the frontline of the battle due to the severity of the fight, Inos father and Shikamarus father had taken charge of giving directions to the whole army. Then, Obito had resurrected the Ten Tails and made it send its explosive Tailed Beast Balls in order to cause chaos amidst the Unions army. As the killing blow had approached, Shikakus last moments were spent thinking and conveying further strategies for the army. He had been a Shinobi to the very end. No The truth was that in his very last moments, Shikaku had been a father. Although the only one who knew that was Shikamaru, as his son. What was it to be an adult? Shikamaru thought about that for a while. Saying goodbye to his fathers grave, Shikamarus feet took him to the next person he wanted to visit. His teachers grave. Sarutobi Asuma He was a man who had turned down the path of an elite that hed been entitled to as the Third Hokages flesh and blood, and instead constantly stayed on the frontlines. After Shikamaru graduated from the Academy, it was under Asumas care that hed been raised into the shinobi he was today. Along with Ino and his best friend Chouji, the three of them had constantly been chasing Asumas back, struggling through missions. Asuma, whod gone through any crisis with a cigarette in his mouth and his same easy going attitude, had been everything Shikamaru aspired to be. And yet, that Asuma could no longer be found in this world. Hed died, in a battle against the Akatsuki group who had been making schemes to take over the Earth. Hed died for the sake of letting Shikamaru live Asuma had understood they had no chance of winning against the inhuman abilities of the Akatsuki member they had been faced against, and died while risking his life to protect Shikamaru and his other comrades. He, too, had spent his last moments thinking of others. Shikamaru had yet to find anything he would sacrifice himself to protect. Of course, the people of his village and all his comrades were extremely precious to him. But it felt like those feelings were different from the extent of fierce protection that his father and Asuma had displayed. Perhaps that meant that Shikamaru still hadnt become an adult. He thought that in the first place that ambiguous word adult referred to a child whod at some point simply become trapped in their own body. In that case, even Kakashi was a child at heart. But Kakashi already had something hed trade his life to protect. For a Hokage, every person in the village is his child. Those were the words of Asumas father, the Third Hokage Hiruzen. Maybe when Kakashi chose to become Hokage, hed become an adult. He wasnt sure about anything anymore Shika niichan! Shikamaru was roused out of his pensive thoughts by the sound of that carefree voice reaching his ears. A plump toddler was tottering towards him. Swaying left and right with clumsy little feet, she made her way towards him step by step. Mirai. Shikamaru called her name, his voice naturally turning fond and cheerful. His tense features softened, and his mouth moved to turn into a smile. Gyaa! Mirai finally came to where he stood, and clung onto his legs with her short little arms. Shika niichan! The toddler looked up at him with dazzling bright eyes, her tiny face splitting into a wide grin. The toddlers smile felt like the sun, and Shikamaru could feel his frozen over heart thawing with its warmth. Its been a while, Shikamaru. Kurenai-sensei. Shikamaru greeted the dark haired woman that was Mirais mother. Im not a sensei anymore, so you can stop calling me that. She said, laughing. Sarutobi Kurenai Originally, she was a jounin leader along with Kakashi and Asuma, in charge of a team made of Shikamarus other classmates. But now she was a mother who had devoted all her time to parenting. You came to visit Asumas grave? She asked. Yeah. And your fathers grave? Ive just come from visiting him. Listening to their conversation and still clinging onto Shikamarus leg, Mirai smiled and lifted her head. Shika niichan! Met Papa! Although the toddler could only manage halting sentences, she was bursting with the need to convey everything she could. Looking down at Mirai, Shikamarus heart warmed up. To become this childs teacher It was a promise hed made to both Asuma and Kurenai. I see, you came to see your Papa, huh? Shikamaru crouched down so he could speak to her eye to eye. Mirai gave a delighted nod at being understood. Wow, how great of you, Mirai. Shikamaru said, gently patting her head. The soft feel of the toddlers still downy hair seemed to travel along his arm and all the way to his heart, turning into a calming breeze that soothed his insides. Grow up soon, okay? Mm. You really love your Shikamaru niichan, huh Mirai? Kurenai said. Mirai nodded so hard she almost pitched herself forwards, and Shikamaru reached out to catch her with both hands. For the sake of this child, he really couldnt go and die just yet Right! Mirai babbled the word with such timing, it almost felt like shed read right into his heart. Well, thanks for liking me. Shikamaru picked up Mirai and lifted her into the air. As the two year old shrieked with delighted laughter, Shikamaru thought to himself one more time, much stronger than before: I absolutely cannot die. Volume 2 - CH 5 Standing in front of Shikamaru were two new, white faces: a cat and a monkey. Of course, the animal faces were only masks, and from the neck down the two Anbu were completely human. They wore jet black uniforms that clung to their skin, as well as the recently redesigned flak jackets of Konoha. The old flak jackets used to have pockets on both sidesof the chest for shinobi to keep scrolls or ninja tools, but the new design had done away with those and kept itself relatively simple. It was a side-effect of the peaceful era that had come into being after the end of the war. Where there would have been eyes painted on the two Anbus masks, holes had been pierced like deep, dark caves. Both the masks had thin mouths painted on, curving from cheek to cheek. The cats mask had thin red markings under its eyes. The monkeys mask had thickly drawn red eyebrows that made it look like it was scowling in temper. Both the Anbu had their hands linked behind their backs, and the eye slits of their masks gave off such a feeling that Shikamaru felt like he was being sized up. If its these two, I think they can do everything youve been hoping for. Kakashi said from where he was seated behind his desk. From where Shikamaru was standing, the cat-masked Anbu was on the right, and the monkey-masked was on the left. The two Anbu had a very large height difference. The Monkey was 176 cm, slightly taller than Shikamaru, while the Cat barely came up to Shikamarus shoulders. So, monkey-mask was male, and cat-mask was female Even without the height difference, their body structure made that much evident. Both of you, take off your masks. Kakashi instructed. The Anbus hands both lifted to reach for their masks at Kakashis command, slowly lowering them to reveal the human faces below. It was an Anbu custom to wear the masks with animal faces. Since they mainly dealt in shady missions such as assassination or causing disturbances in foreign countries, they loathed to let anyone know of their identities. Even most of Konohas own citizens didnt know who was and wasnt in Anbu. People who come and go from the village without eating anything are Anbu. There were lots of rumours and speculations like that. The man is Rou, and the girl is Soku. The two Anbu bowed their greetings to Shikamaru in time with Kakashis introduction. To have such a young girl in Anbu Its unthinkable, right? Soku cut into Shikamarus murmuring. But in the world of Shinobi, competency is everything, and I entered the Anbu by proving the worth of my abilities, yknow. Shes right. Kakashi agreed with Soku. Shikamaru couldnt deny that he was surprised. Soku was extremely young. She was at least 5 or 6 years younger than Shikamaru, and mustve only just come out of the Academy. She had slightly red cheeks, plump with baby fat, but also a thin mouth set in a grim frown that radiated determination. Her thin eyebrows were arched, and her eyes shined with self-confidence. Something about her made Shikamaru feel like this was what Temari had looked like as a child. Hinoko was recognised for her abilities and scouted into Anbu the minute she graduated from the Academy. Despite only being 14 years old, shes accomplished a great number of missions. Kakashi said. Shes very relied upon in the Anbu. Its not good to judge someones abilities based solely upon their appearances, yknow. Soku said, puffing out her cheeks a bit. And, Hokage-sama, I keep telling you not to call me by my real name, yknow. Hinoko Its a very nice nam- In a blink, Soku had disappeared from Shikamarus line of view and before he knew what was happening, a finger glowing orange with barely restrained chakra was pressed against his forehead. I hate being called by my real name, yknow. Be careful not to do it. Shikamaru could feel a sort of frizzing static from the edge of Sokus index finger. It felt like an incredibly small version of Kakashis raikiri. Chakra was bursting from the edge of Sokus fingertips Stop that at once, Soku. The one who spoke was the man whod carried the monkey mask. Kakashi had introduced him as Rou. He had thick eyebrows, a strong jaw and stubborn, one-lidded eyes that were glaring at Soku in disapproval. I have to make this clear from the start, yknow. Soku retorted. I wont allow being looked down on for being a kid, yknow. My bad. Ill be careful in the future. Shikamaru gave a simple apology. There was no need to aggravate the situation any further, and he didnt have the time to deal with the young girls temper. Soku turned her gaze away from Rou and back to Shikamaru. As long as you understand, yknow. She turned her back on him and stomped back to where she had originally stood, taking on the same position with her hands behind her back. Rou can freely manipulate the quality and quantity of chakra; both his own, as well as that of anyone he targets and recognises. Kakashi said, and Rou gave a small nod. Does that mean you can increase chakra as well? Shikamaru asked. A smart question. Kakashi commented. The chakra which I can change is only that which is perceived by others. Rou said. To explain, if I increased your chakra, Lord Shikamaru, I would not be able to change the actual fighting potential in the least. Your chakra would only seem larger in the perception of other persons. In other words, my jutsu cannot be efficient in the practice of deceit if the subject of my chakra manipulation does not participate in the deception. Rou had a very old-fashioned speech pattern, and coupled with his round, boulder-like appearance, he seemed more like a samurai than a ninja. Shikamaru gave the man a nod to show him he understood his explanation, and then opened his mouth to speak again. When you say you can change the quantity of perceived chakra, does that mean that you can completely erase it as well? No matter how you looked at it, Rou was definitely in his forties. He was at least twenty years older than Shikamaru. That is certainly possible. I can make the chakra of any target disappear in the manner youve described, while also allowing you to trace them, Lord Shikamaru. With the mans old fashioned way of speaking, Shikamaru had half-expected the word track instead of trace, and felt a little fazed at the random modern word. I thought his jutsu would be the best suited for this job, but what do you think? Kakashi asked. Itll work. And the little one? Shikamaru asked, turning to look at Soku. The girls eyebrow twitched at being called little one. The child didnt seem to be aware that she was a child. Shikamaru wasnt sure yet if that was a good or bad thing for how useful shed be on the mission. A demonstration would be good, wouldnt it? Kakashi said to Soku. The girl nodded and turned around. She stretched out her left arm so it was facing the open window across Kakashis office. In line with the direction she was pointing, Shikamaru could see a single swallow flying outside. My jutsu is all about Chakra needles, yknow Soku murmured, and an orange flash of chakra burst out of her index finger. At that moment, the swallow which had been startled by the loud sound had quickly swooped to hide behind a pillar outside the window. If Soku had fired her chakra with this timing, there was no way she could hit her target. Her chakra would hit the pillar and just leave a scratch on its surface instead. But There wasnt a single scratch on the pillar, and from outside, the swallow gave a shrill, sharp cry. Shikamaru hurried to the window. Leaning out and twisting his neck around, his eyes searched the ground around where swallow had been flying, and found the bird on the ground. It did indeed look dead. I dont want you to misunderstand, yknow. Im against a meaningless waste of life. Soku spoke from behind him. As she spoke, Shikamaru stared as the swallow slowly came back to its senses, waddling to its feet and getting up. Soon, itd taken off again, flying even higher than before. I made my chakra revitalising when it pierced through the target this time, so that swallow probably feels much more energetic than it did a while ago, yknow. How did you get it past the pillar? Shikamaru asked, taking his hand off the window sill and turning to face Soku. The little girl let out a delighted laugh that sounded her age for once, sticking out her tongue in childish mockery. Once Ive aimed at my target, it doesnt matter if they go out of my sight or not, my chakra needle will follow it anywhere, yknow. My needle wont ever stop in its path until it hits its target. So. Rous jutsu would erase their chakras presence, and let them infiltrate the enemys ranks undetected. When they came within reach of Gengo, Shikamaru would use his kagemane to bind him. And then the killing blow would come with the foolproof aim of Sokus chakra needle. It was alright. They could really do it Can I just ask you one thing? You can, yknow. Soku gave a smile brimming with confidence. Can you stop tacking yknow onto the end of your sentences? * They were coming. The enemy. Oto-nin. Orochimarus underlings. No, wait Since when was I being chased? I was the one who was supposed to be chasing someone. Someone who had to be saved. Uchiha Sasuke. A classmate who could do anything perfectly, with a nasty personality. But he was a comrade. He absolutely had to be saved. I was leading a team for the first time. Failure wasnt an option. My comrades My comrades were being felled down, one after another. Chouji. Kiba. Neji. And then Naruto We were surrounded by sneering oto-nin. Im sorry Im sorry, everyone. Next time, I wont fail again. So please- please dont die- PLEASE! Shikamaru woke up to the sound of his own desperate shouting, twisting out of his covers in a panic. His whole body was drenched with sweat. Hed been dreaming It had been his first mission after making chuunin: to retrieve the missing-nin Uchiha Sasuke whod left the village under Orochimarus guidance. His comrades had been several classmates, and Neji. Theyd lessened, one by one, as they chased after Sasuke. Shikamaru had made the decision to entrust everything to Naruto and take on a sound-nin in a fight. And the result of that decision had been Sasuke leaving the village, and all his comrades sustaining serious injuries. As a chuunin, as a leader, his first mission had ended in despairing failure. Shikamaru placed a palm to his sweat soaked forehead, and slowly took in a deep breath. Why did he see a dream like that? Until now, hed never seen those events in a dream. Although, it was a fact that scars from that incident were still left in his heart. Shikamaru saw the Sasuke Retrieval mission as his biggest disgrace, and never failed to think of it whenever he was judging himself. Hed never again been cornered like he had been on that day Dreams were a manifestation of your subconscious. Then, do I feel like Im being cornered right now? Its alrightits alright, Shikamaru Although it was unlike him to try and soothe himself, the words slipped out of Shikamarus mouth before he could stop them. His heart was still hammering, blood roaring against his ear drums like a steady warning bell. It didnt look like hed be able to fall sleep again tonight. They were going to set out at sunrise. Volume 2 - CH 6 - A bunch of ten year old boys crossed the street, laughing with seemingly endless cheer. In the distance behind them, a grim-faced man in his thirties was hurrying somewhere. The children were probably heading to the Academy, while the man was likely going to work. On the side of the street, there was a store that sold side-dishes in the early mornings, its store-front surrounded with housewives gossiping with animated gestures. It was a usual mornings usual scenery. On this peaceful morning, Shikamaru was striding along the main street that started from Konohas wide open front gates and continued straight to the Hokage Residence. The street ended behind the residence, at the Hokage Monument where all the past generations of Hokage were carved into the mountain. Shikamarus destination was the latter. He had some business there. Usually, when shinobi received missions outside the village, they left Konoha through the main gates. There wasnt any particular regulation that said they had to, but it was somewhat of a tradition. The Anbu were the only exception. They dealt with many top secret missions, so in order to keep their departures unknown to Konohas citizens, it had been arranged for them to leave through the back gates found in the mountain behind the Hokage Residence. That back gate was Shikamarus destination. This times mission was being kept a secret from everyone in the village. The only ones who knew were Kakashi, a handful of senior shinobi, and, of course, Shikamaru himself as well as the accompanying Rou and Soku. Hed left the business of covering up his absence from the village to Kakashi. If anyone asked where he was, theyd be told Shikamaru had Union business outside the village bounds. The ideal scenario was to sneak out of the village without anyone noticing his departure, and come back before anyone was bothered by his absence. Hm? As Shikamaru quickly made his way to the back gate, he noticed a blonde haired man in his field of vision. The blonde noticed him as well. Yoo, if it isnt Shikamaru! Whatre you hurrying for? You wouldnt have believed the two were the same age, by the childish grin that lit up the mans features as he hurried to his friend. His cheeks had three whisker-like lines across each side, and his blue eyes were free of any doubt or hesitation. Thats what I should be asking you. Whatre you doing up this early, Naruto? Uzumaki Naruto. He was the hero who had shown everyone the way to ending the last great war, the son of the Fourth Hokage. The Nine Tails had been sealed into him as soon as he was born, and he grew up facing prejudice from his surroundings, and yet hed never once wavered in his goal to become Hokage, and kept on walking down his path. That was the kind of man Naruto was. Right now, he was a strong candidate to become the next Hokage after Kakashi. I couldnt really sleep last night, Naruto said, So when I woke up this morning I went to eat some ramen at Ichirakus straight away, and now Im heading back home. You went to that shop this early? Lately, theyve been open for business 24/7. Naruto looked incredibly happy about the fact. No, I mean, youre eating ramen so early in the morning Im always good to eat ramen, whether morning or noon or night! Hey, thats not something to be boasting about. Half of my bodys probably made of ramen. Naruto seriously said, puffing out his chest with pride. Shikamaru let out a sigh. Youre now known as the hero who ended the war. Try and look after your body more. Heroes are heroes, and ramen is ramen! That reasoning makes no sense. Hahaha. Naruto laughed, sheepishly rubbing a finger across the bridge of his nose. That behaviour of his hadnt changed a bit since the Academy. Naruto always lived his life with a very pure, straight-forward outlook. It was that outlook of his that had changed his surroundings- even changed Shikamaru. Naruto, who had been seen as the bane of the village, had kept his pure heart and slowly made more and more comrades that stood by his side. In the end, Naruto had even managed to save his friend Uchiha Sasuke who had fallen to the depths of darkness, full of resentment towards the whole world. Saving him wasnt an easy feat. No Rather, it was something that no one other than Naruto could have done. The dream Naruto had been holding close to his chest ever since he was a child was only one: to become Hokage. He had had no relatives to give him a kind word, and the only way he could get attention from others was by his repeated pranks, but still he kept insisting that he would one day become Hokage. In the beginning, nobody had believed Naruto could ever do it. But now, there wasnt a single person in the village who thought anyone butNaruto would be the next Hokage. Naruto was the sun. He had a brilliant flame within him that never so much as flickered, constantly burning. It was because of how brightly he shined that he was the sun. Everyone who saw that passion of his opened their hearts to him, and became his comrade. Up until now, and till the end of time, Shikamaru felt like Naruto would continue moving forwards without that flame of his ever wavering. And that was the way it should be. Someday, Naruto would be Hokage, gain even more of the villages trust, and then keep shining, brighter and brighter still. For the sake of that brightness, something like the sun couldnt know about the darkness in the world. Until now, Naruto had waged war against countless people whos hearts had swayed towards darkness, but he himself had never gone crooked. No matter how far someone sinks into darkness, a part of their heart will long for the light. Naruto fought because he truly believed that. Shikamaru had seen him change the hearts of his enemies with that same ideal many, many times. No matter how much darkness surrounded him, Naruto never lost his light. Thats why Naruto didnt really know the true meaning of darkness. There would always be darkness in the hearts of human beings. Thinking you could save everyone was an impossible ideal. No matter how frantically you reached out to save people and lead them towards light, there would always be those few who slipped through your fingers, continuing down the path of darkness. It was the way of the world. But Naruto didnt think like that. No matter how hopeless the situation, he would never give up on saving everyone from that sort of fate. That was the kind of man Naruto was. And Shikamaru didnt want him to change. Naruto was someone who was supposed to stay pure and straightforward, a shining sun. The more the light shines, the darker the shadows grow. But as long as there was someone to take on the burden of those shadows, it would be fine. Shikamaru thought that it was his duty to be that someone. Wasnt it only natural for a shadow jutsu user to take on the burden of darkness? Naruto would become Hokage, and Shikamaru would support him as his right hand man. That was Shikamarus dream: to stay by Narutos side and sort out any shadows that could interfere with his light. The moment that thought passed through Shikamarus head, he suddenly understood himself. Why had he been so stubborn about volunteering to go to the Country of Silence? It had been for Narutos sake, of course. If the Country of Silence continued to grow more powerful, then Naruto would eventually end up suffering. The Country of Silence would be a huge obstacle for him. Thats why Shikamaru was going to go and nip it in the bud. He had decided to bear all of the shadows that would try to interfere with Narutos light, after all. That included dealing with future obstacles as well. So, whatre you doing out? Naruto asked, breaking into Shikamarus reverie. Im taking a walk. This early in the morning? Naruto, Shikamaru deadpanned. Me taking a walk is nowhere near as weird as you eating ramen at this hour. Well, thats true. They both laughed. Do you have the day off? Shikamaru asked. No way. Because a certain someone keeps giving me pain in the neck missions, I havent had a day off in half a year, you know. Im going on another mission at noon. That certain someone was, of course, Shikamaru. Theyre missions Im picking out for your sake, so stop your complaining. But I still want to take a break for just a biiit. Youre being eyed as a candidate to be the next Hokage. Its too important a time for breaks. Be more self-aware, Naruto. I get that But just one- No buts. Shikamaru said, like one would scold a child. Everyone in the village approves of you. But its exactly because they approve that you need to take on even more missions, so people can think ahh, what would we do if Naruto wasnt here. Its already been two years since the war ended, you cant naively think everyones approval will be guaranteed with your actions from that time. Alright, alright Naruto pouted just a bit before giving a great stretch. My stomachs full, so Ill think Ill go home and sneak in a nap. Shikamaru narrowed his eyes at him. Dont oversleep. I wont. Naruto laughed at the serious look on his face, and started walking back. Oi, Naruto. Shikamaru called over his shoulder. What? Naruto turned around. Youre the man wholl become Hokage. Dont forget that. I never go back on my word, Naruto promised. Thats my ninja way. Never going back on your word. Shikamaru paused. Its my ninja way too. Yeah. Naruto raised his right hand in a great wave, and then turned to go on his way. After watching his back for a while, Shikamaru turned around to go on his own path as well. Im definitely going to make you Hokage. Shikamaru had long decided he wasnt ever going to go back on those words. - I made you wait, huh. Shikamaru was directing the words towards Rou and Soku. This times mission involved infiltrating the country as well as assassinating the target. It wasnt something that could be done completely under the radar. Thats why the two werent wearing their masks. We have several mission objectives. Shikmaru said. Surveying the situation in the country of silence. Searching for Sai and the 10 Anbu who we lost contact with. But the highest priority goes to assassinating the man named Gengo. The pair silently nodded. Kakashi hadnt come to see them off. The three shinobi were the only people near the closed back gates. It was hidden within a cluster of trees at the base of the mountain. Despite it being a bright morning, the gates looked wet and gloomy. Ah well, since we will be carrying out assassination, then we must make sure theres no observation Rous nostrils flared as he emphasised observation. Shikamaru stared at him, bewildered at what he could mean. Your joke totally fell flat, yknow. Soku told Rou. The man looked flustered, an embarrassed sweat drop clinging to his forehead. He was trying to make a joke, know. Soku explained to Shikamaru with an Im so sorry about this look on her face. You were talking about us surveying the situation, and since surveying has a similar meaning to observing, he made that joke about our assassination not being observed, since its secretBasically, this old man tends to make bad jokes like that every now and then, so itd be a good idea to watch out, yknow. Shikamaru swallowed down the urge to make a witty retort, and cleared his throat, trying to reclaim the serious atmosphere. When we go past the gate, we start running, alright? Were aware, yknow. Soku cheerfully answered. Rou, whod turned somewhat red-faced with embarrassment, also gave a nod. Alright then, lets go. And with that, the three of them finally heaved open the back gates. Volume 2 - CH 7 - Temari stood behind Gaaras back, watching his crimson hair swaying in the wind. Looking at him, she thought to herself that her little brother had really grown splendidly. They were standing on top of a hill, gazing down at the brilliant view of Suna from above. The people in their village called this hill the winds reading spot because the wind never stopped blowing up here, all year round. Temari knew very well that Gaara was the only one who came up here despite the strong wind to enjoy the view of the village. Do you need anything, nee-san? Gaara asked. He tilted his head back to look at her, and Temari could see the lone kanji for love that was tattooed onto his forehead. Several years ago, if anyone in the village had heard the name Gaara they would shudder in fear. But look at her little brother now. He was the leader of Suna, and a vital authority in the alliance holding all shinobi together. Gaara had become an existence the Shinobi World couldnt do without. It was all thanks to Naruto. Gaara had a bijuu inside him ever since he was born, all throughout his childhood. He used to believe in loving only oneself and had accepted the rest of the world to be his enemy, not letting anyone near. The old Gaara hadnt even let his elder sister Temari or older brother Kankurou anywhere near entering his heart. Even if he didnt say it out loud, his whole body, his actions of losing himself in the throes of bloodlust, all the things he did transmitted those words loud and clear. Naruto was the only one who had managed to reach Gaara. Naruto simply couldnt abandon Gaara, not when he was a fellow jinchuuriki whod lived the same life he had. After exchanging blows in a fierce battle that surpassed the limits of normal humans, the two slowly came to understand each other. When Gaaras bijuu was removed from his body by the Akatsuki and he was on the brink of death, Naruto had pumped as much of his own chakra into him as he could, not holding back in the slightest. Gaara had recognised him as a friend. Gaara had been changing ever since he met Naruto. His cold demeanour disappeared. The way he treated and spoke to Temari and Kankurou changed. His attitude towards the village changed. His feelings towards the people in their village changed. And in the end, Gaara was recognised by everyone. Temari was eternally grateful to Naruto for that. She thought that the village of Konoha overall was likeable. Their villagers held a strong pride as shinobi, and many of them were logical people. Suddenly, that guys face flashed across her mind. There was a stinging pain inside Temaris chest all of a sudden, and she irritably clicked her tongue. Is something wrong, neesan? Eh? No Gaara was looking at her, worry transparent in his eyes. Temari could feel his concern so keenly that it hurt, and looked away from his gaze. The village of Suna was always parched for water. Being right in the middle of the desert, it never rained. And sand always got mixed in with the wind as well. I got a little sand in my eye, thats all. Thats rare. Gaara mildly said. That doesnt usually happen to you, neesan. Th- thats true Those born in Suna were accustomed to the relationship between its sand and wind, used to handling it. Even in a dust storm, no suna-nins eyes would ever sting because of sand. Temaris line about sand getting in her eyes was a blatant lie and excuse. Shikamaru Gaara suddenly said that guys name, and Temari was caught so off guard she couldnt stop herself from stiffening. Although his sister had stiffened up as if in response to an enemy attack, Gaara didnt say anything about her sudden guarded posture, and simply went on speaking indifferently. I feel like hes been behaving strangely lately. The last time I saw him at the Unions Headquarters, it seemed like his heart wasnt in his actions. I got the feeling he was working himself too hard. You think so too, huh. Temari said. Gaara nodded. I used to not care about other people, but now Im extremely careful to take notice of others behaviour and appearances. Maybe thats why Im sensitive to the movement of others hearts. Of course, her brother was, at the root, a very serious person. Once he believed he should do something, he put his all into diligently carrying it out. It was because of that he was able to open his heart to everyone so completely. It wasnt a surprise that her brother should notice the subtle changes in Shikamarus behaviour, when he was so careful about reading others in general. Hes hiding something. Mm Temari let out a sound of agreement. Hes someone who thinks about the future of the Union and shinobi over all more seriously than anyone else. Gaara said. I dont think he would do anything that could threaten the Union. Gaara was referencing the fact that each hidden village participating in the Union had the duty to report any problems inside or outside their jurisdiction. He was also referencing the fact that both he and Temari had noticed Shikamaru was holding back reporting some situation happening in Konoha. Any problem that made him act like that was very likely a problem that affected all the shinobi villages. Do you have any idea what he could be holding back, neesan? I wonder if I do. It was natural that Gaara would ask her. Temari was the one who worked with Shikamaru the most within the entire Union. Its not that I dont have an idea what it is Temari said. Im just not sure if Im right. Gaara nodded, silently listening. Hed been seriously investigating the shinobi who went missing in action during the war, and the recent cases of missing-nin in the villages. At Temaris reply, Gaara took his eyes off her and gazed down at the village again. A furrow came between his brows. He was thinking. The wind suddenly picked up. Bits of sand scraped across their foreheads, a familiar pain. Lets ask Naruto. Gaara murmured. Will you go, neesan? Yes. Temari was startled by how eager her voice sounded. Of course, you should ask Kakashi too, but hell definitely find a way to avoid answering, so ask Naruto about Shikamaru first. Gaara said, If it turns out that Shikamarus confronting a grave situation, then we must do nothing less than try to save him with our full strength. If you feel like shinobi from Suna are needed, take as many with you as you need. Shikamarus a shinobi of Konoha, you know? Were long past the era where we care about things like Suna shinobi or Konoha shinobi. Hes a man whos necessary to the Union. Its natural that we would support him. Thank you. This isnt something you need to thank me for, neesan. One small tear had slipped its way down Temaris cheek. Impatiently wiping it away, she looked at her little brother with a wide grin. Somehow, the sand keeps getting in my eyes today. * Hey Sakura-chan, are you listening? Naruto irritably asked, leaning his elbows against a pile of books that came all the way up to his chest. He was speaking to Sakuras back as she was rushing along the length of the bookshelf that covered the wall. Ya know, Sai hasnt been around for over a month now, and Shikamarus suddenly turned incredibly cold and stiff around me. Hey, dont you think hes hiding something from me? I dont! Sakuras exasperated voice made Naruto wince. What happened to your mission? It ended today. Then quickly go to Ichirakus, eat some ramen, head home and sleep! Whaaaaat, but its been so long since you stopped by the Hokage Residence. Youve finally shown your faceYoure acting so cold as an original member of team 7. Sakura furiously turned around to face her pouting friend. Right now, Im already overwhelmed with working with Tsunade-sama on developing a system for medicinal jutsu, as well as working on the structure of the Unions system. Ive got to go through documents left over from Tsunade-samas time as Hokage! I dont have any free time! I cant listen to your gossiping! Understand? Huffing, she turned back to face the shelves. Besides, havent you been hanging out with Hinata lately? Wouldnt it be a better idea to go and have her listen to you properly instead of bothering me? What? Are you jealous? Sakura turned around with a furious expression, her fist slamming against Narutos head. Obviously not! I decided to wait for Sasuke-kun, you know! Y-yes maam Naruto answered. Suddenly his eyes changed to look a bit more serious, and Sakura, noticing, paid a little more attention to what he was saying. But lately, ya know, Ive just had this really bad feeling. Is the Nine Tails making a fuss? The Nine Tails was still living inside Naruto. There were also remnants of the other 8 bijuu inside him as well. In that way, you could say he was a human pillar for the power of the Ten Tails. In the last war, Obito had become a human pillar for the Ten Tails and gained chakra rivalling that of the Sage of the Six Paths. Naruto, whod taken the bijuu into him as well, had some of the Sages power even now. His bad feelings were different from a normal humans, and Sakura knew it too. Dont you think youre misunderstanding something? Youre cruel, giving my judgement zero trust Naruto muttered, flopping onto the floor in a sulk. Its because if you are rightly worried, theres nothing you can do. Both Sai and Shikamaru are brilliant shinobi. Even if they end up in a situation where need your help, then theyll ask for it. And if they cant, then the Hokage will tell you to go save them. Ehhh, I cant trust Kakashi-sensei to know when to do that. Youre much worse than he is! Sakura exploded, giving him a kick in the shin. Naruto shot back to his feet, wearily keeping a distance. Stop talking about things you cant help, and concentrate on your missions. Thats what Sai and Shikamaru would both want you to do.Especially Shikamaru. Hes been working himself to the bone in the Union and the village so you can become Hokage! You cant let all that be in vain. I know hes working for mebut thats exactly why Im worried, ya know. Sakura let out a sigh. Get a hold of yourself. Theyre comrades whove believed in you all this time, theyre not gonna die meaningless deaths. Dont talk so ominously about death! Oh, for goodness sake! I say one thing you get upset, I say another you still get upset. Youre being a real pain, ya know! Sakura used Narutos own phrase against him. Go home and sleep! Sakura threw Naruto out of the room. Volume 2 - CH 8 The Country of Silence - Shikamarus team ran for three days regardless of whether it was day or night, before they finally reached the Country of Silence. The Country of Silence was a relatively small country, located towards the West of the continent. Most of it was surrounded by mountains and forests, and the remaining land was dotted with fields. None of the towns in those fields were anywhere near the size of a village in Fire Country. The Country of Silence would have felt like a rustic and rural countryside even to the three original founders of Konoha. The countrys capital, Curtain Village*, was located almost in the very centre of the country. Since they were sneaking in from the countrys borders, Shikamaru and his team had to constantly run through hills and valleys. By the time they reached Curtain Village, it had been about four days since theyd left Konoha. Although it was a poor country, the capital still had all the splendour of a metropolis. While rest of the countrys villages had had houses with straw thatched roofs, even the smallest home in the capital had a tiled roof. There were many buildings made with reinforced concrete, and the streets were clean and well landscaped. Roads spread out around the city in the same shape as a spiders web, expanding in radials from the centre of the city. In the little sections separated by those roads, houses and apartments were lined up side by side. One very large building out in the middle of the city. If one were to look at the city from a distance, this building would be the only one to stand out from amongst the others. It was around 10 storeys high, with a crimson tiled roof, and on the left and right edge of the roof were two gold-coloured lion statues. Ahh, this must be the countrys castle which we seek. Theres no need to sound so smug about stating the obvious, yknow. Shikamaru half kept an eye on the castle, and half listened to Rou and Sokus conversation as they walked down the main street. Of course, they had all long changed out of their Konoha flak jackets. Just as the customs of every country are different, so is the clothing. Rou and Soku had advised that they should procure their clothing locally so as not to stand out during their infiltration, and Shikamaru had bowed to their experience as Anbu. Along the way to the capital, theyd stopped at the richest looking mansion they could find and gathered clothes for the three of them. The clothing worn by the people in the Country of Silence was very simple, without any patterns to speak of. The top was an uwagi** robe, wrapped around the chest and tied with a cloth belt. From the waist down, there were wide hakama**, with their cuffs stuffed into laced up boots which came up to the shin. The clothes colours were as droll as the design. Everyone who walked in the Curtain Village wore either black or brown or grey. Even the stores on the streets didnt have any bright lights or neon signs, their advertisements dull and sombre. There wasnt a single bright thing to be found in the entire city. Have you noticed, Lord Shikamaru? Rou asked from his position in front. Shikamaru was stuck between the two Anbu on their insistence. Rou was their front guard. The mans question was very vague. He wasnt specifying what it was that Shikamaru was supposed to have noticed, so there was no way of replying to him. We have yet to see a single one of the Daimyous attendants. Rou specified. Thats true. Shikamaru agreed. As the two conversed, they were heading towards the direction of the castle. It wasnt with any intention to start the operation now, but simply from the habit people had of walking towards the largest building in the vicinity. Shikamaru had absolutely no intention of rushing or rashly leaping into the middle of things and risking the mission going south. All the people we have seen on the street so far have been the countrys citizens. It is extremely strange to not have seen a single attendant. Rous observation was right on the mark. The rulers of countries within their continent were always, without exception, Daimyou. Unions within the Shinobi World were all very well, but shinobi never, ever took the front stage of politics. And Daimyous always lived in the capital city of their country, with their places of residence brimming over with the attendants who served them. Those attendants differentiated themselves from the countrys citizens with great pride, from their colourful clothing to their overbearing and arrogant attitudes. They were always rushing about the capital where their Damyou lived, going around on errands for him. And yet, they hadnt seen a single one of those attendants. Its possible there isnt a Daimyou, yknow. Soku murmured. That could be the case. Small countries did sometimes have cases where citizens of the country made it appear like they had a Daimyou in charge while handling matters themselves. But this country was different. Shikamaru was very sure of that. He turned around in Sokus direction, his eyes glancing towards the castle theyd now left behind them. Sais message clearly said that this country is being controlled by a man named Gengo. But its possible hes not a Daimyou, yknow. You have a point. As Shikamaru said that, his eye fell on a man who was walking in front of the group. He was wearing a long, black cloak, and had a sharp, cutting look in his eyes. His clothing stood out amidst the hamakas and uwagis worn by the other citizens. The design reminded Shikamaru of the Akatsukis cloaks, although this mans clothing didnt have those red clouds, or the high collar to cover his mouth. There was no seam or fastener down the middle either, only five large, silver buttons. See that man in front of us? We saw some others dressed like him too. Dont you feel like youre reminded of something when you see them? Shikamaru asked. I say, I noticed that as well, Lord Shikamaru. Wouldnt a person normally wait a bit instead of immediately agreeing? Soku asked. Those clothesthe clothes make the target, after all. Rou made another one of his bad jokes. We all want you to shut up, yknow. Soku groaned. Ignoring their bantering, Shikamaru continued speaking. Rou, what about that man over by the side of the street? He doesnt look familiar to you at all? As Shikamaru spoke, he inclined his head slightly towards a tea house on the busy street. Rou looked over his shoulder to follow the line of sight Shikamaru was indicating. ItIt cant be Eh? Whats going on? I dont understand what you twore so worked up about, yknow So I was right. Shikamaru grimly said. I kept getting the feeling he was a familiar face. He and Rou were looking towards a man seated at one of the benches in front of the tea house, and drinking tea. He, too, was wearing a long coat that stood out. As they watched, the man called out for the owner of the tea house. An old shopkeeper immediately rushed out from the tea houses interior, bowing his head several times and gushing praise and excuses towards the man. That style of buttering someone up was exactly how citizens usually behaved to the Daimyous attendants. He used to be in the Anbu, Rou said, stunned. His name is Minoichi. That man Was supposed to have gone missing in action during the war, right? Soku guessed, finishing Shikamarus sentence for him. The three of them kept walking past the tea house, careful not to let their observation of Minoichi be noticed. Itd be fastest to get the answers to this incident firsthand, wouldnt it? Shikamaru said. Fireworks were going off inside Shikamarus heart. His mouth twitched up in a smile. - You wont be able to move anymore. Shikamaru drawled to the frantically twitching man in front of him. They were in an alley between two of the concrete buildings. Shikamaru had specifically chosen this place because it wasnt a hotspot, practically abandoned even in the middle of the day. Rou and Soku were keeping watch at where the alley opened up to the main street. Theyd blended into the shadows as expected of their experience in Anbu, staying completely motionless and concentrating fully on the task at hand. A shadow even darker and deeper than the shade of the alley was extended from Shikamarus feet. It had crawled along the alleyway like a jet black snake, all the way up and around the body of the man in front of him. The shadow tendrils turned into dark hands around curled snugly around his captives neck. The Kagemane Neck Binding Jutsu Shikamarus family, the Nara Clan, had been shadow jutsu users for generations. The Kagemane Neck Binding jutsu let you use your own shadow to stop your opponents movements. The Nara shadows were physical embodiments. Their jutsu didnt stop at just binding with their shadows- they could inflict physical harm with them as well. Just letting you know. Shikamaru dryly said. I can very easily crush your neck with my shadow. H-HowWh-whyre youbastard You dont know me? Shikamaru asked of the Anbu. I know you, Minoichi-san. I- I dont know that name. Dont play dumb. You were originally a shinobi from Konoha, werent you? I- I said I dont know it. Shikamarus shadow moved along the mans throat, dark hands tightening around Minoichis adams apple. Ugh He let out an anguished groan. You were born in Konoha. Shikamaru said. You mustve heard about the Nara clans jutsu at some point, right? And what it can do If you keep this up, Im going to strangle you to death. That was the threat Shikamaru was making. So whyre you, a Konoha shinobi, in a place like this, wearing clothes like that? I-Im not a shinobi, anymore. Minoichi hoarsely said. I aman enlightened one. Enlightened one? What do you mean by that? P-people like you who sluggishly live in thenever changing world of Shinobicould never understand our noble will. Look at you babbling. I asked you who these enlightened ones are. Shikamaru willed a little more strength into the fingertips of his shadow around the mans neck. Geugh Minoichi groaned. Im fine with strangling you if you keep this up. Even Shikamaru himself felt sick at the words coming out of his mouth. His heart was getting covered in darkness Theres no way you could understa- neugh! Shikamaru had tightened his shadows hold firmly around Minoichis bobbing Adams apple. If you keep up that idle talk, Im really going to kill you. Shikamarus pupils had dilated to leave his eyes almost as dark as his shadows. I-Iunderstand Shouldnt that be, I understand, sir? * Iunderstandsir Shikamaru weakened his shadows hold, and Minoichi immediately began coughing and spluttering, tears in his eyes. Now, youre going to answer me. Who exactly are you enlightened ones? Whatre people who were originally shinobi doing gathered around here? Seeing the ruthless expression on Shikamarus face, Minoichi took in a deep breath, and started talking. We enlightened ones rule this country. There arent any low born Daimyous around anymore. The title enlightened one is earned when you are a shinobi who has opened their eyes to the noble ideals of Gengo-sama. Our goal is to create a true revolution in this world together with Gengo-sama. Anything you scum plot or scheme is powerless before him. Anything you hear from me wont let you understand the truth of this country! Minoichi began to laugh, opening his jaws to bite down on his tongue in a suicide attempt. Stop! For a moment, Shikamaru was sure Minoichi was dead, slumped to the side from biting his tongue. But then, his eyes caught up with his brain. In an instant, something had flown and pierced the side of Minoichis neck I used a paralysing chakra needle for him, so he wont be able to move for three days or so, yknow. It was Soku who spoke. She had come to stand at his side without Shikamaru even noticing. Feh, enlightened onesthat sounds both arrogant and annoying, yknow. Soku said, glaring down at the knocked out Minoichi. The ex-shinobis face looked disturbingly peaceful in his paralysed sleep. - Footnotes: * Yes, Curtain Village is really the name. I couldnt believe it either. I spent 20 minutes looking for a kanji that didnt exist, lol. ** The clothing described is easier explained seen than read. *** This is a little tricky. Basically, Minoichi said I understand with casual language, but Shikamaru demanded he use polite inflections. Adding sir was the closest I could get to that sentiment. Volume 2 - CH 9 - Shikamaru didnt even try to hide the shivers running up his spine from sitting on the cold, concrete floor. There was no window to speak of. The walls, the ceiling, everything was concrete. He, Rou and Soku were sitting in a circle in a completely grey room. All three of them were wearing the long cloaks of the enlightened ones. All stolen, of course. Even the room they were currently residing in didnt belong to them. The real owner was an enlightened one stuffed in a closet in the room next door, knocked out by one of Sokus paralysing Chakra Needles. Of course, they hadnt forgotten to do their interrogations in the midst of their thievery. The result of all their cross-questionings was quite a bounty of information. It seems that Lord Shikamaru was correct in his initial conclusion. Rou started speaking first. This country does indeed look like its being ruled by this Gengo character and his frighteningly strong charisma. Shikamaru had to agree with Rou about the charisma. Theyd had to lure another male EO [shortened term for Enlightened One/s] to get a long cloak for Rou, and the one female EO for Sokus cloak. Counting Minoichi, that made three EOs that had been interrogated over all. Three enlightened ones, and yet the one thing that didnt change in every single scenario was their obsessive, unshakable faith in Gengo. The faith the EOs had towards Gengo was clearly different from the trust that Konohas shinobi put in the Hokage, or Naruto. Humans feeling love and respect for another human. That was, in Shikamarus opinion, the bond between Konohas shinobi and their leaders. People respecting other people. But the way the EOs treated Gengo was different. They spoke of him with the same fear and reverence that one would use for a living god. As if they believed that while they were humans, Gengos existence was something else entirely. It was an unshakeable, disturbing faith. What kind of a man could make people adore him to that extent? Shikamaru noticed with mild alarm that deep down inside, he himself felt curious about the answer. Well, its been said from the start that this whole thingll end if we end Gengo, yknow. Soku bluntly said. Thats why the old man and I came along in the first place. If that hadnt been the case, we wouldnt be needed. Though Id have liked it if that havent been the case, yknow. Although her last comment was a little rude, Sokus input was pertinent to the conversation. It seems that their thoughts towards Gengo have already turned into a religious fervour. Rou said. I think so too, yknow. Soku nodded. Something has to be up for them to be so fervently attached to him. What do you mean by something, Hinoko? Shikamaru-san! I told you not to call me by name! Soku sat up in a fit of temper, her index finger pointing at Shikamarus face, the tip of it crackling with orange chakra. If you call me by name again, Im seriously gonna pound you! She was so worked up, she didnt even add yknow to the end of her sentence. Why dont you like it? Its an adorable name * [Translators Note: Hinoko means sparks of fire.] Thats why I dont like it! Sokus chakra blared brighter with her temper. A cool name like Gourai [roaring lightning] or Shippu [swift gale] or Kimidare [summer rain] would have been so much better! It turned out that no matter how capable a shinobi she was, Soku was still a fourteen year old child on the inside. Her line up of cool names were all so unbelievably cheesy, Shikamaru was desperately trying not to laugh. She must have mistaken the strained expression on his face for an apologetic look, because the chakra buzzing at the tip of her finger suddenly went out. Sorry, Shikamaru said, regaining control of himself. I didnt know you hated your name to that extent. Ill be careful not to use it. A-as long as you understand Soku looked somewhat embarrassed at her outburst now, looking down at the floor. Spread out on the floor in front of the three was a map of Curtain Village. This had also been procured from the owner of the room. I say, the shape of this city is truly like a spiders web. Rou said, crossing his arms in thought. Shikamaru looked down to study the map as well. His eyes fell on the picture of the large castle at the centre of the city. The text next to it declared it as Floating Prisoner Castle. Floating prisoner Shikamaru muttered to himself. It is a derogatory term. Rou explained with his old-fashioned knowledge. Used for prisoners of war, or savages living near the borders of a metropolis. Derogatory, huh Shikamarus mind was whirring as he murmured out loud. Did Gengo give it that name? Or was the castle called that long before he became its master? The Country of Silence has always avoided contact with other countries, and as a consequence even we Anbu of Konoha do not have any information on this castle. Shikamaru somehow had a feeling Gengo had given the castle that name. It was just a vague sort of intuition though, so he didnt say anything about it. Why give your own castle an insulting name like that It comes to this sort of meaning, does it not? As the Five Great Nations and other smaller countries claimed their land on the continent, we were savages forced to live on the outskirts. They are insulting themselves. Rou said. Thats definitely what it is. Shikamaru commented, deep in thought. Thats stupid, yknow. Soku scornfully interjected. Shed kept quiet until now, listening to them talk, but looked so worked up she couldnt stop herself from talking. Insulting yourself, declaring yourself to be scum, what kind of a crazy cruelty is that? And these twisted, pessimistic guys are trying to overturn the world of shinobi? Ridiculous. She forgot to add yknow again. Soku, Shikamaru realised, was genuinely angry at the people of this country for giving themselves such a self-deprecating name. Its probably by insulting themselves that they find the ferocity to bare their fangs and fight the rest of the world. Sokus reply to Shikamarus explanation was to look away in disgust. He continued speaking. Revenge is born out of hatred for your opponent. And hatred is never something that can exist in someone without them starting a fight or provoking the other side. Then, Lord Shikamaru, are you saying that the people of this country resent the other countries in this continent? Thats a ridiculous idea, yknow. Soku cut in, still steaming. All the EOs who run this country are former shinobi from other countries, arent they? Soku was right. The fact had come to light during their interrogation of the three EOs. Every single EO who was involved with governing this country had originally been a shinobi from another country. Part of them were shinobi whod gone missing in action during the war, while the rest were those whod become missing-nin during the past year, but they were all governing authorities who answered to Gengo. Theyd learnt that this country had once had a Daimyou as well. The one who had driven the Daimyou out, raised up the Enlightened Ones and changed the country from the root up was, of course, none other than Gengo. It would be a fitting summary to say that the current Country of Silence was being run completely by shinobi. If they hate other countries, Soku continued, Then that means they hate their own villages as well. That cant be right. The concept seemed alien to her. There are shinobi like that too. Shikamaru carefully said, explaining in a calm tone. The group that was the cause of the last great war, the Akatsuki were mostly made up of missing-nin. They were a group with exceptional abilities who hated the world of shinobi. Youd find yourself trapped in a bad situation, and dark feelings would begin to stew. It wasnt surprising if all that resentment and anger made you lash out at your own country. Youd blame your village for your misfortunes and suffering, say that it wasnt your fault, but the structure of your country- no, the very structure of the world that was to blame. It was through that kind of thinking that members of the Akatsuki or Enlightened Ones were born. But, I say, if this is true Rou spoke, and Soku and Shikamaru both fell quiet. If this is true, and the Enlightened Ones feel dissatisfaction towards the current state of shinobi Rou glanced at Shikamaru, who nodded for him to go on. And they came to this country with those feelings of dissatisfactionBut, well, what theyre doing here isnt any different from whats done in the shinobi world, is it? Rou was referring to how the Enlightened earned a livelihood. The Country of Silence had opened a unique messenger route for business, and was taking on mission requests from all around the continent. Whats more, their standard prices were cheaper than the Unions. While large and powerful countries like the Five Great Nations didnt care much about lowered prices over credibility, it was a relief for smaller countries around the continent who had less gold to spare. It was no wonder the mission requests made to the Union had significantly decreased. It was exactly as Rou had said. Shinobi who felt resentful towards the shinobi world ran away to the country of silence- only for them to keep taking on mission requests as only shinobi would. It was a truly ridiculous scenario. A true revolution Soku thoughtfully murmured. When Rou and Shikamaru both turned to look at her, the girl looked embarrassed. Its what Minoichi said. Our goal is to create a true revolution in this world together with Gengo-sama, and all You think theyre taking on mission requests for the sake of reaching that goal? Shikamaru asked. Soku nodded. Well, either waythat Gengo fellow is a threat that must be eliminated. Rou muttered. Weve been blessed with a good chance, yknow. Soku said, pointing at the plaza in front of Floating Prisoner Castle. The town square reserved for speechesIts a fitting stage for an assassination, is it not? Rou laughed, and looked at Shikamaru with mirth. The man who was always so simple and sincere was now talking about cold-blooded murder with a smile on his face. Shikamaru felt like he was just now realising, deep in his bones, that Rou really was a part of Anbu. To summarise what we discussed before: Rou, youll use your jutsu to help us blend into the crowd at the plaza. Ill extend my shadow to reach and restrain Gengo. Soku, youll be placed at a nearby rooftop with a birds eye view. The moment you see Gengo stiffen, you have to send your Chakra Needle flying immediately. They both nodded at his orders with those same disturbing smiles, as if they were looking forward to the thrill. Well be depending on you, Hinoko. How many times do I have to tell you not to call me that?! Soku got to her feet, steaming with indignation. Forty times. Rou whispered. Huh? Soku glared at her senior, her mouth twisting down in temper. Lord Shikamarus name has shi for 4 and maru for 0, soforty. Rou meekly said. Soku was furious. Again with the puns! She strode forward, And bad ones, at that! What happened to the ka, then?! Rou hurriedly got to his feet and Cdespite being 40 years old, significantly larger than his short-tempered junoir, and an Anbu- quickly hid behind Shikamaru for safety, cowering from the fourteen year olds rage. Of course, he couldve been playing his reaction up for laughs, but that didnt stop Shikamaru from feeling more than a little embarrassed on the twos behalf. Is everything really going to be alright tomorrow? He sighed. Both Anbu straightened at once, reassurances spilling out of their mouths. Itll be fine, yknow! There is absolutely nothing to concern yourself over, Lord! Looking at them, Shikamaru let out another sigh. Volume 2 - CH 10 - They were so many people gathered at the plaza in front of the castle that Shikamaru wouldnt have been surprised if it was the citys whole population. It wasnt just the Enlightened Ones with their long, black cloaks. Men and women, boys and girls, people of all ages and classes had all gathered in one large, muddled crowd, waiting for their leader to appear. All of them wore the same enthused, feverish expressions on their faces, their eyes fiercely blazing with devotion. Their voices mixed together, murmuring in praise and exaltation as they waited. All in all, Shikamaru found them loud and annoying. Stuck in the middle of the crazed crowd, and in a cloak on top of that, Shikamaru could feel his skin getting slick with sweat. Rou was next to him. Soku was lurking around the roof of a concrete building across the castle. Rous jutsu had disguised Shikamarus chakra to look like the chakra of the cloaks original owner. From the quality to the quantity, everything was an exact copy of the EO. Rou had of course, done the same for his own chakra and the EO who had worn his cloak. Naturally, theyd disguised their faces too. That had been Rous skills at work again. No matter how well they hid their chakra, if the enemy ranks held someone with sharp eyes and a good memory for faces, theyd be discovered in an instant. Rous skills had ensured they were hidden more than enough, both on a chakra and visible level. Even if their faces were examined, itd be almost impossible to tell the difference between them and the original EOs. And on top of that, Shikamaru and Rou were hidden in the midst of a large crowd. Everything had been arranged so the enemy would have no possible way of spotting them out. For now, lets head towards that place. Rou murmured in a low voice. He barely moved his mouth as he spoke, eyes never moving from the platform placed in front of the crowd. It was raised quite a bit off the ground, with its own wooden staircase to the side. There was nothing on the platform, not a single microphone or bodyguard. The crowd was jostling forward close enough for them to touch the wood. I say, I wonder if Gengo will really appear? Rou doubtfully murmured. He was right to feel unsure. For the leader of a country to stand on such a completely defenceless platform was beyond dangerous. If Gengo did appear, it would be the same as saying that he didnt have the feel the slightest suspicion that anyone could aim for his life. For now, lets just get closer and wait. If Gengo doesnt appear, then well just silently draw back for now. Understood. They just had to get within a distance that Shikamarus kagemane could reach the man on the platform. If Shikamaru could stop Gengos movement, then Sokus Chakra Needle would do the rest. If he would just make an appeara- Rous murmuring was cut off by a sudden roar of joy from the front of the crowd closest to the platform. The elated shouting rose and spread like a tidal wave across the plaza. As Shikamaru tried to push his way to the front, all the people around him were screaming so loud he felt like his eardrums were going to burst. A single man had appeared on the platform. He wore a long, black coat similar to the design the Enlightened Ones wore, but his was covered in countless colourful ornaments as well as the large silver buckles. On top of that, his sleeves were embroidered with silver snakes running down his forearms. His hair was a dark indigo blue. He had a strong jaw, a masculine physique, and his features were clear and well-defined. He calmly looked down at the cheering crowd with clear and intelligent eyes. There were slight traces of stubble around his jaw. He looked about 30 years old. That man is most likely Gengo, isnt he? Rou murmured, and stopped walking for just a moment. Shikamaru kept walking without giving an answer. He felt a firm conviction that the man in front of their eyes was definitely Gengo. Slowly, the man raised his right arm into the air. Instantly, all the wild cheers fell silent. Gengo closed his eyes as if he felt satisfied by that reaction, a small smile pulling at his mouth. He took in one deep breath, then opened his eyes and began to speak. First of all, I would like to express my thanks to all of you who have gathered here. His voice was deep and heavy, soothing to listen to. It had a mysterious quality to it that made you feel like you werent listening to him with just your ears, but your whole body. Shikamaru felt a bothersome, itchy feeling inside his chest, as if the mans voice was brushing against his heart. Rous eyes met Shikamarus as they silently moved closer to the platform. It was clear that he seemed to feel that same, uncomfortable sensation. The two shinobis steps became in sync, keeping their movements slow, subtle and silent. Gengo gave a small bow towards the crowd to convey his gratitude, and then started to speak again. It has been ten years since I came to stand at this podium. We have gained many who share our ways of thinking, and our country has begun to prosper. However, not a single one of our desires have been realised. Everyone had been listening in utter silence. As the mans words stopped, a strange atmosphere sifted into the quiet of the crowd, as if every inch of the plaza was under the mans control. I have a question for the citizens of our country of silence! Gengos voice which had been so calm and composed now rang out with a tempestuous fury. His shouted words seemed to come from his very soul. The country that was ruled by a Daimyou, and this country nowWhich world do you think is better? Who is that better world ruled by? GENGO-SAMA! The citizens shouted their approval as one, their voice roaring across the plaza like a tidal wave. There is definitely no mistake, that man is Gengo. Rou murmured. Shikamaru silently nodded to him, turning to the platform. They were almost there, several meters left to the distance which would allow his kagemane to reach and bind the target. The whole mission would be decided in one moment Gengo raised his right hand, and the crowd quietened again. I have received your answer. The days we were ruled by Daimyou who saw power, wisdom and us, the shinobi, as unimportant- those dark days are long past! Citizens, you may now find peace of mind. We enlightened ones shall forever protect you, with our power and our lives. All you need to worry about is comfortably living your lives. Because that is all that we enlightened wish for. Everyone around them seemed to get drunk on those words. They were strangely overwhelmed with emotion. Some were even crying. Shikamaru honestly didnt think Gengo had said anything all that important. No matter how he turned over the words in his head, it didnt even seem like a relatively good speech. However, he did acknowledge the fact that Gengos voice had a mysterious power to it. The man possessed a power that made you listen to his voice no matter what he was saying. Our country of silence is at the very outskirts of the continent. Our history is that of foreigners, oppressed and downtrodden. Our ancestors did not cut off contact with the outside to sever our exchanges with others. It was to protect our own. As long as we stayed out of contact with the outside, we stayed weak. But now, that is over. Gengos voice increased, incensed. The ones who rule this world should not be the Daimyou, but we who carry the power of shinobi! That is true justice. It is because of shinobis struggles that the citizens are protected. The existence of shinobi who carry powers beyond a normal humans have always been found throughout the world. And yet, we were ruled by Daimyou, who live selfishly, only for themselves, while crushing shinobi and citizen alike beneath their feet! Look at this country. It has been 10 years since I exterminated the daimyou. Look at the prosperity this country has gained! Gengos chest expanded with pride. Almost there. Shikamaru murmured. Only a few steps more, and Gengo would be within range of his kagemane. I will exterminate the Daimyou from this world, and create a new world for us. Why arent shinobi recognised and distinguished? We hold a greater power than any daimyou. We hold a greater power than any human! Why are we who transcend others constantly downtrodden? Arent our merits far greater than other peoples? It is because the daimyou fear the age of shinobi that they discriminate against us, isolate us, and keep us under their influence! Citizens and shinobi alike, we are all victims to the selfishness of the daimyous! They were getting closer to Gengo. From this distance, it almost looked like blue sparks were coming out of the mans fiercely glaring eyes. Revolution Just a little more until they were in range. Just a little more. The man standing in front of their eyes was almost certainly Gengo, and yet theyd been able to easily approach him unnoticed- so easily that Shikamaru felt weary. He thought about the possibility of this being a trap. But there was no way the enemy could have noticed them, and they couldnt just let this chance pass them by. The Akatsuki had once stood with the intention of changing this world. But they were destroyed. They were destroyed by the world of shinobi that remains unchanged with time, no better today than it was yesterday, with shinobi still overruled and discriminated against. But the Akatsuki lived up to their namethey were the dawn. They were the sign of a dazzling morning to come. Listen, you people who hold the morning sun that will rise from the Silences darkness. Gengo slowly raised both his arms, as if he was welcoming a god from heaven. The first rays of sunlight to dawn in this new age, they will shine from our Country of Silence! The citizens cheered, the noise of their yells covering everything else. This was their chance. Shikamaru let his shadow free. A tendril crawled smoothly through the crowd like a black snake, creeping up the platform and stopping at Gengos feet. As soon as that shadowy snake caught hold of hold of Gengo, his movements would be stopped, and Sokus chakra needle would end the business. It wouldve been fine if everything had turned out the way hed planned it. Only the kagemane Couldnt seize Gengo. Wha-! He shouldve been in range. He was in range! Why couldnt his shadow reach- The mouse creeping over there. Gengos gaze slowly turned to look Shikamaru right in the eyes. Hes sensing us, Lord-! Rou shrieked. Several shadows leaped out from behind Gengo and came flying towards Rou, restraining him. Shikamaru frantically tried to reach Gengo with his shadow one more time. Its useless. Gengo callously called. Shikamarus shadow, once as familiar to him as his own hands and feet, suddenly turned into a kite with cut strings. Its tendril missed the target completely, turning round and round in circles, writing uselessly on the ground. Fine then Shikamaru leaped onto the platform, slipping out a kunai from his cloak. If the plan had been ripped apart, then he would fight and do the deed himself. Gengo didnt move to run from Shikamaru. There was a faint smile on his face. Shikamaru ran towards him, swinging his kunai towards the mans throat with expert precision. Someone came at Shikamaru from the side of the platform, kicking him sharply in the stomach. He rolled to the side of the wooden construct from the impact, and quickly sat up on one knee, his kunai at the ready. He stared. You- whatre you? A single man stood between Gengo and Shikamaru. He had an ashen grey complexion. Vague eyes, with depths of unreadable emotion. A straight, honest mouth. Whatre you doing? There was no mistake as to who it was. Shikamaru called the man by his name. Sai. Volume 2 - CH 11 - Sai held a paintbrush in one hand, and a scroll in the other, drawing furiously. Every time he lifted his paintbrush from the scroll, an ink tiger would manifest and attack Shikamaru Shikamaru efforts to fend them off ended with him rolling off the platform and falling right into the crowd. He didnt have the time to be concerned only about Sai. Shikamarus mind was in utter chaos. Why hadnt his jutsu worked? Why had their disguises been seen through? Was Soku alright? Shikamaru dodged attack after attack from the crowd. In the corner of his eye, he could see several Enlightened Ones holding down Rou. The old man was frantically struggling against their hold, but it was impossible for him to shake off that many men at once. Shikamarus cheek was stinging from where Sais ink beast had gotten in a swipe. The resin mask Rou had put on Shikamaru to disguise his face was starting to peel off. Soon, that mask will be torn off completely, so I imagine youll feel more comfortable. Sai said with a simple smile. His paintbrush hadnt stopped moving. Inky tiger after tiger materialised, surrounding Shikamaru. Why are you doing this For a while now, Sai noted, Youve been saying things that give the impression you know me. Shikamaru didnt tell Sai who he was underneath the mask. He couldnt, to begin with. You never spoke your name out loud if there was a risk of you being captured and your name being traced back to your village. Never. It was an ironclad rule of Shinobi. Behind the Enlightened Ones swarming towards him, Shikamaru could see Gengo still standing serenely on the platform. He kept his arms crossed as he calmly watched Shikmarus struggles. If he could just manage to get to him one more time Shikamaru leapt on top of one of the inky tigers surrounding him, stabbing it with his kunai and leaping off in one seamless movement. He ran as soon as he hit the ground, free of the circle of beasts. In the corner of his eye, he caught a glimpse of the tiger dissipating into a spray of black ink. There was so many EOs blocking his way, he could barely even count them. Will it work? Shikamaru grumbled to himself, forming the seal for a jutsu with his hands. Countless tendrils of darkness slowly started to extend from his shadow in every direction. His kagenui, the shadow sewing technique, used tendrils of his shadow to attack and bind his opponents like a needle with thread. Since Shikamaru could create a multitude of shadow needles, it was a good jutsu to use against several opponents. Shikamaru took aim at the tigers and Enlightened ones surrounding him. The needle-like tendrils of his shadow stretched out without any problems. All hed need was one strong force of will for them to shoot up and off the ground. Work! Shikamaru yelled the word like a battle cry. The tendrils raised their heads slowly from the ground, rearing back and getting ready to strike- Stop your pointless actions. Gengo called from the platform above. The moment his voice rang out, Shikamarus shadow tendrils woozily sank back into the ground, and drew back into his normal shadow. Wh- WHAT DID YOU DO? Shikamaru roared at Gengo in outrage. Why was his voice affecting his shadows? What in the world was he? Hm? I do believe I know that jutsu It was Sai who made that comment. Hed now come to stand in front of Shikamaru, blocking his way. Sai, dont you dare Your pointless actions are unsightly. Sai calmly said, his paintbrush furiously dancing along the scroll in his hand. The tiger that materialised from his scroll this time was black and white- and far, far larger than any of the others. You will experience it first hand, and understand, soon enough. Sai said, pointing his paint brush at Shikamaru. The giant black and white tiger took that as a signal, and took one great step towards Shikamaru. You shithead Shikamaru muttered, taking out a kunai and staring up at the tiger, readying himself for battle. Suddenly, he felt something slam against his right leg. The second he realised that, something else slammed against his left leg, and right when Shikamaru realised the Enlightened Ones were bodily launching themselves at him, it was too late. He hit the ground face first, several of the Enlightened piling on top of him and holding him down. To think that someone as sharp as you didnt notice that the tiger was merely a distractionyour mind must really be in chaos. Sai commented, looking down at Shikamaru desperately trying to breath under all the bodies crushing him. Shikamarus impeded field of vision picked up the shadow of a man approaching from behind Sai. Gengo. Take off the mask. Gengo commanded of the Enlightened Ones. A single finger slipped into the crack caused by the tigers claw, and peeled off Shikamarus mask in one go. Now see, it is Shikamaru-san after all. Sai said. So this is Konohagakures genius, Nara Shikamaru, huh Gengos voice sounded like he was a collector whod found an item hed been seeking for quite a while. Shikamaru craned his head to look up into a pair of suspiciously glowing blue eyes. Gengos gaze didnt leave his for a moment. Shikamaru cracked a smile. Just so you know, he said, If you dont get rid of me now, terribly frightening things will happen later. I have no fears. Youll be living right along with me. Gengos confident words were followed by a sharp pain in Shikamarus neck, and he lost consciousness. * This was true darkness. There was no light whatsoever, to the point that Shikamaru couldnt even see his own hands held an inch from his face. It was in this kind of dark that he sat, and sunk deep into his thoughts. He wasnt sure how many days had passed. Judging by how frequently theyd fed him, and the state of his stomach, it had been at least five days. How did things turn out like this? No matter how many times Shikamaru turned over the events in his head, he couldnt find a complete answer. It wasnt just the problem of Sai. Hed extended his shadow all the way to the platform Gengo had been standing on. But his shadow hadnt been able to ensnare his legs, losing sight of the target. And Gengo had been aware of the presence of Shikamaru and the others. Hed called them mice. All this despite them perfectly disguising their chakra. It was as if thered been a barrier around the man that rendered all their jutsu useless when they got within a certain distance of him. Could Gengo really disable jutsu? Shikamaru couldnt tell. But there was no mistake that something had interfered with both Shikamaru and Rous jutsu. Shikamarus shadow couldnt reach Gengo. When hed tried to use the kagenui against Sais monstrous tiger, as well, his shadow had suddenly faltered and lost power. The most appropriate conclusion was that either Gengo or an influence in Gengos surroundings, had weakened the potency of his kagemane. Following that train of thought, there was a high possibility that Rous jutsu had experienced the same effect and been watered down. Then, Shikamarus own chakra signature had likely leaked outside the disguise, allowing Gengo to notice their presence. That was the theory he had been going on for now. Jutsu didnt work against Gengo But why? Shikamaru hadnt had the time to gather enough information to figure out the truth behind the phenomenon. He hadnt had rhe chance to investigate anything, even a little, so of course there was nothing for him to work with. Not having anything more to go on, not being able to think about the reason, it irritated him. He was losing his presence of mind Geugh! Urghh! Somewhere in the darkness, Rous groans of pain reached Shikamarus ears. Sokus cries came from somewhere in the darkness as well too. They both sounded like they were being held somewhere close to him. It sounded like they were undergoing severe torture. He only ever heard their voices in moans and whimpers. For some reason, Shikamaru wasnt tortured at all. Im sorry He murmured, looking towards the direction of Rous pained voice, although it was doubtful the man had heard. This was the result of Shikamarus own hasty actions. Wouldnt it have turned out so much better if hed just investigated Gengo a little more before acting? There had been so many other plans he could have followed Shikamaru struck out with his fists blindly in the dark, hitting the cold, stone floor beneath him. He struck again, and again Are you alive? Gengos voice came to Shikamaru in the darkness. Or are you dead? His captors voice took on a tone as if he worried about there being no answer. Shikamarus chakra was depleted, but he wasnt dead, and he knew Gengo was perfectly aware of that fact. Asking questions he already knew the answer to was nothing more than sarcasm. I see youve been eating all your meals. Shikamaru ate everything they gave him. Of course, only after checking if it was poisoned. Being able to taste the presence of a variety of poisons with just one lick was another of the basic foundation for shinobi. Shikamaru was eating because he hadnt given up. As long as he was alive, there was bound to be some chance of escape. If his body couldnt move as he willed it to when that chance came, then he would die. No shinobi gave up the hope to live. To continue to survive no matter what, to keep carrying out your duties no matter what, that was a true shinobi. We are shinobi because we endure. Thats why Shikamaru had to believe that Rou and Soku hadnt given up either. Have you calmed down a little, after so many days spent in the dark like this? Gengo asked. Do you feel like listening to my words now? Unfortunately for you, Shikamaru said, The dark is a very close friend of mine. Youre an interesting one. Gengo laughed. Ill come again. The mans presence disappeared as soon as it had come. ARRGGGGGHHHHHHHHHHHH! Rou had started screaming again. Volume 2 - CH 12 - The Hokages office back home couldnt even be compared to the enormous size of this hall. Shikamaru was crouched down in the middle of a deep crimson carpet rolled out from the extravagant double doors at the entrance towards the interior of the room. Both of his hands were in manacles behind his back. Two of the Enlightened Ones stood by his sides so he wouldnt get any ideas about standing up and causing trouble. Well, they were originally shinobi, so theyd notice the moment Shikamaru did anything suspicious. Rou and Soku were behind him. They, too, had their hands in manacles behind their backs, and guards by their sides. The only difference was that both their faces were covered in dark bruises and gashes, clear evidence of the torture theyd been suffering. Going by the number of meals and the state of his stomach, it had already been 10 days since they were captured. In all that time, Shikamaru hadnt been tortured even once. Gengo had visited him countless times, staying a bit to make some meaningless small talk, and then leaving. He would always say things like should I make a speech today I wonder or what should be eaten for lunch? useless, stupid stuff like that. Lower your head. the Enlightened on Shikamarus right side ordered, and slammed his forehead onto the carpet. These are important guests. You mustnt handle them roughly. Gengos voice came from some distance ahead of Shikamaru. The moment he said that, the EO let go of Shikamarus head in a hurry, straightening up as if deeply embarrassed at being scolded. My subordinate has been rude. Gengo said. Please, raise your head. Shikamaru had already been lifting his face even before he was given permission. A marble staircase started where the crimson carpet ended ahead of him. At the very top of the staircase, there was a wide floor with a long, extravagant statue of a dragon with a throne carved into it. Gengo sat there, one leg thrown over the other. His left elbow was leaning on the armrest, and he casually cradled his cheek in his left palm. The cool, composed gaze with which he looked down at Shikamaru was exactly that of the ruler of a country. Bring them closer. Gengo commanded. The EOs at Shikamarus sides put their arms through his, dragging him to his feet. They hurried him across the carpet, until he was at the bottom of the great staircase. Rou and Soku were dragged along in the same manner. Have you gotten a little bit curious about my words now? Gengo asked. Sorry but, I have no idea what youre trying to say. Shikamaru said. Gengo let out a small laugh at the immediate and resolute reply. There were several EOs lined up along each side of his throne. All of them were looking down at Shikamaru with the kind of haughty eyes that made him suppose they were Gengos advisors or close aides. Shikamaru saw Sais figure among their ranks, already adorned with the black cloak that all Enlightened Ones wore. Although they were supposed to be comrades, Sais eyes looked down at Shikamaru without any uneasiness or hesitation. Sais eyes had never been very expressive to begin with, but theyd never looked as blank and empty as they did now. Someone as intelligent and well-known as yourself Gengo said, I think youve long figured out what I want from you. Of course Shikamaru had noticed what Gengo wanted. Hed sensed it ages ago, but it was a ridiculous notion. It wasnt ever going to happen. So he kept his mouth shut, and didnt even waste his breath on it. Become my right hand man, Shikamaru. If its you, then you will be able to bring a new world into existence alongside me. I can see that you are a man capable of that. Ill pass. Shikamaru immediately spat out his reply. His eyes seethed with murderous rage as he glared up at Gengo. But the countrys ruler didnt seem the least bit affected. He calmly met Shikamarus bloodthirsty gaze as if it was nothing more than a passing wind. Someone who reacted to my sudden proposition with immediate joy and acceptance would not have been someone I would want. Youre doing very well, Shikamaru. Youve been pissing me off more and more with that all-knowing tone of yours, acting like you can see through everyone. What could you possibly understand about me? Shikamaru wasnt actually pissed off. He wasnt the sort of person who let things like this anger him enough to make him lose his cool. He was just acting like he was itching for a fight because he wanted to see his opponents reaction. That was all that it was. Its impossible for one person to completely understand another. Gengo said, Isnt that why Im holding a conversation with you? Im not seeing through you. Ive simply lived a little longer than you have, so I can perceive your emotions a little. If that somehow seemed to manifest into an arrogant tone, then I apologise. Its exactly that kind of tone that pisses me off. I see Gengo closed his eyes and laughed in a self-deprecating way. For a while, there was silence. Gengos gaze wondered around the room as if he was thinking. He had deliberately created a chance for Shikamarus anger to cool down If you looked at the situation from afar, youd think Gengo was simply pausing to gather his own thoughts and prepare for another conversation. However, the reality was that if Gengo had continued the conversation with its current atmosphere, then Shikamarus anger would have continued to brim over until he was so incensed he would obstinately refuse to listen to anything. Gengo had deliberately created a lull in conversation to avoid that outcome. Creating a pause for both parties to breathe and calm down would effectively change the strained atmosphere between them. Even if Shikamaru had insisted on spitting out vitriol, with the absence of Gengos reply it wouldve been nothing more than empty howling that would release more anger than increase it. Gengo was pushing the conversation down the path that he wanted it to go. This man had a lot of practice with negotiating Finally, after a long pause, Gengos eyes returned to look at Shikamaru. Theres just one thing question I have for you, but would you be willing to give me an answer? What? Shikamaru regretted the word the moment he let it pass his mouth. But it was too late to take it back. Why are shinobi so oppressed and downtrodden? Oppressed? Shinobi? Shikamaru didnt understand what the man was getting at. His silence encouraged Gengo to continue speaking, reinforcing his question with more talk. The villages that shinobi live in are always, without exception, described as hidden villages. Why must shinobi stay hidden? In all the countries in this continent, how much land do shinobi really get to call their own? Youll find that its a very small portion. And why is that? Because there are others who rule the majority of this continent. The daimyous. Well, he wasnt wrong. Shinobi villages did have the title of a hidden village added to their name. The majority of the continent was indeed governed by Daimyous. So what? So the Daimyous governed the countries, so the shinobi stayed in villages that were called hidden villlages. That didnt make shinobi oppressed. Shikamaru held a job in the very backbone of the Shinobi Union, so he knew a little bit more about the state of the world than others. The Daimyous, and the citizens who lived within the countries that they ruled, they all co-existed alongside shinobi in a satisfactory, mutually beneficial relationship. Think about it, Shikamaru. Why are shinobi oppressed by the daimyous? When have shinobi ever been oppressed by the Daimyous? Its not just the daimyous. Were oppressed by every single person who isnt a shinobi. Gengos eyes looked like they were spitting flames as he looked at Shikamaru. I will ask you one more question. You said you were just going to ask one Im asking another. Gengo sharply cut him off. Shinobi hold a power different from all other humans in this world. Do you agree? Chakra and ninjutsu Well, you couldnt deny that they were abilities that clearly separated shinobi from normal people. Shikamaru silently nodded. Gengo seemed satisfied by that, and continued speaking. And the power that shinobi hold is one that far surpasses the limits of a humans abilities. Again, Shikamaru nodded. The Great War that took place two years ago had been a battle that would decide the fight of the whole world. If the shinobi alliance back then had been defeated, then neither Shikamaru nor Gengo would be here talking now. Whether it was Uchiha Madara, who had planned to drag every human on earth into a giant genjutsus dreams, or Naruto Uzumaki, who had taken all the tailed beasts into his body so he could end the battle, both were prime examples of living beings that simply couldnt be called human anymore. It was possible that with the developments of the last era, shinobi had broken away from the path of humanity all together. Why must shinobi who surpass the limits of human beings be forced to live in hidden villages? Why must we endure living that kind of life? Why must we be forced to work for our daily income as the daimyous errand boys? In the Great War two years ago, who was it that saved this world from destruction? It wasnt the daimyou. It wasnt the citizens. Gengos voice increased in power, pushing down on Shikamaru from every direction. Wasnt it we shinobi who saved this world? What was this power? It was making his heart thump erratically in his chest. Shikamaru felt something he hadnt felt at all until this moment: exaltation. Why did he feel like that? Maybe because Gengo had taken the same dangerous feelings that lurked in some repressed corner of Shikamarus heart, and clearly put them into words. He was right Two years ago, shinobi had saved the world. Countless shinobi fought and sacrificed their lives to protect this world, but just how many citizens actually know about that fact? The name of Uzumaki Naruto, someone adored all across the shinobi world for being the hero that ended the warC it isnt even known to a handful of citizens! Uchiha Madara, Uchiha Obito, Uchiha Sasuke, Hatake Kakashi, the Five Kage, the Akatsuki, all of them, isnt it a fact that nobody outside of the shinobi world ever talks about them? It was exactly as Gengo said. No matter how much shinobi put their lives on the line to protect the world, none of the citizens living within society would ever hear about it. This era of peace was built upon piles of shinobi corpses, and yet the daimyou come and sit atop it without a moment of hesitation, comfortably continuing to rule the citizens without a single thought for us. Its for the sakes of those bastards that we shinobi went out into the battlefield at the time of the Great War. We became living barriers for the daimyou and citizens. And yet, in return? Nothing had changed. Well, Shikamaru thought that wasnt an unreasonable outcome. The antagonists against the shinobi alliance during the war, Uchiha Madara and Ootsutsuki Kaguya, had intended to pull all the people in the continent into a genjutsu so they could use their chakra as a living battery. The result had been that in the height of that fierce battle, all the citizens and daimyou had fallen into a deep sleep. But still The fact remained that it wasnt as if no one knew what happened during the Great War. They simply didnt speak of it. Why are we shinobi who hold the greater power forced to live in hidden villages, constantly lurking in the shadows as we go about our daily lives? Gengo stood up from his throne. Is it really for the best? Gengo took one step down the stairs. Then another. He slowly descended, holding Shikamarus gaze as he kept speaking. Shikamaru. The next question is what I really want to ask you. Gengo reached the bottom of the stairs, walking forwards so he stood right in front of Shikamarus eyes. Wouldnt it be for the best if shinobi governed this world instead? Youre wrong. Shikamaru couldnt say those words. No, he couldnt answer the question at all. He didnt know what was right anymore. We are shinobi because we endure. No matter how great the powers you held were, you served the people unseen and from the shadows. That was what shinobi were defined by. However. Endless possibilities stemmed from the chakra and ninjutsu used by shinobi. If shinobi really took control from the daimyous the way Gengo said, and if they governed all the countries, then wouldnt the world make even more remarkable progress than it has up to now? What was really the best choice for the people? He couldnt give an answer. With the power of shinobi, I am slowly going to elevate this country. Gengo said. I am going to put a clean end to this this unrelenting era of war lords. With the power of shinobi, its possible! Killing the man called Gengowas it really for the best? Shikamaru wasnt so sure anymore. Volume 2 - CH 13 - He couldnt refute what Gengo had said Shikamaru was bewildered by the shaken state of his own heart. He had come all the way here to kill Gengo. Hed firmly believed that he was a hindrance to the road to peace for shinobi. It was because he believed that that Shikamaru started out on this path without telling a single one of his comrades the truth. But now that Gengo was standing in front of his eyes, now that he was listening to what he was saying, Shikamaru wasnt sure if his way of thinking was really the right one. Have you ever thought about why wars keep endlessly repeating in this world? Gengo asked. The truth was that Shikamaru had never once thought about it. From the moment this continent had come into existence, there had been a great number of countries who went kept repeating the same skirmishes with each other, again and again, going through their own ups and downs as they did. And in the space between the relationships of those countries, shinobi existed and offered their skill sets for a price, thus gaining provision. That was just the way things had always been, so the word war didnt even seem to apply. Shikamaru had always been concerned with the affairs of the world of shinobi alone. Unlike Gengo, he had never considered the rest of the world. Shikamarus thoughts had always been about how to secure the future of shinobi. How to preserve the reconciled bonds between villages. How effective the union would be for that. How to make Naruto hokage. How to build a strong foundation for his generation. Shikamarus concerns seemed impossibly small in the face of what Gengo was considering. His focus wasnt the world of shinobi, but the whole earth. Dont you think the reason all the fighting hasnt stopped is because the daimyou are governing everything, instead of shinobi? Because these people who hold neither chakra nor jutsu keep meeting together, every time they pass by each other, these wars never end. Because they have no extraordinary people among them, there is no country which is stronger than all the others, and thus no one to keep them in check. So the countries keep fighting and reconciling, again and again, and this world of war continues. I am telling you about a method that will put an end to all that. With the power of shinobi, I and my Enlightened Ones will achieve what no one else has before: the unification of the continent. Unification of the continent Shikamaru murmured. Gengo gave a satisfied nod at him echoing the words. From the start, this world has always been about survival of the fittest. This way of life doesnt only extend to beasts. Even the beasts called humans havent been able to rid themselves of it. In that case, isnt it only fitting that the holders of true strength, shinobi, reign as the strongest, at the top of this hierarchy? The revolution Im speaking of carrying out is exactly that: to turn this atypical world into the best that it can be. Thinking that shinobi are the ones who should be controlling the world might not be wrong. Lord Shikamaru. Rous voice came from behind him. Shikamaru turned his head and looked over his shoulder at the man. Is it not exactly as Lord Gengo has said? Rou asked. Why must shinobi always be used by the daimyou? I am a member of Anbu. I have seen the foul side of the daimyous many, many times. They think of us shinobi as nothing more than convenient tools. My best friend was a man used as a tool in the wars between the Land of Fire and the Land of Wind. The moment both countries declared a ceasefire, he was gotten rid of. A single tear overflowed from Rous wet eyes. A hindrance. I think so too, yknow. This time, the subdued whisper came from Sokus mouth. As Shikamaru turned to look at her, he could see dark purple bruises colouring her young face. Even though she was a child, Gengo had mercilessly given his subordinates the order to torture her along with Rou. I think that what Gengos saying is right, too, yknow. Hinoko Its not just the daimyou, its those people living in the countries they govern, yknow. Soku didnt even care that Shikamaru had called her by her real name, continuing to speak with a heated anger. No matter how nice you are to normal people, the minute that they hear that youre a shinobi, they start watching you from the corner of their eyes. The look in those eyeshorrifiedsuspiciousmarking us as different. Why do we have to spill our blood, sweat and tears for bastards like that? I- I dont understand why, yknow! Even though Gengo was the one to order all those bruises onto her skin, Soku was looking up at the man with admiration, as if shed forgotten that fact completely. You see? Even your comrades are agreeing with me. What I want to do is the most meaningful action for all shinobi. Shikamaru, come with me. Together, couldnt we stop this age of war? Gengo held out his hand. If Shikamaru took hold of that hand, he wouldnt be able to go back home. No, wasnt it strange to think of going back? If Gengo really united all the countries, that included the world of shinobi. If that happened, then surely Naruto, Chouji, Ino, everyone, he would be able to meet them all again. No, in fact he could extend an invitation to them himself, and they could all come together to build the world of shinobi. Shikamaru. Become my right hand man. Gengos words pressed against Shikamarus spine. I Shikamaru wanted to take that hand. But There was also a part of Shikamaru that was desperately trying to stop himself from doing so. Come now, Gengo prodded. W- wh Something was firmly clogging up Shikamarus throat. Shikamaru struggled to push his voice past the foreign, thorny lump, and finally spat out the words: Why do I have to become the subordinate of someone like you? Oh? To think youve listened to my words up to this point, and still refuse to understand. You seem to be a very stubborn one as well. Something wasnt right. Somewhere deep in Shikamarus heart, there was still something inside him that didnt believe Gengo. That part of him said that it wasnt a good idea to submit to this man. There were no well-reasoned words or explanations. Just some part of him that couldnt stomach this. A bad feeling. Every other part of him was utterly convinced that Gengo had the right idea. Very well then, well do this Gengo nodded at the guards beside Shikamaru, and then turned to walk back to where the stairs began. The Enlightened Ones that had been guarding Shikamaru up until now undid the manacles that had been holding his hands behind his back. The sudden disappearance of the constraints that had been forcing him into a crouch made his body go limp with relief. Shikamaru barely stopped himself from crashing to the floor, somehow holding himself up with his right arm. He looked up at Gengo. Gengo was standing at the bottom of the stairs, just several metres away. He had thrown out both of his arms, holding out his chest. If you truly cant trust me, then just kill me here. K-kill you? Shikamarus voice was shaking. Theres no reason why you shouldnt be able to strangle me to death with that shadow manipulating jutsu of yours. Go on. Lets see you kill me. Why was he so confident as he told Shikamaru to kill him? The uneasy feeling in Shikamarus gut was slowly growing. There was something he was missing, somewhere, he wasnt thinking properly, there was something he overlooked Shikamaru placed a shaky hand onto the floor. Sunshine was shining through a large window at the side of the hall. The brightly glowing light fell easily on Shikamarus arm and torso, clearly making a shadow. The pitch black shadow began to quiver slightly. The trembling was slowly increasing, his shadow rippling, and then shaking violently as it tried to shake off its original form. Go Shikamaru ordered his shadow in a weak voice. The rippling shadow changed into a long, dark tendril that headed in a straight line for Gengo. Now, dont stop, Shikamaru! Gengos called out, his eyes burning brightly. He sounded like he was enjoying this. His voice brimming with confidence pressed down on Shikamaru from all sides. His shadow Stopped. It stopped right at the edge of Gengos toes. No matter how much Shikamaru willed it, it wouldnt go any further. Whats wrong? Gengo asked. Why arent you using your shadow? Why wasnt his shadow moving? Something was strange, something was off, something was wrong Think, think, think, think Think, Shikamaru! What arent you noticing? His head felt like it was going to burst into flames. Rou and Soku The feeling in his gut was because of them. Rou and Soku. They were both dedicated members of Anbu that specialised in remaining loyal even under duress so why were they both accepting Gengos words so quickly and so easily? After undergoing such severe torture under his orders, why werent there any feelings of hostility? For their feelings to change to adoration so quickly and easilyC it wasnt possible. There had to be a trick. A trick. One word clearly rose to the forefront of Shikamarus mind. Genjutsu It was a ninjutsu that manipulated your thoughts and plunged you into delusions. Rou and Soku looked like they were under a genjutsu. In that case, then was Shikamaru under the genjutsu too? That was probably the case. But, genjutsu was a doujutsu, a technique rooted in the eyes. A prime example of that was Konohas Uchiha clan, and their special sharingan eyes, a bloodline limit that let them plunge their opponents into a genjutsu. The incident at the plaza. At that time, something had weakened Rous jutsu and exposed their presence to Gengo. That something couldnt have possibly been doujutsu, because until Gengo spoke out and called them mice, neither of the men had looked Gengo in the eye. Eye contact with your opponent was an absolute requirement for doujutsu. There had been no way he could make eye contact with them at that time. Then, what was casting the genjutsu on Shikamaru and the others? He couldnt think. His thoughts were sluggish. When you were caught in a genjutsu, you always needed someone else to help you escape it. But both his comrades were already well under Gengos grasp. Shikamaru felt like he was walking through a thick and murky swamp, slowly sinking in deeper and deeper. In the end, he knew his head was going to go down under as well. Soon, he was going to fall completely under Gengos control. I really cant stand this Shikamarus thoughts helplessly fell out of his mouth. Gengo was looking at him with victorious eyes. Even now, Shikamarus shadow quivered mere inches away from the mans feet. Wouldnt you like to just give in now? His voice was gentle and soothing. Shikamaru could feel his whole body melting against the warmth of it. The remaining slivers of his conscious were slipping away The true nature of Gengos genjutsu A vague answer had been materialising in the depths of Shikamarus mind, but before it could manifest clearly, he erased it of his own free will. He didnt care anymore. Volume 2 - CH 14 - Come now, Shikamaru. Gengo held out his hand. As long as Shikamaru grabbed hold of that hand, then hed be comfortable. He wouldnt have to think about troublesome things anymore. Shinobi would govern the worldthat was how things were supposed to be, after all. As long as he took that hand,everything would be easy again. He wouldnt have to be confused anymore Lets go together. Gengos voice felt like it was pressing down on Shikamarus spine. Shikamaru slowly lifted his right hand, reaching out to the wide palm offered and waiting to engulf him. Their fingertips were just about to brush- But there was something noisy happening behind him The same moment he thought that, Shikamarus body was suddenly being lifted up into mid-air, soaring up and towards the ceiling. His birds eye view let him see Gengo where hed left him, bracing himself against a staggeringly great wind. Even the Enlightened Ones at the top of the stairs were struggling against it. However, the only one rising into the air was Shikamaru. He rose so high, he ended up crashing into the ceiling. For a moment, his whole body felt sore from the impact, and then the next thing Shikamaru knew the wind had stopped, and he was falling back down. Gah! Although hed attained a relatively safe landing, Shikamarus back hit the ground so hard that his breath caught in his throat. Hed been flung away from Gengo, all the way to the other side of the room. SHIKAMARU! Someone called his name in an angry bellow that echoed across the hall. A womans voice A very familiar voice. What are you doing in a place like this? Shikamaru leaned up to look towards the voices owner. A woman was standing at the halls entrance, her blonde hair tied into two bunches on each side, and a sharp look in her eyes. She held a giant tessen in both her hands, no doubt the source of the wind that had blown Shikamaru up into the air. Temari.. What are you spacing out for?! She demanded, Changing yourself to be the way other people tell you to be, thats not like you, is it?! Youre the man that I marked out from all the rest! Get a hold of yourself, you idiot! That guys troublesome lecture should be nothing more than hot air to you! Am I wrong? Say something! Shikamaru! Gengos heavy voice was nothing compared to the piercing roar that was resounding in Shikamarus ears. His eyes were prickling. Ah The fog that had been clouding Shikamarus mind vanished without a trace. All the foreign ideas that had been crammed into his heart were leaking away, spilling out of his chest. It was an incredibly relieving feeling. Shikamaru took in a deep breath, and then slowly let it out. He couldnt help but break into a smile. One scolding had let him escape the genjutsu Whats with you, suddenly showing up and saying all those things? He said to Temari, getting up to his feet and rubbing a hand behind his neck. Hey, I came to save you, so you better thank me instead of grumbling. Temari said, folding up her fan and staking it into the ground. She leaned against it, her chest puffed out in pride. Several shinobi were lined up in ranks behind her. They all had the mark of Sunagakure carved into their hitai-ate. I couldnt just let you die, after all. She grinned at him. Temaris smile was like the blazing desert sun. It cleared up the darkness in Shikamarus heart. Inside his mind, he recalled one phrase in particular that Temari had just used. that guys troublesome lecture Troublesomehuh. Shikamaru turned to look at the villain in question. Gengo was turning to give signals to the Enlightened Ones who had stiffened in the face of danger at the top of the stairs. As soon as they saw his signal, the EOs started spilling down the stairs. All the Sunagakure shinobi moved to stand between the enemy and Shikamaru. Even though the EOS feet had refused to move from the floor in the face of the sudden enemy attack, one signal from Gengo had them heading out to face the enemy. That was the kind of capable man that ruled this castle and country. The sounds of metal clashing against metal rang out as the battle began. Strangely enough, Shikamaru felt incredibly calm. He took one composed step forwards. Some way ahead of him, he could see Gengos squaring his shoulders and raising his guard. Calmly, quietly, Shikamaru kept walking. When he passed Rou and Soku, Shikamaru briefly put his hands on their shoulders. Its alright now. He said to them, and walked on. When there was one step between him and Gengo, Shikamaru came to a stop. He levelled his gaze at the man. At that momentShikamaru yawned. Ahhhhh It was such a big yawn, he could feel his eyes tearing up, and his vision blurring. Oi. Gengo was pointing at something on Shikamarus face. Hm? Shikamaru put up a hand to feel around his mouth, and felt something wet leaking out of his left nostril. Blood. Without even noticing it, hed gotten a nosebleed. That Temari He murmured. He mustve hit his nose when her wind had blown him all the way up to the ceiling. Sorry about that. Shikamaru said to Gengo, rolling his neck. Now, do you have anything to say? I see your reinforcements have been called in, but- Huh? Shikamaru cut off Gengos words with a loud, surprised voice. Reinforcements? Where? Gengo stared at him with wide eyes. Shikamaru realised how crazy his words must have sounded. Oh, youre talking about the people behind me. He said. Nah, youve got it wrong. Theyre not reinforcements. Then what would you call them? I dunno. They just came here of their own accord, so Gengo was staring at Shikamaru with more and more bewilderment. He seemed stunned at the sudden change in Shikamarus behaviour. Whatever you call them. Gengo said. While we may have received a surprise attack from these opponents, my country will not so much as waver- Pff. Shikamaru laughed without thinking. A vein was starting to throb in Gengos forehead. Wont waver? Shikamaru asked, amused. Are you sure? When your castle is in a state like this? Dont underestimate my followers. Gengo said. They wont be defeated by shinobi of this level. Yeah, sure, Ill look forward to seeing that. Now, listen, Shikamaru- Nope, I dont think I will. Shikamaru bluntly said, holding out a palm. I know that if I blankly listen to your words, Ill end up falling under your genjutsu. Gengos right eyebrow gave a very faint twitch. Thanks to that woman, Ive finally woken up. Shikamaru said. Im not going to go under a second time. Na?veYoure na?ve, Shikamaru. You fill your voice up with chakra while making those long speeches of yours, and plunge your opponent into a genjutsu as they listen to it, right? Its a really fitting jutsu for a revolution-crazed guy like you. Shikamaru said. I thought about it long and hard. The reason my shadow weakened that day at the plaza was because I was already being affected by your speechs genjutsu, huh? Genjutsu? Foolish talk. My speeches are stimulating, inspiring. Every word Ive told you up to now was sincere. And every word of it was true. Shinobi are the ones who should be governing this world. That is the grave reality. You are the one who is na?ve, for not understanding that fact. Gengos words were so packed with chakra that they were making Shikamarus earlobes tremble, but he didnt so much as clamp his hands over his ears to try and defend himself. He was completely unconcerned. Shikamarus heart that had been as disruptive as a stormy sea, was now strangely calm. No matter what happened, he wasnt afraid anymore. No, it was more like Somehow, everythings just really troublesome, huh? Shikamaru let out another yawn. I wonder why peoples eyes tear up when the yawn? Gengo didnt answer. He was so thrown off, he couldnt say another word. Shikamaru hadnt really intended to confuse him into silence. He wasnt carrying out a strategy. He was just being his true self. Temaris scolding came to mind That guys troublesome lecture should be nothing more than hot air to you! She was right. Shikamaru had never been someone who thought about the fate of the whole world. He was just a guy who found everything troublesome, and wanted an average life. Thinking about how his actions could change the world, wasnt that incredibly troublesome? He didnt have to burden himself with such thoughts. He didnt care. Gengo could go ahead and change the world however he liked. CNo, wait a second. If Gengo did as he liked, then Naruto and everyone else, what would happen to them? What would happen to Temari whod come here to save him? At the end of the day, Shikamaru said, It turns out that I cant let you do as you please, or itll become a problem later on. Wh-where did your ambition go? Gengo asked. You were thinking about changing the world, Shikamaru! Open your eyes! Whatre you babbling about? Shikamaru asked. Its only now that Ive finally woken up. Shikamaru took one more step towards Gengo, a smile pulling at his mouth. This is my original self. The time had come for Shikamaru to fight. Volume 2 - CH 15 - Shikamaru - A fierce battle was taking place around Shikamaru. Amidst the sound of clashing blades and roaring battle cries,he levelled his gaze at Gengo. Then are you saying you dont care about the oppression of shinobi?! Gengo shrieked, a vein throbbing in his temple. The solemn, all-knowing man from mere moments ago was nowhere to be seen. Was it because Shikamaru had broken out of the genjutsu? No, that couldnt be the reason. Gengo was so frantic, there wasnt a single atom of calm left in his body. Whats made you lose your presence of mind? Shikamaru asked. Wh-what? Well, you look so desperate its pathetic. Who is Gengos faded into frenzied muttering. His voice came out as a pained groan through grit teeth. Listen, we shinobi carry inhuman powers, it is fate that we are feared by normal people. Fear turns into discrimination which gives birth to oppression. At this rate, all of shinobi will slowly see more and more suffering. You know, I Shikamaru tiled his head to the left, cracking his neck. He kept his eyes on Gengo. I think itd be good if the concept of shinobi just ceased to exist. Wh- whatre you saying?! Whats with that reaction? Hadnt you already given up being a shinobi? Again, Gengo started muttering indecipherably to himself. He looked so ridiculous that the corner of Shikamarus mouth twitched into a smile. Shinobi have finally gathered together as one alliance. Shikamaru continued.. As long as the union carries on like this, then soon, all the fighting will settle down too. D-dont talk as if its so simple You never know until you try. Gengos hand had moved behind his back, as if he was grasping something A kunai. Shikamaru had been relaxed till this moment, but now he tensed up. Hed lost all his weapons when confined in Gengos jail. He didnt have anything to defend himself with- Shikamaru! Temari called out. He turned in the direction of her voice. He saw something flying through the air and heading his way. As soon as it came within his arms reach, Shikamaru reached out and caught it with his right hand. Kunai He heard the sound of Temari laughing, happy hed caught it. This all happened in the time it took him to blink. When Shikamaru had turned around from catching the kunai to face his opponent, Gengo was already leaping towards him. Shikamaru lunged as well. Their two kunai clashed in mid-air, sparks flying from the impact. Both was straining their wrist and trying to overcome the other. Isnt it because theres fighting in the world that people like us become shinobi? Shikamaru commented. You impudent youngster Gengos voice had turned violent. In the same instant, both opponents jumped back to put some space between them. They landed at a distance similar to how theyd started, keeping a firm hold on their kunai and a ready stance in their bodies, wearily glaring at each other. Shikamarus feet kicked against the ground as he moved to lunge at his opponent again. He swung his kunai with bloodthirsty intent towards Gengos head. But, their intent was the same. Gengos kunai was flying towards his face as well. Shikamaru jerked his head out of the way, but he still felt the kunai cut a clear straight line across his cheek, saw his blood spraying out in a burst of crimson. His eyes registered a bloody cut across Gengos cheek as well. Shikamarus left arm shot out, and grabbed Gengos right wrist Cthe one tht carried his kunai- with an iron grip. It wouldve been a better situation if Gengo hadnt done the same. The two were locked, both using their weapon-less hand to hold onto the others weapon-ready wrist. The first step to ending that fightingis the Shinobi Union. Shikamaru grit out. Shinobi have to unite first. Then our ring of bonds will expand to wrap around the Daimyou and the citizens as well. As long as our worlds unite, then people wont need to become shinobi anymore. Even if its not in my lifetime, then in my childs lifetime, or in my grandchilds lifetimeone day, shinobi will cease to exist. This world isnt easy enough for ideals to be put into practice. Gengo said. Arent your plans an ideal too? The corners of Gengos mouth lifted in a strange, mechanical curve upwards. The look on his face was too wicked to be called a smile. Im telling you ahead of time, Shikmaru said. You wont be able to put me in a genjutsu. Well, listen either way, Shikamaru. Gengo said, Things called ideals are only of value if the possibility of carrying them out in reality is high. The ideal you are speaking of is as impossible as catching clouds. The difference between your ideal and mine is like the distance between heaven and earth. Stupid, arent you? Shikamaru noted. The true fools are those who dont recognise their own stupidity. Yeah, and thats why Im calling you stupid. A barely repressed smile quivered at the corners of Gengos mouth. Suddenly, Gengo moved his left arm, viciously twisting Shikamarus right wrist around the joint. His wrist ached with a grinding pain. Shikamaru was caught in the wrist lock, and his grip on Gengos armed hand weakened. Gengo angled his kunai towards Shikamarus neck, dragging it closer and closer. He didnt have enough time to avoid it. Shikamaru twisted his body in the same direction Gengo was twisting his wrist, and kicked off the ground with his feet. Gengos armed right arm twisted counterclockwise with his jump, and he managed to avoid the kunai. In midair, Shikamaru brought down his leg to give a vicious kick to the crown of Gengos head. Gengos hand let go of Shikamarus wrist so he could cover his head with his arms. Shikamaru brought down another fierce kick onto his arm this time, and heard a cracking sound from the bone inside. It didnt end there. Shikamaru landed on the ground and pressed his advantage, swinging his other leg around and kicking Gengo squarely in the side. Gengo staggered back one step. Shikamaru still didnt stop. He brought out his left leg and in one smooth kick, swept Gengos feet from under him. Uchiha Sasukes Shishirendan, and the Narutos Uzumaki Naruto Rendan. Shikmrus attack had been imitating those moves. He thought he did a pretty good job, if he did say so himself Gengo had fallen down onto the ground. Shikamaru was on him in seconds, pinning him down as he held a kunai against his throat. If Gengo moved even the slightest bit, then Shikamaru intended to kill him without hesitation. Wh-why arent my words affecting your mind? Gengo choked out. Hey now, you know that Genjutsu only works if theres a weak spot in someones heart. Ever since that woman appeared, Gengo spluttered, Your sudden change of behaviour has shown your heart to be full of weak spots, hasnt it?! Youre really an idiot, huh Shikamaru sighed, before smiling. My heart is full of weak spots. Notheres nothing but weak spots. Its precisely because I have all those weak spots, that there isnt one for you to sneak in through. A close-minded person like you probably wont understand what I mean, though. S-such a thingcant be Youll have to accept it, with the current situation like this. Your words just dont affect me anymore. Cold sweat was breaking out across Gengos forehead. Honestly, I dont want to do this sort of stuff. Shikamaru said, talking to himself more than Gengo. I wouldve liked to just live a normal life. But There had always been feelings of regret about his life smouldering in some corner of Shikamarus heart But in this moment, they cleanly disappeared. Hed made his decision. It turns out that Im not someone who can live that sort of life. People need me, so I have no choice but to do these things. Shikamaru had fallen into his current state because throughout the years, that feeling of having no choice had kept growing larger and larger. Things had started to go wrong inside his heart. Hed held onto the attitude of blaming others for how he was living his life, and become half-hearted and unsatisfied with everything. Hed made a serious mistake. Because the one to start packing away his dreamwas no one other than Shikamaru himself. That dream of his, to live a normal life, it wasnt going to be realised. But he was alright with that. After all, he had found a new dream Im going to spend my life building a world so that people can live their lives. So the people who say they only want to live comfortably can do so to the fullest possible extent. Shikamaru said. Ill stop the wars, and Ill unite the countries. And Ill make a place in the world for those ordinary people who have no dreams other than living a simple, normal life. An normal guy was going to protect the happiness that people found in living a normal life. It was a dream that suited him, and Shikamaru was satisfied with it. For the sake of realising his dream, he would make Naruto Hokage, and he would become Mirais teacher, and if the result of working for his dream was that he became a good shinobi that wouldnt embarrass his dad or Asuma, then hed be happy with that. Up until now, Shikamaru had had his priorities back to front. Hed felt pressured from the outside world, and set limits for himself, living his life with the constant thought to not become an embarrassment. That was why hed worked himself so hard, worn himself out thin. But the world wasnt supposed to tell you what your dream should be. Your own dream was supposed to reach out and connect to the world. Ive finally gotten rid of my doubts. Said Shikamaru. And so what if you did? A soft voice coming from behind him asked. Killing intent. Shikamaru leapt off Gengo, and barely missed the tigers claw that had swung for his head. An ink tiger I wont let you kill Gengo-sama for such a lazy dream. Sai said, standing in front of Shikamaru with paintbrush and scroll in hand. Sai Gengo-sama! Quickly, impose your will onto those foolish Sunagakure shinobi! Very well. Gengo nodded, quickly running up the stairs and to the throne on top. He threw up both his hands. Listen, everyone! He was readying another one of his chakra-laden speeches. As if Id let you! Shikamaru made to run for the stairs, but Sai leapt in his way. I will not allow you to interfere with Gengo-samas cause! Sais paintbrush moved across his scroll with lightning speed, and another ink tiger materialised. Go! The new tiger as well as the one that had swiped for Shikamarus head a while ago, they both lunged at him in attack. Gengo was speaking in a loud voice on the platform. If Shikamaru didnt stop him, then he would plunge all Sunagakures shinobi into a genjutsu and freeze them in place. Suddenly, Shikamaru had an idea. Listen, Temari! Although he wasnt sure of her exact location in the battlefield, he called out for her anyway. That guy plunges people into genjutsu with his words! Drown out his voice with your wind! Understood! Temaris fierce reply sounded from surprisingly nearby. The next moment, gale after vicious gale bloomed into existence, violent wind currents flying freely around the hall. Gengos words were swallowed up completely by Temaris violent wind. In the midst of dodging the attacks from Sais ink tigers, Shikamaru glanced at the throne on the top of the stairs. Gengo had obviously realised his words would have no effect if they went unheard, and was now trying to escape. Shit Shikamaru tried to head up the stairs, but Sais ink tiger leapt in his way. I absolutely cannot let you go pass. Sai, enough already! Wake up! The ones who should wake up are you and the others. It was no use. Sai was completely stuck in the clutches of Gengos genjutsu. Suddenly, one of the many strong gales that had been causing chaos around the room swept in from behind Shikamaru, and Sais ink tigers dematerialised into mists of black ink. Temari had leapt in between Shikamaru and Sai. Leave this to me, and follow that bastard! She ordered. Temari.. You can thank me later, hurry and go! Got it. Shikamaru said, and began to run up the stairs. Stop right there, Shikamaru! Sai yelled. Oh no you dont. Temari said, and opened her war fan. Your opponent is me. Shikamarus eyes lingered on them for just one moment, and then he turned to focus on running up the stairs. Volume 2 - CH 16 - For a split second in time, Temari allowed herself to feel relieved. Shed reached Shikamaru in time. After that conversation with Gaara, Temari had headed to Konoha and questioned Naruto. The blonde ninja didnt have any answers for her. But, just like Temari, Naruto had been havinga weird feeling that something about Shikamaru just wasnt right lately. Ino and Chouji were consulted as well, and when those vague feelings of wrongness strengthened into certainty, Naruto had brought Temari with him to go and press Kakashi for answers. Narutos bloodcurdlingly blunt speeches bothered Kakashi on one side, while Temari requested she bring in reinforcements from Suna on the other. And, eventually, he caved in. Under the promise that they werent to aggravate the situation, Sunagakures shinobi were given the consent to move out. Temari had made prior arrangements with her village so that her back-up could start heading out immediately if necessary. As soon as she got Kakashis consent, Temari sent out a message to her village, and then started running towards the Country of Silence. En route, she met up with the group of Sunagakure shinobi that Gaara was leading. The moment they entered the country, they started picking out handy people for questioning. At this point, it had already been 10 days since Shikamaru had set out for the Country of Silence. Temari was losing her presence of mind in her hurry, and her interrogations turned more severe. Soon enough, one man who called himself an Enlightened One blurted out that the shinobi from Konohagakure had been taken prisoner inside the countrys castle. As soon as she knew that, the rest was easy. They infiltrated the castle with a sand shield made by Gaara. Temari had led her small armada down the corridors, taking out guards before they could call out an alarm, and slowly, stealthily making their way to the great hall. It had been good timing, too, right when Shikamaru was almost about to give his allegiance to Gengo. The moment that Temari saw Shikamaru looking like he was being affected by Gengos talk of shinobi ruling the world, she had lost all self-control. Shikamaru was not the kind of man who would be swayed by that sort of crap! When Temari summoned her win to blow off the doors to that hall and lunge inside, her body wasnt being commanded by her. She was fuelled by pure, unadulterated fury. Hearing it was a genjutsu had made her feel relieved After waking up, Shikamaru had turned back into the man she knew. Hed faced on Gengo with a bloody nose and his usual lazy eyes, and just the sight of him had been enough to make Temari feel like everything up to now had been worth it. You shouldnt be so absentminded right now. It was the Konoha shinobi who said that, with a mechanical smile on his face. The paintbrush clutched in his hand had been giving life to countless tigers and wolves for a while now. At this moment, hed summoned a wickedly snarling white tiger. Out of all the ink animals hed summoned, this one looked the most vicious. If she remembered right, the guys name was Sai Naruto and Sakuras teammate. Absentminded? Im not the one repeating the same attack over and over again. Temari muttered under her breath, and swung her tessen, her whole body twisting into the movement. Her tessens wind transformed into a sickle-wielding weasel: Kamatari. He twisted and spung his body along with the winds current, lunging towards the tiger and slashing at its throat with his sickle. Sais tiger melted back into lifeless ink, collapsing in on itself into the ground. Its admirable how you lack even the slightest bit of hesitation. Sai commented. Temari turned to look at where his voice had come from. Gone! When had he disappeared, and where to? She hadnt even had the time to follow his movements with her eyes A shinobi who can see through the Ink Body Flicker Jutsudoes not exist. Sai had teleported right behind her. He was definitely going to go in for a stab. She wasnt going to be able to turn around in time. Left or right? Oh, screw it! Shed have to make a gamble. Silently hoping a blade wouldnt follow, Temari shifted her body towards the right. A tigers claw swung in her direction, grazing her left eyebrow. Too na?ve. Sais voice was cold enough for chills to go up a persons spine. When had he teleported in front of her? Dammit! Temari swung her tessen alongside her body as a make-due shield. Her fan had been custom made so that its weaving was strong enough to deflect iron blades. She was completely protected against weapons such as kunai. But Guh! Temari collapsed where she had stood, a sharp pain piercing through her abdomen. The manipulation of chakraIts my specialty. Sai said, in a blank, innocent voice. The kunai he was holding had pierced straight through Temaris war fan and into her stomach. There was something faintly coiling around the weapon, like mist. Chakra. Hed wrapped the kunai in chakra so thick you could actually see it. The blades strength and sharpness mustve increased by ten folds. No matter how hard you fight, none of you are a match for Gengo-sama. Sai said. At the end of the day, we enlightened ones will end up controlling the world. Is thatreally what you want? Yes. Sai let a smile break across his face. He didnt look like someone under a genjutsu. Unshakable faith in Gengo was written all over Sais face. But Well then Temari said with difficulty. Whyre you crying? The tear that had leaked out of Sais right eye hadnt escaped Temaris notice. In the depths of his heart, he was at conflict. I am not crying. Sai grit out, and his grip tightened on the kunai, preparing for one final lunge. Temari held her breath. GET A HOLD OF YOURSELF AND WAKE UUUUUUUUUUUUUUPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP! Suddenly, Sai was knocked off his feet by a barrelling kunoichi. He was thrown out of Temaris field of vision entirely, the kunai hed stabbed her with clattering to the floor. Are you okay? The kunoichi asked as she supported Temaris collapsed form. SaSakura? Hold on, dont talk right now. Sakura said, Ill be sealing up the wound in your stomach. Chakra surrounded the kunoichis hand as she gentle pressed against the opening of Temaris wound. Warm waves of chakra gently enwrapped her stomach. WaitSai? Its alright, our comrades are handling it. Eh? Temari shifted to look in the direction Sai had been sent flying. Someone was pinning Sai down to where hes been thrown by Sakura. Giant No mistake. That giant man was definitely Shikamarus best friend. Chouji! A long-hired kunoichi yelled from behind him. You keep restraining him like that! Shikamaru was in danger, but the shinobi of Konoha didnt mobilise to help him. Sakura imitated a citizens comment as she healed Temaris stomach. Itd be really irritating if the case turned out like that, so There were two shinobi standing behind Sakura, both covered in wounds. One was a middle aged man with a fearsome face. The other was a girl many years younger than Temari. Temari gritted her teeth against the pain of her wound, and turned to speak to Sakura again. Hes undera genjutsu Its okay, Sakura assured her, We already heard from these two. The two shinobi standing behind her nodded in affirmation of her words. Alright! Everythings prepared! The long-haired kunoichi yelled at Chouji, holding out her palms. Sai was struggling furiously under Choujis giant body, his face full of bloodlust. He was snarling through grit teeth, light shining on his canines. Ninja art C Shintenshin no Jutsu! The long-haired kunoichi yelled. As long as that jutsu of Inos works, it should be fine. Sakura murmured. Chouji released Sai, backing away. Sai got to his feet. It was one instant. As if struck by lightning, a shudder went through Sais body, and he stopped moving. Across him in perfect symmetry, Inos body had stiffened as well. Ahh, there we go. Its all good now. Sakura slowly removed her hand. The pain in Temaris stomach had completely disappeared. * Ino was diving inside darkness. Deeper and deeper still. She still hadnt found Sai. No matter how much she dived and dived, all that surrounded Ino was a deep, inky blackness. This was Sai, after all. He wasnt fully aware of who his true self was on a daily basis. He wasnt going to be found easily. But she was going to save him no matter what Because if Ino couldnt save Sai, then her coming here would be meaningless. She desperately continued floundering through the layers of Sais heart. The shintenshin no jutsu could make you move someone elses body according to your own will, and the method to it was exerting your influence from the insides of those peoples hearts. During the chuunin exams, Ino had clearly realised this when she and Sakura had fought for control of the latters heart. Back in Konoha, she had read Sais letter, seen his handwriting turned messy and chaotic with a grief she couldnt hope to grasp. In that moment, Ino had felt Sais suffering so keenly that it hurt. At that moment, Ino hadnt yet known about Gengo or the genjutsu or anything else, but she had clearly thought to herself that she had to go. Of course, she wanted to save Shikamaru as well, but the trigger for Ino to start moving was Sais distressed letter. Sai, who was constantly worried about the blankness of his own heart, was suffering more than anyone else under Gengos genjutsu. There was no one who could save Sai from that other than Ino. And that was why she was determined to keep diving, no matter how deep she had to go. When you dived too deep into other peoples hearts, the first thing that would happen was your own existence starting to blur at the edges. The last thing that would happen was your consciousness disappearing completely in those depths. Once that happened, there was no turning back. There was a reason Ino was taking such a big risk to save Sai. She wanted to talk to him more. Sai who always gave such lonely smiles, she wanted to get to know him more and more. There was no way she could leave him in a dark place like this. Soon, Ino started to feel some faint warmth coming from the darkness. A faint light Shed come across a large gathering of chakra. A mix of peoples chakra Naruto. Sakura. Yamato. Kakashi. All of Konohas shinobi were there. It was like a lone fire burning in the middle of a blizzard. Ino dived a little, eyes peering into the giant tangle, searching amidst everyones chakra. There he was Cocooned in the middle of everyones warmth was Sai. Sai! Ino desperately reached out for him. Over here! Sai looked up at the sound of her voice. Both his eyes were red and swollen from crying. Come on. Ino said. Lets get out of here together. Youre Ino reached out, her hand finally landing on Sais shoulder, firm and reassuring. Lets go, alright? She said. In that moment, Sai smiled. Ino had never seen him smile so naturally before. * Ino was breathing deeply and heavily, as if shed just broken through the surface of a very deep ocean. She took in great lungfuls of air, her body desperate for oxygen. The darkness had been left behind, and now the background was brimming with light. Sakura and Chouji were standing guard over them. Ino was sitting across the sleeping Sai. Howd it go, Ino? Although she heard Choujis question, Ino was too drained to answer. Sais head was close to Inos knee. Slowly, his eyes opened. Before she noticed who had reached out first, they had clasped their hands together. Sai. You Sai dazedly murmured, tightening his hold. You were You can stop worrying already. Tears had started leaking out of Inos eyes. Thank you, miss beautiful. Idiot The two gently smiled at each other. Volume 2 - CH 17 - Shikamaru was running up the long, long spiralling stairs. His eyes were fixed on the figure running in front of him: Gengo. All his Enlightened Ones were still fighting down in the hall, and the man they revered like a god was making an escape all on his own. The spiralling stairs had a strangely oppressive feel to them, with the walls of stone that were covering its sides. You kept running up and up and up, and soon enough you started feeling dizzy. How about you just end this and give up now? Shikamaru asked Gengos back. Not that he expected an answer. Some ways ahead of Gengo, there was an iron door. It was a misshapen and crude looking door, without any adornments or decorations. Gengo, running ahead, reached it first and pulled opened the heavy looking door without any hesitation. Shikamaru only caught a glimpse of darkness from within the room before Gengo disappeared inside. The door closed. Shikamaru put his hand against the closed door, and it creaked open beneath his touch. There had to be a mechanism of some sort. Shikamaru swung open the door. It had nothing to do with any plan or strategy. He simply had no choice but to go forward. What lay on the other side of that iron door was true darkness. There was only one presence in the silent blackness. One person. Suddenly, the door swung shut behind Shikamaru. Since Gengo was here in the room with him, it had to be someone else who closed it- that, or the door closing was a mechanism too, and this was a trick being orchestrated by him. So you came in by yourself without any hesitation. Please tell me it wasnt an act of valour. Gengos voice came through the dark.. You realise, you wont be able to see or capture me in this kind of darkness. Hey, the Nara clan have been manipulating our own shadows for generations. Shikamaru told him. The dark is what gives birth to shadow, right? In a way, you could say that the dark is its mother. For someone like me who lives side by side with their shadow, the darkness in this room isnt any different from my mothers embrace. Since the moment you entered here, you were already caught. Shikamaru was half lying. It was true that he was well-accustomed to the dark. But just because you were comfortable in the dark, that didnt mean you had night vision. Shikamaru was only slightly more sensitive to the strength of a presence in the darkness than other shinobi were. That was all. Amusing Gengo returned, his voice brimming with self-confidence. Youre really an interesting man. Its a shame I have to kill you here. Silence Shikamaru and Gengo had both gone quiet, each trying to concentrate their senses on pinpointing the exact location of the other. I was originally a shinobi from Kirigakure. It was Gengo who had broken the silence. He continued speaking. Do you know of a man called Momochi Zabuza? Shikamaru recognised the name. Back when they were genin, Naruto had frequently mentioned his name. Momochi Zabuza was a skilled ninja Narutos team had fought against in a mission. Gengo continued. When Zabuza started rousing a coup dtat in Kirigakure, his wish was to bring about my ideal world. A world governed by shinobi, huh A betrayer tipped the village off, and the coup was exposed. Zabuza became a missing-nin. At that time, my younger self had been among those who followed him into exile. But then Zabuza, who needed gold to realise his ideals, joined hands with a wealthy merchant, a sham of a mafia, and took on disgraceful mission requests. Zabuza said we were dirtying our hands for our ideals, for a just cause, but many turned their backs on him. I was among those who left his side. Almost ten years have passed since then. Ive finally obtained this country. And it is only now Gengos voice was shaking with emotion. It is only now that my ambitions are starting to be realised! And yet to have this happen because of you, you son of a bitch! Shikamarus ears registered the sound of something kicking at the ground. It sounded like Gengo was drawing something out of a metal holder, a blade or a kunai. He couldnt see with his eyes. He had to rely on his senses. But Shikamaru couldnt pick up much more information other than the fact that Gengo was heading towards him. Zabuza left the path! He was in too much of a hurry to realise his ideals, and dirtied his hands! But I am different! After a long road full of hardships, I finally mastered my jutsu! I created a whirlpool that stirs up passion in people, and took control of this country. And that whirlpool will only widen, engulfing the whole continent, every single nation! Gengo shouted. There was another noise beyond Gengos yelling. A carving sound, cutting through the emptiness Definitely a blade. And a very large one, at that. A scythe? No, thinner than that. Something like a halberd or a longsword. Gengos presence had gotten alarmingly close. Shikamaru could feel that blade cutting through the emptiness and heading towards his neck-! He lunged down to the floor, ducking the blow. Shikamaru felt a sharp gust of wind cut along the path of Gengos sword, cutting across the air above him. You dodged well. But dont think Ill let you go! Gengo yelled, and the gust of wind changed direction again. Shikamaru had rolled to a crouch, sitting with one knee up, and he could feel the long sword swinging somewhere above his head. He tried to picture Gengo in the darkness. He pictured the length of the sword based on the sound it made as it cut across thin air, mentally measuring its length from tip to handle. Behind the axis of that swing, there was Gengo. Shikamaru couldnt use his shadow in this deep darkness. It would be impossible to bind Gengo with his ninjutsu. He had nothing to use but his own body. Shikamaru was poor at taijutsu, and he didnt have any weapons left. He grumbled to himself that if things were going to turn out like this, it wouldve been better if hed taken some taijutsu lessons from Lee. Heh Shikamaru let out a single laugh, satisfied to see his usual way of complaining had returned to him. The swing of Gengos long sword brushed the top of Shikamarus ponytail. ! Using all his concentration, Shikamaru rolled towards the direction he calculated Gengo to be in. Long swords lost their advantage when you got in too close. If you wanted to disarm your opponent, than rather than running around, it was far more effective to get in close to their chest. If you ran away while trying to hold onto your life, then youd die. But if you faced the possibilities of death, then youd live It was the very basics of war strategy. Shikamaru heard Gengos longsword cut into the floor behind him. He had stopped rolling into a crouch, right in front of where he calculated Gengo to be, and now he pushed his legs to spring up, launching himself in a headbutt. Got you! Shikamaru grunted as he felt his head collide with Gengos body. Gengo let out a surprised yell and stumbled into a crouch. Shikamaru stepped on Gengos bent knee with his right foot for momentum, and kneed him in the face. Hed done well. Hed successfully been able to calculate right where Gengo would be, using only his sound and strength of presence as a guide to his movements. Gah- But, even though Gengo had received such a severe blow, he hadnt collapsed. Gengo had used all his strength to stop his upper body from falling to the ground, pulling himself forward. He had let go of his sword, and grabbed onto Shikamarus sides with hands. Shikamaru was viciously thrown back, flying through mid-air and then landing with a sharp pain piercing down his spine. By the time Shikamaru took stock of his pitch black surroundings, he sensed Gengos presence already getting back to his feet. There was a clattering sound, like iron being scraped against the stone floor. The sound was most likely Gengo picking up his sword again. All of Shikamarus limbs felt numb. He blinked several times, but couldnt move his body as quickly he wanted to. In Kirigakure, due to the tradition of the Seven Shinobi Swordsmen of the Mist, every single villager strives to master the techniques of the sword from their childhood onwards. Gengo said, swinging his longsword down. His target was Shikamaru, still lying dazed on the floor. Shikamaru only had one way to defend himself. And it was an absolutely ridiculous idea. It was a stunt Shikamaru would never have dreamed of trying to pull off. But he didnt have any other means of escaping the blow. Oh, screw it! Shikamaru groaned and raised both his arms. His palms slid out into thin air, waiting to try and catch the longswords blade as it swung down. Shikamaru felt cold steel slide between his palms. he had actually caught the blade. L-looks like I somehow pulled that off Shikamaru said to himself. Impossible, Gengo stammered, dumbfounded. Not that impossible, as it turned out. At the end of the day, Shikamarus palms had firmly caught Gengos sword between them. Well, Shikamaru commented, I guess you could call this the ninpou of Seriously Trying to Catch a Sword with Your Bare Hands. Is there no end to your mockery? Gengos voice was bristling with outrage. Gengos sword quivered between Shikamarus palms as Gengos increased his force, trying to force it down. At this rate, it was a question of muscle power. The limits of strength between Shikamaru, who was down on the floor with both his arms up, and Gengo, who was standing with a swordsmans perfect stance above him, were terribly different. Gengo had the advantage. The longswords blade was slowly being pushed down. I am going to kill you here, you son of a bitch. Gengo grit out, And then Im going to make those scum in the hall share my ideals. And I will continue on the path to my ambitions. Oi, oi, since when were you so foul mouthed? Shikamaru asked, Someone who doesnt even notice when their mask of politeness has slipped away, theres no way they could possibly rule the world, now is there? Look at the situation youre in and watch what youre saying, you ignorant bastard. Youre a fool who couldnt hope to comprehend the potential of others. Now, I wonder, Shikamaru mused. Who was it that kept asking this fool to be their right hand man? Senseless quibbling. You have nothing but empty words. Gengos force on the sword increased. Shikamarus arms were shaking from trying to hold back the blade. Warm sweat was gathering on his forehead. He was nearing his limit. Hed been cornered. And yet, Shikamaru kept smiling. Sometimes, he said to Gengo, There are things thatre strong because theyre empty. I have no intention of continuing this idle talk. Gengo said. In a very short time, you are going to die. The blade was inching closer to Shikamarus forehead. Well, listen anyway. I really like watching clouds. Be silent. Ysee clouds, are things that can never be caught by anyone, because as long as theres wind, clouds will be blown away before you can catch them. Theyre sneaky things, empty of any substance. Shikamaru felt the blades cold edge touch his forehead. Still, he continued speaking. But even those empty, sneaky things have their uses. They can water the earth with rain. They can strike things down with lightning. So what? Gengo asked. So, Im telling you that its wrong to keep thinking you have to be full of substance to be worth something. Even if your insides feel empty Even if you dont have an unshakable core. As long as you hold a resolve not to become twisted as a person, then youll be fine. But you dont even know that. An idiotic bastard like you who honestly thinks everyone else has to become the way you want them to be, you wouldnt understand what I mean even if you died, would you? The blade had cut into the skin of Shikamarus forehead by now, and warm blood was leaking out. It was precisely because he was still talking despite being in such a grave situation that Shikamarus words had caught Gengos attention. Gengo was distracted by a humans natural curiosity, and as he concentrated on Shikamarus words, his grip on the sword loosened. That was the opportunity Shikamaru had been waiting for. Lying down on the floor as he was, he swept his leg fiercely towards where Gengos. Gengo stumbled, and the sword lurched forward. Shikamaru turned his head along with the direction of the swords momentum, and the blade skimmed past his forehead without cutting any deeper than the surface of his skin, hitting the floor. Shikamaru rolled out from under Gengos legs, getting to his feet. He was out of that corner. Shikamaru allowed himself a small exhale, before he turned and leapt towards Gengo, sticking out his right foot to where he calculated the mans face to be. Shikamaru felt his kick land against something thick and soft, most likely Gengos nose. Gengo staggered back. As soon as Shikamaru landed from his mid-air kick, he jumped back one more time, putting distance between himself and the longsword. So, how does it feel? Shikamaru asked, Getting a taste of the genjutsu of my words? Dont look down on me, you brat Oi, oi, Ive gone from bastard to brat now? As Shikamaru spoke, he could hear a grating sound behind him, like metal being drawn against metal. The room was suddenly full of glaring light. Are you okay, Shikamaru?! Choujis voice. Shikamaru looked over his shoulder. In his field of vision, he could see his comrades standing in the doorway of the room. There was Chouji and Ino and Sakura, and Roku and Sou, who seemed to have broken out of the genjutsu as well. And, of course, there was Temari. While wondering what had happened with Sai, Shikamaru turned to look at Gengo one more time. Prepare your jutsu, Ino! He shouted. Behind his back, Shikamaru made a signal with his hands that he knew Ino would understand. Team 10 had worked together for many years. Their communication was flawless. Got it! Ino replied. Until I give my signal, nobody should make any move to get involved. Shikamaru said. The blood dripping from his forehead was obscuring his vision. He brought up his palm to wipe it away, and then reached inside his vest to retrieve his Konoha hitaiate that had been safely stitched on the inside of his clothing. He tied it firmly around his forehead. He wasnt really worried about how effective itd be in stopping the bleeding though. Arent you acting so composed? Gengo snarled, swinging his longsword overhead with bloodshot eyes. Shikamaru! Shikamarus fingers moved in a quick handseal. His shadow started extending from his feet, heading towards Gengo. Im not such a fool as to be caught in your petty tricks, Gengo said, leaping away before Shikamarus shadow could reach his feet. Gengo landed and lunged at Shikamaru without pause, his sword flashing out to slash at him. Shikamaru was sliced in two from his forehead down. But then his flesh lost its colour, turning black, and then disappearing. Just a kage bunshin. Gengo snarled. Behind him, Shikamaru was approaching with a kunai in his hand. The kunai slashed towards the back of Gengos neck. Gengo dodged the blow brilliantly, a fine example of Kirigakures brilliant upbringing in sword techniques. As Gengo dodged, he shifted his body, bending his knees and swinging his sword horizontally. Shikamarus abdomen was pierced. But this Shikamaru also lost his colour. Another kage bunshin. You impudent little Gengo snarled. Preparations complete! Ino called out. Alright. Shikamarus plan was complete, too. A large part of it hinged on the successful application of Inos jutsu. She stood quite a distance away from Gengo, both her arms up, palms spread out. Her thumb and index fingers were brought together to make a triangle-like formation, and she was looking directly at Gengo. Ninpou, shintenshin no jutsu. Gengo instantly leapt to the side, escaping Inos trajectory. Seeing him evade her, Ino smiled to herself. And she shifted her palms, just slightly, to head for her real target: Shikamaru. Shikamarus body stiffened. He knew that Ino had entered his mind. The jutsu lasted for only an instant. In the time where one could take one breath in, and maybe let another out, the jutsu had already broken. Rou, Soku, Ino called out to the two the instant she broke the jutsu. Itd all gone according to plan The shintenshin jutsu that could enter peoples hearts was also capable of doing one more thing: sharing knowledge. Shikamaru had taken advantage of that fact. The plan that hed carefully laid out in his head had been transmitted to Ino. And she had transmitted it to Rou and Soku. Shikamaru had decided that he was going to bring down this scumbag with Rou and Soku. The three of them would do it together. Lets go! Shikamaru called out the two. Rou and Soku nodded. Shikamaru ran towards Gengo, while Rou and Soku ran to opposite ends of the room, stopping then they faced each other from their parallel places. Whatever you do, its useless. Gengo said. Oh come on now. Shikamaru said. This is the last fight well have. Might as well enjoy it. Kunai and longsword clashed in mid-air. There was a large difference between the mass of both of their weapons. Shikamaru was pushed back from the force of Gengos longsword, tumbling to the floor. Gengos sword came after him, slashing across his chest. But it was just another kage bunshin. How long do you intend to keep playing games?! Gengo snarled, spittle flying from his mouth. Shikamaru attacked Gengo from above, aiming at his head. Gengo swung at him with his sword. It was another bunshin. And another. And another, another, another, another, another, another Gengos sword had sliced Shikamaru in half countless times. But no matter how he sliced and swung and raged, every single time Shikamaru was just another kage bunshin, disappearing from sight as soon as he was injured. Where are you hiding, Shikamaru?! The real Shikamaru had long disappeared from the front of Gengos field of vision. He was, in factm standing right behind him. Not that Gengo noticed. Checkmate. Shikamaru murmured in Gengos ear. Gengo snapped his head to stare over his shoulder, the colour draining from his face. Either way, he was too late Shikamarus shadow had already slithered out of his feet and linked itself with Gengos body. The plan had been executed well. Shikamaru had first made countless kage bunshin and then, using Rous jutsu, given them all the appearance of having a very thick and dense chakra. Gengos mind had naturally started recognising the bunshins chakra. And then, after fighting bunshin after bunshin, hed unconsciously started seeking that chakra out, blocking out other senses in favour of that specific chakra signature. Finally, the real Shikamaru had his chakras traces erased by Rous jutsu, and quietly snuck up on Gengo in the background. Gengo had been attacked from a complete and utter blind spot. Until Shikamaru had locked him in his shadow, the man hadnt had a single clue as to what was going on. SHIKAMARU, YOU BASTAAAAAAAAAAARD! Gengo screamed, turning his head to spew out vitriol at him. As he seethed and shrieked, his tongue flashed a deep crimson inside his mouth. Hinoko. Shikamaru calmly called. Aghhhh! As she gathered her chakra on her index finger, the girl let out a shriek that almost burst Shikamarus ear drums. I keep telling not to call me by my name yknowwwwwwwww! Shikamarus eyes clearly saw the orange glow of Sokus lightning chakra fly towards Gengo and pass straight through his tongue. Ga- gaaah? Gengo made a dry, breathy sound. She just severed the chakra flow to your tongue. Shikamaru told him. From now on, youre stuck in a body that wont let you breathe another word. Tears were leaking out Gengos eyes. Im definitely going to make a world without war, so youll have to forgive me for snatching away yours. Shikamaru said, and signalled for Rou. Rou, who had stayed strong after suffering both torture and genjutsu, came running immediately. Put him in restraints, and accompany him to the Union. Understood, sir. Rou nodded, eyes shining with admiration. Shikamaru rubbed his index finger against the bridge of his nose, trying to gloss over his embarrassment. Rou wrapped Gengos arms in countless layers of metal rings and seals C the specialised handcuffs used by the Anbu. Shikamaru pulled his shadow away from Gengo. The man was well restrained. Shikamaru suddenly noticed that Soku had come to stand behind Rou as well. The missions complete, huh. Shikamaru said. It might not have gone very smoothly, but Shikamaru smiled at the two, and Rou and Sokus faces crumpled like they were about to cry as they nodded back. Volume 2 - CH 18 - After restraining Gengo, Shikamaru and his comrades went down the spiralling stairs to find the battle between the Enlightened Ones and other shinobi had already finished. It turned out that the moment Soku severed the chakra flow to Gengos tongue, the genjutsu clouding the Enlightened Ones minds had cleared up as well, and thatd been a really big help to ending the battle. Despite the battle between Enlightened Ones and shinobi being so fierce, there hadnt been as much harm done as one would think. Other than several heavily wounded people, almost everyone had walked away fight with relatively light injuries. You would think it a miracle that no one had been killed, but it was mostly because the Sunagakure shinobi had faithfully followed Gaaras orders -Do not kill unless necessary.- when they stormed the hall. When Gengos advisors found out that he had been defeated and restrained, all of their shoulders slumped and the will to fight seemed to leave them entirely. They had awakened from their feverish dream, and now turned terribly despondent. When Shikamaru and the others had arrived at the hall, the other Konohagakure and Sunagakure shinobi were handling the Enlightened Ones well, restraining some and giving medical aid to others. Sai! Shikamaru called out when he spotted the shinobi sitting amidst the crowd of people, receiving medical aid from another shinobi. Shikamaru Sai sat upright, looking at him with a blank face. Ino had told Shikamaru about what happened with Sai on the groups way down the stairs. Perhaps it was because Sai had been dragged out of the genjutsu with such strong, desperate measures that the shinobis eyes still looked a little dazed, like some part of him was drifting at sea. Im so sorry. Sai murmured. Dont worry about it. Shikamaru kindly said, squatting down next to him and putting a hand on his shoulder. Its all behind us. Underneath the black material of Sais uniform, Shikamaru could feel the shinobis shoulders shaking slightly. There werent any tears dripping down his face. But Sai was still crying on the inside. Im pathetic. Sai muttered. You were in a trance brought on by that guys words. Shikamaru said. Even Id gotten dragged into it. You have nothing to feel ashamed about. But Dont let it bother you too much. Managing to carry on with a light heart no matter what happens has always been one of your best qualities. Thank you, Shikamaru. A single tear slipped out of Sais right eye, falling down his cheek. When we get back to Konoha, take some time off. Ill talk to Kakashi-san. Thank you As Sai said that, Ino appeared to stand by Sais side. Take care of him. Shikamaru said to Ino, getting up to his feet. Ino gave a deep nod, her eyes looking down at Sai. She kneeled down next to him the minute Shikamaru had gotten out of the way. Just as Shikamaru had let out a small sigh of relief to see everything settled, a mans voice rang out, bursting with righteous with fury. SHI! KA! MA! RUUUUUUUUUUUUU! Oh yeah, hed totally forgotten about that guy Rubbing the back of his head, Shikamaru turned his head to look at the voices owner. What he saw, instead, was a fist headed directly for his face. Shikamarus body was thrown backwards, rolling across the ground. His field of vision changed from the floor to the ceiling to the floor to the ceiling. Six times His brain calmly counted every single roll that had been caused by the terribly powerful punch. Shikamarus body finally rolled to a stop when he was on his back. He sat up on the floor, eyes catching sight of the furious blond man who was now rushing towards him. Shikamaru has gotten onto his hands and knees to get up, but the next thing he knew, the man had jumped on top of his back like a man would a horse, grabbing the back of his collar. Shikamarus neck was jerked up and down and an incoherently furious scolding blasting into his ears. YOU C WHY C TELL ME C EVERYTHING BY YOURSELF C ALWAYS LIKE THIS C EVERYONE C WORRIED SICK C EVEN I C GAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAH C YOU FUCKING IDIOT! Im really sorry, Naruto. Shikamaru spoke to the man on his back. Youre really a fucking idiot!! Naruto furiously repeated. Narutos bellowed words had been disjointed and choppy in his worked up state, his feelings spewing out his mouth without structure, but Shikamaru had clearly understood all of Narutos concern for him packed into his rant. It was because Naruto had such a fire inside him that he was suited to be the leader of the Country of Fires hidden village, Konoha. Didnt you say you were gonna be my advisor, huh? Naruto muttered. The blonde seemed to have calmed down somewhat after Shikamarus apology had registered, and hed verified that Shikamaru was indeed alright. This countryll be fine from now on. Naruto firmly. Sakura had come to stand next to them at some point Shikamaru hadnt noticed. Since the Enlightened Ones ruling this country were all shinobi, there isnt a single citizen who doesnt know that Narutos the hero from the last shinobi world war. Sakura said. Nobody will kick up a fuss over these events once they see that Narutos here. And since Gengos genjutsu has been broken, things will settle down soon enough. Narutos influence over the world of shinobi was immeasurably strong. It was just like Sakura had said. Nobody would oppose the hero who had saved the world. Hey, from now on, Naruto sternly said, If anything happens, tell me first. Aa. Shikamaru closed his eyes and nodded. Naruto let go of the back of Shikamarus collar and stood up. Come on. Naruto held out his hand. Shikamaru silently took it. Naruto pulled him up with one smooth, strong motion, and Shikamaru was immediately back on his feet. Shikamaru envied how Naruto could be so honest and straightforward. And he thought that for Narutos sake, he had to try and be more honest too. This is the last time Huh? Naruto tilted his head at Shikamaru. This is the last time Ill act like a kid. Aa. After all, Im gonna spend all my time after this babysitting a kid. Shikamaru said, poking Naruto in the chest. Hey, whore you calling a kid? Who do you think? The two looked at each other, and burst into grins. For the sake of Roku, Sou and Sai receiving immediate medical treatment, it was decided that their first order of business was returning to Konoha. Naruto, Sakura and others were going to stay behind in the Country of Silence and clean up matters there. Shikamaru wasnt worried about leaving Naruto behind. With Gengo out of the picture, he was sure things would work out fine. Sunagakures shinobi intended on doing the same, leaving part of their troop behind while the rest headed back to Suna. Konohagakure and Sunagakures forces would both head their separate ways home. This time around, Im really in your debt. Shikamaru said to Gaara, as they stood at the gates of Curtain Village. Sunagakures returning shinobi stood lined up behind Gaara. All the shinobi who had been brought up in the desolate desert of Suna had the same strong, formidable countenance. Every single one of them were looking at Shikamaru with a smile. It was small things like that which let you feel the world of shinobi was really beginning to merge into one. Dont worry about it. Gaara replied. Youre someone whose existence is essential to the Union, now and in the future. Theres no need for you to use such formal words like debt for an operation like this. Isnt it natural for someone to go and save their comrade? Gaara crossed his arms as he spoke. He never used to be this talkative. Years ago, Gaara used to be someone with an unreadable face, blank of any emotion; constantly bloodthirsty, a dangerous guy. But now, Sunagakures shinobi looked at Gaara with affectionate smiles. Behind Shikamaru, there was Sai, Rou and Soku. Chouji and Ino, too. As well as another group of Konohagakures shinobi. All of them were quiet too, attentively listening to Gaara and Shikamarus conversation. But I really am very relieved Gaara murmured seriously to Shikamaru. If my sister hadnt been so troubled, we all wouldve ended up losing a very valuable person. Temari was standing next to Gaara, her gaze fixed on some spot above their heads. She had taken on the attitude of completely ignoring the exchange. Shikamaru supposed it was because she was trying to hide her embarrassment, but it was only a little charming, not a lot. Dont worry about Gengo. Gaara said. Well drop him off at the Unions headquarters on our way home. We keep receiving your help on every little thing I keep telling you not to speak so formally. Gaara said. The Kazekage that held such love and devotion in his village then stuck out his hand for Shikamaru. Well then, well meet again at the Union. Shikamaru said, and grasped Gaaras hand. He gave a firm, strong squeeze. Gaara returned the handhold with the same strength. See you later. Aa. Gaara let go of the handhold, turning his gaze to look at his comrades. Lets go home. He said, and Sunagakures shinobi unanimously answered in a cheer. Temari turned her back to leave, and Shikamarus voice suddenly called out to her. Oi. Gaara looked almost as surprised as Shikamaru himself felt. Temari came to a halt mid-step. The rest of Sunagakures shinobi looked like they were going to stop too, but Gaara made a gesture for them to go ahead and Sunagakures shinobi obeyed, spilling out of the villages gates and into the main street. Gaara followed, casting one look over his shoulder at Shikamaru before disappearing. Only Temari was left. Somewhere behind Shikamaru, he could faintly hear Soku let out a kyaa!. Shikamaru ignored her, and drew closer to Temari. What is it? She sourly asked. Her eyes always had such a staggering power Shikamaru felt like he was about to lose his nerve, and took a deep breath to try and calm himself down. He tried to get his thoughts past his mouth. Today It was no use. The words werent coming out. What? Temari asked irritably, urging him to hurry up. Even now, her body was slightly tilted towards the gates to follow the direction her younger brother had gone. Thank you, for today. Hmph. Temari gave a snort, and Shikamaru continued talking. Next time, how about eating a meal together? Are you asking me on a date? Temari plainly asked. The look in her eyes was serious now. There wasnt even the slightest bit of embarrassment in her attitude, nothing endearing. Why am I asking this sort of a woman out for a meal? Shikamaru questioned himself. Well, yeah, it is that sort of thing. His reply came from somewhere in Shikamarus subconscious. Hed asked her out, so, it couldnt be helped. No Hed called out to her and made her stop because he wanted to ask her out. Shikamaru felt bewildered by these emotions that he himself didnt understand. I see. Temari thoughtfully said. A date, huh It was almost as if she was seated in a war council, talking about preparations for how to deal with a formidable enemy. Temari put a hand to her chin, starting to think seriously about the matter. You dont want to? Shikamaru involuntarily blurted out. Temari gazed closely at the look on his face for a while. Then she let go of her chin, and put her hands on her hips. How troublesome. Temaris radiant grin after she said that felt like something incredibly precious to Shikamaru. Volume 2 - CH 19 The End - It had been one week since Shikamaru left the Country of Silence. Kakashi had ordered him to take a break and heal up from the fatigue caused by being held captive as well as the final fight with Gengo. The wound on his forehead had been given medical aid by Sakura straight away, so Shikamaru didnt really have any injuries that he had to rest up for. The state of his heart was also much lighter compared to how it had been before his trip to the Country of Silence. He didnt really need a vacation, but Kakashi had insisted, and so he complied. Chouji and Ino had gone out on other separate missions soon after they returned to Konoha. Naruto and Sakura were still working things out in the Country of Silence. Of course, Shikamaru went to visit Mirai at Kurenai senseis house, but it sufficed to stay there for just a few hours. All his time was alone time. He didnt have to do anything. All week, nobody had bothered him. For the first time in a long while, Shikamaru had lived quietly and calmly, day after day. Some days, he had sat himself down in front of shougi board, and played against himself for hours. Other days, he set out at sunrise and climbed a mountain, lying down at the top and watching clouds until the sky was dyed red from the setting sun. Shikamaru had enjoyed that time immensely. He reflected on how much he had changed. If it had been the Shikamaru before the went to the Country of Silence, then he wouldnt have been able to stand a week of no missions or work for the Union. He wouldve lost his presence of mind completely. He wouldve kept thinking what if some serious incident happens while Im gone or what if someones made a mistake in their work and nobodys noticed. All kinds of ridiculous, nonsensical thoughts. He wouldnt have been able to completely relax for even one full day before he went back to work. But now, Shikamaru could relax to the fullest possible extent. This whole week, hed barely given a thought about the work waiting for him at the Union, or the missions piling up, his mind only ever wandering to them right before he went to sleep. His comrades would be able to handle everything just fine, even if he wasnt there. He could now think of that and be at ease. It wasnt that hed abandoned his sense of responsibility. Hed just finally allowed himself to have some breathing space and calm down. If ever a situation arose where he really was needed, then Kakashi or Temari would definitely call for him. And if that time came, then hed switch his mind set into that of a sharp genius, and support them to the fullest extent. There was no need for him to frantically think about when hed go back to work every single second. If he had faith in his comrades ability, then he could comfortably switch between working and relaxing. Shikamaru had cornered himself to the extent that he had forgotten completely about that fact. In his week of relaxing, Shikamaru had also examined himself. Hed taken a long, hard look at why he was so different after his trip to the Country of Silence, to the point that it made himself uncomfortable. He realised how many comrades he had. And he also realised that he had ignored their existence completely. He saw how he had kept insisting on taking on every single burden and responsibility, all because of a small-minded, haughty, and completely mistaken pride that they couldnt handle things without him. A person couldnt live their life all on their own. Nobody was smart or skilled enough to handle every single thing by themselves. Thats why you had friends, comrades. The thought Ill shoulder everything by myself was wrong at the very root. It had been worth Shikamaru going to the Country of Silence if only so he could realise that. When he had been in Floating Prisoner Castle and entranced by Gengo, Temari had stormed in and given Shikamaru a wake-up call that broke him out of the genjutsu as well as every other doubt that had been holding him down. In the middle of her gale, he had been able to realise exactly who he was. Honestly, Shikamaru was originally an irresponsible man. He found pretty much everything troublesome, and if it was up to him, he wouldnt want to do anything at all. It was fine to live as a fool, and hed be happy to live his days as a coward without a care in the world. That was Shikamarus nature. And honestly, wasnt that fine? It was because he had accepted the root of his nature, with its devil-may-care and irresponsible attitude, that he could bring himself to accomplish things. After all, it was none other than people like him who could understand the feelings of normal citizens who had no dreams or ambitions to speak of, and only wished to lead peaceful, ordinary lives. What was wrong with thinking you wanted to live a normal life? The definition of a dream wasnt limited to just the ambitious ones that aimed high with their goals. Living in a world that was constantly at war with itself, a normal life was possibly the hardest dream to achieve. And that was why there was significance to Shikamarus existence. If the world could become peaceful, if it could become a place where anyone could live comfortably, then surely the people who wanted to live normal lives could do so, one average day at a time. Unfortunately, Shikamaru had been born into a world full of war. That was why he had to live his life in a hurry. So for the sake of those who would be born after this, Shikamaru absolutely had to end the fighting in the world. It wasnt a dream with lofty and sublime feelings like Gengos was. He didnt have any particular noble motivations behind it either. A world where anyone could live comfortably So if the person who wanted to build that sort of world took everything on his own shoulders and worked incessantly, wouldnt that be missing the point? Hed word hard in a comfortable way, too. That kind of attitude was best. * You really worked hard. Kakashi said as he straightened out a pile of documents on his desk. Shikamaru had come to his office to give him his full report on what had happened in the Country of Silence, as well as give him greetings for his return to work. Sakuras report on the present condition in the Country of Silence, as well as Ino and the others ending reports for the mission gave me a basic idea of what went on. Kakashi said. Ive also heard the talks of all your hard work from Rou and Soku in the hospital. Hard workwell Shikamaru felt the corner of his eyebrow twitch in embarrassment. Hed been unable to see the truth of Gengos genjutsu and then gotten himself caught up in it. Temari had come to his rescue and hed finally been able to wake up, but even after that hed received the help of his comrades right until the very end. There hadnt been a single thing that hed accomplished by himself. It wouldve been fine even if you didnt write this on your vacation Kakashi said, looking at the pile of documents in his hand. There were about 50 pages in all. It was the report Shikamaru had written. While he had refused to think about his missions or work at the Union to the very end of his vacation, the Country of Silence was a different matter. Writing reports after missions was one of the basics of being a shinobi. It was a given that hed do that much, vacation or not. Besides, it was light work that didnt take up more than an hour of a day. Please look over it. Shikamaru said. Kakashi let out a sigh and moved the bundle of documents over to the side of the desk, placing it on top of the mountain of paperwork he already had. The pile swayed a little bit, and after wearily eyeing it for a while, Kakashi then turned his gaze on Shikamaru. Youre an existence that this village and the Union couldnt do without, Kakashi said, So try and take care of yourself a little more An existence they couldnt do without, huh Thats really troublesome. The words leaked out of Shikamarus mouth naturally, without any conscious effort. Kakashi looked at the expression on Shikamarus face for a while, and then he laughed. I see that youre alright now. Kakashi cheerfully said. Yeah. Shikamaru naturally smiled. Now then Kakashi put one hand behind his neck, rolling it around. His other hand went to a drawer in his desk, opening it and pulling out a sheaf of documents. He presented them to Shikamaru. Shikamaru looked down at the file. It was stamped with a red seal that indicated a B-rank mission, with its details clearly written out. He was to accompany the attendant of the Daimyou of the Land of Fire, delivering a sovereign message to the Daimyou of the Land of Lightning. A bodyguard assignment, basically. Thanks to the Union and general co-operation between the shinobi of today, the security of the general public was rapidly strengthening. Going between two countries wasnt really as remarkable as it had been in the past. In reality, the Daimyous attendant wouldve been fine with their own bodyguards. Shinobi were only assigned as an extra precaution for unexpected events. The one to work on the mission didnt necessarily have to be Shikamaru. It was a job that any shinobi above chuunin level could accomplish. Its far too simple of a mission for you, but Kakashi-san, mind if I stop you there? Shikamaru cut in, holding up his right hand. Its been such a long time since you called me Kakashi-san, Kakashi said, staring at Shikamaru with a surprised look on his face. Its startling to hear it now. Keeping my shoulders straight, watching the way I talk, and always twisting around my behaviour to be ideal Shikamaru shrugged. Ive already stopped doing that sort of thing. Thats good to hear. Kakashi nodded. So, about that mission, can you leave it to some other guy? Why? W-well, because the day after tomorrow is Shikamaru looked away. His cheeks were turning a deep crimson. Kakashi curiously tilted his head at him, waiting for the rest. I have a date. Pfff! Kakashi snorted in sudden laughter. Shikamaru glared at him. To think that youd turn down a mission to go on a date is surprising, Kakashi chuckled, But sure, you have my permission! Go on your date. Thank you. Kakashi leaned back, crossing his arms and closing his eyes. Spring has come for you, Shikamaru. He said, nodding repeatedly. Yup, yup. Fine, I gave up on my dream to have an average life. But for goodness sake, at least let me enjoy this comforting part of my life in peace. Then, Ill be going. Shikamaru swiftly turned his back to Kakashi, stepping forward to head towards the exit. Shikamaru. Kakashi called out to make him stop. He had stood to get on his feet now. I feel like if I ask the current you, then youll understand more than you did last time. Do you mind if I ask you one more time? What do you think it means to be an adult? Shikamaru looked up at the ceiling for a while, gathering his thoughts. An answer appeared in his mind, and he opened his mouth to share it with full honesty. Giving up on one thing, and finding something else thats even better, more valuable Shikamaru said. Its that kind of feeling, isnt it? Though I might not understand it all that well. Giving something up, and finding something more valuable, huh? Kakashi echoed. Well, while there are people like Naruto who never give up on their life-goals and always work towards them from their childhood onwards, most guys usually give up on a goal because it turns out it cant be done. Shikamaru said. But they keep living on, and, in the end, they find something thats even more valuable, and live working towards that goal instead. Or at least, thats what I think. I see Kakashi closed his eyes again, crossing his arms. Well then, Ill be off. Shikamaru said, turning around and heading out. He was too embarrassed to stay there any longer. He was just shutting the door behind him, when Kakashis cheerful voice rang out one more time. I hope you enjoy yourself, Shikamaru. Although he knew Kakashi wouldnt hear him, Shikamaru replied anyway. Thank you very much. Everyone kept living their lives, and time passed slowly and steadily, like a stream He looks a lot like me, doesnt he? Our son had only just been born, but he was crying like hed already seen through everything the world had to offer. Its alright. I told him. One day, youre going to realise you dont know everything as well as you think. And when that time comes, youll have definitely made comrades who will walk side by side with you. The baby couldnt have understood a word, but he still stared up at me with wide eyes. Those eyes of his looked just like his mothers, all long slit and almond shaped. I really cant say anythings troublesome from now on, huh I said. You can say it a little. Temari told me. If it ever looks like youre getting so bad that youll stop functioning, then Ill intervene and send you flying back to your senses again. So, its okay. Aa, youre right. Then What are we going to name him? How troublesome. Volume 3 - CH 1.1 Pages 1 and 2 are title pages. Pages 3 and 4 [T/N] V is to bring to someones attention, appeal, complain. In more medical terms, the phrase is actuallythe patient/childs chief complaint is a psychosomatic disorder. The meaning of a chief complaint is simply just whatever they are heading over to the hospital to seek treatment for. So if you go into the ER feeling like your head is spinning, your chief complaint is vertigo. So its a decrease in the number of children who are seeking help (/brought up concerns to their doctor about their) psychosomatic disorders. ʮ֤ is not to be taken literally as a number in this instance. It commonly means to be enough/sufficient/adequate. One-tenth is more likely to be written like ʮ֤һ instead. I ended up expanding the name by incorporating it with other details.Ӥɤįҡis literally Children+ Mind+Cure+Room. So I had to make it sound casual with Childrens Mental Clinic. After mulling it over, I thought that Childrens Mental Healthcare Clinic made more sense, considering the details that are later in this chapter. You could call it a unit, division, or department for the kanji, but I thought that clinic would suffice. It does not seem to be a standalone building. Rather, its a section within Konoha Hospital. I decided not to go with Psychosomatic, because the literal kanji would have needed to include (mind-body). Psychiatric also has a separate set of distinctive kanji. Pages 5 and 6 [T/N] This section deviated from [my spoilers] a bit. The can mean child, so I originally assumed that they were talking about a patient due to the nature of the clinic. With the release of the additional pages on this mornings update, the should actually mean young woman, referring to the girl who was debriefing them. This is why context is very important in Japanese, especially for ambiguous kanji! ݅= kouhai. This refers to peers who are beneath you in terms of seniority (can be in age, position within Konoha, or shinobi rank). Sakura is already a Jounin in The Last. ХХ= to work energetically/actively/vigorously at something. So when Ino says ХХǤơ, she means that Sakura has been putting forth a great effort into what she does. 䤫ꤿ= to want to share a good fortune, or bask in the luck with someone else. In more colloquial terms, Ino basically implied I wish I could be standing in your shoes. Pages 7 and 8 Pages 9 and 10 [T/N] = shishou. It just means teacher/master. I usually leave positions and honorifics untranslated, thats all :P ѥ󥯤= If you go flat or burst. It usually refers to tires, bulging balloons, and such. Here, the meaning feels like being overwhelmingly stressed= explode (from the stress). I think that if you go past that threshold = burned-out from it (go flat). Pages 11 and 12 [T/N] My understanding of the timeframe is this: 2 years ago (end of the war)>>6 months later (Sakuras proposition)>>Unknown time period where she consulted with Tsunade and worked on it alone>>Unknown time period where Ino and Sakura worked out the details of cooperating together>>6 months post-collaboration, the clinic is out of prep-phase (present time). The 1.5 years since the introduction of the facility (as mentioned by the lady in the first page) includes the proposition+consultation+teamwork time. Now, the light novel takes place several months after The Last (given by the WSJ and website timeline image). It depends if several months encompasses the 6 months of their teamwork. So I think during the Last, Ino and Sakura might already be working on this project. At the minimum, I think that Sakura was at least working independently on the development of the project. Then, Ino might have recently joined in. The hand gesture looks [like this] when Sakura declines Inos invite for tea. Sakura said ޤȤ͡. The same Until next time (ޤȤ) as Sasuke said to her (the different inflection on the ending is the feminine/masculine version). I dont think its an intentional reference since its a common phrase, but I thought that I should point it out anyway. Pages 13 and 14 [T/N] Pages 15 and 16 [T/N] Τʤ is literally without replacement. So something that cannot be substituted The raw says = existence, being, entity, presence. I couldnt think of an intuitive way to phrase it But when read altogether, you get something like a priceless existence or an essential entity. Pages 17 and 18 [T/N] ʤ is generally like How nice! or Im happy for youor So lucky!Theres not exactly a clean English expression for it. Literally, the is for pleasant/good/nice/excellent + the ʤ for emphasis. It carries a slight nuance that means that shes a little bit envious of them. It is not vicious in any way like this overly dramatic emoticon: ?(???.. 줫ʤ뤤 is literally not reached + thoughts/feelingsWhen used in the context where youre distinctly referring to someone else, it carries a nuance that can refer tounrequited love (Ȥɤ뤤). However, given the context of the passage, I think it would not be appropriate to restrict the focus of this sentence on just her thoughts about Sasuke, or assume his thoughts about Sakura. The scope of the things that she hasnt communicated to anyone seems to be beyond that. It probably includes how she feels about seeing other couples, feeling compelled to be preoccupied with her work, etc. Though her thoughts about Sakuke may be within those thoughts, I think it is best to leave the sentence open by translating it as a variation of thoughts/feelings that have yet to be told to anyone else. So with the new context, my translation changed from [my original spoilers] and also my rough translation from the photo[leak] is an expression that like Well!or See here! or Hey there!. You use it to call out to someone, or when youre surprised about something. I originally thought that the excerpt would continue beyond this last phrase, so I translated it to be open. So now with the context, it carries a different nuance that seems like she is trying to snap herself out of her thoughts. //End Translation Volume 3 - CH 1.2 Pages 20 and 21 [T/N] Pages 22 and 23 [T/N] Pages 24 and 25 [T/N] A daimyo is a feudal lord An onsen is a hot spring~ Referring to [Mitokado Homura], one of the elder and upper village counselors. Pages 26 and 27 //End Translation //Section 2 completed. Volume 3 - CH 1.3 Page 27 Pages 28 and 29 [T/N] Sakura doubles her ʤ. Which is just an expression for like Ah, this is wrong!, Dont do it! Its no good, Its hopeless, I shouldnt be xxxx. 򤤤 is to turn around, or turn ones face around. So the get the man to face/look at her. They literally just say ء (Breasts/chest/bust) without pronouns assigned to them(==so I have to assign one to the sentences in order for it to flow in English)But I think you get what theyre saying anyway :P Page 30 [T/N] //End Translation //Section 3 completed. Volume 3 - CH 1.4 Page 31 [T/N] Page 32 and 33 [T/N] Though is spring or prime, when you use it in this instance, the nuance means more likesex, lust, budding sexuality, etc. lol~~ For example, when written like Ҥ it literally means that youre selling springtime. But it actually means Engaging in prostitution. So the nuance here is like Everyones urges are peaking, when I say Everyones at their prime..lol~~~ (If you wanted to keep it super literal, she actually said Its springtime everywhere. But we all know what she means now, right? :P The expression referring to Chouji also needs some explaining, I think. ɫݤʳ is a bit like Fair words fill not the belly and Food before romance. The ɫ isnt the literal definition for a colour. Its actually about being interested in the opposite sex, passionate romantic feelings, etc. Its related to the expression (hana yori dango= Dumplings rather than flowers). It means desiring practical things over aesthetic things. Page 34 and 35 Page 36 and 37 [T/N] //End Translation //Section 4 completed. Volume 3 - CH 1.5 Pages 38 and 39 Pages 40 - 42 //End Translation. //Section 5 completed. //Chapter 1 completed! Volume 3 - CH 2.1 Pages 44 and 45 [T/N] Pages 46 and 47 Pages 48 and 49 Pages 50 and 51 Pages 52 and 53 //End Translation. //Section 1 completed. Volume 3 - CH 2.2 Pages 54 and 55 [T/N] -Ƥ has a nuance that means that something was done for you. In this case, it implies from Sasuke that Sakura did something for his arm ( graft, transplant, etc). Its not a hardcore and direct Because of you. ޤʤ is not the samethank you as you see arigatou . The nuance with tsumanai is that you use it to express a pardon for inconveniencing someone else. It can be used to say Im sorry and Excuse me in a way that arigatou cannot be utilized. The nuance is more apologetic, but with the context, the meaning is closer to thank you, IMHO. ǰȤͬ can sometimes mean Im in sync with you, but that seemed unlikely within context. The other more common denotation is forͬ is to mean a classmate, peer, someone in the same year as you, etc. ݤˤʤ has a meaning thats not as simple as its on my mind(literally). The connotation for it is moreso like Im interested/care about xxxxx; Im feeling worried/anxious about xxx; or Im feeling a bit uneasy about xxxx. So it cant really be translated exactly, but the meaning is a cross between them. Pages 56 and 57 [T/N] So there are a ton of nuances that involve love in this section. Its impossible to go into depth into all the nuances (it would take pages, seriously! Its outside the scope of what I can write about at length here~) . There are a lot of resources out there that will explain the nuances (google will be your friend!)~~But the mini-version is that there are different degrees of to love in Japanese that do not exist in English. The order from crushes/less serious to forever love would roughly be like ä(suki= to like)>>> ä(Daisuki= to like a lot/love)>>> (Koi= infatuation, or a passionate/romantic love)>>> (Renai=--step inbetween//a more pure love--)>> (Ai= giving an unconditional/even deeper love). There are distinct usages/differences between them. Their connotations vary (such as koi sometimes being referred to more of a selfish love versus ai being referred to as a selfless love), but thats a topic for your own personal research if youre interested in it. So in this section: Suki= Sakura talking about Inos feelings to Sai;;; Koi = Sakura talking about budding love;; Renai= Sakura talking about being fulfilled in love, and comparing the development of eachother''s relationships. Pages 58 and 59 Page 60 //End Translation. //Section 2 completed. Volume 3 - CH 2.3 Page 61 Pages 62 and 63 Pages 64 and 65 Pages 66 and 67 Pages 68 and 69 //End Translation. //Section 3 completed. //Chapter 2 completed! Volume 3 - CH 3.1 Pages 72 and 73 Pages 74 and 75 Page 76 //End Translation. //Section 1 completed. Volume 3 - CH 3.2 Page 77 Pages 78 and 79 Pages 80 and 81 Pages 82 and 83 Page 84 //End Translation. //Section 2 completed. Volume 3 - CH 3.3 Page 85 Pages 86 and 87 Page 88 and 89 //End Translation. //Section 3 completed. Volume 3 - CH 3.4 Pages 90 and 91 [T/N] There are emphasis marks in the novel, so I have to approximate it by bolding it here~~ The culture medium is some serious business. Magire is the one appendingϤǤ (ijyou desu= Thats all) to the ends of his sentences. Its just a verbal quirkso just roll with it~ Pages 92 and 93 //End Translation. //Section 4 completed. //Chapter 3 completed! Volume 3 - CH 4.1 Pages 96 and 97 Pages 98 and 99 Pages 100 and 101 //End Translation. //Section 1 completed. Volume 3 - CH 4.2 Pages 102 and 103 Pages 104 - 106 //End Translation. //Section 2 completed. Volume 3 - CH 4.3 Pages 106 and 107 //End Translation. //Section 3 completed. Volume 3 - CH 4.4 Pages 108 and 109 [T/N] Pages 110 and 111 Pages 112 and 113 [T/N] Pages 114 and 115 Pages 116 and 117 Page 118 //End Translation. //Section 4 completed. Volume 3 - CH 4.5 Page 119 Pages 120 and 121 Pages 122 and 123 Pages 124 -126 //End Translation. //Section 5 completed. Volume 3 - CH 5.1 Pages 128 and 129 Pages 130 and 131 Pages 132 and 133 Pages 134 and 135 Pages 136 and 137 Page 138+ //End Translation. //Section 1 completed. Volume 3 - CH 5.2 Pages 139 and 140 //End Translation. //Section 2 completed. Volume 3 - CH 5.3 Page 141 Pages 142 and 143 Page 144 [T/N] //End Translation. //Section 3 completed. Volume 3 - CH 5.4 Page 145 Pages 146 and 147 Pages 148 and 149 Pages 150 and 151 //End Translation. //Section 4 completed. Volume 3 - CH 5.5 Page 151 Pages 152 and 153 Pages 154 and 155 //End Translation. //Section 5 completed. //Chapter 5 completed! Volume 3 - CH 6.1 Pages 158 and 159 Pages 160 and 161 Pages 162 and 163 Pages 164 and 165 Page 166 //End Translation. //Section 1 completed. Volume 4 - Prologue Prologue - Something besides the Wedding Invitation Hatake Kakashi, the Sixth Hokage, found that he had a problem. Well then, what am I to do His quiet murmurs drifted into the empty room, eventually swallowed up by the silence. As usual, Kakashi was alone in the Hokages office, and grappling with a mountain of paperwork. The pile of documents that sat front of Kakashi had actually reached such a height that they were blocking his line of sight from his seat. It wasnt just the one pile either. Several piles of similar height were stacked around his left and right. As the villages leader and Hokage, it was his duty to read through every single one of these documents. However, that wasnt Kakashis problem. Or rather, it wasnt a very important problem. The business of all the documents on his desk could be easily settled by reading through them one at a time and stamping them as necessary. For jobs like that, once you started concentrating, you would be surprised at how quickly it got finished. Wondering if you could complete the paperwork faster than new work would get piled up in front of you, wondering if you could be quicker, thinking youd turn it into a match and see- if you concentrated on your work with those kinds of thoughts, then doing paperwork naturally became something that was sort of fun. As he stamped each document, Kakashi would think to himself if I dont pick up the pace, people wont be able to see my face past this mountain of paperwork, and keep himself entertained with silly thoughts like that as he worked. However, his current problem wasnt something to be handled so lightly. Kakashi let his eyes fall on the Mission Roster document spread out across his desk. His hands started moving. Or rather, to be more accurate, only his fingertips were moving. In the silence of his empty office, Kakashi started tapping his fingers against the surface of his desk, their tiny strikes letting out a ton, ton sound. Somehow, the rhythm of his fidgeting helped him collect his scattered thoughts. As the name implied, the Mission Roster was a document that held the details for all the upcoming missions of every single shinobi in the village. What sort of mission theyd be on, how long those missions would take, every possible detail of their schedule was written down. Kakashi was checking the Mission Roster far more carefully than usual, because of a certain circumstance. His eyes slowly glanced towards the edge of his desk, where an envelope had been safely placed to make sure it didnt get buried under the piles of paperwork. Inside of that envelope was a written invitation to Naruto and Hinatas wedding ceremony. Kakashi had already filled out his RSVP form to say that he was going, and added in a congratulatory message. Normally, that was all one needed to do for weddings, but Kakashi had one more task at hand. The task in question was to rearrange the Mission Roster to make sure that all of Naruto and Hinatas invited guests Cespecially their close friendsC could attend the wedding without any missions getting in the way of their schedule. It was mostly a headache because Naruto and Hinatas comrades were all shinobi that were very active in the frontlines of the shinobi world. They were all first rate ninja, and always being handed new missions whether day or night. And, missions like that always included possible misfortunes. Messed up weather conditions, bad roads, injuriesthe reasons and circumstances would vary, but it was often the case that a shinobi expected to return to the village in three days ended up coming back after a full week instead. Kakashi had to rearrange the work schedules of such elite and busy shinobi while keeping in mind the fact that their missions could be delayed as well. It was an incredibly difficult task to distribute this kunoichis missions, and that shinobis missions Not to mention, he had to make sure he didnt arrange it so some poor sap would stagger into the wedding ceremony fresh out of a mission either Kakashi felt a parental sort of want to arrange it so everyone would have at least one free day prior to the wedding- however, in the real world, it wasnt so easy to put such a thought into practice. Kakashis eyes flickered back and forth along the roster. If he put that mission there this person could go, but then that that person couldnt, if he put this mission there that wouldnt work eitherhe was having an incredibly tough time. And then on top of all that, there was the fact that in the world of adults and paperwork, there was such an annoying thing as appearances to be considered. If the leader of a group of elite shinobi, shinobi so dedicated that they wouldnt take any extra time to rest even when wounded or in the midst of a fever, then gave those shinobi consecutive days off, then it just wouldnt be proper. He had to think about how it reflected on his official stance as the Hokage. He had to handle everything smoothly, manage the villages affair without a hitch, and make sure that things went well. And, he had to do both those things and somehow make it so that everyone could attend the wedding with smiles on their faces. Kakashi closed his eyes and leaned back in his chair, thinking deeply. He didnt really have any brilliant ideas. Rearranging everyones schedules was guaranteed to be a problem. Itd be nice if he could just call the day of Naruto and Hinatas wedding a mission, and fix it like that It suddenly dawned on Kakashis mind that he could. If he did that, then all the other adjustments would be pretty easy C But no, that was, it was kiiindait would be an abuse of authority, right Kakashi crossed his arms, his face screwed up in thought. In reality, the course of action that Kakashi had thought up of wasnt him abusing his authority in any way. After all, he was just struggling to do everything in his power to adjust everyones schedules properly. However, Kakashi hadnt faced such matters in his paperwork yet, so he wasnt aware of that fact. After all, Kakashi was a shinobi who spent most of his life flourishing on the frontlines of battle, not in politics. Well, itll be my last resort I guess. Kakashi let out a loud laugh, and then continued to stew in his thoughts. Volume 4 - CH 1 Wedding presents, full throttle! If you asked people about the hidden villages of shinobi, then youd find a large number of citizens Cthe kind with no love for shinobi or their homesC who imagined those hidden villages as small towns enclosed by mountains on all sides. Surely, those citizens would say, hidden villages are completely cut off from the outside world, isolated completely from everyone else. A sort of floating island in the sea, backwards and underdeveloped. Definitely, theyd say, a hidden village is a place that normal people would be idiots to want to visit, and on top of that, somewhere you could only find with great difficulty. A hidden shinobi village absolutely had to be that kind of place. That was what a lot of people thought. However, the reality was very different. Konoha had a very well-known monument at its entrance, the *AUN Gate. If any normal person entered Konoha for the first time, theyd be dumbfounded by the sight that greeted them past the gate: a giant, sprawling village that was overflowing with activity and populous. The village was constantly maintained and developing, and it was in no way limited to just the residential areas of the villagers. There were schools, hospitals, various shopping centres, and even recreational areas. There was everything a person needed to live their life to the fullest. Absolutely every possible establishment could be found in the village centre alone. Konohas sheer size was to the point that if you called it a city-state, you wouldnt be far off. You could live your whole life never taking one step outside Konohas borders, and never want for anything, never lack any sort of comfort. And this very metropolis was nestled within the depths of a forest. That was what the village of Konohagakure really was: a huge city that suddenly materialised within a forest. There wasnt a single shinobi who felt the slightest bit dissatisfied with a village like that. Konoha had originally been a gathering of several shinobi and their clans, but when a group of people lived somewhere, they naturally end up wanting places that would make them food. And of course, after that there was the demand for stores that would sell daily necessities too. Following that logic, it was natural that another group of people would come into the equation: merchants with an eye on the village full of customers. So it came to pass that a group of non-shinobi Cof sellers and crafters who wanted to take the shinobi on as customersC would end up moving to live close to the shinobis settlements. And in the same way that shinobi had clans and families, the sellers and workers didnt just come to the village all by themselves either. They brought along their clans and families too. There were a lot of normal people who moved to the village along with their family for the sake of trade, as well as people who were originally shinobi but were now taking up different professions. There were also those who thought to themselves, I dont come from a clan of shinobi, but I want to send my child to the Ninja Academy and moved to the village with that intent. Shinobi households, merchant households, crafters householdsmany, many different people from varying backgrounds and professions all came to live together in the village. And as the moon waned, and the months and years passed, it was with those people that the settlement became the large metropolis that it was today. And that huge village, even now, was still continuing to grow and advance. Konohas great size made it so that circling around the entire village even once would be a tremendous effort. Going that kind of distance could even end up breaking your bones. And yet, for a while now, someone had been running round and round the village of Konoha. That someone was Rock Lee. Dawn hadnt even broken yet, and he was staggering as he ran around the village, with a face that looked like he could die any moment. Why, exactly, was he running around by himself at this hour of night, when all the villagers and shinobi without missions were soundly asleep? It wasnt for any particular secret training. As a matter of fact, Lee wasnt even running because he felt like he wanted to run. If he could, then Lee would have dearly liked to go back home and sleep. However, he had a certain circumstance that meant he couldnt do that. Everything had started about half a day earlier On that day, the Sixth Hokage Hatake Kakashi proclaimed a certain, special mission to those within Konoha. It was a secret operation that Uzumaki Naruto and his fiance Hyuuga Hinata absolutely could not find about. Cleary stated: All those who will attend Naruto and Hinatas upcoming wedding must bring wedding gifts. A ridiculous mission, isnt it? It was something that everyone would likely have ended up doing anyway. Youd rightly assume that among the wedding guests there were people who had already bought wedding presents, or made preparations for them. However, most of Naruto and Hinatas friends were as young as they were. Most of them either hadnt ever attended a wedding before, or were attending a close friends wedding for the first time. It was likely for the sake of that majority of inexperienced wedding guests, that Kakashi had given this task a mission status. After all, while he looked quiet and calm on the surface, Kakashi was a man with a sense of humour. This top secret mission of his was something that fit his style. That being said, there was someone among the wedding guests who had taken the words top secret mission completely at face value. Someone who had received the mission proclamation with far more passion than anyone else. That someone was, of course, Konohas self-proclaimed Beautiful Green Wild Beast: Rock Lee. I will repay Naruto-kuns friendship by putting my whole body and mind into finding the best wedding gift! Lee had declared to Kakashi, and then taken off running into the distance. Lee was someone who firmly believed that you could come up with a lot of ideas during training. His personality wasnt that of someone who would think while sitting still. Moving my body will help me think better was what he had thought. However Le had run and run around the huge village countless times, but he hadnt been able to think up any ideas. Well, to be more accurate, he had thought of one thing. Somewhere around his second run around the village, the word dumbbell had popped into Lees mind But, that was ridiculous. Even Lee knew that nobody would ever bring dumbbells as a congratulatory gift to a wedding. Thus, his only idea had been rejected immediately. And although hed kept running and running, since then, Lee hadnt thought of any other ideas, let alone a good one. It had to be a present that nobody else would bring, something that spoke of his own character as well a gift that expressed his hearta gift that would be received with pleasure, the best gift ever But no matter how much he thought and thought, the right answer just wouldnt come. The bonds between myself and Naruto should be better than this! Lee had muttered to himself as he ran. He came to a resolution: Until he thought of a gift, he wasnt going to stop running! His heart was set on it. Lees Personal Rule was in motion. That Personal Rule of Lees had been brought into existence for the sake of bettering his mind and body through training. The rule was this: once Lee decided he was going to do something, then even if it looked like the world was going to crumble and disappear tomorrow, he would still see it through to the end. It was a principle he stuck to with overwhelming devotion. Until he could think of a nice present besides dumbbells, Lee would run endlessly if he had to. By the way, Lee wasnt counting just running around the village border as one run. The same way one goes back and forth around a room when theyre wiping its floors- with such an example, its easy to imagine the scene, isnt it? For Lee, one run around the village meant running through the entire village, every nook and cranny and road that the village had. It was a very simple-minded way of counting. Of course, that meant that Lees path also included jumping over fences, hopping from tree to tree, and running over the roofs of closely packed houses. It wasnt anything out of the ordinary, for a shinobi to take unusual paths like this through the hidden village. In fact, it was incredibly common, so much that the normal citizens no longer took notice of it. So there wouldnt be any landlords complaining about Lee running over the roofs. At most, one person would maybe send one complaint in the morning: Some man with thick eyebrows was yelling KUUAAA as he ran across our roof at dawn, he was really very noisy. And so, under the watchful eyes of the previous Hokages faces all carved into the mountain overlooking Konoha, Lee jumped and ran and leaped all across the village. He kept that up the whole night without a single new idea occurring to him. And that is how Lee found himself greeting a new days dawn without a single wink of sleep. At this time, the light of sunrise was now reaching out to touch the carved stone faces on the Hokage Monument that stood in the city centre of Konoha. Eighthundredand sixtyfour Lees breathing was coming out in hoarse wheezes and puffs as he gasped out that number. His running had deteriorated to a delirious staggering, to the point where anyone walking would be faster than him. He had finally reached his limit. Lees legs buckled from underneath him, as he helplessly pitched forward and collapsed. He didnt even have the strength to try and soften his landing, falling straight onto the ground with a sudden thud. Lee lay unmoving on the ground, face down in the dirt, and wondered where he had gone wrong. First, there was the idea that his mind would clear if he moved his body. Had he been wrong about that? No, that wasnt possible. It wasnt wrong. Lee quickly rejected that thought. Then, was it that idea to do a handstand run in the middle of his run around? He had thought it would help give him a different perspective to think from, but had that been a bad idea? No, sometimes you needed to do audacious things to produce new ideas. Not to mention doing one handstand run around the village was part of his normal training schedule. That couldnt have been where he went wrong either. Could it have been that uncommon method hed tried of running backwards? No, that was a perfectly fine method of exercise. He had done absolutely nothing wrong. But then, in that case, why had he been unable to think of anything? Lee gazed numbly at the ground in front of him. His body had been burning hot just a while ago, but it was now getting cold in the chilly morning air. The sweat covering his body turned freezing cold, and Lees body started shivering. But hed exerted every single muscle in his body past the point of caution, and no longer had the energy to get up. Even though its for a dear friend, even though I said Id put my heart into getting a wedding present. To think that I havent been able to come up with one good idea. Why am I so incompetent? Lee squeezed his eyes tightly shut, angry with himself for being such a disappointment. However, he couldnt just let things end by saying he was incompetent and useless. He had decided to find a worthy gift even if he had to put his life at stake, so he couldnt possibly just stop and give up here. The fatigued and exhausted Lee let his eyes snap open again, flames of determination burning within them once more. However, once he opened his eyes, Lee came to realise something: Someone was standing in front of him. When had that happened? There was a pair of legs in Lees vision, with a familiar looking uniform. Lee was surprised that he hadnt noticed the person until now. They seemed to be watching him. Lee slowly raised himself off the ground, and looked up. To see. That person. Neji Lee quietly murmured. Maybe he was an illusion or maybe he was a ghost, but there he stood: his deceased friend, Hyuuga Neji. Running without a break until you collapse. Neji said, watching him with his usual calm gaze. Youre still the same as ever, Lee. Lee had no words. There were hundreds upon hundreds of things Lee wanted to tell Neji the next time they met. But with Neji in front of him, he found himself miserably unable to make a single sound. But even if he didnt say anything, Neji understood it all. For some reason or another, that was the thought that entered Lees mind as he looked up at Nejis always all-knowing eyes. Neji crouched down next to Lee. Theres something that I really have to tell you Neji said, putting a kind hand on Lees shoulder. Nejis hand felt warm and encouraging. Lee suddenly thought it was likely that Neji had appeared because he was concerned over how much Lee had been pushing himself. NejiI I know. No need to say it. Neji smiled, his long hair swaying slightly. Lee, remember this well. More than stamina physical strength. And, the Hyuuga Neji paused. It was unclear whether he was finished with what he was saying or not. His figure got wrapped up in the morning mist, and disappeared. .eh? The wind was blowing swiftly, rustling the nearby trees and pulling away the morning mist. EhC waitC Neji? Neji?! Lee looked left and right, desperately searching his surroundings, but the only thing that met Lees bewildered voice was the morning silence. EEH?! We-werent you going to give me some advice about the wedding presents Ive been so frantic about? Isnt that why you appeared? NEJIIIIIII?! NEJIIIIIII?! Lee got up with a start as he shouted for his friend. It was now morning. Pretty early on, but late enough that the majority of people had already woken up and started preparing to greet the new day. Lee dazedly looked around, trying to take stock of his current situation. Somehow, it looked like hed fallen asleep right in the middle of a road. It was a good thing that he hadnt passed out on the village boarder. So it wasa dream Lee murmured to himself, his mouth dry and parched for water. A short, fleeting dream. Lee sat numbly on the road, and hung his head. Nejis death had been a long time ago. A handful of years had already passed. But even now, Lee still occasionally saw Neji in his dreams. They usually came in those hastily taken naps in the middle of an extremely difficult mission, or when Lee was having a hard time thinking over something. But only occasionally. Most of the time, no matter how much Lee wanted to see him, Neji wouldnt appear. When Neji did appear, Lees dreams were usually about going through vigorous training with Neji, or heading out on a dangerous mission with Neji, the two of them together against harsh odds. There had been very few dreams were Lee could actually face Neji and talk to him. Most of his dreams were about things that had already happened. Training, or fighting against an enemy, or strategizing on a mission. It would be Neji calmly talking about ond strategy or another, and Lee standing next to him, listening intently. Whenever Lee woke up from those dreams, phrases would spill out of his lips. Lets make a more dynamic frontal assault! or Ill go out in the front, so please watch out for our surroundings!. All things he couldnt say to Neji inside his dreams. If I said this to Neji, what sort of a face would he make? How would he reply? Lately, it was getting harder and harder to imagine how Neji would have reacted. Lee was terribly, keenly aware of that fact. A strong voice suddenly rushed out at Lees slumped back. Lee, thats some nice youth youve got this early in the morning! Lee looked over his shoulder to see a man behind him, smiling widely so the white of his teeth showed, his hand raised in a thumbs up. It was his teacher of spirit, Might Guy. However Ga-Gai sensei Lee found himself at a loss for words. The reason was that Gai, who had been restricted to living his life in a wheelchair, had somehow gotten himself and his wheelchair onto the roof of a nearby toolshed. During the Fourth Shinobi World War, Gai had put his life at stake during his battle with Uchiha Madara, and opened the Eight Gates. His life at least had been saved thanks to Naruto, however his right leg had lost its ability to function. From that day onwards, Gai had lived his life in a wheelchair. However, he hadnt changed his hot-blooded ways, carving the word youth onto the cast on his right leg, and still encouraging and guiding Lee as he always did. Lee had been stunned speechless because he couldnt fathom how his teacher had possibly managed to get onto the toolsheds roof with his wheelchair. Suddenly- TOU! Gai gave a great battle cry, launching himself and the wheelchair off the sheds roof. He somehow managed to angle the wheelchair for a smooth landing, if with a very loud BANG. Lee rushed over to his sensei, flustered and worried. Sensei, that was very dangerous! Why would you want to do something like that There has to be a great number of people in the world who think you cant fly in a wheelchair! So Ive decided to prove them wrong with my own body. Gai spoke of such a terrifying notion with incredible ease and calm. Such a feat wouldve been absolutely impossible for anyone else, anyone who didnt have Gais exceptional control over his body and fit physical state. Everyone in the village, Kakashi and Ebisu and Genma too, they still treat me like a shinobi. That makes me happy. Even though I shouldve retired long ago So, because of that, Ive decided to keep on proving the impossible to be possible, and show my usual self to you guys! Gai said, giving his Nice Guy Pose. Thats my youth, after all! Gais words deeply touched Lees heart. They had always been like that. When Lee was suffering, when he was in pain, when his heart felt like it was going to break into pieces, every single one of Gais words had saved him, time and time again. Even now, Lee took courage from hearing Gais words. He wanted to someday become a magnificent man like Gai. He wanted to become a man who would warmly encourage another lost and confused soul like himself. That was a dream Lee held onto even when he was awake. By the way, Gai-sensei, what are you doing here? The question suddenly occurred to Lee, and Gai replied with light chatter. My morning training of course. I thought that Id spend today travelling back and forth all around the village. How about it Lee, would you like to join me? Thank you, Ive already done such training. Impressive. However, the matter thats bothering you still hasnt been settled, has it? Lees eyes opened wide in surprise at Gais sharp observation. Ho- How did you know?! It only took one glance at you to realise youd spent all night training and worrying about something. How many years do you think Ive been spending youthful time with you? Thats why from the very start I said to you nice youth this early in the morning. It was only after Gai said that that Lee realised how awful he looked. He was covered in mud, and absolutely unsightly in appearance. He had stumbled a few times in his fatigue, falling and rolling on the ground. It was all the dirt left over from those runarounds. And its very likely that youre concerned over the matter of wedding gifts, isnt that right? Lee got panicked by Gais even shrewder question. Gai-sensei, can you read my mind?! No, its because Im invited to the wedding as well Gai was concerned over the wedding gifts too. All would be well as long as the wedding present wasnt ordinary. However, the problem lay in making sure the present wasnt too strange, either. Wasnt there a wedding present that combined the feelings he wanted to convey, something that radiated the feelings of victory, friendship and hard work? Lee and Gai were both racking their brains for an answer. What kind of a present would embody the passion of youth? Was there really any such present in this world? Well if anything represented youth, it would be how they both wore their smart looking tight green jumpsuits. When you said burning youth the first things to come to mind would be sweat and tears, right? Could sweat and tears be turned into a gift somehow? No? To begin with, people were living off nothing but will power, werent they? What kind of curry was better, bland or extra spicy? Their conversation reached its climax. No, after all, Lee heatedly said, The me of today definitely thinks that Curry Pilaf is better- Wait, hold on Lee. Gai held out a hand and interrupted him. Weve gone off subject too much. In matters like this, one must concentrate. We should retrace our steps back to the root of this conversation. So we should return, to the root? Yeah, originally, this problem of a wedding presents is all about the wedding itself, right? Somehow their conversation had turned too philosophical. When Lee failed to contribute more to the talk, Gai asked another question. Lets think about it like this: what is the one thing that you absolutely must bring to a wedding? Lees gaze focused as he thought seriously about it. What was a wedding? Something necessary for a wedding A wedding was a ceremony where two people who loved each other became husband and wife. In that case, something absolutely essential to that ceremony would be- Itslove Lee said, looking straight at Gai despite being somewhat embarrassed at the subject. Thats whats necessary isnt it? Thats very poetic. But Lee, wouldnt the answer be the bride and groom? Lee felt like lightning had hit him along with Gais words. His entire body stiffened like hed just been hit with a lightning release jutsu. Unconsciously, a loud AHH! leaked out of his mouth. Th- thats right! Lee said, If the bride and groom arent there, there can be no wedding ceremony! Right? A wedding ceremony without the bride and groom would just be a plain ceremony, not a wedding. A useless ceremony without any meaning! Lee had been blind. Gai may have seemed like an impulsive and clumsy person, but he really was a thoughtful person. He had the ability to see beyond the surface and into the root of the matter. For Lee, that had always been something about Gai that he looked up to and aspired to also do. In that case, we need to think about this from the perspective of the bride and groom, and bring gifts that they would be happy to receive. That would be best, wouldnt it? Exactly. Gai said. Yosh, then Ill think up a present for the groom! Lee, you think up one for the bride! Roger, Gai-sensei! Lets think about this not from our perspective as the givers, but from their perspective as the receivers! The two men faced each other with their bowl cut hair and bushy eyebrows, and clasped each others hands, thinking seriously about the matter. It was quite a spectacle in the early morning. Lee was desperately trying to think from the brides point of view. If I was a bride, thenId be dressed up in the bridal clothes and going to my wedding And after that Wedding, childbirth, housework, nursing Words and images flashed across Lees mind in successive order. Going shipping with the baby in my arms. Keeping an eye on the baby as I clean its room. Carrying the baby on my back as I open the Seventh of the Eight Gatesthe Gate of Shock! Having a baby is a surprisingly serious matter. To raise and look after a child, then undoubtedly, you need both physical and economical strength, right? In that instance, an image entered Lees mind. He could imagine Hinata tenderly holding a child, and Naruto gazing at the both of them. And suddenly Lee realised that this whole time he had been thinking only of what to give Naruto as a wedding gift. It was only deliberately trying to think of the brides feelings that let him realise that. A wedding wasnt something you did by yourself. That said, the best gift for someone who would eventually be a motherC Lee, remember this well. More than stamina physical strength Nejis words from that dream came to mind. I finally understand Neji. You were worried about Hinata, werent you? Lee nodded to himself, and then I know what it is! Lee peacefully said. To protect ones house and family, physical strength is neededAnd on top of that, the highest possible level! Gai nodded, answered as well. Right now, I thought all the work that goes into fixing up faults around the house. Pest control and plumbing and carrying groceries. One must skilfully develop their arm muscles for such tasksIn that case, the answer we both came up with must be the same. The gifts that we should bestow are Gai grinned at Lee with delight. Dumbbells! Lee became aware of a tear leaking out his eye. I too Lee sniffed. Right from the startfrom my second round across the villageI thought of that as well! Tears were rolling uncontrollably down Lees face now. Gai sensei! Gai senseeeeeeeeiii! Lee sobbed, and threw himself to embrace his teacher. Lee was ecstatic. His thoughts had not been wrong. His sensei had approved his idea. His joy was pure and simple. Gai was crying too. As tears leaked out his cheeks, he tightened the hug. Lee! You get the dumbbell for the right arm, and Ill get the dumbbell for the leeeeeeeeeeeft! Gai yelled the up towards the heavens. UOOOO! ILL GET THE LEFT DUMBBEEEEEEEELLLLLLL!! For a long time, the two clung to each other and cried. Thanks to Gai, Lee had finally found a wedding present that suited his feelings for the couple. His heart felt light and clear. Very soon after their revelation, the two had gone to buy dumb bells straight away. The merchant was very surprised to sell two dumb bells so early in the morning. Please have a look at this, Neji. Ill show you the wedding present I got. These dumbbells! Gai grinned at the strong look in Lees eyes. Lee, with this our preparations for the wedding are fully complete! Yes! These weights we carrythey will definitely be the best wedding presents! Yosh, lets have a race while holding onto them then! Here we goooooooooo! The minute those words left Gais mouth, he started fervently turning the tyres on his wheelchair, zooming ahead of Lee in a sudden gust of dirt and wind. Lee was left staring at the slowly disappearing sight of his Senseis back in the wheelchair. Wait for me please, sensei!! Today as well, Konohagakure was full of a very youthful sort of weather. On that note Afterwards, Kakashi did in fact receive several complaints, all along the same lines: Early in the morning, two strange men were crying and screaming about something behind my house. So noisy! * No, thats not a typo. The A-N written on Konohas gates does sound like aun, which is, not-coincidently, the sound you make when you open your mouth to eat or yawn. Besides that awesome punnage, in Japanese culture, a and n are the first and last sounds of the Universe, so the gates also carry the symbolism of marking Konoha as a sort of sanctuary. Volume 4 - CH 2 Her Everyday Life KA! KA! KA! The sounds splitting out with every hit were pleasant to Tentens ears. She was at the usual training grounds. Her usual marks. Her usual training method. Her feelings, however, were just a little bit different from usual. Wedding gifts, huh As she muttered hereself, she raised back the kunai in her hands, and smoothly threw it. Another KA! rang out, her kunai lodging right in the middle of her prepared marks. It was marvellous marksmanship. But then, for someone as well trained in weapons as Tenten, hitting the bullseye of a non-moving target from where she stood was nothing, a piece of cake. Tenten usually headed out to training before she ate her breakfast. On days she didnt have missions, she always preferred to do this. Shed head out to the training grounds in the early morning, practice with kunai and shuriken until her body felt warmed up, and then go and eat breakfast. She usually ended up eating breakfast on the training grounds, though. Her usual pattern for breakfast was eating the steamed meat buns sold by a nearby shop, and washing it down with green tea. What should I do Tenten murmured to herself again, and threw out her arm once more. KA KA KA! A handful of shuriken were flung from her hand this time, perfectly encircling the kunai that shed thrown and pierced the bullseye with. Again, it was a show of skill so easy and simple for her that she could do it with her eyes closed. But then, it wasnt something easy for just Tenten alone. This level of marksmanship in practice was something that anyone who called themselves a shinobi was well-versed and well-practiced in doing. In fact, it was something students soon learned to master after entering the Ninja Academy. It was also very normal for students who came from renowned shinobi households to have the skill taught to them by a parent or sibling even before entering the Academy. To put it simply, what Tenten was now practicing was one of the most basic techniques. If you asked why Tenten was still practicing such a basic skill, the answer would be that shed been influenced by her teacher, Gai, and his words. Anyone who neglects their basics wont see tomorrow! Those were the words Gai had said when shed first started being taught by him. His words had made a very big impression on the young Tenten. Lee who was standing next to her, was so deeply affected he started crying, and naturally ruined the moment. But, Tenten still took Gais teachings to heart and continued to diligently practice her basics to this very day. To begin with, Tenten had never been a ninja with mastery over a wide variety of jutsu. Ever since the old days, while she did have a talent for space-time jutsu, her chakra control was worse than other ninjas. Shed realised early on that shed never be the sort of ninja who could pull out large scale or complicated jutsus. However, just because she had noticed that early on, that didnt mean Tenten had gone and given up on being a strong and impressive kunoichi. She didnt have that sort of weak mindset. In Tentens case, it had been a good thing that she had been able to realise what she was suited for and what she was bad at while she was still young. Because as soon as Tenten knew what her limits were, she started to frantically think about what field would be best suited for her as a shinobi. And when she found the answer, she was quickly able to resign herself to that path, and pursue it full-heartedly. The answer Tenten had found was: Ninja Weaponry. Handling weapons like shuriken or kunai was the norm for anyone who called themselves a shinobi, but there was no one who specialised in weaponry Clet alone someone who mastered it. That was what Tenten devoted herself to. It went without being said that she aimed to be more skilful than any other shinobi when it came to common weapons, but she also trained herself to fight with weapons that other shinobi rarely ever used, weapons that other shinobi wouldnt even recognise on sight, weapons of every kind and variety. Tenten forged herself a unique path to walk on. When it came down to it, the reason shed had such thoughts was most likely because of her teacher Gai, and her teammates Lee and Neji. Theyd influenced her greatly. Gais name was renowned for being the best Taijutsu user in the village. Lee admired him, and simple-mindedly trained to be just as he was. And Neji had always been called a genius in the jutsu of the Gentle Fist passed down in his renowned family, the Hyuuga. Tenten had spent time with them, trained with them, occasionally sparred with them and gained a considerable grounding in taijutsu. To begin with, before ninjutsu or genjutsu came into the picture, taijutsu had been the groundwork of shinobi accomplishments. Tenten learned taijutsu fiercely under Gais tutelage, and she did well. However, Lee and Neji were both learning and training along with her, and Tenten eventually came to realise that she was never going to reach their level of stamina or physical strength. Team Gai had the highest level of taijutsu competency in the entire village, and by training under Gai and sparring with Lee and Neji, Tentens level had come to the point where her taijutsu was superior compared to every other shinobi but her teammates. In the midst of all her training, part of Tenten couldnt help but unconsciously compare herself to Lee or Neji, or even Gai. Im the most incapable within this team. That was the thought that nagged Tenten every second of her training. However, that thought was what had spurred her onto her unique path. Gai and the rest could break a boulder with their bare fists. Tenten didnt have the ability to so much as consider doing that with her own hands. That was why she armed her hands with kunai. So she could be equals with Lee and Neji. So she could walk alongside them. In time, Tenten did end up polishing her talent for space-time jutsu, and learned how to summon endless varieties of ninja weapons using scrolls. By that time, partly due to all her days spent learning about various weapons, Tenten had become completely enraptured by the charm of Ninja Weaponry. She looked twice at the weapons she held in her hands, and marvelled at their beautiful simplicity,. Back in her Academy days, shed had female classmates who said that kunai were plain and dull. They didnt understand a thing. It wasbecause a kunai was plain and dull that it was so charming. Tenten hadnt said her thoughts out loud back then, but her current self would. Her current self was continuing to train with the goal of becoming the number one master of Ninja Weaponry, after all. Her thoughts were devoted to Ninja Weaponry more than anyone elses. Even the crudest blade had a beautiful side to it. Ninjutsu and Genjutsu, and even Taijutsu, none of them could win against the beauty of Ninja Weaponry. Of course, while she would say her thoughts out loud if she wanted, that didnt mean Tenten went around unnecessarily lecturing people about them. She expressed her thoughts with her actions, not her words. The sight of her kunai smoothly slicing through a target, for example, was far better than any worded explanation. That was how Tenten thought. But she had to make sure her aim was superb, or there would be no point. Thats why Tenten didnt skip a single day of practicing the basics. Every day, she silently polished her weapons, readied them for practice, and hit her targets. Lee and NejiTenten watched their hardwork and talent more close than anyone, and they were why she put every effort into her training. Because no matter how strong those two got, they never neglected their basics either. All of that was why Even though these basic skills were things that anyone could do, that anyone could manage to do well as long as they had good instincts, even if they didnt practice much, even so Tenten still practiced tens and thousands of times, repeating the motions again and again. Her body, her arms, even her very fingertips, she was going to practice and practice, and instil instinct into every inch of her. In actual combat, the mark wasnt going to just kindly stay still for you. She wouldnt have the luxury of aiming from a standstill either. If you stand still, youre going to die. But Tenten still always started out practicing by throwing kunai into the middle of still targets. She eventually ends up throwing the kunai hundreds and hundreds of times, repeating the motions over and over again, and then eventually Eventually, even when her targets are moving in complex patters, for a single instant, she can feel like theyre still. Be it kunai or shuriken, they fly from her hands and sink into the targets like the mark is calling for them. To constantly practice a basic skill that anyone can do, every single day, without skipping it once, repeating it over and over againthat dedication was something not just anyone could do. The world had to be able to see that. And so her dedicated training eventually bore fruit. Her skill increased to the point that if you now asked any of her comrades who the best weapon user was, their answer would be immediately be Obviously, its Tenten. It was a natural result of her hard work, but it was something that made her extremely happy. Of course, she felt proud about it too. But today, devoting all her thoughts to Ninja Weaponry was something that was causing her a bit of trouble. Argh- this- I cant think of anything! Several loud thuds of ZUGAGAGAGA accompanied Tentens annoyed voice, and a bunch of shuriken thudded into their targets, the loud noises echoing across the empty training grounds. She was surrounded by targets that were covered with kunai and shuriken. Of course, not a single one was off-mark. When Tenten had first heard about the wedding gift business, shed immediately thought to herself, Alright, Ill give them some custom-made kunai! She had made her decision, was satisfied with it, and the whole thing should have been over with right then. However, that night Tenten had been lying down in her futon, looking listlessly up at her ceiling. She was almost on the verge of sleep when a single thought broke into her mind: Other than a kunai, I wonder what sort of a gift would be good? Tenten was shocked when she couldnt immediately think of anything. She ended up spending the rest of the night growing more and more agitated when she couldnt find the answer. Thanks to that, she hadnt gotten a wink of sleep. Stifling a yawn, Tenten moved forward to collect her shuriken and kunai from where they had been embedded on the many targets. There were lots of posts sticking out on the training grounds that Tenten frequented. Some of them were as tall as a normal person. Other users usually used the stakes for when they were training in taijutsu, for kicking and punching. Tenten, on the other hand, used the stakes to mount the targets that she brought along. She approached those targets, firmly and quickly pulling out the embedded kunai and shuriken in each one. For a while, she repeated the motion with each target, wracking her brain with thought the whole time. She was no longer thinking about buying weapons as a gift, kunai or otherwise. Her train of thought had long left that option behind. The thing was that, if you asked Tenten, a gift of any Ninja Weaponry was something shed happily receive. So naturally, everyone would expect that her gift to the couple would be a Ninja Weapon as well. There was nothing strange about it. But, see, wait! Wouldnt that just be too predictable and ordinary? Ever since last night, for some reason or another, thoughts like that kept circling around her head. Something was nagging at her. What was bothering her? The truth was, she already knew the answer. Marriage, huhwell its a nice thing Tenten exhaled, leaning against one of the stakes. Her hands silently played with one of the kunai shed collected. This was what had been bothering her. Naruto and Hinata were getting married. It was a happy occasion. Tenten herself had always been getting caught up in thinking about shuriken or kunai or flying guillotines, so shed never had a boyfriend. She lived her life without any thoughts for romance or femininity. Hearing about someone close to her getting married suddenly made one disturbing thought fly into Tentens mind and refuse to leave: Was it really okay for her to be like this? From morning until night, it was always NinjaWeaponry, Ninja Weaponry, Ninja Weaponry Was it really okay for a young woman to be like that? On that note, the most recent feeling of love at first sight for Tenten had been for the flying guillotine. She only had to hear the weapons name before deciding she liked it, and then gone and bought it. But well, how could she not? And her latest favourite fashion was definitely wrist accessories. There was a device you could wrap around your wrist, and with one single pull, roll out a scroll for summoning weapons in an instant. The convenience was brilliant. You could carry out an assassination anywhere, any time. It was the latest in cutting edge technology. Butwas it really okay for her to be like that? Shed collected a large and varied enough collection of Ninja Weaponry to open her own store if she wanted to, but she somehow always ended up buying new kunai before she even realised what she was doing. Kunai really were the basics of Ninja Weaponry. Tenten had strong feelings about them. She had collected both common and rare weapons, but at the end of the day, kunai were always the best. She collected both common and rare types of kunai. Well, that was fine, wasnt it? You could never have too many kunai. First there were those rare kunai with engravings on it. She couldnt carry those on missions. They were a work of art. It would be best to keep them on display at home. But then, because of those kunai being at home, she needed to buy a few more kunai for mission supplies. And if those ended up running out too quickly, shed be in trouble, so she had to buy a lot of spares as well. And then, well, since she was out shopping for kunai anyway, it was best to buy a lot of different varieties at once to save time, right? That was how Tenten ended up unconsciously covering an entire wall in her house with her kunai collection. She was incredibly pleased with it. Shed gaze at it in satisfaction and think alright, on tomorrows mission Ill be able to smoothly hit all my targets. But Was it really okayfor her to be like that? It wasnt a good idea. If she went on like this and, for example, gave those custom-made kunai as a present, then it was doubtless that everyone would say this: Kunai, again? Well, its Tenten Tentens always all about kunai The images of everyone saying that popped into Tentens mind. It vexed her. Im not just some kunai woman. I have a flying guillotine too, you know. Youre wrong. Thats not all I am. Tenten started sharpening another kunai as she brooded. If she could find a wedding gift other than a custom-made kunai, something suitable and elegant, then So you werent just all about kunai! Wow, as expected of Tenten! You know, Tenten is someone with a great sense of aesthetic beauty! Those reactions would be good. What kind of a wedding present would get those kinds of reactions? The wedding was coming up soon, so she had to go absolutely everywhere to try and find a good gift. From shops shed already been to before to smart-looking general stores, she thought she should go and have a good look. Ughh, but my funds are limited The flying guillotine had been expensive. But it had been one of a kind C she couldnt not buy it. If youre wavering, buy it. That was Tentens rule that had gotten her to make such a large weapon collection. Wellthen to sum it up Tenten closed her eyes, and tried to go over all the details in her mind. Realistically speaking, she had to think of her budget first. She had to properly manage her finances if she wanted to buy a gift. Next, since she wanted to think of a gift that wasnt a custom-made kunai, she had to think about the features of a custom-made kunai, and think of gifts that were the complete opposite. That way, Tenten concluded, shed think of something good. Then, in that case, that limited her options for a wedding gift to Tenten calmly opened her eyes. Something that I can afford with my limited budget. Something that gives off the feelings of a young woman. Something that doesnt kill people That would be! I have no idea what that is! It was no good. Her head was a mess. She didnt even understand what she was trying to say anymore. The kunai shed been unconsciously sharpening in her hand was now dull but shiny. She hadnt been paying attention and done a bad job. The thought of having to admit she was a woman with no merit besides Ninja Weaponry made Tenten feel awful. If she didnt do something, she was going to have to There had to be something, something else, wasnt there anything? And, at that momentC Tenteeeeen! Tenteeeeeeen! She heard someones voice calling her name from a distance. The person sounded like they were getting slowly getting closer. She knew who it was even before they came into her field of sight. The only person whod be running around with such a loud voice this early in the morning was Lee. But when Lees figure finally approach theed training grounds, Tentens eyes grew wide at the state of him. Tenteeee! Lee waved enthusiastically as he ran towards her with a smile. Have you already decided on the wedding gift? Lee?! Tenten burst out. What on earth are you doing?! Lee was unmistakably dressed like a woman. A housewife, in fact. Hed even gone as far as to wear an apron over the dress. He looked like a middle aged housewife coming home from shopping. Was that make up hed tried to put on his face? Hed overdone the powderC his whole face looked unnaturally pale. And was that red smear on his mouth lipstick? Hed even made his eyebrows larger Cno, on second thought, the eyebrows looked about the same. Either way, it was a sudden and unexpected appearance that Tenten absolutely didnt understand. There wasnt anything strange about being surprised by the way Lee looked. If it hadnt been Tenten, but someone who didnt know Lee, they probably wouldve screamed at the sight of him. On top of everything else, for some reason Lee was carrying a dumbbell in one of his hands. It was beyond understanding. At this point, it wasnt so much confusing as it was frightening. Wh-what is this?! Why in the world are you- I got it for the bride, and Gai-sense got it for the groom! Lee gushingly answered, practically shaking in excitement. And my clothes had gotten dirty from running so I thought I should listen to Gai-senseis teachings and think more about the feelings of a bride! So I dressed up like this! And after doing this I really am extra sure that dumbbells were definitely the right choice! You gave me an explanation but I didnt understand a single thing! Tenten retorted. As a matter of fact, she was only more confused. Why the cross dressing? Why dumbbells? It was all incredibly strange. Lee lifted up the dumbbell and cheerfully declared: Gai-sensei and I have decided to give dumbbells as wedding gifts! Tenten, what are you going to give them? In that instant, something inside Tenten cleared away. She didnt understand, and yet she did understand. She didnt comprehend how Lee had ended up wearing a housewifes clothes, but she did understand that he and Gai both seemed to intend to bring dumbbells as gifts to the wedding. And in that moment, all the things shed been worried about suddenly seemed insignificant. The inside of her head suddenly felt clear, like a mist had disappeared. I came to make sure our idea wasnt the same as yours, Lee explained, smiling through his lipstick smeared mouth. No, it isnt the same at all Tenten tried to keep a straight face. Ah, is that so? Im glad! Well then, Ill be continuing with my training! With that get up?! Tenten failed to keep a straight face. When it came to Lee and Gais antics, it was barely possible. She watched Lee run out of the training grounds with the same energy hed run in with. Tenten stretched, and let out a groan. And, with that Custom-made kunai it is! She didnt have any more doubts. Tenten was very confident. Why in the world had she been worried? Compared to dumbbells, her gift was excellent. She felt relieved. She was fine just the way she was, after all. Alright then, back to training, training~ KA! KA! KA! The pleasing sounds of weapons hitting their targets started to ring out again. The usual training grounds. The usual targets. The usual training method. And her usual feelings. This was Tentens everyday life. Volume 4 - CH 3 Meat and Steam The flames shimmered, flickering and swaying from side to side. I wonder why people always find it so calming to watch fire? That curious thought suddenly entered Nara Shikamarus head. It was probably something that had started generations ago, back when people were still waiting on civilisation to happen. In those days, fire had always been a constant companion to people. Fire had illuminated their surroundings and held the darkness of night at bay. It protected people from both the cold and foreign invaders. It had also been used as a signal, to find the location of your comrades, and the way back home. Years and years of those activities had bled into peoples genes, and surely been passed onto Shikamaru himself. That was why, sitting in front of the warm flames, he felt such a soothing feeling. That feeling was passed on in Konohas Will of Fire. From parent to child. From child to grandchild. From teacher to student. From friend to friend. Your feelings were tied to each other. Connected. Maybe that Will of Fire had started out as a small flame that anyone could easily put out. But it hadnt disappeared. Even now, it was still being passed on, from person to person, and still burning bright. It was those connections spanning generations that made fire so soothing. No matter how much time passed, every single cell in Shikamarus body was marked with the memories of those who had come before him, and found fire to be such a comfort. People would use fire to cook food and sit around it, gazing into the flames as they ate. Before they realised what was happening, theyd gather around it in groups of loved ones. Back then, and now, that was a sight that never changed. In fact, in this moment, Shikamaru was sitting in front of a warm fire and eating a meal with his best friend, Akimichi Chouji. Chatter. Laughter. The sound of clinking tableware. Most of all, the sound of sizzling meat as it cooked. Yakiniku Q. It was the usual place for Shikamaru and the rest. When it came to barbecue restaurants like this, people usually expected them to be crowded at night only, and not be all that busy during the day. Yakiniku Q was an exception, always bustling with people during noon and the night. Their meat was cheap, and on top of that high quality, so the restaurant was very popular. And that meant that right now, at this very lunch hour, Yakiniku Q was no different from a battlefield. Orders were being called out from seats on every side, calls for beer or oolong tea or utensils all being met by the hurrying restaurant workers. They were hurrying around the store, circling around all the customers in a rush. The place was hectic. Shikamaru was watching the frantic state of the workers out of the corner of his eye as he put a single piece of meat onto the grill. The deep red colour of the meat almost seemed to shine, the fat glistening like a pearl. Proof that it was fresh. The mouth-watering sizzling sound mixed in with the delicious smell wafting through the restaurant. Shikamaru and Chouji had decided to have lunch here at the usual place. The decision itself had happened just a while ago. Shikamaru had headed out to do some shopping, and bumped into Chouji in the middle of the road. Theyd gotten to talking. Then Chouji said, Its about to be lunchtime anyway, so how about eating some meat together? and here they were at their usual hangout of Yakiniku Q. Shikamaru had entered the shop with the intention of stopping by briefly, like one would do at a tea shop, but Chouji always did this. Some meat hed saidC as if! Chouji never sat down without the intention to dedicate himself to eating all he could. Shikamarus piece of meat on the grill was starting to get nice and juicy. He reached out with his chopsticks and flipped it over. The underside had been grilled beautifully. If the meat got grilled for too long, itd get too hard. You had to keep careful watch to make sure it didnt get over-cooked. Most people liked to let their meat cook for a period of time decided by instinct alone, but a recent research study had concluded that those people usually ended up cooking their meat for too long. Or at least, that was what Chouji had told Shikamaru while they were talking. Chouji himself, right in the middle of criticising those over-cookers, ate a piece of meat off the grill that didnt look anywhere near cooked yet. Chouji had a tendency to eat meat when it was still too close to raw for comfort. Shikamaru thought it was better to grill meat a bit more. His piece on the grill looked like it was about ready to eat. Just as Shikamaru reached out with his chopsticks, his meat was snatched away before his very eyes. Chouji. He had grabbed the piece and stuffed it into his mouth with a large sound of content. That wasmy meat Huh? Ohhhh, sorry Shikamaru. I saw it was ready to eat, and before I even realised, my hands just Chouji looked apologetic as he realised hed snatched up the wrong meat. Ah well, its alright. Theres still plenty more meat to eat, after all. So saying, Shikamaru put another piece of meat on the grill. He turned back to Chouji with a broad grin, and said: After all, better you eat it than having it burnt to a crisp, right? Chouji grinned back at his friend, and then returned his focus to chewing the contraband meat in his mouth, adding some rice too. This meat is really good. He mumbled as he chewed. Shikamaru stared, wondering if Chouji had noticed the despicable timing of that comment. Cooking with a charcoal-powered grill is really hard for amateurs. Chouji continued. So when it comes to cooking and eating a lot of meat at the same time, gas-powered grills are the best. They really chose a great method for cooking good meat. Yup, Chouji was blissfully ignorant. His comment had been about the meats cooking method being good. While Chouji talked, he kept guzzling down more rice, too. Oh man, at this rate the bowl was gonna get empty in no time. Shikamaru somehow managed to flag down a restaurant worker in the chaos and ask for another serving of rice. The thing about Choujis unapologetically large appetite was that it felt nice to watch him eat. Watching him eat somehow made Shikamaru feel full too, even though he hadnt eaten all that much, and even got his own meat stolen from right under his nose. It was because of this that Shikamaru somehow always found himself unnecessarily meddling to make sure Chouji ate well. In the end, he pushed the second piece of meat hed put on the grill towards Chouji as well. Chouji handled his chopsticks with frightening skill, and the meat disappeared in the blink of an eye. One by one, rows of barely cooked meat all disappeared into the insides of Choujis mouth. Chouji looked incredibly happy after eating so much meat. On top of that, somehow hed lately started looking dignified while eating as well. Meat, rice, meat, rice, meat, rice, meat, meat, meat Chouji continued eating nonstop, and as Shikamaru watched the spectacle, he concluded the new impression of dignity was because of Choujis goatee. Lately, Choujis overall appearance had changed a bit. The first thing that caught peoples eyes when they looked at him was the goatee. It wasnt grown ridiculously long either, but kept nicely short and well maintained. That wasnt all. Choujis hair had been cut a little shorter as well, and swept neatly back. It gave his overall appearance a clean, tidy, and composed look. There was no doubt about it. It was the goatee. When you had that coupled with his hair and the other differences in his appearance, then Chouji looked like a respected adult, even to Shikamaru whod known him for years. That was why there was a new dignity to how Chouji looked when he ate as well. Maybe I should grow a goatee too Shikamaru muttered as he leaned against the back of his chair. Eh? Why dyou wanna do that? Chouji momentarily looked up from his frantic eating. As much as he looked like he lost himself in his food, Chouji always listened carefully when Shikamaru was talking. Shikamaru recognised that fact, and kept talking, Unlike you, I look like I havent changed at all since I was a kid, dont I? Shikamaru said, touching the ponytail on top of his head. Shikamaru had always kept his hair like this, ever since he was a kid. It was a simple ponytail, his long hair gathered and tied up above his head. It wasnt that he had been determined to keep his hair like that or anything. It was just that for someone as inherently lazy as Shikamaru, this was the easiest way to deal with his hair. If you had to say he was determined on anything, then it was probably that he was determined to keep his hair and clothes as simple and easy as possible. But then, it wasnt like he was determined to struggle to keep things easy till the bitter end, or anything like that. So you couldnt really say it was because he was determined for things to be easy, either. It just turned out that way because he didnt really care. Shikamaru didnt understand people who went to ridiculous lengths to change the way they looked, the kind who went to so much trouble to carefully pick out their clothes or put on airs. He thought the best kinds of clothes were those you could carelessly wear anywhere, anytime, the kind that let you comfortably watch clouds or take a nap. When he was a kid, Shikamaru used to think if I could, Id like to spend every day just sitting in front of the fire and watching the flames. A kid like that was clearly different than those who cared about what the world or society at large thought of them. So it wasnt surprising that he usually didnt concern himself with his hair or clothes. But seeing his best friend of many years suddenly looking like such a dignified adult gave Shikamaru something to think about. Shikamaru had been made a chuunin at quite a young age, and similarly gotten involved with a lot of jobs to do with the administration of the village. For example, hed been made a supervising examiner of the chuunin exams, and that had him attending a lot of meetings about them, intervillage and otherwise, and in every single one of those meetings hed naturally been surrounded by people who were older than him. Since he found himself tasked with duties like that, Shikamaru often found himself thinking look at this like an adult or be composed as an adult or you have to be firm in your attitude like an adult should. Shikamaru already possessed every possible characteristic associated with behaving like an adult, but at this moment it had suddenly occurred to him to compare himself, who hadnt changed a bit in looks since he was young, to the mature looking Chouji in front of him. And that had resulted in Shikamarus comment about getting a goatee. People always tell me you havent changed at all when they see me Shikamaru grumbled in complaint, still eating. Chouji looked up and tilted his head in confusion. But, when they say that, they probably mean your hair right? Chouji paused, looking down at his empty plate. Ah, obachan, one more serving please! After calling out his order, Chouji wiped his mouth, and looked back at Shikamaru. If you ask me, youve changed a lot since old times. Really? Shikamaru asked. Do I look like an adult? Yeah. Maybe its because youve come out of so many important Shinobi Union meetings. Compared to the old you, your face has really changed. I think you look a lot more steady and capable now. Im the one whos saying it, so it cant be wrong. Chouji had given him a huge seal of approval. Ah, now that you mention it, a lot of people do tell me that I look like my old man. Maybe Shikamaru himself hadnt noticed it because he saw his face in the mirror every day. But still, he couldnt help but think that if he had a goatee hed look a little more dignified Shikamaru put a hand on his currently clean-shaved chin and kept thinking about the matter. As he did so, Choujis ordered serving of meat appeared. It was a huge plate, but most people would be surprised to hear it wasnt for the both of them. Forget the both of them, it was a serving just barely enough for Chouji. That usually surprised people too. But then, both the workers and regular customers here were used to Choujis eating habits by now, so nobody would be surprised. When we all came here for the first time, we ordered this huge serving then too, didnt we Shikamarus thoughts went back to the time soon after he had become a genin. His team had to celebrate here when their first mission had ended safely as well. And after that, after the end of every mission, they often came to this restaurant. The four of them would eat at this same table, and Shikamaru would sit in this very seat. ~ Chouji was being yelled at by their teammate Ino. Hey?! She yelled, Chouji, you ate my meat! Shut up Shikamaru grumbled at the loud noise she was making. It was a mistake. Ino immediately turned to glare at him. What do you mean shut up? Its my meat! Then are you saying youre going to cook the meat? Now hed become a target. This was outrageous. What is this? Shikamaru complained under his breath, putting meat on the grill. Why am I the one who has to cook everything again? Ugh, troublesome Why were women in general so pushy? Shikamaru thought about the matter as he overturned the meat. To start with, there was the woman closest to him: his mother. She was pushier than even normal women were, to an abnormal extent. What in the world had made his old man look at such a frightening woman and think Im going to marry her? Shikamaru absolutely couldnt understand it. This should be enough, right? The meat was just about cooked. At Shikamarus comment, Ino reached out with her chopsticks, a satisfied air around her. But the meat suddenly disappeared. It wasnt a supernatural phenomenon. It was Chouji. Ino threw down her chopsticks and started screaming. On purpose, right?! She shrieked, Youre doing this on purpose! Huh- I just- I saw the meat, so Chouji stuttered. Dont think youre going to get out of this by making vague comments! Ino grabbed Chouji by the collar, still shouting. Bewildered as he was, Chouji still didnt let go of his bowl or chopsticks. Shikamaru grumbled that he was going to end up grilling the meat again anyway, and started putting more meat on the grill. It was the usual scene for their team. And then There was a person happily watching over the three of them. Asuma. ~ Shikamaru came back to the present, and looked at the place Asuma once used to sit. Shikamaru, Chouji, Ino, and Asuma. The four of them used to come to this restaurant after every mission, and crowd around this table. In the past, Shikamaru had thought life would always continue like that. It had been absurd to imagine everyone in a constant loop of youth, but somehow Shikamarus past self had still thought that way. He hadnt been able to imagine what hed be like when he grew up. But, time had passed despite all that. Ino had become more feminine. Choujis appetite hadnt changed, but hed grown a beard. Even Shikamaru had changed before he realised it. And Asumawasnt here anymore. The four of them couldnt be together again. This restaurant, this seat, everything was deeply dyed with the memories of those happy times that Shikamaru couldnt return to. It was because he didnt want to forget those memories that Shikamaru kept stopping by the restaurant, even now. When Shikamaru was surrounded by the familiar fragrance of cooking meat, he could fall into the hallucination where that same smell of tobacco was hanging around as well. Asuma had been an adult. His goatee had always smelled of tobacco from all his countless cigarettes. No matter what the situation was, he had always been calm. Calm and easygoing. Asuma had gone on many travels when he was young, so he had a lot of knowledge, and his skill as a shinobi was even greater. He was like a father, and he was like an older brother. Hed always treat Shikamaru and the team out to meat. Come to think of it, hed always slowly turn pale in the face of Choujis voracious appetite, and frantically rummage around in his wallet to make sure he had enough. Now, Shikamaru and the rest paid for their meals out of their own wallets, with the money theyd earned by themselves. Shikamaru wondered if hed been able to become an adult that was just a bit like Asuma. Shikamaru took the menu into his hand, turning the pages and calculating how much he and Choujis bill would come up to. It would be too expensive to treat him. If they split the tab, then he could comfortably afford it. Oh man, I should eat a bit more while I can Shikamaru eyed Choujis ferocious eating speed, and reached out for some meat of his own. chomp, chomp, chompObachan, another serving! Chouji called out, his mouth full of chompC no, er, beef. Chouji eventually stopped eating, for the time being at least. He looked satisfied, gulping down a cup of oolong tea in one go. When he was certain Chouji had started breathing again, Shikamaru spoke. So, about what we were talking about before, what are you gonna do? Huh? Dessert? We never once talked about dessert, Chouji. About Naruto and Hinatas wedding presents. Ohh, yeah, that. Shikamaru sighed. Had Chouji forgotten? In the first place, Shikamaru had gone out onto the streets with the intention of buying a wedding present. Hed bumped into Chouji by chance, and then theyd gotten to talking about what they should give. Shikamaru was still undecided on what he would give as a present. After all, he had to think of something that both Naruto and Hinata would be happy with, and he was coming up pretty blank. Shikamaru wasnt just inexperienced with wedding presents, he was a stranger to the practice of giving gifts in general. In that case, it would be best for him to talk to someone who didnt neglect social frivolities like that. And while he was at it, it would be best to hear a womans opinion. Thus, Shikamaru had gone to visit Ino. Yamanaka Flowers. That was the name of the shop that Inos family ran. When Shikamaru went to talk to her about the matter, Ino had immediately started boasting that shed already decided on her gift. As to be expected of Ino. She was very well informed when it came to the latest trends and fashions. As to be expected of a comrade from my team, Shikamaru thought, and felt relieved. If thats the case, then itll be fine if I buy something from the same store as you. He said to Ino. Can you tell me where it is? Eh? You cant copy the store. Forget it. And thus, even though they were comrades who had faced fatal battles together, Shikamaru was immediately abandoned. After that I give up Shikamaru had grumbled as he wandered around, surveying the village shops. Hed bumped into Chouji at one of intersections, and found himself where he was now, at Yakiniku Q. But apparently Chouji had forgotten the whole story in his meat-craze. Even now, he was eating some ice cream. When had Chouji ordered ice cream? Shikamaru didnt even try to figure it out. There were some things about Chouji that were beyond comprehension. Honestly, when it came to the topic of finding a wedding present, Choujis opinion might not be as reliable as Inos. However, where Shikamaru was worried about the wedding present, Chouji was perfectly at ease. Actually, Ive more or less decided Choujis response was so unexpected that Shikamaru shot up in his seat. Youve really decided?! Whatre you getting them? Yeah. Chouji said, slipping out a thin, rectangular piece of paper. Im thinking of giving this to them. Chouji slid the item across the table, and Shikamaru picked it up so it wouldnt get wet. This is Shikamaru couldnt believe his eyes. This was a complimentary ticket for a meal to one of the most expensive Ryotei restaurants in Konoha. Young adults like us dont usually go to places like that, Chouji said, with a grin. But since its a wedding gift, it works. It was exactly as Chouji said. This restaurant was extremely formal and extremely expensive, so many young adults didnt usually go there. But a complimentary ticket for a meal there, as a wedding gift, was a thing of pure brilliance. It was a chance for the couple to go somewhere they didnt go often, and it was a thoughtful wedding gift that they would both enjoy. There couldnt possibly be another wedding gift as thoughtful as this. But while it might have been an amazing wedding present, how could Chouji so easily let of a meal, and a high class one at that? Chouji, are you really the same guy I knew? Youve really become far more of an adult than Id ever realised. Shikamaru was staring in turns at the elegant ticket in his hands, and then to Choujis face as he happily ate his ice cream. He was dumbfounded. Chouji continued eating his ice cream without being aware of his friends staring. Soon enough, hed started on a second bowl. Plus, it came with such good timing, Chouji said as he licked. That meal for three At first, Shikamaru didnt understand the meaning behind what Chouji had said. A moment passed, and comprehension dawned. Sweat appeared on Shikamarus forehead. You couldnt possibly Shikamaru meekly asked, feeling shocked for a completely different reason. Youre not going to.eatwith them? Chouji looked up from his ice cream with a great laugh. No way. Even if its me, Im not about to intrude on a meal between two newly-weds. R- rightyeah, that would be. Im going to ask a favour from the owner, and eat at a separate table. Seriously? Without thought, Shikamaru looked up at the ceiling. The ceiling fan was spinning around without stop as always. The ceiling fan that continued to steadily spin around in silence. Chouji, who continued to quietly but determinedly eat his ice cream. Soon, lunchtime had already passed, and the customers in the restaurant became sparse. Peace had returned again to Yakiniku Q. Listening to the faint sound of the whirling ceiling fan in the now quiet store, Shikamaru continued worrying by himself. A complimentary high class meal. That was the present Chouji had prepared. It definitely didnt have any bad sides to it. But While it might not have had its bad side, why in the world was it for three people? That ryotei restaurant shouldve thought about how frequently couples would want to go and be alone, lovers with no interruptions. Had that ryotei no sense? If it was three people, then of course Chouji would end up going! Shikamaru inwardly criticised the policies of a restaurant hed never been to with a sour look on his face. His mind imagined Naruto and Hinata getting a little dressed up for the uncommon chance to eat at a high class ryotei restaurant. And, then, in the seat behind them. Chouji. Ordering a second serving of his food as he attentively watched over them. would that really work out okay? No, right now, Chouji was fine as he was. In a way, it was a very Chouji-esque gift. Right now, the bigger problem was Shikamaru himself, whod still yet to think of anything. He had to devote his thinking process to coming up with something. Shikamaru straightened in his seat, and silently closed his eyes. Whenever Shikamaru was thinking deeply about something Cfor example, his next move in his favourite game of shougi, or a complicated strategy in the middle of a missionC he had the habit of sitting in a certain way as he thought. He didnt purposely try to get into that position. It happened naturally. It was the position that he could think best in. On that note, nobody wouldve ever expected Shikamaru to end up resorting to his thinking position in the middle of Yakiniku Q. He himself hadnt even expected that things would come to this. Shikamaru gathered his thoughts inside his head. Something that would be suitable as wedding presentseveral possibilities and options floated across his mind. First off, it would be best if the gift was something practical and helpful. Kitchen appliances, or cookware. A good present would be something that the couple didnt already own. Dinnerware was popular lately, wasnt it? Matching bowls for a couple to use were a good possible option. Watches maybe, or a picture frame for the wedding photos, too. They seemed to fit the standard. Presents that could serve as happy memories of their wedding were good. But they also had to be presents that would hold interest to both of them. Either way, he couldnt get the same present as another person. After all, Ino had kicked up such a fuss over even getting something from the same shop, so getting the same present as someone else was logically just as bad, if not worse. The wedding was soon, so maybe getting a large bouquet would work as a gift? In its own way, it was a very wedding-gift-like thing. There was also the option of getting them foodstuff. High class ingredients, like pastries or tea, those would be happily received wouldnt they? But then that seemed like it would end up being similar to Choujis gift of a high class meal. But no, honestly it would be fine if he ended up giving them a gift certificate of some kind like Chouji had, wouldnt it? He could earn a gift certificate from a department store. Hed just have to buy enough things that he liked, and it would be easy to choose things he liked But then how would he afford buying enough to earn a gift certificateMoney wasmoney Shikamaru slowly opened his eyes. Chouji was still eating ice cream. What to do At the end, one word had come to float pragmatically at the front of his mind: money. It was a good angle to focus on. Rather than getting the couple something they couldnt use, or something that was similar to someone elses gift, it was far better to give them money to spend on anything they liked. But then, there was the thought of how it would look if everyone else gave Naruto and Hinata gifts, and then Shikamaru just went here you go with an envelope of money. Since its me, then theyd probably think that I thought shopping for a gift was too troublesome, and resorted to giving money out of laziness, wouldnt they? He was worried about that possibility. In reality, it was likely that nobody would think such a thing. But honestly, giving money was an incredibly wearisome gift choice. It felt like it didnt have any sincerity. It wouldve been okay to give it to someone I barely knew, but to themit wouldnt be okay, would it? Shikamaru was still worrying without an end. Similarly, Chouji was still eating without an end. Youve eaten a lot. Shikamaru suddenly noted the countless bowls of ice cream piled up in front of Chouji. You dont feel cold at all? It feels nice and cool after eating all that hot barbecue. Plus, Im the kind of guy wholl be travelling in Snow Country and still go and buy ice cream to eat. My appetite doesnt lose to the cold. Chouji grinned at his friend, and as he finished his latest bowl, finally seemed content. Gochisousama*. Wait. Wait a minute. Now. Just now, something had sparked inside Shikamarus head. Choujiwhat did you just say? Huh? Well, I said gochisousama No. Before that. About travelling in Snow Country. Ah, yeah, I said Id still eat ice cream even if I was travelling in Snow Country. But you know I was just giving an example? Thats it. Shikamaru looked delighted as he pointed at Chouji. Travelling. A trip. Thats good, isnt it? A trip for their honeymoon! Shikamaru and Chouji left Yakiniku Q without any particular next destination in mind. They were just aimlessly walking around. It didnt matter if they did or didnt have a goal in mind. Shikamaru was finally free of his worries on what to get. I get it, youre going to give Hinata and Naruto a honeymoon trip as a gift, right? Yeah, Chouji. Thanks to you, I finally thought up a good idea. Now, all Shikamaru had to do was select the destination. Then, go and give it the once over to make sure everything was of good quality. Ah. He was going to have to ask for a womans opinion again, wasnt he? Where would he be able to find Ino? According to what shed said when he visited her earlier about thinking of a gift, she would probably be on her way to buy her wedding gift As he and Chouji walked around, Shikamaru started glancing around storefronts. Are you looking for someone, Shikamaru? I can help. Yeah, I want to hear a womans opinion. Itd be good if Ino was around. That being said, Konoha was a huge city. The fact that Shikamaru and Chouji had managed to meet up while just walking around without the same destination in mind had been a great coincidence. If they now managed to bump into Ino, then itd be a coincidence on top of a coincidence for all of Team 10s combo, the Ino-Shika-Chou to be gathered in one spot. The chances of them bumping into each other without any communication beforehand were, obviously, pretty much zero to none. Even if such a coincidental gathering of friends had happened in a fictional play or movie, the audience would have criticised it severely, calling it an series of impossible coincidences. Just as Shikamaru thought that, Chouji let out a murmur. Oh, look whos here. Youre kidding me right?! Shikamarus voice rose to a hysteric volume in his surprise. Reality was indeed an amazing thing. Surprising coincidences that seemed to come out of novels, like randomly meeting teammates, happened all the time. However, the sight that greeted Shikamaru after he let out his yell of surprise was a coincidence that was going to stun him even more. Shikamarus line of sight had him looking at the back of a womans head. Her hair didnt reach down to her knees like his teammates did. This womans hair was somewhat short, and tied into two bundles. She was a completely different person, and the sight of her made Shikamarus eyes widen despite himself. The woman in front of them was a jounin from Konohas ally SunagakureTemari. Many people were always coming and going from Konoha, not just shinobi from other villages like Temari. There were shinobi coming to receive missions, shinobi returning from missions, clients who gave missions, and a great more variety of people. There was a continuous stream of visitors coming and going. Of course, that didnt mean just anyone could come in. Those at the village gates always kept an eye out for suspicious looking people or dangerous objects, inspecting and questioning visitors. Temari, for example, was a shinobi from another village who carried a large tessen on her back. It was her favourite weapon of choice, a war fan that let her create a devastating gust of wind with one swing. But dangerous as her weapon was, Temari was a shinobi from an allied village, and there had been years of trust and cooperation between her and Konoha, so she was naturally given a permit to bring her tessen within the city limits. Shed also easily passed through the interview to get a visitors pass, and had been issued one a long time ago. This very same Temari now turned around at Shikamarus surprised yell, and noticed the two. Her eyes met Shikamarus. What, so its you who yelled. Whatre you doing? Shikamaru had let out such a hysteric yell because hed been surprised at the coincidence of Chouji supposedly finding Ino. Now, he did his best to answer Temaris question in a serene, unruffled tone, despite how the insides of his heart felt like they were jittering. O-oh yeah. We were just eating lunch and then well, that aside, whatre you? Im going around giving my greetings prior to the Chuunin Exam meetings. Chuunin exams? We still have a way to go until they start, dont we? Well, you could say that this year were having meetings about the meetings. Temari gave a wry smile. She had a lot of troublesome duties to carry out. Temari was the Yondaime Kazekages daughter, and the current Godaime Kazekages elder sister. She was a sharp and capable person who aided her younger brother with her flourishing activities in diplomacy with other villages. Like today, she would casually come and go from Konoha to participate in meetings planning for the Chuunin Exams. Shikamaru drew a little closer to Chouji so Temari wouldnt hear, and hissed into his ear. Oi, Chouji! Whyd you go and say look whos here? I thought it was definitely Ino and But if you need a womans opinion, it doesnt really matter even if it isnt Ino Th-thats true, but Shikamaru glanced back at Temari. Temari was the best wind user in Sunagakure. No, she was probably the best wind user in the whole world of shinobi, or if not, second. She stood out for her accomplishments in diplomacy and rearing shinobi in non-combatant areas, but her personality was militant. She was audacious and bold at heart, and generally suited to the battlefield with her belligerent attitude. It was likely because her personality was like that that she did so well in politics, but would it really be okay to ask Temari, a woman who woke gale after gale to do away with enemies on the battlefield, her opinion on a honeymoon for Naruto and Hinata? Her personality was completely different from Hinatas. Temari was strong-willed and constantly looking after others, and both those qualities made her the same type of woman as Shikamarus mother. It wasnt likely that she would think of something that someone meek like Hinata would like. On that note, Inos personality was different from Hinatas too. But, Ino had been classmates with Naruto and Hinata since childhood, so consulting with her seemed easier. Ino would probably gladly give a consultation about Naruto and Hinatas honeymoon. She was the type to point out all the latest trends and all. But Temaris reaction to being asked to consult, that was something Shikamaru couldnt imagine. What, a honeymoon? Temari said, her eyes losing their warmth as she looked disdainfully at him. Youre sure asking me about something pointless. That was the only reaction that was coming to Shikamarus mind. Whatre you two sneaking around for? Temari had a doubtful look on her face. You look suspicious. He quickly had to somehow mend the situation butC Shikamaru wants to ask you about something. But Chouji acted first. Wellyou Shikamaru got flustered as Temari turned her gaze to him. He couldnt possibly say something like it would be unreasonable of me if I asked you about planning a honeymoon, right?. There was no choice but to be frank about it. Well, thats, I mean He kept stuttering. For some reason, hed gotten tense. Shikamaru felt strangely embarrassed. He couldnt even look Temari in the eyes. Finally, he blurted out: Ive been thinking about it, but, for a honeymoon, where do you think is good? Eh?! Temari let out an incredibly stunned sound. What?! Startled himself at her reaction, Shikamaru could look her in the face now, staring. You- tha- ho- honeymoon?! Temari wouldnt look at him. See, hed been right after all, asking her was rude. Of course Temari would be troubled if he asked her to help with picking Naruto and Hinatas wedding gift. Even Shikamaru had been having trouble with it, and he was their classmate Ugh, Chouji, you shouldnt have meddled. Shikamaru glared at the man with several grudging comments on his tongue. Chouji pretended not to notice and averted his gaze to look in a shop window. While glaring unpleasantly towards the man, Shikamaru tried to switch the situation around. The end result was that the damage was already done, so he might as well hear her opinion. Sorry. Shikamaru apologised. I know its unexpected, but I want to hear your thoughts. Wh- why ask about th- that to me? Temari looked incredibly bewildered and flustered. It was perfectly understandable. Well, I guess because I thought asking you would be best Well, he couldnt say anyone would do as long as theyre a woman when she looked like she was seriously considering it. That would be incredibly rude. Even Shikamaru knew that. A-asking me would be best She said. For some reason, Temari was looking down and uneasily fidgeting. Shikamaru was convinced it was because she was troubled by the question. This wasnt good. At this rate, there would be no progress. It would be best to offer his opinion first. I think itd be good to relax at a hot spring inn, but what do you think? It doesnt sound too old fashioned? Iit seems fine Alright, great. Im glad. An inn by the hot springs with good food is the best, huh. Temari had approved his idea. Shikamaru could feel all his worry draining away. Hed been worrying all morning, and now he finally gave a relieved smile. It would be a fine wedding present for Naruto and Hinata. Temari, on the other hand, looked like her composure had been disturbed. Dont tell me you still have some business to take care of? He asked. That was likely it. Temari had come here on business after all. She was probably bothered because hed kept her busy with this consultation. Ah, no, Im done for today I was about to go home. ? She didnt have any duties to carry out, but she was restless. Shikamaru tilted his head, confused at her response. Temari was acting odd today. What could be causing it? Itd be best to check out some inns later, right? Chouji suggested, and Shikamaru pulled himself out of those thoughts to concentrate back on the gift problem. Thats right. Shikamaru nodded. Itd be best to go and take a good look as soon as possible. Its still pretty early, so even going today would work, right? Yeah. Itd probably be best to do that. Then, Chouji said, Im going to head off to eat some sweet chestnuts, so you two should go check it out. Eh?! Shikamaru and Temari both exclaimed at the same time. Flustered, Shikamaru looked at his friend. Cho- Chouji! What do you mean youre not coming with?! Mmm, sorry Shikamaru. I have to eat dessert after meals. You just ate! I have separate room for dessert. Im telling you, you just ate dessert! As they kept exchanging retorts, Shikamaru glanced at Temari. She was probably angry at Choujis sudden selfish behaviour too, because her face was slowly turning bright red. Oi, oi, oi, this isnt the time for jokes. Chouji, change your mind. Women arent to be made angry, it will always end up turning into a troublesome situation, I learned that way back when I was a kid! Shikamaru was desperately trying to communicate these pleas with his eyes, but Chouji wouldnt change his mind. Youre checking it out for a honeymoon, so itd be better if you two went by yourselves. Chouji said such a thing with a wide grin. It was too reasonable for Shikamaru to argue against. Anyone would agree that it would make more sense for a man and woman to go check out an inn beforehand, rather than two men. That way, you got both the bride and grooms point of view. But, right now, with Temari reacting in ways Shikamaru didnt understand, and her face looking bright red with what had to be rage, going alone with her would be Shikamaru felt his face drain of colour. Well then, Ill see you two later. Chouji said, starting to walk. Im heading off. Ah By the time Shikamaru could make a sound, it was too late. Chouji merely glanced over his shoulder at his friend, waved a hand, and then disappeared into the crowd. Shikamaru had gone completely and utterly still in utter dumbfoundment. Why Chouji? Why did you want to eat sweet chestnuts that much? Even though you ate that much ice cream, why? Does your stomach hold no end? Those were the thoughts streaming through his numb, stunned mind. Even though the streets of Konoha were always bustling with activity, the place where Shikamaru and Temari stood seemed strangely inactive. It was almost like they had a barrier around them. They were both wrapped up in a dense silence. Shikamaru was too frightened to look Temari in the eyes. Uh His mouth moved despite himself. How should Iwhat do you want to do? Those were the words that came out of his mouth. Im an idiot. But, just then Shikamaru felt an abrupt tug on his sleeve. Ill go. Temari quietly said, not looking at him. How did the atmosphere get like this? In a short while, Shikamaru and Temari had made their way to where Konohas hot spring town was. On the way, they hadnt talked much. Shikamaru had tried to bring up small talk to see how shed react, but Temaris replies had been short and curt, and the unsettling atmosphere between them had continued. Why is there such a puzzling tension? Shikamaru averted his eyes to look ahead so he wasnt meeting the huntressCno, Temaris eyes, feeling sweat perspiring against his forehead. He tried to objectively, and calmly analyse the situation. To start with, it wasnt unusual for him and Temari to be alone together. Rather, it was common. In the past, he had guided her around the village, and theyd eaten together along with having meetings about work. There was even the fact that hed gone outside his usual behaviour and asked her on a date. Well, he said date, but in the end theyd done what they always did, talking about light things, and then next thing he knew ending up talking about work without him noticing.** But, at that time, things hadnt been as tense as they were now. Far from it, the whole day of their date hadnt been bad at all. Despite all that, why were things so tense today? Why did the atmosphere feel so strained? Why wasnt Temari talking to him? Shikamaru desperately wracked his brain for answers. The most likely cause was that deep down, Temari was fed up of being dragged into a troublesome matter. Hed prompted her about her plans for the rest of the day, and after saying she had none, there had been no way for her to politely refuse to come, so now she was irritated at the trouble she had to go through. That was why things were different today. That was why she wasnt talking much. But, if you looked at the root, this was all Choujis fault. Chouji and his stomachs sudden, unexplained craving for sweet chestnuts. And moreover, it was Choujis fault for bringing up the meddlesome suggestion it would be best for you two to go together and then disappearing. If he hadnt done those things, then at this time he and Shikamaru, or just Shikamaru himself, wouldve been doing the check up on a random inn. Id never thought things would turn out with me coming here with Temari It was a turn of events hed never have been able to imagine happening this morning. Hed never thought hed eat yakiniku with Chouji, and then bump into Temari, and then end up in this situation. There mightve been that saying about how shinobi should look underneath the underneath but this wasnt something anyone couldve seen coming. Good grief, the world was beyond predicting. While Shikamaru brooded, he and Temari crossed over a wooden bridge. There was a river streaming beneath it, with a light layer of steam rising from it. It was river from a hot spring. There was a slightly cloying smell to the water, kind of similar to eggs. It was the hydrogen sulphide that was blended into the hot spring water. The source was the volcanic belt Konoha was located atop of. A good large quantity of hot springs were present in this area, so much that in the old days the hot springs had been known as a healing area for injured shinobi. Now it was a tourist hot spot for attracting people from and outside the village. They were passing a lot of such tourists as they travelled. Most of the tourists were usually dressed in yukata, with geta wooden sandals or leather soled sandals, and clothing that had the name of the inn or institute they were staying at. That seemed to be the general dress code of the town. It was good for visiting the hot springs, or just walking around. Health and entertainment. The town had obviously developed by combining those two things, and many things other than inns could be found. Restaurants, game centres, souvenir shops, and various other shops were lined up all around. Another enjoyable side to this town would be just walking around and visiting all of them. Shikamaru and Temari had passed by a lot of such stores. Most of the storefronts had wicker baskets where meat dumplings that had been cooked with the steam of the hot springs sat in rows, looking nice and pretty. Souvenir shops had postcards and wooden carvings aimed at tourists, along with shinobi goods. Here and there, you could see bags and bottles that were stuffed with hot spring mineral deposits as well. The hot springs were a truly valuable source of income for the town. Shikamaru was looking for an inn to check out amidst all the establishments. The sun was already setting in the west, and in a short time, night had fallen. The lanterns in front of the stores and buildings started to light up, one by one. Their lights were the only illuminations in the town after the dark had fallen, and the sight of all those brightly lit lanterns amidst the darkness and wisps of steam that enshrouded the town was pretty breathtaking. It looks amazing Temari murmured. Yeah Shikamaru quietly agreed. Then, he turned to her. Hey, we took all the trouble to come here, so how about we drop by the town shops? Temari had finally spoken of her own volition when shed commented on the scenery. The towns beautiful scenery seemed to have eased away the tension, and Shikamaru wanted to take advantage of that. Theyd taken all the trouble to come here, after all. They werent about to get punished from above for dropping by a store or two. Youre right. Temari said, looking around. Thenhow about that shop? The shop she was pointing to was a small one, with a sign that said target practice at the front. It looked like the sort of place that had three wooden kunai for you to throw and hit several prizes on shelves, and if you could knock a prize over, then you could have it. You sure youre fine with that? He asked. Yeah. I wanted to try that kind of thing just once. I dont really understand, but it looks like her spirits are back to normal Temaris eyes were shining as she ducked under the wooden sign in front of the shops entrance, and Shikamaru felt relieved at the sight of her. He followed her in. The inside of the shop was surprisingly crowded. Passing his eye over the other customers, they were likely mostly lovers, a lot of young men and women. For some reason, Shikamaru was unable to feel calm. Temari had already picked up a wooden kunai and thrown it. It barely grazed the side of the targeted prize, slipping away into the darkness behind it. She picked up another one, and threw once more. This time, her aim was off much more, not even coming close. Hm? Temari was tilting her head in puzzlement. Oi, oi, whats up? He asked. Its rare for you to miss a target. Forget playing target games, both Shikamaru and Temari handled kunai in their usual everyday lives. And furthermore, those were real ones. It was impossible for her to miss twice. No, the thing is, theyre too light to throw well. Temari said, handing the wooden kunai to him. Ah, I see. They are way too light. Far more different than the usual ones. Itd be hard to throw this. Shikamaru understood the second he felt the wooden kunais light weight in his hand. But, if thats the problem, Shikamaru said, handling the wooden kunai, Then if you just find the centre of gravity and adjust, you should be able to throw it, like this! He threw the wooden kunai. He threw it with much more force than he did his usual kunai. It missed completely. Hm? Now Shikamaru was tilting his head in puzzlement, too. After their target practice had ended, the two of them were back to searching for the inn. Temari was carrying one small daruma, and another equally small cat figurine. They were the only two prizes that Shikamaru had managed to drop after he had paid his own way through several more tries. But to think that after all those attempts, only these two tiny prizes were gained. Shikamaru couldnt help but feel like that cost-effectiveness of that shop was in question. But, Shikamaru was still a pro. Throwing the wooden kunai again and again had helped him get use to the weight. Even with all the practice, those wooden kunai were unbelievably tricky. You couldnt possibly hope to practice enough to hit a big prize without paying a big amount of money too. Shikamaru had realised that very quickly. No, in fact, you could spend as much money on practice as you wanted, and it would probably still be impossible to hit the big prizes. Shikamaru felt sorry for all the couples at the shop hed seen, letting out sounds like kyaa! and awww as they aimed at prizes they were never going to be able to hit. If theyd just been a little heavierwell, to sum it up, the wooden kunai were so far from real kunai that it was almost impossible to knock over anything with them. If possible, Shikamaru would have liked to throw a real kunai. At the shopkeeper. But either way, seeing as he wasnt allowed to use a real kunai, hed thought it would be better to hit what he could rather than to keep aiming for the impossible and go away with nothing. What he could being the small daruma and cat figurine***. They had been the smallest prizes in the shop. Their loss wasnt any great blow to the shopkeepers stock. The shopkeeper really had a brilliant strategy. Sorry He said to Temari, I couldnt get anything other than those Speaking of which, itd be really bad if hed gotten so used to throwing the light wooden kunai that his aim with real kunai got affected. Heh, theyre the perfect size for carrying back home. Temari replied with a grin. She wasnt being sarcastic. Those were her honest feelings. Every now and then, Temari had times she smiled innocently like this. Thesell be great souvenirs for my brothers. She said. Come to think of it, she was right. The number of prizes was just right. But, that brought up the questionbetween Gaara and Kankurou, who would be given the daruma and who would be given the cat figurine? He wasnt sure, but either way, itd be something to smile at if you saw it. Temari always did think about her brothers. Temari was humming something under her breath as she looked at the prizes in her hands. She looked like she was in a good mood. Alright thenwe should get around to picking an inn, right? Shikamaru said. Oh, how about here? Shikamaru had come to a standstill, looking up at a nearby inn. It was magnificently structured, with a very historic feeling. The paper lanterns glowing faintly at the sides of its gates felt like they were giving a gentle welcome to guests. It looked like they had a pretty large pond too. From the outside, everything looked fine, but the main focus of their visit was the hot springs and the meals. Itd be a problem if everything just looked decent but was actually bad quality. Yup, best to go in and have a look. Shikamaru nodded. Just one quick overall assessment would be enough. He turned to go towards the inn, but at that exact moment, Temaris footsteps stopped. Whats wrong? He looked over his shoulder to check on her. AhC wellC after allC how to say this Temari was looking down and uneasily fidgeting. Again? Just when hed thought that the usual Temari had returned. What in the world was going on? So its justC at the endC Im not yetC Im not mentally prepared She muttered, not looking at him and fiddling with the daruma and cat figurine in her hands. Mentally prepared? For what? Maybe she felt awkward in front of such a fancy looking place? If such a high class place had prices that were too high for him to afford, then of course Shikamaru was going to give up. Hed think it was a shame, but he would. But they wouldnt ever know without going in and checking the place out. Whether his decision would be to go for it or pass, hed still have to look at the rooms and hot springs. He had no way to work around it. It was going to be a problem if they just gave up right in front of the places doors. Temari, for now how about we just go in, and then you can think about it. Okay? IC itll be too late to think about once we go in. I could get carried away with the atmosphere, so What do you mean?! He absolutely couldnt understand what Temari was saying. Shikamaru was at his wits end. What on the world was going on? The atmosphere? Did she mean the old-fashioned atmosphere of the inn? Carried away? Swept away? Was she talking about the pond? He didnt understand a thing. However, he knew one thing for a fact: Theres definitely something wrong with Temari today. Shikamaru looked carefully at Temaris face, staring as he gave her a once over. Temari hurriedly looked away from his gaze. As she did, her face was turning bright red. You Shikamaru slowly said. Dont tell me you He put his hand on Temaris forehead. She let out a startled sound, her whole body shivering with a jolt. It was probably because his hand was cold. Youre burning up, arent you? He asked. Temaris forehead felt slightly warm. But, it didnt look like a fever. On the other hand, she had turned bright red up to her ears. IC Im heading home, so She stiffly said, awkwardly moving away and turning to go back. She was clearly acting completely different than usual. For the usual lively Temari to suddenly be so frail-like, it had to mean that while she may not have had a fever, there was something wrong with her health. There wasnt any other explanation. Oi, oi, do me a favour and wait. Its already dark out, and if your physical condition is bad then thats all the more reason you should rest here for just one night. Its alright. Ill quickly set out the futon for you. Shikamaru had said that because he was worried about Temari, but it looked like hed said something he shouldnt have, because Temari suddenly started running away from him at full power. Shikamaru stared, dumbfounded, at the sight of her running full throttle. Well, at least her health seemed fine after all. But wait, he had to catch up to her! Shikamaru started running, too. Hed finally been able to come all this way with her, if they went back right at the doors of the inn, then thered have been no point. He absolutely had to get Temaris advice on what would make for a better honeymoon trip. After all, it wasnt just for Naruto, it was for Hinata too. Just a mans point of view wouldnt be enough. He had to have a womans point of view. He had to hear the opinion on the womens side of the spa, on the yukatas, on the service given to women, all sorts of things that a man couldnt judge on his own. Shikamaru put his full concentration into chasing after Temaris back. He reached out to catch her with a hand. This isnt gonna work if Im by myself, this isnt gonna work by myself! Shikamarus hand reached its mark. Hed managed to catch Temari by the arm. Tightening his hold on her, Shikamaru yelled, Please just wait! I need you! Temari had forcibly come to a stop, and now looked over her shoulder at him. For some reason, her eyes looked a bit wet. They were both panting, totally out of breath. The dim lit of nearby lanterns illuminated their faces slightly, Shikamarus shadow falling on Temari. Maybe shed calmed down, because her face wasnt red anymore. The light given off by the lanterns illuminated Temaris face, which looked even more mature than usual. Shikamaru unconsciously ended up gazing at her. He was enveloped in a mysterious feeling. Like being in the middle of a dream. Is it really alrightif its me? Temari quietly asked. Those words pulled Shikamaru abruptly back to his senses, and he gathered his wits again. He nodded firmly. Yeah, it wont do if its not you! He said seriously, After all, I cant go into the womens side of the hot spring! ha? For a brief moment, Temaris jaw dropped. Uhm? What are yousaying? Shikamaru was bewildered by the look she was giving him, like she was suddenly suspicious of him. It was a strange reaction to his reply. But for now, it was best to verify what they both were thinking. No matter how you look at it, I wont be able to go to the womens side of the hot springs, right? Obviously! She sounded a little indignant. What are you suddenly She was well-aware of the situation, good. As expected of Temari. In that case, he just had to carefully explain the rest I cant go into the womens side. Since Im a man. So I need you to go to the womens side. Since you can go in. Like you said, its obvious. When you come out of the womens side, I need you to tell me the state its in, just in a few words. Thats all thats needed. Okay? Its a really simple thing to do, right? What exactlyare you talking about? Temari asked, in an incredibly calm voice. She wasnt looking like she was suspicious of him anymore. Now her eyes were just plain confused. What was this all about? Hed explained it very simply and clearly, but she still didnt understand. Shikamaru didnt know how to fix this. What in the world was Temari not understanding? Just a while ago, shed agreed that he couldnt go into the womens side of the hot springs To begin with, Temari said. What, exactly, are we talking about? Was that the root? To think that all the things hed been saying hadnt reached her at all What do you mean what? Shikamaru asked. Were talking about selecting an inn for a honeymoon for a wedding, arent we? Exactly, whose wedding? Naruto and Hinatas, obviously. Huh? Didnt I tell you that? Thats odd It seemed like theyd had some sort of a misunderstanding. The whole time, Temari had been thinking of some wedding other than Naruto and Hinatas. Shikamaru finally realised that fact at this moment. Temari was of a superior excellence to other people. She would hear the beginning of an explanation, and immediately deduce the rest. He wouldnt have to say it out loud for her to realise theyd had a misunderstanding as well. Shed catch on just as quickly as he did. So thats how it was, Shikamaru thought, finally understanding. There had been a misunderstanding. Temari seemed to have worked it out, too. Hmm, so thats what it all was. She said, smiling peacefully. No, hold onAh!! Shikamaru inadvertently let out an exclamation. It was possible that Temaris misunderstanding had beenC Hey, oi You couldnt have thought that, right. When he said that, for some reason, Temari silently took her tessen off her back, holding it in her hand. H-heywhat is it? He asked. Whyre you suddenly taking that out? Wh- whats up with your chakra?! Temari grinned affectionately at him. Shikamaru was captivated by the sight, and found a smile forming on his face, too. Smiling at each other like that, they looked like the very picture of an intimate pair of lovers. That night in Konoha One sudden, out-of-season gale swept over Konohas hot springs, and lasted the entirety of the night. The residents and tourists spent the whole night awake, too frightened to sleep . . . More translator notes: I do hope I managed to translate everything clearly enough without any need for the extra explanations, but still thought I should put in an explanation just in case. * Gochisousama is a phrase said after meals that basically means thank you for the meal. Its the polite thing to say when finished, but I didnt wanna literally translate it and think Chouji was thanking Shikamaru for the meal. ** An extra linguistic note since its hard to express the connotations in English. Interestingly, the natte shimau here expresses that Shikamaru was frustrated with himself for letting the subject turning to work. He seems to blame himself for not making the date as date-ish as it couldve been. Which is adorable, considering how the author seems to have used this moment to lampshade how shikatemahave always been dating without noticing it, doing the same things they always do and all. *** Better seen than explained, heres the daruma doll, and cat figurine. Both are p common tourist bait lol. 2 FAQS: 1- Nah, Tem wasnt mad at Shikamaru. She was generally relieved it was a misunderstanding- not everyones ready to get married straight away, after all. Notice that she smiled peacefully, and grinned affectionately etc. She used her fan as a way of letting out wind to blow some steam, as it were, since she is embarrassed. 2- A little explanation about Temaris misunderstanding. Japanese is pretty vague. When you dont expressively mention something to be for someone else, the general assumption is that its for yourself. Hence, since our babies are involved as it were, the logical assumption is that the honeymoon Shikamarus been thinking about is for himself and Temari. This assumption is first reinforced when Temari asks why Shikamarus asking her about this (probably hoping hell say its about another couples honeymoon lol) and Shikamaru says well I thought asking you would be best. See, the wording he uses doesnt just mean he thought asking her specifically instead of other people was best. It also means he thought asking and hearing her opinion for their honeymoon would be best. So she thinks he means I thought itd be best to ask. That is when the misunderstanding really falls into place. It doesnt help that on top of this, Shikamaru keeps saying other things to be misunderstood. Youre burning up is pretty innuendo-y, annnd laying out a futon for someone is, you guessed it, usually an euphemism for sex. Though in this case Shikamaru literally meant hed make her bed for her so she wouldnt have to, but you cant blame Temari for misunderstanding haha. Volume 4 - CH 4 One Bowl Full of Soul These days, naruto* [fish cakes served atop ramen] was incredibly popular. When did it happen? In the blink of an eye, naruto had risen to number one in the Popular Toppings list. From children to adults, people of all types and ages loved naruto. More naruto would be served on dishes, and then before you realised whatd happened, theyd have finished and run out. Even the local mothers had started saying that if children ate naruto then theyre grow up to be healthy, energetic, and strong. Ahh, naruto. You scruffy-looking fish cakes, with your pale white background and pink swirling whirlpool in the middle. But, if you werent here, people would feel so very lonely. Teuchi, the owner of Ichiraku Ramen, was cutting up more naruto fish cakes today. Now, ramen would be made by smoothly adding in boiled noodles to various soups, and then then skillfully, artistically adding several toppings on top. The finishing touch of just that tiny bit of naruto added a firm flair to the whole bowl of ramen. As the popularity of those naruto toppings grew, so did the turnover that Ichirakus made. These days Teuchi was continuously setting out extra tables in front of the place, but even those would immediately fill up. It certainly hadnt been like this in the old days. Ichiraku Ramen had opened shop in Konoha a good many years ago. Back then, a good number of people were grateful for the cheap and quick ramen,but the turnover had barely been enough for Teuchi stay out of the red. Hed thought that hed keep scraping by like that until the bitter end. And back then Back then, naruto had always been the least-liked. The Popular Toppings board which stood outside the shop would always have naruto scrawled at the very bottom. Nobody really cared whether it was there or not. The reason nobody cared was the existence of other toppings Simmered bamboo shoots, loved for the texture as people chewed on them. Roast pork cutlets, carefully cooked and greatly recommended. Half-boiled eggs, drowning in their own lovely flavour. Seaweed, and their incredible surge of popularity as an optimum highlight on ramen. Every single one of them were strong competitors for the place of number one topping. Seaweed in particular had always been a tough opponent. While naruto was always stuck at the bottom, seaweed hovered constantly at top in ranking. You could say that seaweed had always been the greatest obstacle that naruto could never pass in popularity. The reason was likely because nori had so many devoted customers. Shinobi seemed to have a certain inclination towards seaweed. Seaweed never stood out, and never showed off. It clung to the sides of the bowl, or floated around in groups in the soup. It was like a shadow. Compared to the pointlessly exuberant naruto, with its bright pink spiral on white that never failed to stand out, seaweed had a completely different atmosphere about it. It would be exaggerated to say shinobi had fellow-feelings for the seaweed in their ramen, but it was true that they felt a sort of familiarity towards it. Seaweed had such popularity that it had likely never been declined by any customer. To think that naruto had finally surpassed seaweed- no, not just seaweed, but bamboo shoots and pork cutlets and eggs as well. It had surpassed them all, now sitting at the very top of the Popular Toppings board. Teuchi looked at the proudly sparkling naruto, and felt emotional. He thought about how eras would change and ramen would be continued to be made and great changes like this would still take place. When you thought about it, naruto was made of minced fish after all, and it contained various nutrients shinobi needed. And then, more importantly, the swirling pink whirlpool pattern looked pretty similar to the mark of Konoha carved into the hitai-ate of Konohas shinobi. One could even say the jagged edges of naruto looked similar to shuriken. The naruto hadnt been popular up to now, but the tide had turned, and in the present, naruto was mysteriously and deeply appreciated by shinobi. There was some curious sort of fate between shinobi and naruto. One could say that naruto was a foodstuff that seemed like it had almost been made specifically for shinobi to eat. But as for the question as to why naruto was suddenly so beloved by so many shinobi, well, that was all thanks to another Naruto. His regular customer, Naruto. The popularity of naruto today was all thanks to that Naruto. Well now, from now, well be focusing on the story of that customer Naruto, instead of the topping. Uzumaki Narutohe had been frequenting Teuchis shop ever since he was a child, a regular among regulars. Teuchi had been invited to his wedding ceremony. Although Naruto had told him he was getting married, Teuchi hadnt imagined hed even be invited to the wedding. He had to think of a good wedding gift. To think that little kids now getting married Coupling that with narutos amazing climb to the top of the Popular Toppings list, Teuchi had many things he felt emotional about. It really made him acutely aware of how time kept flowing and passing. Teuchis memories took him back to the first time Naruto had come to his store Heyo, lad. Do you wanna come over and eat something? Teuchi had called out with a smile on his face, but the young boy jolted with a start, his whole body shaking. It had just passed dinner time, so the shop was empty. Teuchi had noticed the child constantly sneaking glances towards Ichirakus as he wandered aimlessly on the streets. He hadnt just seen the boy today, either. The kid been wandering around here a lot the past few days, and Teuchi had gotten used to the sight of him. He would always walk hesitantly towards the shop, and then walk away, back and forth without ever actually coming in. Sooner or later, Teuchi had found himself getting curious about the young boy always wondering around his field of vision. It was because every time Teuchi saw him, the child was all alone. Today as well, the boy was hunching his shoulders against the cold weather, sneaking quick peeps inside the store every few minutes. There werent any other customers around to deal with anyway, so Teuchi just instinctively called out to him. The child approached him slowly, trembling with nerves. But Teuchi slid out a bowl of ramen towards the boy, and that tiny, frightened face instantly lit up. What was the little one doing, outside at this late hour all by himself? Just what was his family doing? His parents? Those thoughts passed through Teuchis mind, but he didnt ask the child any questions. He just watched over him as he ate. It looked like he was enjoying the meal. Soon enough, the child had lifted the great bowl to his lips with his tiny hands, tipping it back so as to slurp up all the soup he could and not leave a single drop behind. The bowl so large compared to him, that his face disappeared completely out of sight. When the child lowered the bowl, he looked happy and content. His eyes met Teuchis, and the kid grinned so wide that his teeth showed. Teuchi found himself grinning back. You eat really well, he said, Alright, lad. Ive decided itll be the shops treat for your meal today. When Teuchi said that, the childs grin turned even brighter. He said thank you, and introduced himself. The kids name was Uzumaki Naruto. Teuchi had privately thought to himself that it was a name with a nice, shared fate with ramen. That was how hed first met Naruto. After that day, Naruto would often show up to come and eat and eat at Teuchis shop. Teuchi heard from his other customers how Naruto didnt have any family. He also heard about the unpleasant treatment Naruto received from most of the villagers. So that was what his constant, nervous back-and-forth in front of the shop had been about. One of Teuchis other regular customers told him this: Why do you let that kid into the store? All the other stores ward him off. Your sales are going to suffer. Youll lose money, Im telling you now. The words themselves hadnt seemed to come from a bad place. The man had likely been honestly worried about Teuchis store. But still, somehow, Teuchi found himself losing his temper and letting loose a furious lecture. Oh, he didnt know anything about the world of shinobi, that was true, he told the customer. He understood there had to be many circumstances around Narutos situation. But why in the world would he turn away someone who liked ramen, who came all the way to his store in the hopes of filling his stomach? For that little kid with no parents or siblings, it was very possible that Teuchis store was the only place he could eat a warm meal made just for him. Its possible might have been conceited for thinking that way, perhaps placing more importance on his stores existence to Naruto than was due, but it all came down to this: Teuchi might not have known a thing about the world of shinobi, but the world of ramen was one that he understood perfectly. When it came to ramen, the bowl in front of you was everything. Teuchi concentrated wholly, devotedly on every bowl of ramen he prepared, silently and without compromise. He put his pride as an artisan on the line, and gave his everything to make each bowl of ramen. So a child who found that bowl of ramen so delicious, who ate his food looking so ridiculously happy- how could Teuchi possibly turn him away? It wasnt possible. Any ramen store worth their salt would say the same. Youre supposed to sit down, and eat the bowl of ramen in front of you, Teuchi snapped to the customer. The circumstances of the person sitting next to you shouldnt matter. The person sitting next to you was just someone who had come to eat ramen just like everyone else. It was that simple, so what exactly was the problem? If there was any wrong to be found when a customer was glancing nervously to stare at another one, then it was the ramen. The ramen had been cooked badly. Because if you cooked really good ramen and set it in front of someone, then they wouldnt be able to think about anyone else. Theyd just be transfixed by the bowl in front of them, and happily eat without a care for whoever is around them. -and if theres anyone who doesnt like our store because of that, then Id be pleased if they did get lost. Teuchi had said as he finished the rant hed unleashed on his regular customer. Im sorry, Teuchi. The regular said to him, II didnt mean it like that I understand. You said that because you were concerned about the state of my store, right? Teuchi gave him a friendly smile. Come again, alright? From then onwards, regular customers continued to visit Teuchis shop, and Naruto became part of that group, too. He came almost every single day to eat. Until, at one point, things changed. One day, Naruto stopped coming to Ichiraku Ramen. Teuchi told himself it was a strange series of incidents to do with a complicated situation. Thats why Naruto couldnt come. Naruto, who would come to eat lunch at noon, and then come again to eat dinner at night. Naruto, who would buy huge amounts of cup ramen to keep himself full with, but then still show up in the early hours of the morning. That was the sort of person Naruto was, and yet one day, he suddenly stopped coming. Someone who always came was suddenly absent. Someone who should be present was nowhere to be found. Was is still really okay to call it a strange series of incidents? Teuchi felt incredibly uneasy in those days following Narutos absence. Come to think of it, hed gone through this pattern various times. The reason was that while he served many villagers ramen, he also had a lot of customers who were shinobi. I wanted to eat your ramen just once before I head out on a mission. His shinobi customers would say such delightful things. Teuchi would think fervently to himself as he cooked their ramen: I really hope you come back and eat my ramen again. It wasnt because he wanted to sell them more ramen. It was because he wanted them to come back safe. If you could come back safe, eat my ramen, and show me that smiling face again, it would be far more happiness than any artisan could ask for. I wont even charge you. Of course, it was a bit idealistic of him to ignore the fact that if he didnt charge for their second meal he would have a hard time paying the bills for the ingredients of said meal. But at the end of the day, Teuchi had gone through many years at his shops where shinobi customers suddenly stopped coming. They hadnt come almost everyday like Naruto had, but they had still come frequently throughout every year. Ive got a mission after this. When my mission ends, Id like to come back and eat your ramen again. Theyd say with a smile, and head out. They would head out, and never come back. Teuchi waited for months. He waited for years. They didnt show up. Teuchi didnt understand anything about the world of shinobi. But he did know that death chased every single one of them. It was thanks to those shinobi who put themselves at risk and protected everyone in the village that Teuchi and the other villagers could live peacefully. That was why Every night, Teuchi would prepare the ingredients for the next day of work at Ichirakus. At as he did, all the faces of his missing shinobi customers would come to mind. You were careful, right? You just got fed up my ramen, right? You just found another, better store, right? Right? Thats the case, Teuchi tried to tell himself, trying to cheer himself up. Thats definitely the case. Who knows, I may even see them tomorrow. In that case, Id better make sure tomorrows ramen is better than ever! He spent his nights staying up and preparing ingredients with fervently hopeful thoughts like that. That was how Teuchi continued making ramen, day in and day out. Several months after Naruto stopped showing up, Teuchi heard that the shinobi was just out of the village for an extended training trip. He felt relief surge through him from the very bottom of his heart. It was true that the last time Naruto had stopped by the shop, hed mentioned going on a long trip. Teuchi had assumed it was for a mission of some sort, but he couldnt have imagined Naruto would be away for so long. Shinobi had such harsh training ethics. When Naruto came back from his two year long training trip, hed grown taller and looked just like a grown man. It was funny, how Teuchi wouldnt have noticed those drastic changes if hed seen him every day like he used to. Teuchi didnt talk about a lot of things. He just put a bowl of ramen in front of Naruto for him to eat. It was one bowl full of soul. Naruto mightve grown, but the bright grin he gave Teuchi after eating his ramen hadnt changed at all. For some reason, that fact made Teuchi so happy he grinned back even wider. Narutos characteristic bravado and inability to give up would eventually help him save the village several times, and soon enough he was being called everyones hero. A handful of years later, and the little boy who had been so isolated was now loved and acknowledged by everyone. The name Uzumaki Naruto passed across a great many peoples mouths. And every time someone repeated his story, people would find themselves feeling a sort of affection towards the naruto topping. Dozens of Teuchis customers would ask for additional orders of naruto, and eventually there were so many requests that it almost became a craze. Embarrassingly, there were quite a few people going around and calling Ichiraku Ramen by the name Heros Ramen instead. Teuchi felt uneasy when people starting eating the ramen and murmuring if I eat this, I wont fail on my mission! or please let me come back safe and alive under their breath, but he couldnt heartlessly tell them to stop, either. All the shinobi and kunoichi who frequented his shop and said things like that were the protectors of the village, those who would go out and be chased by death on cruel missions almost every day. It was human nature to want the comfort of charms that would protect them. And then, there was the undeniable fact that Teuchi himself had always been praying in a way, too, every time he cooked for shinobi about to head out on missions. His constant thoughts of please come back and eat again were really no better than the murmured wishes of his customers. If I eat this ramen Ill become stronger, or if I eat this ramen Ill become a heroit wasnt happy circumstances which lead to those kinds of wishes. Even the thoughts and prayers of one person could help you change. Teuchi had learned that very well in the past. Yes, that incident had been on a cold, cold night in the middle of winter. That night was when Teuchi had decided to open up his first shop, the night he had experienced his lifes latest triC Ah, the broth in his stockpot had started to boil. The steam had risen up along with the bubbling sound, and snapped Teuchi clean out of his reminiscing. Oops, I got too caught up in thinking about the past. Teuchi muttered. Good grief, he was getting old. He briskly moved onto making the ramen. The boiled noodles were gently put into the soup. He carefully added the toppings, arranging them in a pleasing manner. And then, yes, the final topping of naruto. Teuchi had broken away from his train of thought for the sake of concentrating solely and only on making the bowl of ramen that had been ordered. What had he been thinking about? Hed completely forgotten. Teuchi usually forgot things these days, and didnt remember them straight away, but he didnt mind. It was enough to live each day one ramen bowl at a time. What else would the owner of a ramen store wish for? That much was enough. It was because Teuchi loved ramen so much that hed decided to enter the world of ramen, after all. Besides, if hed been thinking about something very important, hed remember it straight away. Ahh, thats right, hed been thinking about a wedding present. His brain knew how to hold onto important things after all. Both Naruto (the person) and naruto (the topping) had helped Teuchi out a lot. He wanted to show his gratitude in return, but unfortunately the things he could do were limited. What Teuchi could is what he always did: make ramen. But then, that wasnt a bad thing, Teuchi thought. The relationship between Teuchi and Naruto was that of a shopkeeper and his most regular customer. When it came to what Teuchi knew about Narutowell, he knew the boy loved Teuchis ramen with a deep and pure passion At the end of the day, despite knowing each other for years, Teuchi and Naruto had been mutually impeded from talking about anything else since they both wholly devoted themselves to concentrating on the ramen on the counter between them. Since Teuchi was like that, and Naruto was like that, it was already clear that the only gift he could give was ramen, right? Teuchi reached out to the memo pad he kept nearby, and wrote three words on it: Free Ramen Pass It was a voucher that would let Naruto eat all the ramen he liked from Ichirakus for free. Surely, hed be delighted with this gift. No, hold on a moment. Teuchi scribbled a few more words. Free Ramen Pass - Valid for One Year There we go. Teuchi nodded in complete satisfaction. Wedding presents were all well and good, but that didnt mean money grew up trees. Teuchi feared his shop would end up disappearing from the strain of unpaid noodles if he went too over the top. Either way, Naruto would be delighted with this gift, since he could eat all the ramen he loved. He loved ramen a lot, so hed probably come over every day. Every day. From morning till night. Hed bring along his wife and say Alright, Im gonna eat ramen until every cell in my body is made of ramen! And then hed eat. And eat, and eat, and eat, and eat, and eatand Teuchis store collapsed. Inside Teuchis mind, he could see his daughter Ayame going absolutely stiff with shock and staring at their collapsed store. Ayame, who worked so cheerfully and energetically to attract customers to their store was staring sadly at its tattered remains. Teuchi didnt know what to say to her, and stayed stock still in shock. One yearis a long time Ayame whispered, a large tear falling down her cheek. It was a nightmare. How had this happened? Why had the store collapsed? Theyd only been making ramen Gah Teuchi frantically shook his head to rid himself of the frightening images. Calm down. Calm down, Teuchi. Be cool-headed. Indeed, a year is too long Free Ramen Pass - Valid for One Year Half a Year Half a year No, no that wouldnt do either. The pen in Teuchis hand squeaked from strain as he gripped it far too tight. Free Ramen Pass - Valid for One Year Half a Year One Month Teuchi let go of his pen, nodding. This would do. Wait no, he still felt a little frightened Free Ramen Pass - Valid for One Year Half a Year One Month One Week Teuchis breathing had gotten a little laboured. When had that happened? He was picturing Narutos reaction One whole week?! Alright, then I better eat ten bowls of ramen every day! It was no good! Teuchi put the memo pad far away from him. How could he think this was the solution? Vouchers would only bring misery and destruction. It would wreak havoc on him and his daughter. Ohhhoh no Teuchi was crying at the horrific images his imagination brought to life. Thanks to his carelessly written voucher, Ayame would be out on the cold, dark streets. Shed meet some shitty man and get married to him! Ayame, how could you do this to me? To marry a buckwheat noodle makers son! You dont have the right to call me father. Leave. Leave my sight or Ill dump ramen over both our heads! Nooo.ohh no, nooo Teuchi groaned, cradling his head in his hands. A free pass was impossible. If he did that, he wouldnt be able to make a livelihood. Then, what should he do? He had to put a time limit or number of bowls limit, otherwise it would be a disaster. Even if he told Naruto only eat as much as common sense allows, Teuchis common sense and Narutos common sense werent the same thing. That being said, any gift he could give that wasnt ramen felt like it wouldnt have any meaning. It was an impossible situation. Good afternoon, Teuchi called out to a new customer who just came in. One large serving of ramen, please. The customer said, Ah, and extra naruto. Naruto really has been popular lately. It used to be that it barely sold, but nowadays Teuchi was stocking up ahead of time to make sure he never ran out. Teuchi switched over his distraught feelings for professionalism as he started making the ramen. As always, he devoted himself entirely to the task, and added the naruto topping at the very last stage. He put in the extra naruto too, arranging them nice and careful. It looked like narutos place at the top of the Popular Toppings list was safe for quite a good while. Here you go, order up! Teuchi slid the ramen towards his customer, and went back to worrying. He pulled back the memo pad, opening a new, blank page. The customer was happily munching on the naruto i his ramen. It was alright even if he asked for more helpings of the topping. Teuchi had a whole mountain-full of them already cut up and ready. Teuchi looked at the mountain of cut-up naruto that hed arranged on a tray in his work area. The memo pads new page was white, just like most of naruto was white. But naruto wasnt just white. It also had that lovely spiraling whirlpool pattern. Those naruto were good things. Teuchi thought. Teuchis mind was blank, and the memo pad he had in his hand was blank, but the naruto wasnt, because it had that lovely, fascinating spiral. For a while, Teuchi continued to silently stare at the mountain of naruto. And then One Free Serving of Naruto Before he even realised what he was doing, Teuchi had written that line on the memo pad. He put down the pen. Then, just as quickly, he picked it back up. One Free Serving of Naruto This wouldnt do either. It was too small a gift, he was worrying too much. Teuchi kept trying to think of a gift option that wouldnt let his worst fears come to life. It was thanks to Naruto (the person) that naruto (the topping) had gotten so popular, so Teuchi couldnt behave so small-mindedly. But, as important as a wedding gift was, if he acted too recklessly, then his imagination taunted him with images of Ayame out on the cold streets, marrying some irresponsible bastard. What he needed was something with perfect balance. It had to be something that carried a deep love of ramen, but also something that wouldnt put the store in danger of bankruptcy, some kind of splendid gift that combined both those factors. Teuchis thoughts started churning again. Its thanks to Naruto (the person) that naruto (the topping) is so popular. So in that case Teuchi found his resolve, and wrote out a new sentence on his memo pad. As he did, he thought of how Naruto looked when he ate his ramen. That look the boy always had, of being so happy he couldnt even speak. That grin of Narutos was unfair. It was underhanded. Any owner of a ramen store would turn to mush when they saw it. Whenever he thought of that look, Teuchi couldnt help but think: I always want to see this face. Alright. Teuchi gave a satisfied nod. Hed finally found the right wedding present. All You Can Eat naruto, For as Long as You Want!! *naruto, as you can tell, are the fish cakes Naruto happens to share his name with. Lol, there are lots of puns in this chapter, with some subtle references to Naruto & Sasuke with the whole naruto and seaweed thing, but yeah. I tried to make the distinction clear by never writing naruto the topping with capital letters. ** and yeah, in case anyones confused, Teuchis final gift option was a lifetime supply of naruto, for Naruto. Ahaha, aww Teuchi, tbh. Volume 4 - CH 5 The Relationship Between Them With just one glance, Haruna Sakura knew that this gift was The One. This is it, she thought, theres no better wedding gift than this! She had been browsing for gifts inside her favourite fashion-conscious store when her eyes landed on a marvel: a one-of-a-kind photo frame. The colour, the shape, even the tiny details carved into the design, everything about it fit Sakuras tastes perfectly. It almost made her feel like the frame had come into existence just so it could be bought by her. Sakura was the type who absolutely had to buy one-of-a-kind items. Shed decided that it wouldnt do if she bought a gift that she wouldnt have wanted for herself. If you didnt like the gift you were buying yourself, you couldnt really be confident in giving it to others, could you? Ahh, if I could, I really would like to decorate my room with this. She couldnt help but think, If I had something pretty like this in my room, Id look forward to coming home every day But honestly, the biggest reason Sakura had liked the photo frame was because it was one-of-a-kind. There were no other duplicates. It was the only one in the world, something nobody else would have. It was a wedding gift after all, so itd be disastrous if anyone else bought the same thing as her. But as long as she bought this one-of-a-kind photo frame, she wouldnt have to worry about anyone else buying the same gift. Even if someone else did happen to give the couple another photo frame, it wouldnt be the same design as this one, and her gift would still be superior in its uniqueness. On that note, as far as she knew, nobody else was thinking about buying a photo frame for the couple. Captain Yamato, for example, had the hobby of reading books about architectural design and construction. Furniture to match their new home Yamato had mumbled with his usual blank expression on his face, Or, no, maybe its the new home itself that I should Then there was Sai, who had a talent for art. Hed been unusually enthusiastic, talking about how he spent his nights staying up to paint the couple a wedding gift. Shed actually run into Sai this morning. She happened to catch sight of him standing absolutely still in the middle of the street, staring in numb, dumbfounded horror at the white scroll in his hands. His art had disappeared entirely. Sakura Sai had dazedly said. The bird flew awayinto the sky How in the world had his chakra ended up spilling over into his ink? Sai had been a bit too enthusiastic, if you asked Sakura. Anyway, at the end of the day everyone was gathering gifts that reflected their own hobbies or skills. So Sakura herself decided to buy a stylish momento as a gift, something that would suit her feminine nature. And thus, her eyes had come to rest on the aforementioned photo frame. A photo frame was perfect. It was a gift that would definitely become a treasured momento, something that couldnt possibly be left unused. On top of that, you wouldnt even have to make a choice about the most important part of the photo frame: the photo that would be displayed inside. That choice was left up to the recipients. Sakura imagined the photo frame standing proudly in a corner of Naruto and Hinatas room. They could put frame their wedding photo in the frame, or maybe one day a photo of their newborn child. Either way, it would be lovely. The happy memories preserved in the photo frame would watch over their future happy life. The couple would be smiling in their photo, and smiling in real life whenever they looked at that photo. For some reason, just thinking about that made Sakura feel happy as well. Her cheeks curved with a smile. This was definitely the one. It would be the best wedding gift. Sakura reached out for the photo frame, andC Found another hand had landed on the other side of the photo frame. Sakura abruptly tried to pull the frame out of the other persons hands with a great heave. However, the other party had tried to do the very same thing at the very same time. The photo frame trembled between them, not moving from the equal but opposite directions of force. Sakuras eyes followed the interlopers hand to look into the face of its owner. Her eyes met Yamanaka Inos. Ino, let go of that! Sakura grit out, pulling with all her might/ You let go, Sakura! Ino was pulling with all her might as well. Sakura and Ino were very close friends. Every since they were children, they had been friends, and they had been rivals. Just the other day, theyd been put on a mission as a team. It had been a very sudden assignment, but theyd worked together perfectly, with flawless cooperation. They practically breathed in sync. But to think that theyd come to the same store at the same time, and reached out for the same item in the same instantit was like fate was pulling a prank on them. They couldnt have pulled off the timing better if theyd planned it before hand. Maybe they really were breathing in sync. If theyd been a man and a woman, they might very well have fallen in love. Maybe tiny hearts wouldve been popping and flailing around them. Unfortunately, the only thing Sakura and Ino were giving off in this moment were flames and sparks of an imminent war. It only took one glance at Sakuras face to realise that her intentions were the same as her own. Women were good at noticing those sort of things. Ino had likely realised it too. We both want to buy this as a wedding present! Each woman understood the others intention immediately, and a fierce struggle began. I- found it- first! Ino said through clenched teeth. I was- quicker- thank you! Sakura retorted, putting all the strength she had into pulling. Whenever she and Ino got like this, she couldnt help but feel the fierce competition from their childhood friendship flaming to life. The photo frame started to quake between them from the pressure of the equally fierce strength being exerted on either side. But, I grabbed it with my right hand! Sakura thought to herself, inwardly cackling in glee. The chances of victory were hinging on their positions. Sakura had grabbed the frame with her right hand, and Ino had grabbed it with her left. Theres no way the frail grip of Inos left hand can withstand the overwhelming power of my right hand! Shannaro! Sakura yelled, and put all her force into her right hand. The photo frame slid out of Inos grip in one smooth movement. Ahh! Wh- whatre you doing?! Give that back! Ino fiercely protested. But Sakura was a grown woman. She ignored Inos shrilly complaints with an air of mature composure. Talk of them being rivals or anything was long past now. Now, Sakura had surpassed Ino in everything. Sakura held the photo frame in her hands and felt the glow of victory swell up in her chest. Youre such a brute! Ino said, An idiot with brute strength! Who are you calling an idiot?! Sakura was incensed, unconsciously clenching her hands around the photo frame in her hands. Ssakura tried to regain her composure and act like a cool-headed, mature, grown woman. H- haha. Ino, you do know that Im the best medical-nin in the entire village, right? The high-grade medical jutsu I use require very precise chakra control. To call me an idiot would be a little offits because I excel so much in chakra control that I can bring out a strength superior to others. My strength proves just how much of a terribly excellent medical-nin I am. But well, Ino, I suppose that even if you used shintenshin jutsu and entered my body, youd never be able to pull that level of chakra control off, huh? Ugh Ino took one step back, making an angry sound in the back of her throat. I win. Sakura thought, Thats right Ino, its best for you to retreat now. Sakura turned her back on Ino to head for the cash register, and in that momentC Oh, by the way, Sakura, youre surely not thinking about giving that photo frame to Naruto and Hinata as a wedding gift, now, are you? Ino called out with a terribly sarcastic tone. Youre not, right? You couldnt possibly think of giving them such a lame gift. Wha-?! Sakura stopped in her tracks, turning back to stare at Ino without thinking. But, the minute she saw the sly grin on Inos face, Sakura saw through her completely. Ah, how naive, Ino. Sakura was familiar with Inos usual tactics. She was degrading the photo frame so sakura would decide against buying it. Ino had seen she couldnt win against Sakuras brute strength, so now she was trying to win with words. However, that move wasnt going to work. Whatre you saying? Sakura retorted. You were desperate to buy this just a minute ago! Eughth-thats Weak. Really weak, Ino. Youre always like that, if someone points out the smallest flaw in what youve said, you get all flustered straight away. Thats some awful fashion sense you have there, trying to desperately buy something you thought was lame. Sakura said, giving the final blow. Ino had miserably gotten stuck in a trap of her own making. I- I didnt particularly say I was going to buy it! Ino protested. Then why were you holding onto it so frantically? Th- thatstrash, yeah, trash. I thought it was something someone had thrown away and wanted to throw it away! What a see-through excuse! Please, as if there would be trash on a shelf in the middle of a store?! Sakura suddenly became aware of a store employee coming between them. Uhm, honoured customers, The employee spoke politely, Im very sorry, but youre disturbing the other customers Ack, somehow shed raised her voice without realising. Sakura quickly turned to apologise to the employee I- Im so sorry Sakura poked Inos side with her elbow. Come on, Ino, you apologise too. Thanks to you, weve been a bother Excuse me? Its your fault for raising a ruckus and shouting, isnt it?! Ino shoved Sakura back. Watch what you say! Sakura and Ino glared at each other, and in the next instant, they had both lunged at each other. Their hands grabbed and pulled at each other, hair and clothes alike as they struggled. In the first place, things turned out like this because you butted in! I keep telling you, I found it first! Honoured customers! The panicked employee tried to come between them. Please, desist, honoured customers! Ironically, this was the only moment where Sakura and Ino got along. SHUT UP! They both shrieked at the employee, fierce, demon-like expressions on their faces. A deathly silence fell on the store. It felt like time had stopped. The employee whod tried to interfere between them had dropped their jaw. But in the next instant, her features hardened. By the time Ino and Sakura came to their senses and apologised to her in very small voices, it was already late. Both of them were thrown out of the store. Butjust because they were thrown out, that didnt mean their arguing had stopped. Look at what you did! I cant believe I actually got thrown out of the store! Look at what you did! Even though Id finally found a good wedding gift! Sakura and Ino were arguing with raised voices in the middle of the street, uncaring of any curious eyes whod stop to see what the fuss was about. Found? Ino scoffed, Oh, thats a nice way to put snatching something out of someones hands with your brute strength! In the first place Sakura, you can never compromise on anything! You dont have a heart or willingness to compromise, just that brute strength and nothing else! Theres really no helping you! Excuse me?! Having a heart has nothing to do with this! Do me a favour and stop saying random things just because I exceed you at everything! Excuse me?! What do you mean, you exceed me at everything? When it comes to which one of us is more feminine, Im definitely the one who exceeds you! Femininity? Sakura scoffed. Where? Youre just gaudy and flashy! Ah, what a sore loser! Ino crowed. When it comes to looks, fashion sense, flower arrangement, and cooking, Im better at everything single one of those things! Oh, but when it comes to having inhuman strength, thats certainly your victory. Ino, you pig! A vein was throbbing in Sakuras forehead. But, she hadnt lost yet. Oh? I can cook just fine, you know? And when it comes to things like looks or fashion sense, thosere stupid things to concern yourself with. You know, its because stuff like that is all you think about that youre not good. Sakura gave an exaggerated, dramatic sigh, shaking her head in faux-disappointment. Just because people will never look at you and see an intelligent woman like they do with me, that doesnt mean you should lash out at me. Ino didnt so much as flinch. Ahh, actually Sakura, come to think of it, I just had this thought today. Someone whos got a big head when their only redeeming feature is brute strength, that kind of woman will never get proposed to, right? Thats so pitiful Never get proposed to?! Thats what I should be telling you! Eh? Oh, Im sorry, Sakura. I didnt say that about you in particular, but I guess I accidentally hit the bullseye, huh? Ill apologise if I hurt your feelings~ You Maybe Ino had brought up such an incredibly sensitive matter since their argument was originally about wedding gifts, but that was just too far. It was a low blow. But well, Ino continued. I guess it is kinda obvious that just a good head and brute strength arent enough to guarantee youll be a bride. What are you, a master of sarcasm? Sakura thought, but replied without cowering. I keep telling you that I can cook! And my cooking is sure to be at least better than yours, Ino. Pardon? Sakura, you dont seriously think someone like you can beat me at cooking, do you? Obviously I do. Im confident I couldnt possibly lose to you! Fine then. Lets see whos really better! Ino and Sakua glared at each other. Somehow, the outcome of their pride and stubbornness had turned into a cooking competition. Wedding presents, the photo frame, everything else had been thrown out the window and forgotten completely. Neither cared about how things had come to this. The only thing that fueled both women was to do everything in their power to wipe that smug smirk off of their rivals face. Sakura and Ino. The cooking showdown that would put both their womanly prides on the line had now begun. The star dish of the showdown: soldier pills. Soldier pills were small, transportable masses of preserved food that shinobi liked to use. Foods with high nutrient balances were kneaded and dehydrated into round balls. They were very well known and widely used in all parts of the shinobi world as a standard military ration. However, the world of soldier pills was unexpectedly deep. It wouldnt be an exaggeration to say that there was the numbers of different types of soldier pill were equal to the number of people who made them. This was because the ingredients used in the solder pills, as well as their size, varied from maker to maker. For example, there were those who made soldier pills using ingredients listed in a secret recipe that had been handed down in their clan for generations. And there were also those who make them so big that they were about the size of a rice ball. And then there were those who made soldier pills for animal consumption, not humans. Soldier pills were a type of food whose contents were changed by many, many factors. The family tradition for the recipe, preferences, physical condition, tactics, mission length, weather conditionsall these factors went into the making of a single soldier pill. That was why Ino and Sakura had decided the the soldier pill would be the dish for their cook-off. It was quick to make, and easy to eat. The wide range of its recipe also allowed both Sakura and Ino to display their different personalities and skills, and quickly and easily determine which was superior. Sakura had bought her ingredients, gone home, and immediately gotten to work on creating her soldier pill. Shed poured all her ingredients bowls, and put all her concentration into mashing them with a wooden pestle. First, there was sesame seeds, almonds and walnuts. All ingredients that were commonly used in Konoha. Just you wait and see! She muttered as she grinded the ingredients to powdered dust. Ill show you that when it comes to cooking, my ability is definitely higher! All the ingredients used in soldier pills were generally prepared the same way: grinding them until theyd become a powdered dust. Sakura added in more often-used ingredients, honey and rock candy, continuing her work. As she grinded the ingredients together, her thoughts went back to her Academy days. The academys Kunoichi Classes including teaching the young kunoichi about things like flower arrangement and tea ceremony. You had to learn a wide range of information about culture and behaviour. The classes existed so that kunoichi could easily infiltrate enemy territory undetected, so their behaviour and knowledge wouldnt betray their inner nature. You couldnt grow to be a successful kunoichi if you didnt know how to act like a normal woman. And those many Kunoichi Classes had, of course, included cooking. Ino had shined brilliantly within cooking class, always carrying out her recipes to the letter. Sakura, on the other hand, couldnt follow them as easily. Back then, Sakura had looked with yearning aspiration at the ever-popular Ino. But now, things are different. As a kunoichi, and as a woman, Sakura had continued to grow and improve her skills. The person she used to admire from behind then became someone she could face head on, side by side. And now, Sakura had taken one step after another to move forwards, further than Ino had. Inoin cooking, and in whatever else that comes my way, get ready to take a good look at my back! Sakura furiously said, full of fighting spirit as she grinded away with the wooden pestle. Ino had said shed never become a bride- well, Sakura wasnt about to take that lying down. She absolutely could not afford to lose in this battle. In the first place, Ino was just getting carried away in the the bliss of getting along well with Sai lately. Sakura wasnt going to lose against that fickle bliss. Youre going to get a good taste of a blossoming womans wrath! Sakura darkly thought. Cooking mightve been a little different than the actual matter that had sparked her rage, but either way it was a win. And Sakura had prepared a plan that would guarantee her victory. Fufufuthis is it. Sakura let a wicked grin creep up her face, holding up the ingredient that was key to her success. The ingredient in question was pudding. Sakura had associated with Ino since childhood. She knew all about Inos great love for pudding. In fact, she knew all of Inos likes and dislikes. For shinobi, information was everything. It wasnt arrogant for Sakura to think shed win when she had perfect knowledge of Inos tastes. Brimming with overconfidence, Sakura threw the pudding into her soldier pill paste. Cackling, she mixed it in with a gleeful grin. With, this my victory is guaranteed! All that was left after this was to mould the paste into a suitably sized ball and dehydrate it. In a short time, Sakuras special pudding-flavoured sweet soldier pill was complete. Some time later, nearby the general store theyd been kicked out of Ino was already standing at the place theyd promised to meet on one of Konohas main streets. Sakuras eyes met Inos, and Ino let out a wide grin. So you showed up after all, Sakura. Ino said, And here I was beginning to think youd realised you were no match for me and ran away. Ill bet anything she purposely showed up early just so she could say that line to me! Sakura inwardly thought, clicking her tongue. The reason she thought that was because Sakura had arrived exactly at their promised time to meet. She had decided she was never going to be a late-arriver like Kakashi-sensei. What a pointless thing to do But, Sakura wasnt going to be provoked by petty tricks like this. The victory to this match was within the palm of her hands. Ino could boast while she could. Victory comes to those who take their time. Sakura said as she faced Ino. Her composure was magnificent, and she was fully confident in her impending victory. Alright then, our match has begun. Ino serenely said. So, to make sure the match is fair, lets take our soldier pills to a third party wholl judge which one is most delicious. HUH?! Sakura gaped. Youre not going to eat it?! In a single instant, the victory held in Sakuras hands had crumbled into dust and rubble. Obviously not. Inos eyes were wide in surprise at Sakuras reaction. Even if we both ate the others dish, theres a high chance that neither of us would be willing to hand over the victory. Thats why we need an objective third party to be the judge. Inos reasoning was sound. Sakura had had a blind spot. To think that Ino wouldnt eat the soldier pill Going out of her way to buy pudding had been pointless. Going to the trouble of making the soldier pill Inos favourite flavour was now completely, utterly pointless. Judging by your reaction, Sakuradont tell me you Ino was fixedly staring at Sakura, a furrow between her brows. You didnt put poison into the soldier pill, did you? As if Id ever do a thing like that! Now that was just too much. How could Ino doubt her own best friend? I wonder Ino said, Well, anyway, fine. So anyway, I think we should have Chouji be the judge. W- Wait a minute! Choujis your teammate! Its Chouji, so when it comes to food, hell never lie, yknow? Hes not going to skew the facts to take my side. So when it comes to this, Chouji would be the most reliable judge, wouldnt he? Well, when she put it that way, anyone would agree. Sakura found herself coming round to Inos reasoning. Alright then, Ill go and bring Chouji. I saw him around here somewhere just a while ago. Ino said, and disappeared. Soon enough, Sakura could hear her coming back, most likely with Chouji in tow since she was constantly spouting things like just come on and hurry! or this is a chance to eat some nice home-made cooking, yknow! and other things. It sounded like Chouji was putting up some resistance to the position of judge. Sure enough, Chouji slowly came into Sakuras field of vision, his giant form being dragged forwards by an insistent Ino. His face looked incredibly gloomy. Ino was definitely forcing him to participate. Just wait, Ino. He was protesting,I came down down here to eat ice cream. Its fine, its fine. You always say you have a separate stomach for desert, dont you? Yup. Thats why Im telling that Ive already eaten dessertOh, Sakura. Choujis eyes landed on the other girl, and he immediately began to plead for help. Ino doesnt understand me very well. She wants to make me some kind of guinea pig for a soldier pill. Save me, please. So, Ino, Sakura said, Which pill do we give him first? Sakura had expected Chouji to say something like Oh shit, you were in on it too! but instead, he turned meek. Oh well, I suppose Ill have a separate stomach for soldier pills too Chouji said such a reliable sounding thing. Sakura felt reassured. Ino was right. Chouji would definitely be a fair and impartial judge to both of them. Besides, even if Ino didnt eat the soldier pill, that didnt change the fact that the pudding would make it taste sweet and delicious. Shed still be able to win. Sakura clenched her fists tightly. Okay so, Chouji, can you eat both pills and tell us which one is more delicious? Ino handed Chouji the soldier shed made, and Sakura did too. Chouji looked down at the soldier pills he held in both hands, his eyes flickering from one to the other. He raised Sakuras soldier pill to his mouth first, and took a bite. He was judging, so rather than eating the only thing, he only bit half of it. Thithis is Choujis eyes had grown wide as dinner plates. Sakura waited for his reaction and Delicious! This is really delicious! Its amazingly sweet, and its chased away all my fatigue completely! Chouji was so delighted, he immediately threw the other uneaten half of the soldier pill into his mouth. He didnt stop there, even plucking the extra soldier pills Sakura had made from her hands, and gobbling some of them up too. Alright! Sakura hooted, raising her fist into the air. Take a good look, Ino. This is a display of my real abilities! Choujis positive reaction had been obviously unexpected. Ino was glaring at him with a horrible look on her face, and Sakura could hear the womans molars grinding. How about it? Sakura asked her, Maybe you should just accept my victory now? Cho-Chouji, Ino was flustered. Come on, hurry up and eat mine too. Choujis cheeks were still stuffed full with Sakuras soldier pills, but he quickly popped in Inos soldier pill as well. He threw in the whole thing, not doing it by halves this time. He stuffed three, four more of Inos extra pills in as well. Maybe it was so he could taste it properly, since some of Sakuras soldier pills were still in his mouth. Yesyesyes! Choujis eyes were wide as saucers, and he was nodding fervently. Amazing! These ones are really sweet and delicious too! Chouji swallowed his cheeks full of soldier pills with a huge gulp. An incredibly satisfied grin drifted across his face. Ino had gotten incredibly worked up and excited, pressing him for answers. So, which one is it? Which one is more delicious? Come on. Hmmtheyre both really sweet and delicious, so its really hard to say which ones better. Chouji mumbled. He tilted his head to the side in puzzlement, crossing his arms as he chewed. One after another, more of Ino and Sakuras spare soldier pills popped into his mouth, being carefully chewed and judged. Yeah, I think theyre both great. Theyre both sweet and delicious. Yup, really delicious. Delicgeugh. Choujis legs crumpled from underneath him, and he collapsed. Blood was trickling down from his nostrils. Oh no! Wh- wait- whats wrong?! Chouji had gone completely limp on the ground, his eyes wide. A single soldier pill spilled out of his limp hand onto the ground, and upon seeing that it was one of Inos, Sakura let out a shriek. Poison! She shrieked. Ino, you! You put poison in it, didnt you?! As if Id ever do that! What kind of a person do you think I am?! E-either way, we need to give him medical aid! Chouji, come back to your senses! Choujis mouth creaked open at the sound of Sakuras voice. Even I got to makemanygreat comrades He incoherently mumbled, blood leaking down his nose. Whats happening?! Is your life flashing before your eyes?! Noooooooooo, Chouji dont die! Ino cried, Sakura, quickly, do something! Ino was crying, but Sakura didnt even understand how Chouji had gotten like this. Examining Chouji, he seemed to be in perfect health. The only possible cause for his state was unmistakably the soldier pills hed eaten. Dodont tell me Sakura swallowed. An unknownpoison? Sakura was staring fixedly at Ino with a hair-raising look on her face. Why are you suspicious of me?! Ino shrieked. He became like this after eating your soldier pill Its possible the effect of your pills just kicked in! But I wouldnt put in any poison! I have madeso manycomrades Chouji deliriously mumbled. This is bad! Choujis life is flashing before his eyes again! We dont have time to argue about this! Sakura said to herself, and gathered her determination. She reached out for one of Inos soldier pills. Whatre you gonna do?! I need to figure out whats in this, and this is the best way to do it, Sakura said, and carefully pulled the soldier pill closer to press it against her tongue. If theres any poison in this, then my tongue would probably go numb Rather than eating it straight away, it was best to taste it and check first. I keep telling you I havent put any poison in it! Ugh, honestly! Ino reached out a grabbed a soldier pill too, except this one was Sakuras. She licked the pill as well. Its possible yours is the one thats weird! Sakura carefully tested the soldier pill, keeping it against her tongue. Cold sweat broke out against her forehead, but she kept the pill in place in earest. For a while, things were silent. Sakura carefully broke the soldier pill in her hand to tiny pieces. Seeing her do that, Ino timidly did the same. They both put very small bits of the soldier pill onto their tongues, rolling them around. its delicious. yeah. Both of them flung the remainders of the soldiers pills unto their mouths, unable to hold back. What is thisthis flavour, its incredibly delicious! Sakura couldnt even try to hide her surprise as she chewed. Mine too, I love this flavour! Ino couldnt hide her surprise, either. There wasnt any poison at all. Rather, Inos soldier pill was Sakuras favourite flavour: white ball anmitsu. In other words, it was just a sweet, the same as Sakuras was. Then, why in the world? Just as Sakura was thinking that, Chouji had suddenly gotten back on his feet. Chouji, are you okay?! Ahh, that surprised me. Chouji said, wiping at the blood that had spilled down his nose. My blood sugar suddenly rose.huh, to think I even got a nosebleed. So thats what it had been: blood sugar. Now that Chouji said it, Sakura understood too. It was true that both soldier pills were incredibly sweet. And that was just an individual soldier pill. Chouji had eaten large amounts of both, and all at once on top of that. No wonder the sudden sugar in his system had affected him badly. And hed mentioned eating ice cream before this, too. No matter how much of a big eater Chouji was, getting far more sugar than he needed all at once was bound to effect him badly. Ahhhhh, Im so glad, so thats what it was Ino let out a huge sigh of relief. Sakura glanced back at her, and the woman looked like the weight of the world had come off her shoulders. Yup, thats all it was. But yknow, after eating those soldier pills, I really feel like Ive eaten real pudding and white ball anmitsu. Hmm, after this, maybe Ill go and eat some sweet chestnuts? Sakura and Ino stared at Chouji, dumbfounded. Chouji, you know youre gonna kill yourself like that?! Its fine. Chouji replied. The stuff I just ate has already been digested by now. Thats something that wouldnt normally be possible Ino stared at Chouji, stunned. Chouji, youre really amazing. But hey, Ino. Sakura turned to ask the woman. Why did you go to the trouble of making the soldier pill my favourite flavour? Ino was the one whod said they should make an impartial third party taste the soldier pills to be fair, so what on earth was this about? Sakura was really curious about the answer. Ino had an uncomfortable look on her face. No particular reasonI just thought maybe itd be good if I gave you some to eat sometime maybe Pff, as if. Ino had thought along the exact same lines as Sakura, and given the soldier pill the same flavour as her opponents favourite food. So, in the end of the day, their argument that had started from reaching for the same photo frame, had ended up in them plotting the exact same cooking strategy. Thinking the ludicrous coincidence, Sakura couldnt help but start laughing. Ahahahaha, whats with that? At the end, you even had the exact same strategy as me. Ino got caught up in Sakuras laughter, and started giggling too. Fufu, well, weve been hanging out together for a long time after all. Just how many years have we spent together? I think everything you think. We both do. Sakura added. They were both facing each other and laughing so hard they were clutching at their sides. Eventually, Sakura calmed down, and wiped her fingers on her trousers. Okay then, as someone who thinks the same way you do, can I say something? What? Dont you think that if we both looked for a wedding present together, wed be able to find something far better than a photo frame? Naturally. If we combined my fashion sense with yours, nobody could possibly stand a chance! Ino said, with a wink and a grin. Alright! Sakura threw an energetic fist into the air. Then lets both go and find the best wedding present ever! Ino smiled at the sight. Honestly, Sakurayouve really become a force to be reckoned with. She was looking at Sakura with a suddenly wistful and serious look on her face. You used to be such a crybaby back in the old daysPeople were always calling you forehead girl or forehead revolution, and you started crying straight away everyt ime Hold on, Ino! Sakura exclaimed. What do you mean forehead revolution?! Dont just suddenly make up named that a person was never called! Come to think of it, you just thought that name up now, didnt you?! Ino stuck out a tongue at her. Wha- You! Get back here right now! Ahahaha, learn to take a joke! Both of their voices mingled and mixed into the chaos of Konohas, but they sounded unmistakably happy. Sakura and Ino. The two of them would always be rivals. And, always be the very best of friends. Volume 4 - CH 6 The Legendary Teacher Im glad I chose this job. Until you were able to have that thought with pride surging through your chest, then your life wasnt truly a happy one. This was because a job was something you chose to live through for your own sake, as well as the sake of others. Or at least, that was the way that Umino Iruka thought. And, right now, Iruka was extremely happy. His chest was bursting with pride when he thought about it. The trigger for this sudden burst of joy was simply this: hed glanced the three syllables on top of Ichizoku Ramens Most Popular Toppings list: Na-ru-to. Just glancing at it made Iruka immediately think of Naruto and Hinatas upcoming wedding, and before he knew it, he was overwhelmed with emotion. It wasnt because he was easily moved to tears with his old age. It was because the emotion overwhelming Iruka was likely something very close to parental love and affection. And a certain something had happened to make him even more overwhelmed. The other day day, Iruka had been in the Academys staff room as usual, working through some documents. Naruto had come to see him with an incredibly deferential look on his face. He said he had something to ask Iruka, something about the wedding. Iruka had already let Naruto know he was definitely going to come to the wedding, so he didnt have the faintest idea what he wanted to ask. Iruka asked him what he wanted to talk about, and Naruto abruptly blurted out: Id like it if youd come to the wedding as my dad. The second Iruka heard that, a giant grin spread over his face. He answered immediately: Leave it to me! Iruka even cracked a joke as he was seeing Naruto off outside: You came in with such a serious look on your face, I thought you were gonna ask me to treat you to ramen again. The minute Narutos figure disappeared out of his sight, Iruka found himself publicly bursting into tears. In all his years of being a teacher, nothing else had ever made him feel this happy. The path I chose wasnt wrong, Iruka thought as he wept, his tears overflowing seemingly without an end. And now, even when it was just seeing the word naruto written at Ichiraku Ramen, Iruka felt his eyes starting to burn again. He even found himself ordering another topping of naruto. It was because Naruto was a dearly beloved, special pupil to Iruka. Of course, Iruka wasnt the type of teacher who gave special treatment to one pupil above the others. He never played favourites. But that being said, Naruto wasnt just his dearest pupil. Even amongst all the people Iruka knew, Naruto was a special existence for him. Although, it hadnt always been like that. When Iruka had first become Narutos class teacher, hed had mixed feelings. Whenever Iruka looked at Narutos face, the faces of his dead parents would never fail to come to mind as well. Iruka was an excellent shinobi. His parents had been excellent, as well, and that was partially why when Iruka was still young, theyd gone out to the battlefield and never come back. When the village was being attacked by the Demon Fox, Irukas parents had headed to the frontlines to protect Iruka, and everyone else, from the assault. Theyd fought without rest until their very last breaths. And ever since then, Iruka had lived through the rest of his adolescence without anyone to praise him, without anyone to acknowledge him. Every single time he returned to a pitch black home with nobody else inside, hed think of his parents. The years passed, and Iruka became a teacher. And who would appear in front of him as a student but Naruto? Iruka knew that the Demon Fox, the Nine Tails, was sealed inside of Naruto. And he was also perfectly aware that Naruto hadnt done anything wrong, and had nothing to be blamed for. Even though he understood iteven though many years had passed and he shouldve been able to accept it his head understood, but his heart was discomposed. His father had been a silent and severe man. His mother had been a composed woman, family-oriented and reliable. They had both been jounins who were deeply trusted by many people. Whenever Iruka had hung out with his friends, hed never stop talking about his parents with a deep glow of pride. He wanted to quickly grow up and become a fine shinobi too, so he could support them. But then, in the blink of an eye, the Demon Fox appeared in the village, with a blood curdling howl that sounded like it could pierce the very heavens themselves. His mother had sustained injuries trying to protect him. His father had every inch of him covered in blood, but he was still scrambling to try and fight. His parents worn and weary figures would start fading and slipping away and then Iruka would wake up with a start, back in the dark of his room. It was a nightmare hed see every now and then, every since he was young. But after Naruto was made his pupil, Iruka started seeing that same nightmare every single night. The nightmares made him completely emotionally drained, and Iruka found himself starting to unconsciously avoid Naruto. Naruto would constantly pull pranks, and that made his other classmates dislike him. But your classmates were supposed to be your comrades. But Iruka couldnt bring himself to do anything. All he could do was watch. His confidence as a teacher crumbled away. He was completely useless. Until one day, Iruka realised a certain fact: Naruto is the same as me. The pain of living day in and day out with no one to praise you, no one to acknowledge youC I know that pain better than anyone, so why didnt I notice this until now? After that realisation, Iruka never found himself avoiding Naruto again. Soon, his nightmares disappeared as well. But what if? What if I hadnt had that realisation? Even now, the thought occasionally bothered Iruka. If he hadnt had that realisation, then it was very possible that Iruka couldve become someone who thought about nobody but himself, who believed he was the only one in a pitiable circumstance. He couldve become the lowest of the low, an idiotic bastard who didnt notice the pain of anyone but himself. Iruka believed it was thanks to Naruto that hed escaped that fate. Meeting Naruto had been something that had changed his life. It wouldnt be an exaggeration to say that Naruto was the reason Iruka had decided to work as a teacher for as long as he lived. Thats how important Narutos existence was to Iruka. At that momentC It was because he was thinking of old times. A certain mans face flashed briefly before Irukas mind. The mans name: Mizuki. Hed been a man who held high grades, and been blessed with a talent for ninjutsu. Mizuki was someone Iruka had known since childhood. Theyd applied for the teaching examination together, worked as teachers together, and helped each other. Mizuki had always been smiling and soft-spoken, unlike Iruka and his tendency to nag, so hed always been a popular teacher amongst the students. But, Mizuki had another side to him, different from the smiling face he showed their students. He had been full of deep jealousy, a man who couldnt believe in himself. Nobody truly grasps the real me. The real me is far more amazing. Im not all that I appear to be. Im not some small human to be pushed into a tiny corner like this. Everyone in the village is underestimating me. Mizuki only ever let those words spill past his lips around Iruka. In a nutshell, Mizuki was another person who was troubled because he had no one who would acknowledge him. That was why Mizuki turned into someone who viciously pursued things, only caring about the end results and nothing else. When things didnt go well, he blamed others. He grew jealous and resenting, and he didnt sever the wicked feelings that were leading him astray. In the end, Mizuki had taken the wrong path as a shinobi. Mizuki, Iruka thought, when it comes to being a teacher, theres no such thing as instant results. Any results from your teaching will be seen in five or ten yearsC no, for some cases, they may need even more time. It depends on how those children are taught and raised, and what kind of adults they grow to be. The results from teaching are seeing the lives our students live when they grow up. But, if you couldnt see even that, of course you wouldnt understand. Now, Naruto was so famous that there wasnt a single person in the village who didnt know his name. Everyone acknowledged him. Naruto, who had been bullied and laughed at every since he was a child, who had lived his days isolated from everyone else. Naruto. Would Mizuki have been able to predict this future for Naruto? No, he wouldnt have. Someone who had hadnt spent their years as a teacher would never be able to see what Iruka was seeing now, the future of a student unfolding before his very eyes. This feeling, these emotions, nobody else could possibly understand them. I had wanted you to feel this emotion as wellMizuki. By the time Iruka left Ichirakus, it was already dark outside.bHe hurried on his road home, feeling the night wind pushing at his back. The wedding present hed bought for Naruto and Hinata was inside his vests front pocket. It was nice to feel the heavy weight of something so important against his chest. He thought that he really was a happy man. It wasnt just Naruto who still felt affection towards Iruka after graduating, but many of his other students as well. There wasnt a happier feeling in the world than that. Naruto especially would frequently come to see Iruka, asking if they could go and eat some ramen together. But, in the future, Hinata would probably be making meals for him at home, so if Naruto still went out to eat as frequently, shed probably get mad at him. Thinking about that, Iruka couldnt help but laugh. His good mood continued the journey home. Iruka entered pitch-black house with nobody inside, and turned on the lights. There was a single toothbrush sitting in the cup beside his sink. He thought he might have to replace it soon. A half-drunk cup of tea lay, forgotten, on his coffee table. Iruka realised hed forgotten to bring his laundry back in from where hed hung it out to dry, and moved to bring them back in. His underwear in particular was now freezing cold from hanging out in the night air. There was a faint splash as a drop of water fell from the kitchen sinks faucet. It was a quiet night. Iruka let out a sigh, looking up at the low ceiling. It might be about time that I start seriously looking for a life-partner too For some reason, the thought that entered his mind felt particularly strong today. Iruka made a small fist, and murmured to himself: Alright, lets not to lose to Naruto! It was a very quiet declaration. As for what happened with that matter, lets leave that for Iruka to find out. Volume 4 - CH 7 The Final Mission, beginning Lee and Tenten had been talking at the training grounds. Shikamaru and Chouji had met up by chance. Sakura and Ino had faced each other in their favourite store. Sai had crumbled on the spot as he stared up at the sky. Iruka had been humming as he hung his laundry to dry. And Ichirakus had been busy with work as usual. Not a single person had noticed the tiny insect flying near them. It was only one insect. It was flying restlessly around the village of Konohagakure. It was a very small insect, so small that nobody paid any attention to it. And even if anyone did become aware of it, theyd soon lose sight of it in the clear and bright, sunny weather. It was difficult to keep watching a tiny bug that was flying restlessly round and round. However Suddenly, the insect stopped moving. Or rather, to be more accurate, it had taken a break to rest its wings. When an insect stops its movement anywhere near you, it becomes much easier to see. Aburame Shino looked intently through his sunglasses at the winged insect that had stopped atop his fingertip. Youve worked hard. He said, thanking the bug in a quiet voice. As he did so, the bug on his fingertip walked down into his palm, and then very calmly and naturally disappeared into Shinos sleeve. A bug had just gone inside his clothes, but Shino wasnt flustered. Rather, he had a very calm look on his face. That was only natural. The reason was that Shino was a shinobi who had been born into the Aburame clan, which was a line of insect users. The people of his clan would allow insects called Kikaichuu to reside inside their bodies. Afterwards they would command those insects as they liked, and in return allowed the insects to feed on their bodies chakra. This is how their contract continued. And the very bug that had gone into Shinos sleeve a moment ago, was simply another Kikaichuu that Shino manipulated. It was very natural that Shino had remained calm, because all that had happened was that the insect had returned to its next. In their contract, the insects were mainly used out in the field during missions, but they had a wide variety of uses. Besides attacking and defending, they helped seize the enemy they were hunting down, doing things such as chasing and or searching. They were used for pretty much every scenario. A large number of insects could even take on the shape of a human and use your own jutsu. In this way, the Aburame clan who lived side by side with a large number of insects since the day they were all born became familiar with the nature of those insects, and perfected the jutsus they used when they fought alongside them. they were a hiden clan. And, this day Shino had been using one of his clans hiden techniques to spy on the activities of his comrades. As for why hed do such a thing, the reason lay in the man who was standing near Shino. So, howd it go? Inuzuka Kiba asked as he played with the ninja dog, Akamaru. As expected, it looks like everyones working to obtain wedding gifts Shino replied from where he stood, a high ground that allowed him an unbroken eyes view of the village. Just like I thought, Kiba said. So, has anyone already decided what theyre gonna get? Most of them havent yet. It looks like theyre mostly meeting up to consult with each other. Kiba let out a whoop at Shinos reply. Yahoo! Just like I wanted! As Kiba spoke, he brushed the goatee growing on his face. Lately, Kiba looked like hed grown very fond of it, and touched it whenever he could. It looked like it was becoming a habit. Its our chance to act while everyones worried. Its finally my time to shine. More accurately, our time. Shino corrected. Kiba let out a laugh, I know thaat. Right, Akamaru? Kiba said, patting the ninken whose length was longer than Kibas own height. Kiba had been born into the Inuzuka clan who was a clan of ninja dog users, so for him, Akamaru was a partner he had been eating and sleeping alongside ever since his childhood. It was the same for Akamaru, and even now when he had past 10 years of age, Akamaru still continued to accompany Kiba on missions every day. Akamaru immediately barked twice as a reply to Kibas question. Yeah, thats right. Kiba said. Were gonna find a present that nobody else has given, one that comes only from Team Eight. Team Eight huh Shino thought as he watched Kiba and Akamaru play together. His thoughts were going back to the first day he had been put on the same team as Kiba. The silent Shino, the action-loving Kiba and Akamaru, and the withdrawn and thoughtful Hinata. Those three people and one animal had been the members of Team Eight. They were comrades who had trained together, supported each other, and always been together. However, while the mature Hinata had been one thing, Kiba had been boisterous, reckless and extremely prone to grabbing leadership to himself. When Shino had been put on the same team as Kiba, hed found his different character and way of thinking to be extremely tedious, and had spent every day sighing to himself and lamenting the difficult future that was no doubt in store. I dont think Ill be able to get along with you well. The reason is that weC Even now, Shino could clearly remember his past self who had said those words. On that note, his words were cut off because at that moment in the past Kiba had shouted: What the hells with you? Youre really gloomy! Kiba really had been crass ever since the old days, always speaking in a loud voice like an idiot. Kibado you remember what I said the first time we were put on the same team?Shino suddenly asked that question without any real reason. Impulsiveness was Kibas department. But, Kiba most likely wouldnt remember it. The first time? Kiba asked, Oh yeah, that time when we were eating lunch at the training grounds. Kiba kept petting Akamaru as he thought, looking up at the sky. Then, Right, it was only my lunch box has bugs in it or something like that- I never said such a thing. Shino said. What in the world? Forget remembering it, Kiba had even fabricated a senseless fake memory in its place. Shino fixed his stare on Kiba, feeling the anxious feeling he had back then still lingering in his insides. Wha-what? That wasnt what you said? Kiba looked flustered by Shinos stare for a moment before recovering, Well, forget about the small details. The wedding gifts are more important. Right? Kiba grinned widely so his canines showed. Shino thought that Kibas ability to quickly switch moods wasnt a good, but a bad quality of his. In that moment: You know, Shino, Kibas tone of voice had changed. A hard wind blew between the two of them. Kiba continued speaking with a serious look on his face. I was happy that Kakashi-sensei called this thing a mission. Even I can get that Kakashi-sensei and everyone else are just calling a mission in name only. Since hes someone whos got eccentric judgement. But, for me, I really think of this as a mission. Im thinking this is gonna be the last mission for us members of Team Eight Shino didnt even let out a sound of agreement, calmly, silently listening. Its like weve been given this last mission, this last mission. Kiba continued. Like maybe Kakashi-sensei could have specially arranged this for that purpose? Or I could just be overthinking things Kiba stopped talking and looked away, laughing like he was embarrassed. No, youre not overthinking Shino said. Shino understood Kibas feeling so much it hurt. It was because hed been having the exact same feelings too. Hinata was currently busy getting ready for the wedding. Kiba and Shino both went out on missions a lot as chuunins leading their own teams. The four of them hadnt been able to head out on any missions as Team Eight lately. And, most likely, after this theyd Team Eights last mission for Hinata, huh Nobody else would be involved. This was something that only people who had been on their team every since they were young, who had been through all the happiness and sorrow with them would ever understand. Kiba and Shino, and Akamaru as well It was definitely something nobody but Team Eight could do. That was why Shino had sent his Kikaichuu to fly and investigate the states of their other comrades. So Shino and Kiba could give a more magnificent present than anyone else. so they could make Hinata happy. So, what are we going to do? Shino asked. Kiba fell silent. He was staring at nothing in particular without saying a single word. Silence continued between the two. Akamaru restlessly moved around, uneasily letting out a whine as he looked up at Kiba. Shino couldnt tolerate the unnatural silence coming from Kiba. Is it possible you havent thought of anything yet? Kiba silently nodded. Hed said all that, but at the end he didnt have anything but his enthusiasm to show for it. as expected, Kiba was always Kiba. This side of him hadnt changed ever since the old days. For now, we have to think only of things that Hinata likes. It cant be beyond the things she likes. The reason is that if we give her something that, for example, we didnt know she disliked on her long-awaited wedding day, the atmosphere will turn bad. They gone through missions with Hinata for many years. It was enough to say they were comrades whod eaten out of the same pot. There was no doubt they knew what Hinata liked better than anyone else. Stuff that Hinata likes is, well, theres zenzai Kiba said. Shino thought over this. It was true that Hinata definitely loved that soup made of Azuki red beans. Whenever they were taking a break in training or on a mission and theyd stopped by a tea shop, Hinatas eyes would shine if she saw any zenzai. And then theresyeah, pressed flowers. Kiba said, She really likes making pressed flowers. Man, she has such simple hobbies. Zenzai and pressed flowersneither of them would do for a wedding gift. Come to think of it, was there anyone in the world whod give soup as a wedding present? Shino wracked his brains. Ah, wait thats right. Naruto, he always loves eating ramen, right? Kiba suddenly said. Yes, Shino said. Ramen is something he eats often, isnt it? And, you know, Kiba said, This is something really surprising that not everybody knows, but, Naruto really likes oshiruko. Oh, is that how it was? Now that you mention it, I have seen him drinking that soup out of a can before. Right? Theres something even more surprising than that. Naruto has a hobby of watering plants. And its not just watering them either. Kiba had a gleeful look on his face as he lowered his voice to murmur. Naruto, he likes talking to the plants while he waters them. Of course, just when hes the only one in the room. Akamaru and me just happened to be walking by the front of his house when we heard him, talking to one while he watered it. Hes got an odd side, talking to plants. Right, Akamaru? Akamaru let out one vigorous bark in reply. Shino didnt understand most of what Akamaru said, but he knew that this reply meant Exactly!. That definitely is unusual. Shino said. Talking to bugs is normal, but that isnt so for plants. He might have just been feeling really bored, but theres also the other possibility Well, just to be sure itd be best to go and see the situation ourselves He crossed his arms and nodded. Naruto did have certain odd sides to him. Come to think of it, in the past Naruto had even played poker with his own kage bunshin. Well that was what happened when you didnt go to play with him, Shino thought. But you know, Kiba said, When you rethink it all, its pretty amazing. What is? Yknow, the stuff they like. Like, zenzai and oshiruko**? And then pressing flowers to preserve them, and watering plants to take care of them, stuff like that. No matter how you look at it, the stuff they like and their hobbies are pretty similar, arent they? I see, youre right about that. But Kiba Mm? Wha? The most important subject is the wedding present Ah, yeah. What should we do? Silence covered them for the second time. Kiba sat down, absentmindedly stroking Akamaru. Shino stood still as usual, staring down at the ground. Then letsask somebody This time it was Kiba whod been unable to endure the silence. Everybody was asking everyone else too, right? Kiba said, Lets do that tooyeah? Where did the Kiba who was so enthusiastically talking about Team Eights last mission go? Thats what Shino thought as he looked down at the line of ants marching past his feet. He thought it, but he didnt say it, because Kiba had now given him a much better idea. I suppose we also have no choice but to go and consult someone Alright! So, whore we gonna ask? Your dad? Im saying this just in case, but my mom and sis wont do, yknow? Theyre completely different types compared to Hinata. Kiba said, getting to his feet. Good grief, he was so impatient. Theres someone whos very suitable for Team Eights last mission. Shino said. If you ask who, then that person isC I gotcha, thats who you mean! Alright, lets go Akamaru! Kiba had instantly understood what Shino meant before he could even finish speaking. He rapidly started running off with Akamaru. Both their figures slowly started getting small with the distance. He doesnt have even the slightest sliver of calm in him Shino thought, and began walking after Kiba. By the time Shino finally arrived at their intended location, Kiba and Akamaru had already made themselves right at home. Akamaru was lying down on the carpet, and Kiba had sunken comfortably into a chair. Shino calmly entered. Oh hey, youre late. Kiba said, a teacup in his hand. Kiba sat far too comfortably, like he was sitting in his own house. Really, the word restraint was probably completely foreign to Kibas brain. Youre too relaxed, Kiba. Shino said, silently sitting down as well. As he did, an infant came running from another room, throwing herself on top of Akamaru. Akakiba! Akakiba! She said, pulling at Akamarus ears. Akamaru lifted his neck, looking a little annoyed, but then lay down again and let the child continue with what they were doing. I keep tell you, Im Kiba, and hes Akamaru. Kiba said with a very put-upon tone. It sounded like theyd kept repeating this conversation many times. The child let out squeal of delight, enjoying herself and laughing. Akakiba and Kibamaru! Youre mixing them up now, mixing them together huhPlease spare me, Mirai The childs name was Sarutobi Mirai. She was the daughter of the deceased Sarutobi Asuma. Whyre you like this? Is it because Akamarus fur is white,** so youre confused? Kiba murmured, throwing a seriously thoughtful look towards Mirai, who had smushed her face affectionately against Akamarus. It was true that Akamaru was completely unlike his name, white-furred as he was. Kiba had given him the name Akamaru because after eating the special soldier pill that Kiba concocted, Akamaru would become covered in others blood in battle. But, Shino thought it was unlikely that the colour of Akamarus fur had any connection to this. The reason he thought so was that Kiba and Akamaru frequently came to play with Mirai during their walks. If she hadnt seen them often, then it would be normal for Mirai to not remember their names, but that didnt apply to Kiba and Akamaru. And yet, Mirai mixed up their names. It was most likely because Kiba and Akamaru were so close and so often together that she did that. Actually, Shino sincerely hoped that was the case. Looks like she still doesnt remember the difference even though you come to play with her a lot. Shino hadnt really meant for the words to come out, but they had. Kiba dejectedly hung his head. It doesnt bother me. He muttered. Little kids do that a lot. Its uncle buggy! Mirai suddenly said, pointing at Shino. Shino felt a painful feeling come over him, and Kiba who had been dejectedly hanging his head until just a second ago, suddenly let out a loud, booming shriek of laughter. II am big brother buggy Shino said, unable to hide his shaking. The reason is that I am still too younC I heard what was happening from Kiba, A voice behind him said. Shino turned his head to see a woman with lustrous black hair. Mirais mother, Sarutobi Kurenai had come in with tea and some food. She had been through pregnancy and childbirth, and was now going through housework and child care, but for Kiba and Shino and Hinata, she was always their teacher who had been in charge of their Team Eight. Shino and Kiba had both thought that if they wanted to ask anyone for advice about Team Eights last mission, then it would be her. That was why theyd come here. But A present for Hinata, huh Kurenai said, leaving the plate Cit was mostly full of snacksC on the table and sitting down. But rather than me, dont you think it wouldve been better to ask Hanabi? No, well, I mean yeah but Kiba mumbled, his hand stopping mid-action as hed reached out for his favourite snack, beef jerky. Hanabi was Hinatas little sister. Compared to the plain and not very fashionable Hinata, Hanabi was a far more fashionable young woman and extravagant in her tastes. We thought that it might be bestnot to involve her family members Kiba awkwardly tried to speak in a polite way he was unaccustomed to. Lately, Kiba had been trying to speak politely to Kurenai. It was most likely the fact that hed realised you couldn''tt speak to your old teacher like you were best friends after a certain age was past. A-and then, of course, wellwe are not thatintimately acquaintedwith her. Kiba stuttered. While they had gone to the Hyuuga house a few times to meet up with Hinata and such, neither Kiba nor Shino had met up with Hanabi outside of that. Itd feel awkward to suddenly go and ask her to consult with them about wedding gifts. Plus, like Kiba said, if they involved her family members, then there was the chance that the talk of wedding presents would reach Hinatas ears. Hmm, youre right Kurenai crossed her arms and thought. In the meantime, Kiba finally laid his hands on the beef jerky, chewing on it furiously while muttering The feeling when you chew it is really importantthe feeling like it was a magic spell. There was another reason for Kiba to get so upset when the subject of Hanabi was mentioned. Shino knew a little bit about it. The incident had happened on the day when theyd been told that unbelievable news about the moon possibly falling. The memories of those days when meteorites were raining down on the Earth and it really felt like the last days of their existence were still fresh in Shinos mind. Most of the village had been repaired by now, but if you took one step outside the village, youd see the leftover scars from that time still remaining. No matter how many months or years passed, you still wouldnt be able to perfectly restore all the trees that had been moved down by the meteors, or the meteor craters left behind. Shinobi had gathered to protect the village from the meteors raining down on them, and in the midst of this a team had been assembled to rescue Hanabi, who had been kidnapped by the mastermind behind the occurrence. It was a team assembled to find the hideout of the mastermind as well as rescue Hanabi. A mission like that was Kibas specialty, since he was a ninja dog user with his own keen sense of smell. Hed been brimming with confidence, saying how likely it was that hed be picked due to his connection to Hinata via Team Eight. But, Kibas name hadnt been on the list of those selected for the mission. Kiba had become incredibly depressed about that matter. What arent I on it? If it was me, I could find where Hanabi was straight awayI could definitely help outI really wanted to find the creeps hideout and whoop his ass with my new jutsuI wanted to help stop the moon from falling Even now, Shino could clearly remember Kibas endless grumbling about the subject. Its over, its over Kiba had murmured in despair, and Shino remembered telling him, Well, the whole world may be over soon Why did he remember that? Probably because Kiba had ignored it. But, Shino thought that Kakashi-sensei had chosen the right teams for the right occasions. Kakashi-sensei was the Rokudaime Hokage, and he had to make his decision while thinking of saving everyones lives, so instead of putting Kiba on the team that was sent to rescue Hanabi, he put him on the life-saving team in the village. Kibas mission had been to quickly find and save the people who were buried under the rubble of buildings that had collapsed after the meteors hit. It was an important mission that was only possible precisely because of Kiba and Akamarus keen senses of smell. And Shino had also been sent out as part of the life-saving team along with Kiba. It was because his bugs were able to slip into small cracks in the rubble that people and dogs couldnt go through. As Shino and Kiba hurried around the village while riding on Akamarus back, they had managed to save many people who hadnt managed to escape before the meteors crashed. And furthermore Kiba hadnt taken refuge in the shelters, instead staying outside to help the people who still believed that tomorrow was going to come, the village shinobi as well as ramen Ichirakus owner Teuchi who was preparing ingredients for tomorrows ramen. H even boasted about how it any meteorite came falling towards the store, hed destroy it with his new jutsu. Hed put a stunning amount of effort into his activities. Kibas stroke of bad luck was that the only one to see his efforts had been Shino who was constantly beside him. And Shino hadnt ever told anyone about what happened that day. Shino thought that good deeds like that werent the kind that should be displayed to the world. Shino was intently watching Kiba jerkily tearing into his beef jerky. Shino thought it was likely that Kibas bitter memory of not being picked for the Hanabi Rescue Team had resurfaced when he heard her name. However, Shino knew. He knew that when push came to shove, Kiba was a reliable man. He knew that Kiba had gone running around the village with Akamaru and saved many people''s lives. He knew Kiba had even protected Ichiraku Ramen while he was at it. Only Shino knew those things. Wasnt that just fine? Although Shino hadnt really been able to hear the name of Kibas new jutsu when he used it since the sound of the meteorite being destroyed had been too loud, but still, it was just fine to leave things that way, wasnt it? Ahh, instead of tea, Id have liked to be able to drink shouchuu Kurenai murmured, bringing some snacks to her mouth. Kurenai had been famous for loving alcohol ever since the old days. On top of that, she loved the strong stuff, and drank a lot of it. She was a heavyweight drinker. It was impossible for Shino to imagine drinking as a hobby since he didnt touch a drop of alcohol himself. Alcohol was not good. It got his bugs intoxicated. Shino avoided anything that so much as had a strong smell. Be it something you ate or something you drank, or even medicine, if the smell was strong or the ingredients were fiercely affective, theyd influence the bugs inside him. For insect users, that was a life-or-death situation. At that was why Shino liked to eat things that were soft on both humans and insects, like salads. Ah, actually, speaking of alcohol, do you two know about this story? Kurenai said, taking her eyes of Mirai and Akamaru to look at Shino and Kiba, In the old days, the forests Senjuu Clan used to give honey wine as a wedding gift. Senjuu? I think I heard of that name in history class Kiba tilted his head in puzzlement, tugging at his goatee. Shino shook his head in exasperation. The First and Second Hokage. Shino said. Ah, yeah! No, of course I knew that yknow? Kiba said. Kurenai smiled as she watched them. Watching you two talk like that reminds me of old times, She said. Seeing Kurenais smiling face made Shino think of old times too. Honestly, Kurenai had been a really relentless teacher. Strong-mindedwas a rude word to use, but she was an extremely sensitive genjutsu user. Shed been especially fond of frequently using dizzying genjutsu during their training, and even remembering it now made Shino recall the nausea along with it, thats how severe she had been. Of course, it had been Kurenais way of showing her love, and it had definitely toughened up the members of Team Eight, but still, one couldnt help but think about how incredulous it would be for someone like that to simple mellow out after becoming a mother. Look at you shamelessly brooding with a goatee. Back in the old days your face used to be slippery smooth. Kurenai said, grinning as she pinched Kibas cheeks with both hands. Owwww, pwease stowp thwat Kuwenai-senswee! Kurenai looked like she was having a lot of fun. Maybe she hadnt really mellowed out. So, sensei, the story about the honey wine of the Senjuu clan? Helping a friend in needwasnt Shinos motivation. He just wanted to hear the rest of the story. Ah, yeah. The forests Senjuu clan, just like their name implies, lives in the forest, Kurenai said, letting go of Kibas cheeks. There are bears in forests, right? And you know how bears will knock down beehives to try and get to the honey inside, right? People say that the origins of honey wine were in those knocked down beehives that happened to have rainwater mixed in with the honey. It was found in ancient times by the Senjuu clan who lived in the forest. It was a wondrous drink for them, something that had the nutrition of honey and made them energetic. So naturally, after that, the making of honey wine slowly became part of their culture. Why did they give it as a wedding present? Well first off, it was because at the time the recipe for honey wine wasnt perfect, so it was rare. But most importantly, it was because of the high nutritional value. The theory was that the honey was abundant, so drinkers of it would share its fertility. Either way, it all comes down to the fact that alcohols always been used to celebrate happy occasions since old times. But, that Naruto doesnt drink alcohol, yknow? Naruto prefers to drink ramen soup and oshiruko. Kurenai sighed deeply when Kiba and Shino said those things. That kids eating habits are so biased. Shino and Kiba simultaneously shuddered as they remembered going to Narutos house in the past and finding the kitchen empty of anything but ramen. Lately Naruto had been boasting that hed started eating vegetables too, but even that was just to the degree of him occasionally buying a few cherry tomatoes. Shouldnt he be dead by now? Kiba said, which was a fine comment considering Kiba himself ate nothing but meat. You couldnt help but think that Hinata would have to do something. But well, at any rate, honey wine can be used as a medicine, and used in cooking too. If its Hinata, then Im sure shed be able to find a good use for it. Plus, she probably wouldnt use it straight away. Isnt it a wonderful and romantic idea for her to open a jar of honey wine one day and think back to her wedding day? I see, thinking of it like that, a wedding present thats mentioned in history and legends is a really good idea. Kiba said, And on top of that, its something used by the clan of Konohas founder. Its definitely a fitting gift for me to give, as the future Hokage. Kiba was nodding with his eyes closed now. He was probably imagining his future Hokage self. Shino, on the other hand, was quietly thinking. Something was bothering him a little. Honey wine was an idea theyd gotten from the alcohol-lover Kurenai-sensei. Shino and Kiba hadnt thought it up themselves. But, no matter how disinterested Shino was in alcohol, he did have a basic understanding of the variety of alcohol sold in the stores and bars of Konoha. Hey Shino, lets hurry up and go out to buy it! Kiba was in high spirits, but Shino never remembered seeing honey wine around the village. Is such a thing sold? Shino murmured, Im hearing about it for the first time in my life Kurenai easily answered, It isnt sold. Huh? Kiba let out an idiotic sounding voice at Kurenais comment. If it was being sold, Id have bought it already. That stuff is really rare to find in our village. Uhmthe-tehn what do we do?! That legendary honey wine is something that I only got to taste once, many years ago. Thats all that I can say. Oh no Kibas face looked like the end of the world was coming. In fact, Shino thought he looked worse than he had when the moon had been falling. Kiba really had an endless range of facial expressions, Shino thought as he stoically watched. The honey wine that I drank was given to me by a travelling merchant. It really delicious, so I asked him where it came from. I was thinking of going and buying it too. And, what do you think he said as a reply? Kurenai paused, her face turning grim. He said he bought it in the Soraku. You mean those black market guys?! Sorakua group of renegades unreachable by any country or village. People said the village itself looked like a perfectly normal place nobody would glance at, but in fact was the hometown of a clan of black marketers. It was a place nobody heard good rumours about, the kind that got their hands on hard-to-find weapons that had been banned everywhere else. To be more accurate, the merchant said that hed gotten the honey wine from a beekeeper who lived in Soraku. So they even have beekepers? Well the black marketers who settled there arent just gonna live off of weapons and money, you know, so there must be an original community there who supplies life necessities. Since the merchant who had sold the honey wine had gotten it from Soraku and then visited Konoha, that meant that there had to be some way of communicating with the community inside Soraku. I wasnt able to find them, but you guys are Team Eight, specialised in hunting people down, arent you? Kurenai said with a mischievous smile on her face. She looked pretty serious about it. Just leave it to us, Kiba said, As long as me and Shino and Akamaru are there, itll be a piece of cake! Kiba stood up at the end of his declaration, and Akamaru who had been letting Mirai do as she willed now stood up as well without any prompting to go next to Kiba. Mirai watched Akamaru leave her, and said in a voice that showed how reluctant she was to say goodbye: Shinomarus going? I always tell you, hes Akamaru! And come to think of it, youve really mushed all our names together this time, havent you?! Shino had been watching the usual exchange, when Kurenai prompted him to turn towards her. Hey,Shino Kurenai said in a very quiet voice so no one else would hear. Kiba doesnt have very good judgement. You understand what I mean, right? Shino silently nodded, meeting Kurenais eyes. While youre at it, buy some for me as well! That was the message Kurenai wanted to impart. There wont be any problems. Shino said, leaving as well. From branch to branch. They were flying through the thick greenery of trees. Shino and Kiba, and Akamaru, were heading out of the village as one team to retrieve Hinatas wedding gift. Soon enough, theyd already put the distance of one mountain between them and Konoha. Kiba was wearing a jacket over the slightly improved Konoha vest. It was a crudely designed jacket, with fur on the inside. Shino wore his favourite long coat over his own vest, and had raised the hood attached to it over his head. This was their usual attire for missions. In other words, they were clothes that perfectly suited Team Eights Last Mission. The improved Konoha vests no longer had the double pouches for scrolls that used to be on both sides of the chest, favouring ease of movement over anything else. What was surprising was that they were lighter than the old vests, but more durable. Such a thing wouldve been unthinkable during the old days. It was an amazing sign of progress in technology. It really made you feel aware that time was passing. The village and people and things as well, they were all changing one by one. Thinking that hed reached an age where he could feel that times were changing made Shino feel a little sad. And then he thought about the next generation of Konoha, which made him think of Mirai. Which made him think of what Mirai said. Do Ireally look that old? Shino spoke without thinking. Kiba looked over his shoulder at him in mid-air. Akamaru had gone ahead of them, so it was only them two leaping across the trees. In a way, they almost looked like they were flying in mid-air. They chose this method of transport over running on the ground because it was faster. With every leap, their surroundings blurred and were quickly left behind. For a while, theyd moved in silence, until Kiba noticed what Shino had said. Oi, oi, dont be bothered by stuff like that. He gave a wide grin. Uncle buggy. I am not bothered. Shut up, Idiotmaru. Its Kibamaru! No, its not Kibamaru either! That was the topic of their conversation as they flew over trees. The smell of earth and greenery was strong, and bugs were moving everywhere. It was a nice day with clear weather. It was surprising and incredible, far better than hed expected going on the strong winds from last night. Beautiful butterflies were dancing around in the peace of the morning. After a while of silence, Shino opened his mouth again. Im not old enough to be called an uncle yet, but if I am called one, then you should be called one too, Kiba, because were classmates of the same age You really are bothered by it! Yes, it bothers me. Kibado I really look that old? Kiba grinned at Shino openly speaking about his feelings. Well, well, look at that. Compared to when we were kids, youve gotten a lot more honest. Kibas all-knowing grin grated on Shinos nerves. Shino deliberately looked the other way when he said, Im asking you because weve known each other for a long time. So, do I really look that olC Youre really serious about this! Asking twice! Alright, I get it already. Youre fine! You look just right for your age! Kiba ran a hand through his hair, his voice strengthening. Youre taller than me, and youre always quiet and wear those sunglasses all the time, so of course you look mature! Come to think of it, for a tiny kid like that, we all look old! Really? So, Im really okay? Youre so persistent Look, you dont even have to wear sunglasses anymore. Youve gotten pretty good looking. Not even a little bit, definitely more good looking than Narutos stupid face, so dont worry! Kiba bluntly said, then confidently pointed a thumb at himself, Well, of course when it comes to good looks, you come in second after me and Akamaru. After AkamaruI dont really understand that, its strange Shino stared fixatedly at Akamarus tail some distance in front of him. * Zenzai and oshiruko are both dishes made of the red beans called Azuki, with the only real difference being the consistency, where oshiruko is more of a soup and zenzai is more like jam. Theyre both called soups though. ** Akamarus name means red circle, and akamarus white, so Kiba thinks thats why Mirai is confused. Volume 4 - CH 8 The Final Mission, end Now then.its finally time to get started. Its Team Eights Last Mission! Lets go, you guys! Kiba loudly raised his voice like he was yelling out a battle cry. After a long journey, Shino, Kiba, and Akamaru had finally arrived at the entrance of Soraku. They passed under a stylish Japanese gate held up by thick, scarlet pillars, and walked into the town. In the next moment, every single one of the party gulped at what they saw spread out in front of them. Even Kiba, who had been incredibly boisterous just a minute ago, looked meek all of a sudden. It was beyond what they had imagined. Countless buildings were huddled together, walls that had broken apart and crumbled, slanted store signs with faded paint, and numerous shops with broken glass windows, lined up like they were trying to compete with each other. Of course, there was no one inside the town. The uninhabited and abandoned ruins had obviously stayed that way for a very long time. The centre of the city had a lot of tall buildings around, a telling sign of how a considerable number of people used to live here. Neither Kiba nor Shino knew how Soraku had gotten into this state, or where its former residents had gone. But before they realised what they were doing, they were imagining the long-past scenes of bustling activity that could no longer be scene. Parents and children had been here. Siblings. Friends. Lovers. There was no doubt that there used be happenings here that were no different from those of Konohagakures. The entire neighbourhood was quiet. There wasnt a single sound. But, occasionally, you could hear the sound of the wind. It was most likely the sound of wind currents blowing through the broken windows and inside the buildings. It felt like the wind that blowed so vainly in the quiet stillness was the sound made by the abandoned town screaming. The vicissitudes of life. That phrase came to Shinos mind. But then, was it really acceptable to sum up something like this with that one simple phrase? He hesitated, because the sight looked too sad for those words. Its a desolate place. Shino murmured. Do any people really live here? Kibas nose twitched, moving. Theres no mistake He said. There are definitely a few people here, somehow. Kiba walked into the building that stood at the front, saying, This way, Shino and Akamaru followed. The inside of the building was just as jumbled as the outside. The two men and animal carefully made their way down a long and dark corridor. It got more and more complicated as they headed in, like a maze. Pipes of some kind clung to the walls, though it was hard to tell whether they carried water or gas. Judging from the appearance, it looked like the building hadnt originally been structured like this, but rather that several additions had been made to it over the years, and that had resulted in such strange pathways forming. Its most likely a countermeasure against intruders Shino thought, staring at the differently coloured walls. It stinks of mould in here, Kiba commented from ahead of him, This place sure is depressing. At that moment- Well -meow- Im so sorry its depressing. A cat had sprung out from one of the broken air ventilator ducts. What the?! Kiba was discomposed by the sudden appearance of the cat. It was because he hadnt been able to sense it with his nose. Akamaru went on guard, letting out a low growl. In an instant, Shino was on the alert as well. Those hitai-ate meow, Konoha shinobi? The cat was talking. It didnt look like there were any other cats around. It was mostly grey-furred, with white fur at the tip of its nose, and mouth. It was glaring at them with sparking eyes. One sinks of dog. One stinks of bug. One is a dog. After looking them all over, one by one, the cat muttered such abusive language. Seriously, meow, youre such a bunch of good for nothings. But Kiba didnt mind that at all. He was looking at the cat and showering it with words of praise. This ones a surprise. Kiba said, Completely without scent. This cats a big deal! Ninja cats completely remove our scent when were self-grooming our bodies, meow. Were different from normal cats. One of those rumoured ninja cats huh? Shino fixed his eyes on the cat in front of him. It looked like any other cat youd find just about anywhere. Its movements were very cat-like as well. The difference was the kimono it wore, and the human words it spoke. Soraku had another side to it, as a paradise for cats. Many cats had come to live in the abandoned town. Most of them were normal cats who couldnt speak the human language, but among them were these miraculous ninja cats who had learnt how to speak like human and use ninjutsu. These ninja cats had served the black marketeer clan here for generations. Calling them a substantial authority in this town wouldnt be exaggerating. Ninja cats cooperated with normal cats so that be it day or night, they were always keeping a watchful eye on the town. And, that included swiftly dealing with intruders. It looked like the pipes that clung to the walls and ceilings were actually a secret pathway for the cats. The whole building was probably- no, the whole town was probably the same. Theyd likely manufactured the whole area so that you wouldnt be able to go anywhere that was out of the reach of the cats. It was thanks to the ninja cats that this area remained secure. However, Shino and the others had only come desperately looking for honey wine. It would be terrible if there was a misunderstanding that theyd come with bad intentions. And so, Shino began to speak as gently as he could: We arent people to be suspicious of. Shino said, Were looking for someone. Were just searching for information. A man who wears sunglasses, a long coat, and a hood that covers his eyes! Youre most certainly suspicious, meow. Well, you have a point For some reason, Kiba agreed with the cat. Shino felt a little irritated by that, and raised his voice. You cant call people suspicious just because they wear a hood and sunglasses. The reason being that I am not someone whos suspicious. And furthermore, people you should truly be suspicious of are the types who try to hide their suspicious nature by not looking suspicious at all and Calm down, Shino. Kiba said. Its not going to help if you raise your voice at the cat. I really cant bear how much you stink of dog, meow. It makes me want to throw up EXCUSE ME!? HEY, YOU CAT BASTARD SITTING OVER THERE!!! Calm down, Kiba. Remain calm. Follow my example. Itd be better if you quickly left, meow. If you dont, youll be ripped limb from limb. Faced with the repeating provocations from the ninja cat, Kiba finally sapped. Heeeh, thats just fine with me. We can get our information just as well by tying you up, cant we? Kiba glared at the cat with sharp eyes. He cracked his knuckles, then rolled his neck around, lightly loosening his body. And then- Lets go, Akamaru! Kiba leapt up from the floor, and Akamaru rushed forwards at almost the exact same time. You foolish human, meow. The cat looked up at the ceiling, not looking particularly concerned at all. It moved its back legs one by one to stretch them out, and rolled the joint of its own eck as well. Gyan! Akamaru let out a high-pitched yelp, and collapsed next to Kiba. Whats wrong, Akamaru?! Wai- this is-?! Kiba suddenly collapsed next to the writhing Akamaru as well. Ah- wait- ha- gah- hya- kaa- ku- Akamaru and Kiba rolled around on the floor, letting out strange noises. They seemed to have completely lost themselves, pulling at their hair and hitting their clothes. Shinos skin perceived the tiny little attackers that had jumped off the ninja cats body. Ohh, so theyre fleas He said. You sent out fleas as an attack. As expected of one who carries the name of a ninja cat. This is really rare. I guess you could call somet like Ninpou: Flea Shuriken D-dont just c-calmly analysEEEEEE. Kiba yelled. Quickly d-do something sHINOOOO! It couldnt be helped that one would feel incredibly itchy when theyd been covered by such a large number of fleas. Kibas aggrieved yelling and Akamarus pained whines were echoing in the corridor. In order to aid them, Shino kneeled down on one knee and made the signs for a hand seal. Insect Gathering Technique! Shino yelled, and placed his hand down on the floor. As he did, a pattern of blue chakra shaped like a spiders web emerged. It spread out from his fingertips like a fan. As he did that, the fleas that had covered Kiba and Akamaru jumped towards the blue chakra webs, gathering inside them. The Insect Gathering Technique worked just as it name suggested, luring out bugs near the user and gathering them in one place. It was a fundamental technique for the Aburame Clan that every one of their members could do. On that note, this had originally been a technique used for collecting insects of investigating ecology. W-were saveddd Kiba mustve been in a lot of pain. He was trying to even out his disordered breathing as he got up. Akamaru looked like he still felt disgusted by the ordeal, shaking his whole body like he would when hed gotten wet. To think you couldnt even win against fleas. Theres a limit to how pathetic can be, you mutts, meow. You shitty cat, looking down on us! Kiba lunged towards the cat who had been calmly watching them. Gotcha! Kiba had firmly grabbed hold of the cat in his hands. However, the second hed touched it, the cats body crumpled into pieces like stone. What the?! Pebbles? No, that wasnt what they were. They were crunchy bits of cat food. The cat had definitely been there a moment ago. When in the world had it switched itself with a fake made of cat feed? I see, so its a Cat Feed Bunshin Shino murmured. Is this really the time to be praising them?! Kiba snapped. Its really about time you get going, meow. The cat spoke from an room inside the passage, its eyes shining in the dark, Even a cat will only turn the other cheek three times. From now on, itll be time to bring out the claws, meow. It was like this that the ninja cats turned away intruders. For the sake of protecting the town and the Black Marketeer clan. However, it should be that if a merchant stops by, they dont turn them all away. Thats what Shino thought. However, he didnt know what to do that would make the cats stop fending them off. Ugh, fuck this! Kiba howled irritably, We cant catch the cat, we cant get information from the cat, theres nothing we can do! If you want information, then you exchange it for matatabi*. But thats impossible, since you lot dont have any matatabi. You understand now? You really stink of dog, so we really want you to hurry up and leave. So that was it. Matatabi could be traded for a pass to get inside. Theyd been thoughtless. Their opponent was a cat after all. This is bad, Kiba Shino said. At this rate, well make no process. The reason is that we didnt bring even a little bit of matatabi Shino leaned in closer to Kiba, whispering so the ninja cat couldnt hear. Since the situations turned into this, Ill use my bugs to- Hold on, Shino. Leave this to me. Kiba took out a soldier pill from the pouch on his belt, and tossed it towards the ninja cat. Alright, cat. Ill give you this. Lets make it a trade. That for information on the beekeepers location. Are you making a fool out of me? No matter how you look at it, this isnt matatabi, meow. Matatabi is The cat trailed off, stopping its curses about the soldier pill. It started to lick the soldier pill, its pink tongue flashing in and out. What? What is this? Does this have matatabi in it? The cat slowly sunk down to lie down on the floor. It was the typical lounging behaviour shown in cats after they licked matatabi. So, hows that? Kiba grinned widely. We can do business now, right? Whats this about, Kiba? Shino asked. Do soldier pills have matatabi in them? Nah, the soldier pill has inukekka** inside. Its something similar to matatabi. The Inuzuka Clans special-made soldier pills were usually aimed at dogs. Hed never have thought that one of those soldier pills could have things that cats liked too. As expected, Kiba was a reliable man. Gnnn.Tthe cat sounded vexed even in its soldier-pill induced daze. To think that Id curl down to the floor like this because of some dog-stinking jerk, meow. My pride cant forgive this, meow. The cat said that, swallowed the soldier pillow in one gulp, and took off running. Wha- HEY! DONT YOU GO STEALING FROM ME! YOU SHITTY CAT! The cat dashed off like a hare- or maybe he should say, like a cat? Either way, Kiba had run after the runaway cat at fullspeed. JUST YOUUU WAIT! Kibas enraged shouts echoed furiously through the halls. Shino and Akamaru looked at the sight of Kibas back as he chased the ninja cat, and started running too. As they chased the nimble ninja cat, they ran down countless twists and turns, corridors curving left and right like a maze. Shino had just turned after another curve in the path when he saw Kiba up ahead of him. He had frozen in place, completely stock still. Shino panickedly came to a halt in his running so he wouldnt run into him. What happened, KibaDid you lose sight of it? Kiba didnt turn his head even at Shinos question. Shino peered around him and saw that there was a woman standing in front of Kiba. The ninja cat from before was being held in her arms. She was a young woman with beautiful, chestnut brown hair, and lovely wide eyes. Her age seemed to be around the same as theirs. Kiba and the woman had locked gazes, staring almost as if they recognised each other from somewhere. The woman then noticed Shinos presence, and, looking him up and down, started to shrink away. Wait, I am definitely not a suspicious person Shino spoke before he could be told anything, beating assumptions to the bunch. Im the comrade of Kiba here. When he said that, the womans facial features relaxed. Oh, so thats what it was. You suddenly ran in so suddenly that I was surprised. She said, and smiled. Let me go, meow! The cat was struggling to get out of the womans arms, but couldnt get free. Seeing that, Shino asked, Could it be that yourethis cats owner? The woman looked surprised as she answered. Yes. Uhm, did our cat do something? I heard a really loud voice. Were looking for someone. Shino said, We gave a soldier pill as payment, but the cat took it without saying anything. Ahh, I see. Tsk, I always tell them to do business properly. Im sorry if I wont do business with someone who stinks of dog, meow. The cat hissed as it struggled. Stinks of dog? This person? The woman turned to look at Kiba. Shino turned to examine his friends state as well. For some reason, Kiba had been standing stiff as a statue with his mouth open for a while now. Uhm, Im so sorry. Our cat has been incredibly rude The woman said, Ah, my name is Tamaki. We own a weapons store. And this little one is Momo. Hes always protecting me. So the woman was called Tamaki. So hes called Momo. Kiba suddenly said, My- my, what a coincidence. Our dog is called Akamaru, ahaha. Kiba was saying things that made no sense. What in the world had been a coincidence? Shino was troubled by not knowing which component in their conversation made it a coincidence. Even Akamaru had an absolutely stunned look on his face. And of course he would, to see his owner acting like a completely different person right in front of his eyes. So youre a ninja dog user? Tamaki asked, her eyes shining, Thats amazing. It was then that Kiba started acting incredibly strange. He would fidget. He would look left and right. Run his hand through his hair. Tug on his goatee. No, well, heh, Im not that big a deal Kiba said, Ah- you know, see, amazing is a different thing, right? Like how Im at a level where I could be considered a candidate for the next Hokage, like that. What is such an amazing person doing here?! Tamaki was astonished. Akamaru hung his head and let out an upsetsounding whine. Shino didnt say anything. Just a few moments ago, Kiba had been furiously yelling SHITTY CAT!. Shino wondered where in the world that Kiba had disappeared to. CAh, I see, Tamaki said, Youre looking for the beekeeper. Yeah, for a friends wedding present. Kiba said, We were thinking of giving honey wine. Ahh, thats a very good choice. Shino watched Kiba and Tamaki as they talked. Somehow, Kiba had finally managed to get to the point. Kiba and Tamaki were holding the conversation by themselves. Shino was silently patting the head of Akamaru, who was also not participating in the conversation. Akamaru had looked like hed been upset by something, but when Shino petted him the dog seemed to feel better, looking up at Shino with his eyes crinkling. Shino would never have imagined that despite being a bug user hed end up spending such a long time with a dog and learning to read its heart. CThen, Ill guide you. Ah, you know where it is? Wed be really grateful. It looked like Kiba and Tamakis conversation had ended. She was going to guide them. Its easy to get lost in this town, Tamaki said with a wry smile as she and Kiba walked side by side ahead. Shino and Akamaru silently followed. They walked through a very complex route. Shino thought they were going to go outside, but they went inside a building again. Then he thought theyd be outside, but this time they headed down an alleyway that had more similar looking buildings. So, this beekeeper, Kiba asked, What kind of a guy is he? Hmm, Tamaki said, Well Ive never seen his face, so What do you mean? Ive never met him, but I know where he is. Whats with that? Shino kept walking as he observed the harmonious atmosphere between Kiba and Tamari who walked a little ahead. He was very grateful for the guide. If they hadnt asked a resident to show the how to navigate through these complex streets i the town, then even with Kibas nose and Shinos bugs, theyd have had an incredibly hard time finding their target. And ever since a while ago, all theyd come across were cats, and not a single human being. They were on top of crumbling walls, in the crevices of rubble, inside shops with broken windows. He could feel the cats eyes on them from every possible hiding place. When you looked at the cats, they were either lying down or licking their paws, but they most certainly never let Shino or the others out of their sight. While observing those surroundings, Shino had a sudden feeling. This abandoned town, and the cats who lived there, basking in the sunit almost felt like one day, all the other humans had suddenly disappeared off the face of the Earth. Here, people were the outsiders. If it wasnt for Tamaki and the ninja cat Momo, theyd probably be surrounded by now. Speaking of Momo, the cat was walking alongside Tamaki with a sour look on its face. It looked like it wasnt pleased with how cheerfully Tamaki and Kiba were chatting to each other. Kiba was making large and exaggerated motions with his hands and arms as he talked, and laughter was streaming from Tamaki. Shino stayed quiet as he usually did. Akamaru was ducking away from the unflinching stares of the cats as he walked. In that manner, the three of them eventually came to the towns outskirts. As they came to that point, the number of crumbling buildings lined up side by side had steadily decreased until only not even one house remained. Instead of that, what they saw wasC well, instead of that, a thick fog had descended. Their field of vision was impaired. This wasnt a trivial matter, Shino thought to himself, and gathered his concentration. He focused on carefully watching their surroundings. Ahead of him, Kiba and Tamaki were continuing their trifling conversation. Even though theyd soon be arriving, something was different about Shinos mood and the mood between the two in front of him. Tamaki was continuing, unbothered by the fog. Eh? Come to think of it, have we not met before this in Konoha? I recently moved there. Though I still come back here pretty often to visit my family. But yeah, thats it, before this, my grandmother was completely naked when a group of cats- ah, here we are. Tamaki suddenly came to a stop. While wondering what on earth her grandmother had done, Shino came to a halt too. You could vaguely see a bamboo grove in the fog ahead of them. This bamboo groveshould be the right place. Tamaki said. Those were some ambiguous words from someone who said theyd guide them. What do you mean should be? Kiba asked. Well, in a nutshell, nobodys ever met him. Then how do you know this is where he lives? Please take a look at this, Tamaki indicated a pair of stone monuments that were erected ahead of the bamboo grove. Seeing the rotted rope that was wrapped around the stone monuments, Shino murmured: Travellers Guardian Deities. Thats correct. Temaki said, People come here and place an offering, things like vegetables and the like, near the statue. When they come back the next day, the offerings will be gone, and a small container of honey or honey wine will be in its place. And so, we call the person who leaves honey, whoever they are, the beekeeper. Why hasnt anyone tried to go see him? Kiba asked, looking incredibly surprised. Normally, wouldnt you be curious about what kind of a guy he is? Well, that certainly was what you would think. Normally. But, this was Soraku. The possibility that whoever lived here wasnt someone upright was 200% percent. As long as that person did their business properly under the watch of the cats, then nobody would care whether they were a traveller or a fugitive. As you can tell by the Travellers Guardian Deities, these are sacred grounds. But the people who live in Soraku dont bother looking around. We have no business here after all. Tamaki said with a laugh. The fact that the beekeeper was living on sacred grounds didnt seem to be something upsetting. As expected, the people of Soraku have a unique way of thinking thats a little bit different than others. But we do have business here, you know Kiba said, We cant just sit around in a daze for who knows how many days while waiting for our offerings to be exchanged with honeywine. Either way, you jerks wont be able to find it, meow. Even cats get lost in that bamboo grove, meow. Momo gave a sadistic laugh. Hed thought the cat had finally decided to say something worthwhile only for something like that to come out of its mouth. But Kiba wasnt perturbed. Were shinobi. We wont get lost. He directed the words at Momo, and then turned to walk towards the bamboo groves shrouded in mist. After parting with Tamaki and Momo, the party had started walking through the foggy bamboo grove. Shino turned his head and looked back. The rest of the town was already out of sight in the fog. So, thats what Momo meant by getting lost. If this was the state of the food, no wonder Tamaki and Momo and the other people of Soraku had never gone in here. Either way, since they were looking for someone whose face was unknown, it would be an impossible task to accomplish if you didnt have shinobi with high senses of perception like Kiba and Shino. This wasnt somewhere for non-shinobi like Tamaki to be. But, that being said, it was possible that this wasnt somewhere for shinobi to be either. Those statues of Traveller Guardian Deities were placed as a marker to separate the world that humans lived in and the world that gods lived in. In other words, they were now walking on territory that didnt belong to humans, but gods. They already hadnt been able to see well in this fog, but Shino felt like it had gotten even thicker. Alrightthis should be a good spot for the first one. Kiba said, and threw a kunai into a nearby bamboo pole. He was doing it for the sake of placing a marker near the entrance of the bamboo grove. Hed do it again after they covered a bit more distance. Theyd repeat that for a while as they continued. This way, theyd be able to find their way out when they left without puzzling over it too much. First well find him with my nose, then when we do, youll call your bugs andachoo! Kiba sneezed suddenly. He sniffled, and then said, Heh, maybe that girls talking about me Have you fallen for her? Shino bluntly asked. HUH?! No, you idiot! Theres absolutely nothing like that! Kiba was incredibly flustered. He was yelling his denials using a much louder voice than usual. Was Iinterrupting your romance? Im telling you youre wrong! Hinatas getting married soonKiba, when you get married Ill end up finally being alone. When you do get married, leave Akamaru to me. The reason is that he is the only one who understands me without words Excuse me? Ive got no clue what youre saying! What do you mean youll be alone?! As Kiba was barking in a fluster, Akamaru looked up at his owner and barked too. Woof! What the- Akamaru?! Whyre you saying stuff like that, too?! And leave my goatee out of this! Even though Akamaru had only given one bark, it appeared hed conveyed a long string of words. Kiba was ranting back, his face going crimson all the way to his ears. Was his face red because of anger or embarrassment? Shino silently thouhght. Most likely both. Kiba suddenly gave an exasperated shout. Arggh, thats enough! Lets just keep going without getting into stupid conversations like this! He turned his back on them both, stomping ahead. Seriouslythe strong smell of bamboo makes finding things hard, ugh! It looked like he was much more irritated now that hed been a while ago. But, Shino was pleased to see it, because Kiba was far easier to understand when he was like this. Of course, while he mightve been pleased now, that was only now. When hed first met Kiba, there had been many times when hed gotten irritated at his personality that was the complete opposite of Shinos. During break time at the Academy, Shino would let his bugs take walks on the top of his desk, while Kiba would run around the corridors and playgrounds with other classmates, yelling loudly. In class, Shino would silently listen to the teacher, while Kiba would either be asleep or making a racket. To sum it up, Kiba was second to Naruto when it came toforget second, after all, the boy in question had never been the type to be content if he wasnt first placeKiba was at Narutos level when it came to causing a ruckus. He had been a complete problem child. Back then, Shino had wanted to be assigned to a team with anyone but him. But now, Shino went on missions with that same problem child. When had being alongside Kiba become something completely natural? Life was really impossible to understand. For some reason, Shino kept thinking of the old days as he walked. His field of vision was still hindered by the fog. The scenery never seemed to change, always the same. Clusters of bamboo with thick fog hanging between them. Shino thought his surroundings right now looked like a painting. Hold on a minute. This is strange Kiba suddenly muttered in a low voice. This isnt the smell of bambooWhat is this, this faint, sweet scent? Kiba looked around, his nose twitching. Of course, Shino had no way of smelling whatever Kiba could. It was that faint of a scent. However, Shino did immediately notice the very strange thing right in front of his eyes. KibaLook at this Ahead of where Shino was pointing, there was a pole of bamboowith a kunai sticking out of it. It was the kunai that Kiba had thrown in as a marker near the town outskirts from where theyd entered. A long time had passed since theyd placed that marker, and theyd continued walking forwards only. They shouldnt be seeing the marker. Is it a genjutsu? While feeling uneasy, Shino shifted the chakra flow inside his body, making the insects inside him uncomfortable. Hed shifted his chakra for the sake of breaking the genjutsu. However, absolutely nothing changed. By all rights, the kunai that should be a long distance behind them. But it was still in front of them. Shit, we cant break out of itWhat is this? Kiba lowered his voice, his eyes glancing sharply around their surroundings, Is it the Sly Mind Affect Technique? It feels similar to the Demon Illusion Double False Surroundings Technique too, butits not either of them They were a pair whod been raised under Kurenai, the leading genjutsu user in Konoha. To be honest, they were confident that their knowledge in genjutsu was higher than other ninjas. Of course, that included breaking out of them too. But, theyd never heard of a genjutsu like this. To begin with, if it was a genjutsu, then it wouldve been cancelled by now. Which mean it was something different than but similar to a genjutsu which would bewhich would be what? We have no choice, huh. Kiba said, For now, how about we continue with me and Akamaru using the Fang Rotating Fang technique? Kiba had found a very simple solution. Rather than following a set course while avoiding bamboo, theyd just disregard that and cut through in a straight line. Shino silently nodded. Alright, then lets go Akamaru! Kiba looked around. Akamaru? Kiba began restlessly turning his head left and right. Shino searched around his surroundings too, straining his eyes to see past the fog that surrounded them. But no matter how much they searched, despite being right next to them only a moment ago, Akamaru was nowhere to be found. Akamaru had disappeared without a sound or trace. This cant be rightAkamaru! Hey, Akamaru! Wh-What is this?! Akamarus smell is gone! Kiba completely lost his head. He leapt through the fog, still yelling. WHERE ARE YOU, AKAMARU?! ANSWER ME! AKAMARU! Wait, Kiba! Calm down! Shino ran after the panicked Kiba. As Kiba ran, calling for Akamaru, the fog grew denser around his figure. He shouldve been very close by, but Shino couldnt tell thanks to the fog. Shino ran, and ran, but he couldnt catch up to Kiba. And soon, Kiba disappeared from his sight, too. Shinothis smell is really strong. Kibas voice floated towards him from the middle of the fog. You should get what this is now too. Its the smell of honeythis sweet smellits unmistakably! At that moment, all traces of Kiba disappeared completely. Kiba! In that moment, countless numbers of Kikaichuu appeared around Shino. He swung up both his arms, countless Kikaichuu streaming out of his inner body in all directions. Some went above to the sky, others flooded his surroundings, and his Kikaichuu looked almost as thick as the fog. But all the Kikaichuu who had been released didnt behave the way Shino expected. They immediately came back to him, reporting that they could find nothing. Cant be He tried a second time, and a third, but no matter how many times he released them, the same result happened. The Kikaichuu went through the crevices between the bamboo that grew around him, but always came right back without finding anything. Watching the insects fly idly about him covered Shino in a cold sweat. His Kikaichuu responded to chakra. For them to not be finding anything despite that meant that Kiba, who had been here just a moment ago, had truly and totally disappeared. It wasnt that he just couldnt see him in the thick fog. This is impossible Shino frantically tried to think. He recalled the last things Kiba had said. Hed talked about a sweet smell getting stronger, and said that it was the smell of honey. Hed said that Shino should be able to know what it was too, which meant it had been very strong. But, no matter how much Shino strained his senses, he couldnt smell even the faintest scent of sweet honey. However, as he sharpened his senses and concentrated, his efforts bore fruit in another way. Surrounded by the buzzing of his returned insects, Shino became aware of another, different buzzing in the background. He suddenly looked up, and saw several figures flying out of the fog. They were enormous compared to his Kikaichuu. Black and yellow in colour. Hornets. And they were flying towards him in a straight line, aiming right at Shino. He immediately used his insects to defend himself and mow down the hornets. His swarm of Kikaichuu took on the shape of black sword, flying freely through the air. When they did, the hornets bodies suddenly started melting into a strange viscous liquid. And that liquid started enshrouding the attacking Kikaichuu. What is this?! This technique! As the liquid wrapped around his Kikaichuu, great drops of the thick liquid fell around Shino as well. Honey? The sweet smell of it mixed in with the fog, just like Kiba had said. For the first time since theyd entered,Shino could finally smell it too. In fact, the smell was steadily growing stronger. The hornets made to assault Shino once more. He used his bugs to defend himself again. The bamboo is in the way If he just had some time, he could smash down the bamboo in a few seconds. The hornets attacked, skillfully flying in and out of the bamboo and using it as a shield at the same time. It was at the moment Shino gave his attention to them that it happened. Right near Shinos feet, the honey that had fallen to the ground began to take on the shape of hornets again. Ive done it now! Shino thought as the re-formed hornet flew straight towards him on ground level. The hornets stinger mercilessly stabbed at the back of Shinos neck. His body swayed terribly. This wasnt a normal hornet sting. The hornets poison had been specially prepared to be strong enough to take out two shinobi at once. The hornets manipulation of him, and their specialised toxic stings, they all pointed to a very skilled insect user. A user of hornets and wasps and bees. The people of Soraku had named that person well as the beekeeper. Just as Shino became convinced he knew the true colour of the enemy they couldnt see, his body collapsed on the spot. After some time passed, the beekeeper appeared out of the fog without a sound. Step by step, they slowly approached Shino. It was a very strange sight. You couldnt see their face, because it was covered by an anbu mask in the shape of a bee. And it wasnt just their face you couldnt see. Every part of the beekeeper but their masked face was covered in a swarm of honey bees. No, rather, it would be easier for you to picture if it was said that it was almost like the beekeepers entire body was made of honey bees. This was the beekeeper of Soraku, whose face no one had seen. They slowly stepped forward. Konohas Aburame Clan They murmured, while looking down at the fallen Shino. Their voice was quiet, but clear. It sounded like a young boys, but at the same time, like a frail-nerved young man. It also sounded like a calm womans. It was a mysterious, androgynous voice. Exactly. Shino answered from behind the beekeeper. The Shino that had collapsed onto the floor broke apart and scattered. It had been an insect kage bunshin made of thousands of bugs. To think that youd trick me the beekeeper said, Youre a rare one The beekeeper didnt have any particular emotions in their voice as they looked around. The insects that had been pretending to be Shino joined the rest of his Kikaichuu, and in no time at all, the beekeeper was enshrouded in Shinos insects. The honey bees on the beekeepers boy buzzed and jostled in agitation, sensing their owner was in danger. But, why the beekeeper wondered, The poison The beekeeper was talking about how Shino shouldve been stung by the hornets and allen to their poison. The truth was that Shino had indeed been stung. He had let himself be stung, because he knew that his opponent would never come out into the open if he wasnt down. And thats why Shino willingly let himself take the poison sting. He had enough confidence and faith in himself to do it. I was poisoned. Shino confirmed. But it wasnt a problem. The reason is that this amount of poison wont kill me. Thanks to the insects inside his body, poisons up to a certain level could be neutralised. Shino in particular had studied the small, venomous Rinkaichuu bugs used by his now-deceased clansman, Aburame Torune, and then raised his own insects to resist poison thanks to that research. That was why it was possible for Shino to neutralise strong poison in mere moments. You could say it was something hed inherited from Torune, who had been raised alongisde him when he was young, and been like a sibling to him. Well, Im well and truly beatThis is my loss. The beekeeper said, realising they couldnt retaliate. They didnt struggle, Youre after my life, I suppose. Well, Im content to be killed by an insect user of such skill No, Im afterhoneywine Shino spoke into the tense silence. Id likeabout two bottles Maybe it was because Kiba wasnt around, but the silence suddenly felt too silent. Would you come to my home? The beekeper asked, turning their masked head. It turned out the beekeeper was originally a shinobi from Iwagakure, who had settled down to live here peacefully while simultaneously fearing their pursuers would come to find them. In short, Shino had been mistaken for one of the beekeepers pursuers, and thats why the beekeeper had attacked him. Kiba and Akamaru Shino said, A dog-loving human and his adored dog, they were here, but, what happened to them? Dont worry, theyre safe. Theyre just wandering around in the fog. The beekeeper answered. They were talking as they headed towards the beekeepers home. Earlier, why did you target me? Because if you dont strike first against an insect user, youll be in trouble later. I see They continued quietly conversing in that manner. Shino thought they were having a rather lively conversation. Shino had known of the insect-user clan of Iwagakure. It had been a clan of mainly bee-users, that was now destroyed. The beekeeper was a descendant of that clan. Here it is The beekeeper came to a stop, and Shino could see a small house appear in the thick fog ahead of them. It was a simple house with a thatched roof. The garden was most likely the breeding area for the bees. There was a basket made of bamboo next to it. The thatched house inconspicuously existed within the bamboo thicket enshrouded with fog. The atmosphere felt like one of those ninja refuges you heard about in stories. Actually, a runaway-nin was in fact secretly living here, so a ninja refuge was exactly what it was. While Shino had been looking at the house, the beekeeper had brought honeywine. As he passed it to Shino, the shining, beautiful amber liquid swayed gently inside its container. Thank you. How much? I dont need money. The beekeeper calmly answered, It wouldnt be of any use to me even if I had it, so It looked like theyd always been living in this place alone. They seemed to be leading a lifestyle that was completely self-sufficient, without any eed for money. Shino let out another short I see and put the honey wine in the sack the bee keeper gave, Which reminds me, Ive be very grateful if you could teach me the way out. The fog is really thick There isnt one. The beekeeper unhesitatingly gave that sort of reply. What do you mean? There isnt a path backthats what I mean. the beekeeper sat atop a nearby boulder, looking intently at Shino with the eyes behind their mask. This bamboo grove is a bit like a kekkai barrier. Once you step in, you can never get out. Youll keep getting lost in the endless fog. Thats the kind of jutsu this is You cant undo the jutsu? Shino asked. Im sorry, but it cant be undone. Its a jutsu I tied to myself the beekeeper didnt sound very sorry about it. Their voice was as emotionless as it had always been. You could say they were calm, but it was more like their voice was completely flat. For example, even if you killed me, the jutsu wouldnt come undone the beekeeper continued, looking up at the sky. This fog was originally made with unique ingredients that cause humans to become confused and lose their paths. I used just a little bit of that fogs essence to create the jutsu Shino looked again towards the misty fog. To think there was that sort of ingredient within itWas that really possible? Well, he couldnt say it was impossible. He couldnt feel any hostility from the beekeeper, nor from the honey bees that swarmed them. It didnt look like the beekeeper was lying. And Shino remembered the mysterious story hed heard from his father, Shibi. Kumogakure was apparently the owner of a mysterious waterfall. It was huge, his father had said, falling down fiercely and giving off huge waves of spray. Apparently, if you faced the falls, your inner self, your true self would be reflected. At the time itd been hard to believe, but there indeed was such a place in the world. In that case, it wasnt too strange if a fog that made humans lose their way existed. It wasnt a genjutsu, but the fog that had been to blame for everything. Shino walked towards the outskirts of the beekeepers house. A never-ending fog. And never-ending bamboo, bamboo, bamboo The unchanging scenery continued without end. As an experiment, Shino walked in a straight line, his insects flying around him. He soon found himself arriving at the beekeepers house once more. He tried again, walking more carefully, only to come back to see the beekeeper still sitting calmly on his boulder. Thanks to the composition of the fog, even my bugs get lost, is that it? His bugs couldnt help him. There was no exit. He couldnt find Kiba and Akamaru. He was in a really tight corner. But Shino still kept investigating his surroundings. I got lost my way in life and found myself here The beekeeper said, But, that doesnt mean that this is a bad way of life. Rather, Id wanted to live like this. Here, there is nothing but the present. Theres no past, no future. Just now. Im living in the present. Dont you think thats more than enough? The beekeepers words were calm, slow, and even as he continued sharing his thoughts. Ive always been running. Running from fights, and from the path of a shinobi. From the start, I never thought the shinobi life agreed with me. But I was born and raised into a clan of insect users. I didnt have any other choice but to live as a shinobiThats why I threw everything away, and ran away to this place. If I have no other path to live but that of a shinobi, then all I have to do is keep getting lost and never go down it The beekeepers slowly flowing words disappeared into the pure white fog. Shino silently listened to it all. All people are lost. The beekeeper said, Not just me. Be it shinobi or merchants, man or woman, everyone. And that includes you. Youre lost as well. Thats why youre wandering, confused, through the fog like this. He pointed out. Youre saying Imlost? When had Shinos mouth gotten so dry? Shino swallowed, and held his breath. And, for some reason, memories of Hinata and Kurenai rose into his mind. He remembered the time hed spent training with Hinata. He remembered the days of missions hed done under Kurenais supervision. He had finally made a friend in Hinata. Kurenai had understood him even though he was quiet. But Hinata was getting married soon. Even now, she was busy preparing for the wedding ceremony. Kurenai was busy raising her child. Now, she was behind a certain line. The two of them had already started down their own paths. And Shino silently watched the sight of their two backs. Theyd never be able to go back to how Team Eight used to be. Forever. Shino tried to stay calm, but his breathing was getting harsh and laboured. The fog was filling up his lungs. Is this what he meant by my being lost? Hinata and Kurenai, and everyone, they were heading down their own paths, but Shino was the only one left behind where he began. That was the feeling hed fallen into. He wasnt heading towards anyplace, and he wasnt settling down anywhere. He felt like he was like the wavering fog, always being the only thing that was left behind. Were those feelings a deception created by a fog? No, that wasnt it. Hed always, always felt like this. After they came to this place, and before as well. He had always kept feeling lost And, the thought had occurred to him. From some tiny corner of his heart. He hadnt even noticed it himself, but hed thought I want to go back to those days. He wanted to go back, just one more time, back to those days when everyone had stuck together as Team Eight. You hadnt even noticedthat you felt lost, had you? The beekeeper said, looking at Shino. Shino was standing stock still in place. He couldnt move a single step forwards. No matter how much he tried to move forward, he wouldnt be able to reach the exit anyway, so why bother? He couldnt even see anything in front of him anyway, thanks to the fog. You dont have to keep pushing yourself forwards. The beekeeper said. You can just leave everything, and live here, and itll be fine The fog, along with the beekeepers kind words pierced through Shino. That might just be best. Shino thought. If he couldnt move forwards, and if nothing was waiting for him even if he did move forwards, then he wanted to just stay here and live his days without changing anything. That could very well become his happiness. The beekeeper held out a hand. The honeybees that surrounded their arm drew away to reveal a milky-white hand. If you want, the beekeeper said, Then you could stay here with me. Shino looked at the offered hand. And then, suddenly Its Team Eights Last Mission! Lets go, you guys! He suddenly remembered Kibas words. That battle cry of his resounded inside Shinos mind. Thats right, this isTeam Eights last mission! In that instant, it felt like the darkness around Shinos field of vision disappeared completely. His dazed mind became crisp and clear. For some reason or another, the fog around his surroundings had drawn back. I cant just stop in a place like this. I have to hurry and go back to the village. The reason is that I absolutely have to attend a precious friends wedding ceremony! Beneath his sunglasses, Shinos eyes were resolute as he looked firmly ahead. That moment, he suddenly noticed a nearby bamboo pole with a kunai embedded in it. It was unmistakably the kunai that Kiba had thrown into a bamboo pole near the town. He hadnt noticed it at all until now. And the fact that it was here meant that Shino turned his head, and sure enough, he could see the entrance to the bamboo grove ahead of him. His eyes could even make out the states of the Travellers Guardian Deities. It was definitely the place that Shino and the rest had entered. The entranceno, the exit is there He said to the beekeeper, pointing. ? I dont see anythingtheres nothing but fog the beekeeper tilted their head to one side. The tone of their voice sounded like they genuinely couldnt see the exit. And Shino finally understood the situation. It was a pretty simple thing. The fog made humans lose their way. The jutsu used the fog. People lost the paths of their lives inside the fog. Here, there wasnt any present or future. Thats why there was nothing but an eternal present inside the fog. Thats what it was. But, that was only the case if you were running away from your past and had thrown away your future. Just like the beekeeper had said, no matter how much someone trained as a shinobi, no matter how many years theyd lived, anyone who lived life had times when they felt lost. But for those who didnt give up and kept moving forward and believing in the future, this fog didnt have any power at all. If you firmly, steadily, built up hope and belief in yourself in your heart while walking forwards, then even if you did get caught in the middle of a thick fog, you would eventually find your way out. Shino gave a wry smile. He couldnt help but think that in a way, the fog was very similar to life. I seeSo you saw the road ahead with the Travellers Guardian Deity the beekeeper hung their head. They quietly murmured, Its best that you go quickly then. Before you lose the path again As usual, the beekeepers tone was even and without emotion. But, something about them seemed lonely as they sat on that large boulder. Or maybe Shino was overthinking things. No, that wasnt it. The fog wrapped around them, the neverending bamboo thickets, the small house without people, the honey bees that surrounded the beekeeper, the anbu mask they worse and hid their face with, every single one of those things was like another barrier to the beekeeper. Shino understood that very well. The reason he understood was that Shino hid himself too, in his long coat and hood. This is a shield to protect myself. Not physically, but emotionally. Shino understood those sorts of feelings so much it hurt. Thats why he wavered over whether he should step over the boundaries of a persons barrier. People got lost over even things like this. But If he just left the beekeeper behind in this thick fog, he wouldnt be a shinobi. The beekeeper was a fellow shinobi whod also been born into an insect user clan. If Shino held himself back by thinking he was overstepping his boundaries or meddling in someone elses business, and just turned his back on them and left, then he knew he was definitely going to regret it. At times like this, rather than regretting what you didnt try, it was better to try your luck and see. The reason for that is You said youre living in the present. Shino said, But I cant help but wonder if that isnt the wrong choice. the reason that is that its what Naruto would do. Can a person really live in the present when theyre running away from everything? Shino asked. Someone whos constantly dragged down by their past and unable to see their future, are they really living in the present? Today will one day be in the past, and someone who lives eternally in that present will never be able to see their future, will they? At least, thats what I think Shino shifted the sack on his back full of honey wine that the beekeeper had given. Until now, hed never resented himself for being bad at words. When he was lost in the fog, he really had thought that hed be able idly living day by day. Youre really a gem the beekeeper finally spoke after the listening to Shinos lecture. Really unexpected. I thought you were a really quiet man, but it turns out that while you may not show it in your words or your facial expressions, youre quite passionate on the insideI feel like I just got lectured by an eager teacher. The beekeeper was calmly speaking. Their tone was as even as it always was, and thanks to their mask, Shino couldnt see the look on their face. However, he felt like the beekeeper was definitely giving a wry smile. A teacher, huh..Ive never really thought about that, but my partner is a problem child after all Shino replied, the faces of his comrades coming to mind, Lots of my classmates were problem children. A constant complainer, a huge glutton, a young pranksterThe one who behaved properly was always me. But still, every one of those classmates have now become splendid adults. They lived eagerly in the present without running away, and thats why they could arrive at this future Shino paused, and gestured towards the sack of honey wine he carried. Thank you for this. Ill be going now. What are you doing to do about that dog-loving child? the beekeeper asked from behind him, What if, unlike you, he doesnt make his way out? Shino didnt even have to think about his reply to that question. That ones far more honest than I am. Shino said, He wont lose his way. Full of conviction, Shino turned towards the exit and started walking. When Shino came out of the fog, the wide, blue sky greeted him. He put his hands in the pockets of his coat, and waited in front of the Travellers Guardian Deity. A line of ants were marching near his foot, and he watched them to pass the time. After a while, he heard a voice from the midst of the bamboo thicket. Yahoo! We finally found the exit, Akamaru! The voice was immediately followed by a very familiar sounding bark. Kiba leapt out of the bamboo grove, covered in mud. Youre late Shino called out, when a mud-covered Kiba leapt out. Kiba. WHA- Kiba jumped back in surprise when he saw Shino suddenly standing beside him, I know its you by the smell, but you could at least give some warning before you suddenly make an appearance! Kiba pulled out a hand towel to wipe off the mud on his face, grumbling about how Shinos abrupt appearance had almost given him a heart attack. You look like you went through some hardships Shino noted. I did not! Everything was fine! Kiba was someone who liked to act tough. He was easy to understand. He mustve gotten lost too, in his own way. Just like Shino, Kiba had probably faced his worries and anxieties for the future, too, in that genjutsu-like bamboo grove. But, Kiba had still made it here. What in the world had Kiba been worried about? What kind of a future was he going towards? Shino felt a little curious, so he wanted to prod for answers. Are you going to confess to that woman? Kibas face had turned scarlet at the sudden question. Wha-? What is this?! Why is it that even youre bothering me about Tamaki?! Hmmmeven me, huh Kiba really was an incredibly easy to understand man. But, that was one of his good points. Listen, youre totally wrong! You know, Shino, you really dont get itIts probably because youre not super popular. Listen, a man cant be too greedy. Kiba was trying to play it cool as much as possible, but his face was still red. Then, what should a man do? Wellthe first step is obviouslyuhhyou knowthat thing. Kiba was flustered, cold sweat dripping down his forehead, Uhm- yeah, letters! Exchanging letters seems like the best place to start, right? Seems like? No, it definitely is! Popular guys start out things like that by exchanging letters! Right Akamaru? Kiba mustve been very flustered, appealing to Akamaru for help. Akamaru averted his eyes. Anyway, more importantly, weve gotta go and find that honey wine. Kiba changed the subject. The suns gonna set soon! Ive already gotten some. Shino said, So lets go home Youre kidding, right?! I didnt even do get to do anything! Shino gave the astonished Kiba one backwards glance before starting the walk back. Akamaru looked up at Kiba, whod frozen stiff in shock, gave one bark, and briskly followed Shino. Wa- wait just a minute! Kiba followed after them, full of complaints, Good grief, first Naruto, now you, why is it that you guys always get the good parts! I did a lot of work inside that fog too, you know! It looked like the only one who knew what Kiba had gone through in the fog was Akamaru. Akamaru himself seemed to be keeping his lips sealed, so he probably wasnt going to go talking about it. Shino was thinking about that as he walked, whenC Hey, Shino, look at that! Kiba yelled. Wondering what he was yelling about, Shino turned his head to look back and The fog surrounding the bamboo grove had lifted. In full sight, the bamboo grove wasnt all that wide at all. Just normal-sized, like any other bamboo thicket. Shit, what is this, why is it just clearing up nowI got so lost in there Kiba had apparently forgotten about how hed bluffed that everything had been fine inside the bamboo grove, complaining openly now. So he had gotten lost in his own way. But, Kiba didnt know the true meaning of that fog. The fact that the fog had lifted so completely meant I seeso you worked things out Shino murmured to himself. In that moment, Kiba glanced at Shinos face. What he saw made his eyes go wide. Shinothis is rareyou hardly ever smile like that Hm? What are you talking about, Kiba? Huh? Kiba started blinking. Was I seeing things? Thats strange Shino turned his back on him and kept walking. We have to hurry up. The reason is that Kurenai-sensei is waiting for us. The atmosphere felt refreshing. The sky was clear, and the fog was gone. Kiba hurried to catch up to Shino, and then squinted his eyes as he looked up at the sun to tell how much time had passed based on its angle. Gahh, I really wanted to find a wedding present before anyone else did. He muttered. Seriously. We ended up whiling away so many hours But then hey, our wedding present is definitely the best one! Obviously. You, me, and Akamaru all achieved this gift by working together, after all. After a while, the old buildings of the abandoned town started to come into sight again. There werent as many cats in the area now. As expected, the cats had shown up to keep an eye on them. Theyd probably decided Shino and the rest werent a threat and gone back now. That, or theyd seen them walking with Tamaki and Momo, and decided they approved of their presence. Somehow, it felt like the abandoned town itself had given them its seal of approval. As they entered a complicated looking alley-way, Shino took out one insect. Just in case, hed told this one insect to memorise the complicated journey back. Kiba saw the insect and immediately understood, letting out a whistle. Youre really sensible, He said, Thanks. If we follow it, well head to the exit soon. They followed the insect as it flew through the roads without hesitating once. And with this, Shino murmured, Team Eights Last Missionis complete! For some reason, hed wanted to say the words himself. He didnt want to hear them from someone else. He wanted to hear them come out from his own mouth. Of course, if he did that, the self-declared leader of Team Eight -aka Kiba- wasnt going to let it slide. Why are you the one whos declaring that?! And you know, the mission isnt gonna be finished until we head back to the village! Of course. Shino obediently nodded, continuing to think about what hed been considering earlier, Well go back to the village, and make sure to ascertain the beginning of Naruto and Hinatas future with our own eyes. Hm? Whats this? Youve turned into a real poet today. Have I? They kept talking as they walked. Shino remembered the day hed first been put on the same team as Kiba. I dont think Ill be able to get along with you well. The reason is that weC Kiba hadnt let him finish that sentence. Back then, hed been filled with nothing but anxiety about the future. Every day, hed felt depressed about it. But, look at how things turned out. Right now, Shino had a partner he trusted more than anyone else walking beside him. He had a best friend who listened to what he had to say. If he was able to tell his past self about how things would turn out, what kind of an expression would his younger self make? Hed probably think the future wasnt all that bad after all. But, there was one thing Shino clearly knew: The present isnt all that bad. Even if he walked on a different path on the future, the memories of this time wouldnt disappear. And when it came to what lay beyond his memories, when it came to the future that lay ahead of this present contentness, Shino had nothing to be afraid of. The reason was Shino suddenly remembered something, and turned to ask Kiba. That being said, Kibayou said you were being considered a candidate, but when exactly will your Hokage Inauguration ceremony take place? Sh-shut up! Ill work hard so it happens! The reason was: these bonds. His bonds with his comrades were for life. *Matatabi is a Japanese plant otherwise called silvervine, its like a much stronger version of catnip. ** Inukekka is the Japanese name for catnip. Interestingly, dogs like catnip too! I never knew this lol. *** Its a common concept in Japan that if you sneeze, somebodys talking about you. Volume 4 - Epilogue Perfect Weather for a Wedding The weather was very clear today. Under the watchful eyes of the past Hokage carved into the mountain, many people gathered in the centre of the village. Everyone was in formal attire, their clothes a little more adult-like than usual. Kakashi hectically rushed around as he took care of every possible factor, from readying the venue to checking on security measures. After all, the people attending included Gaara the Kazekage as all the Kage from the other villages, Kumogakures Killer Bee, and more. Yamato was moving around in a frenzy too, acting under the supervision of Kakashi, who was handing out instructions while getting advice from the previous Hokage, Tsunade. Kakashi had asked Yamato for a few favours. But somehow, before Yamato could notice what was happening, hed ended up being burdened with many tiresome tasks. Kakashi had said Ill be relying on you with a smile, though, so Yamato didnt have any harsh feelings. Rather, Yamato, whose facial expression was usually so unchanging along with his mellow character, was in excessively good spirits, carrying out his chores with a content smile. He had that look on his face because Kakashi was a senpai Yamato respected from the bottom of his heart. Lee and Gai showed up with dumbbells in tow, and threw everyone around them into a great shock. Theyre even training on a day like this Everyone thought, half-scandalised. Nobody knew yet that they hadnt brought the dumbbells so they could train with them. Tenten was acting like she was both the hot-blooded mens guardian, scolding them on how to behave while doing this or that. She was muttering complaints like she was burdened with looking after them, but deep down in her heart, she was having fun. Shikamaru was talking to Temari about something. It appeared to be a complicated discussion about work, but both of their faces were bright and cheerful, and every now and then, their laughter would mix together in the air. They were smiling naturally, spontaneously, and seeing them stand side by side didnt feel out of place at all. They were a well-matched couple. As he watched the two of them, Chouji smiled as well. While he was thinking he didnt want to disturb the nice mood those two had, he was also preoccupied with something else inside his head. Chouji was looking for a solution to solve his dilemma: how he was going to manage to eat every single one of the many dishes laid out in the venue. He thought that he would need a secret plan,something like what Shikamaru would cook up, but no matter how much he thought and thought, no amazing strategies occurred to him. Chouji settled on the idea that hed just start from one side of the banquet and go all the way to the other. After coming to this conclusion, he gave another smile. Speaking of nice moods, Ino and Sai were like that too. Theyd entered the venue holding hands. Even while everyone around teased them, all Things are heating up!, the two looked blissfully happy. Nearby them, Kiba had been constantly asking Kurenai questions for a while now. Kiba had burst into the venue triumphantly holding up honeywine, boasting about how weve brought something for Naruto from the history of the Senjuu clan. But, it looked like Kibas actual knowledge of history was vague, and now he was bothering Kurenai with constant questions about it. It seemed like Kurenai had finally decided to give him an impromptu history lesson. Kiba listened intently as she talked, noting things down on a memo pad, probably so he could use the info properly later. Nearby, Mirai was all dressed up and riding on top of Akamaru, playing around. Shino was watching, wondering if it still counted as playing horsey if in fact you were riding a dog. Then, while looking at Akamaru and Kiba, Shino wondered when it would be best to give Naruto and Hinata the honeywine. It was their trump card, so perhaps it should be saved for last. Or, maybe it should be given first. It was something to be concerned about. The reason was Shino kept worrying silently in his head over the matter. One bye one, the venue was slowly filling up with more and more friendly and familiar faces. Ichiraku Ramens owner Teuchi came, as well as his daughter Ayame, who was an attraction for guests to come to the ramen store. Iruka was already being overwhelmed with emotion from the moment he stepped inside. The weather was very clear today. Sakura looked up at the sky, alone. As she did so, she thought about a certain someone who was under the same sky, continuing his travels even now. Just thinking that made her insides feel as bright and clear as the sky above her. She had someone she was sending her thoughts to. Just that was enough to make her feel blissful. . . . It was a beautiful day, as if the heavens themselves were giving their blessing. And, of course . . . Hyuuga Hinatas thoughts had wandered over to a place beyond the sky again. Neji nii-san Glancing out the waiting rooms window, she could see the blue sky free of any clouds. Im getting married. She whispered those words inside her heart, and turned to look at the young man standing next to her. Looking at the intense look on his face, her heart started thudding despite herself. Even though shed always been looking at him, just being with him like this made her pulse rate pick up like it had the very first day shed met him. Narutos unflinching eyes were looking at the Hokage Monument, the faces of previous Hokage carved into rock. Or rather, to be more accurate, he was looking at the carved face of Namikaze Minato. His dad. Just looking at him as he did that, Hinata felt so full of emotion, her chest could burst. Ahh, she thought. Right now, this second Standing next to the person she loved like this made her feel unbearably happy. She was so happy, she couldnt even hope to express it with words. This moment is bliss. Hinata thought, simply, honestly. As she did, maybe he noticed she was looking, because his eyes turned to meet hers. Hinatas face turned red. She ended up fidgeting a little. He gave her an embarrassed grin too. The serious look on his face turned into another one, innocent like a young boy. She adored every single one of his facial expressions. Her father Hiashi and little sister Hanabi entered the waiting room. It was almost time. Hinata took Narutos arm, and held on tight. . . . Uzumaki Naruto and Hyuuga Hinata. Their wedding ceremony now begins. Volume 5 - CH 1 Section One: Sunagakure Shinobi are those who endure. They are those who endure even the most unreasonable circumstances. This was fact. One man held conviction that it was fact. His conviction came from living in a world where you could only survive if you endured. Suna. That was where he had been born, and its scenery was one that he had become intimately familiar with. At noon, the temperatures would soar to over 40 degrees Celsius. And at night, theyd drop to below freezing level. It was a world that rejected the existence of living things. An absolute hell where even bacteria were denied the comfort to thrive, let alone plants or animals. That was the world this man lived in. And that was why he had to endure. The mans name was Gaara. In the corner of such a desert, a single oasis clung to existence: the village of Sunagakure. The villages terrain was strangely shaped, sunk into the very earth. Nothing about it seemed like a natural occurrence. Eventually, people began to whisper of the legendary eras, of gods like Susanoo and Amaterasu forging the terrain with techniques beyond mortal knowledge. The centre of the village held an incredibly plain-looking Kazekages Office. Gaara, like most shinobi, did not have any interest in extravagance. He thought it would be sufficient to wear clothes that most people wore, and have furniture that was generally used. It was a manifestation of his abstinence from luxuries. It was also possible that it had something to do with the fact that as a young boy who was the previous Kazekages son, Gaara had never wanted for anything or lacked any luxury. He had, however, tasted loneliness. Ahh Gaara let out a sigh, and looked up at the sky. Light from the evening sun fell softly on his hair, a shade that was closer to red than brown, and his face, fair and good-looking, like chiselled marble. He wondered when he would finally be able to use his own will and freely soar away into sky. Well, right now he had an opponent to do battle with: a mountain of paperwork. Shinboi had all come together to fight the Akatsuki who had wanted to take control of the world. And the Akatsuki had been defeated, along with Ootsutsuki Kaguya. However, their battle to save the world had not been commissioned by anyone. Of course, most of the Daimyou financed the battle since it was technically linked to the national security of their nations. However, the Land of Wind had kept an ongoing limited arms policy for ten years now, so they balked at the sudden expenses from the war. After all, it was a battle between you ninja alone. They stubbornly argued. As if that reasoning makes sense. In the first place, isnt the protection weve given you the only reason youre still alive? Sunagakures shinobi were furious. It wasnt unreasonable of them to be so. They werent asking for money so they could have luxuries, they werent asking for gold. Sanitary maternity hospitals for the sake of infants, and construction of water wells so no one would be in a difficult situation. Prior investment into research centres so they could keep up with advancing technology. Pensions for shinobi who had been disabled by injuries sustained in battle, and the families who had lost their provider in the war. For all of those things, the people of Sunagakure needed money. And the job to retrieve that money from the Daimyou, well, that was currently Gaaras occupation. That job didnt hold any flashy battles of ninjutsu, or adventures with blood spilling down flesh. Rather, it was wrestling with straight-forward paperwork, inconspicuously laying the groundwork for future accomplishments, and boring mediation efforts between higher powers. Those were the reasons behind Gaaras single sigh. Gaara, you here? The door opened with a clang, and a single young kunoichi entered. She was a beautiful woman, her hair a golden colour that reminded you of the desert sand shining under the morning sun. There werent many people in the village who spoke to Gaara Cwho was, after all, the kazekageC in such a friendly, familiar manner. And, out of all the females in the village, only this one woman spoke to him so familiarly. This one woman was Temari. Whats happened? Gaara asked, feeling his tense lips relax slightly. When his elder sister came to the office by herself, it usually wasnt because of anything important. If it had something to do with work, his elder brother Kankurou wouldve accompanied her. Hehe Just as hed thought. Temari sat down to speak with him, but there was a wide, relaxed grin spreading across her face. Its nothing really, She said, I got another letter from Shikamaru, you see. I see. He says hes writing everything on paper because he doesnt trust the security of the new electronic mailing system yet. Temari explained. Its a pretty odd and outdated method, but still, he does it because hes being careful. Shikamaru was his elder sisters fiancee. He was an incredibly subtle and shrewd shinobi theyd met during Konohas Chuunin Exams. When Temari told Gaara about her and Shikamarus relationship, hed been very surprised. But when Gaara told his brother Kankurou Nah, it was really obvious. Is that how it was? Gaara had become extremely concerned after that conversation, and even read the love story Icha Icha Paradise to try and understand what signs he missed. But, at the end of the day, he came to the conclusion that those who didnt understand were going to continue to not understand. There are very rapid developments occurring in the encryption system used in electronic mail. The details are in the THX-1138 file sent by the Raikage- No, thats not what Im talking about. We werent talking about electronic mail? Ahhh. Temari let out a very exaggerated sigh, shrugging her shoulder. Gaara, I wonder why when it comes to stuff like this, youre just as bad as Konohas Naruto. Is there something wrong with what I just said? There is. There really is. Temaris tessen was being pointed towards him. When a woman is talking about stuff like this, shed prefer it if you listened to what shes saying about the letters contents. Understand? Is there an emergency of some sort? No, thats why Im telling you Temari gave a strained smile, and looked like she gave up on explaining in detail. Its the ceremony, the ceremony. The scheduled date for the ceremony. Ahh The date for the wedding ceremony was, in fact, one of Gaaras unsolved problems, pinned to a corkboard inside his mind. Temari was the Kazekages sister and, in a similar vein, her future husband Nara Shikamaru was an authority figure in the village of Konoha. Thus, when it came to the ceremony, politics were immediately involved. The details of the ceremony couldnt be decided only with the intentions of the couple getting married. If an error in judgement was made, over hundreds of shinobi could die. Since ancient times, Konohagakure and Sunagakures relationship has always run very deep. In the very beginning, at the time when the Five Kage first came into existence, Sunagakure could only survive because Konohagakure had given them a plot of fertile land in a secret agreement between them. After that, one would note that the southern village of Sunagakure targeted the far more bountiful plots of land owned by the northern village of Konohagakure. Even back when Gaara and Temari had first met Naruto and Shikamaru of Konoha, they had been stuck inside a whirlpool of those schemes and tactics. But, if you put it like that, then it gave the impression that Suna had always been the unjustified and lone aggressor. However, the shinobi world wasnt that simple a place. The truth was that Konohagakures side had carried out countless schemes to destabilise Sunagakure as well. For many long years, the two villages kept up the appearances of allied nations on the outside, while tension ran thick and fierce underneath. It was precisely because of that long-running history that there was such huge political significance in the fact that Temari, the previous kazekages daughter, was now marrying into Konohas Nara Clan. It was an indication that the two villages didnt intend to have an alliance on paper only, but to have a genuine detente. Gaara said, It would be nice if Konohas side said that theyd accept our proposed terms for the date of the ceremony. Youre being unsentimental. Temari retorted, How much do you think Shikamaru and I have been wracking our brains over this? It would be nice if the security teams in both villages accepted them, too. Youre really not cute at all. Just be honest and say youre feeling jealous. Temari said, leaning over and pinching Gaaras cheeks. In the past, Gaara would have killed her on the spot for doing such a thing. Now, however, he didnt feel the slightest inclination to do so. Rather, the opposite. Surprisingly enough, he thought that having your cheeks pinched by your older sister didnt feel bad at all. On that note, it still didnt change how Gaara didnt really understand how this relationship of family differed from the relationship between man and woman. All he knew was just this: when Gaara saw Temari smiling so widely it looked like her cheeks would break, or when he glimpsed the wondrous smile his close friend Uzumaki Naruto would send Hyuuga Hinata, this thought would enter his mind: Something about it is definitely different. Gaaras mother had died soon after giving birth to his jinchuuriki self. His father never remarried. Thinking back on it now, Gaara thought that maybe his father had done that to stay faithful to his mother. Anyway, if the village of Konohagakure just accepts, all will be well. Gaara said, getting up. Wherere you going? The Elders asked for a meeting with me about another matter. If I show up before they call me, itll put them in a good mood. RUGOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO! A vortex of sand was swirling and churning around, and in the middle of the sandstorm, the shape of a large human was forming. Its huge! Kankurou thought. Even though it was his enemys work, he couldnt help but be overcome with admiration at the magnificent sight. The morphing body had to be tenno, twenty metres tall. The size of a small building. Itd be one thing if it was a summoned spiritual animal who was this big, but it was incredibly rare for a shinobi to be able to transform themselves to such a gigantic size. Its different from the Akimichi Clans Multi-Size Technique! Kankurou thought as he watched. I guess this is something thats only held by A rank runaway-nin in the Bingo Book! Kankurou-sama! Ill handle this myself! ! One of Kankurous subordinates, Amagi, had leapt out to the field. The enemy hasnt made a move yet! Kankurou barked, Its too early to make attack! Sir, if we wait, its just giving the enemy time to gather strength for an attack! Amagi was still young. He had cleared the Chuunin Exam at 13, and come under Kankurous direct supervision at 15. He was a generation who hadnt experienced the battle with Kaguya. Amagi was a young boy with androgynous features, like his cherubic chestnut brown hair, that sometimes had him mistaken for a girl. Im heading out! Amagi cried, and tenno, twenty kozura* flew out of his sleeves towards the enemy. In the same instant, Amagi himself had also thrown several handfuls of daggers. It was a very artistic show of Amagis skill, but even the jounin Kankurou would have the ability to create a timing that would let him deflect a barrage of small, sharp weapons in an instant. UOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO! The giant moved his arm to brush away the annoying projectiles. But, that was what Amagi had been expecting. Ive got you! Amagi yelled, and the kozura hed thrown suddenly pulled together like silver belts. They changed course in mid-air, deflecting the giants arm and heading straight towards his heart instead, rushing forwards like a meteor shower. Ah, so he used chakra strings after all, Kankurou thought. It was a specialty of Sunagakura shinobi to use the chakra that shinobi had and turn them into strings that could control puppets. Using chakra strings to control kozuras directions, sort of like a homing device, was an original technique invented by Amagi. But, like I said. Hes still young. RUOOOOOOO! The giant roared, gathering all his strength. ! Amagi noticed something unusual was about to happen, and hurriedly moved to retract the kozura from their course. But, he was one second- no, half a second too late. It was lightning. A bolt of lightning burst out of the giants body, and struck the area where Kankurou and the other shinobi were gathered. Amagi! Kankurou yelled. He and the other shinobi were fine. Theyd only lost their footing from the impact of the thunderclap. But Amagi wasnt. He had still been connected to the threads of his kozura, and received the full brunt of the electric shock from the lightning. Amagi crumpled like a puppet whose strings had been cut. Ah People say that the moment you die, you see bright, revolving lanterns. Amagi had imagined his own death would be under more heroic circumstances but reality hadnt turned out that way. Hed survived countless battles after his first fight. Who wouldve ever thought that hed be brought down by his own jutsu? He certainly hadnt, and it had been his downfall. Am I just going to die like this? The thought threw Amagi into chaos. I still haventI still havent done anything He could feel his consciousness slipping away, falling into a dark abyss. Hey. Somebody said. They were holding him close, keeping a warm arm around Amagi. Ah? For just a moment, Amagi thought the person holding him might be his father or his mother. It wasnt anything to be ashamed of. It was a natural feeling that those in the battlefield would all have. So youre alive, huh. It was Kankurou. There was red kabuki makeup on his face as usual, and his kind eyes were looking down at Amagi. Its basically a Magnet Release: Raijinga** technique. Kankurou said to Amagi. Hed placed the young shinobi under the shelter of a relatively safe boulder. Like the name suggests, you use your electromagnetic powers to absorb the mass around you, expanding your bodys scalar appearance, and take on the shape of a giant. In a nutshell, its a jutsu that creates a huge human form out of iron sand. Kankurou knew Amagi had already heard the explanation back at the briefing, but he was explaining it one more time to help Amagi get back to his senses. Shinobi were special people who constantly put themselves out into the battlefield of missions, and receive various types of training. No matter how much blood has been spilt, no matter how much they fear death, if they just hear the details of their mission again, they instinctively start to calm down. Kankurou didnt know whether this behaviour was a blessing from being human or not. All he knew was that right now, he didnt want the young subordinate in front of his eyes to fearfully die. Hed applied first aid to stop the bleeding too. He does use Lightning Release for his expansion in size, but when it comes to his electromagnetic power, its a different matter. Kankurou continued. The giants walking creates a piezoelectric effect where subterranean graphite is crushed, and electrical discharge is created. So, he takes that energy from the natural world surrounding him, and uses that instead of being limited by his own reserves. Im sorry. Amagi mumbled, tightly clinging onto Kankurous hand. It looked like his mind was still a bit muddled, but Kankurou understood why he was apologising. Amagis thoughts were probably along the lines of: I got in the way of the jounin I admire. Anyone would have those sorts of thoughts. Especially since this was the first A-rank mission Amagi had ever experienced. Well, I guess the only person whod remain unshaken after their first A-rank is Gaara. Kankurous thoughts strayed towards his poker-faced brother. Gaaras first A-rank, in other words, the first mission that pitted him against other shinobi of jounin rank, had been when he was twelve years old. The A-rank mission hadnt been long after Konohas Chuunin Exams had ended, and along with that, the end of Orochimarus Konoha Crush plot. Honestly, considering how one of the Legendary Sannin, as well as several kekkai genkai users had all been involved in the Konoha Crush, it had definitely qualified as an A-rank mission all on its own. But, that being said, at the time Kankurou and the others had felt like the words A-rank mission would apply to a mission with certain aspired qualities. Back then, Kankurou had been fourteen, and his elder sister Temari had been fifteen. Thinking back on the incident in Konoha now, Kankurou felt terribly nostalgic. That moment, in the middle of fighting, theyd met a person who was like a sun. Uzumaki Naruto. Kankurou-sama, its coming! One genins calling voice pulled Kankurou out of his reminiscing. Okay, well be heading out soon. He said to Amagi. This time, lets act according to the plan, alright? Yes. Amagi was cooperative now. Even after thinking he could die in the middle of this dire mission, the child prodigy had managed to regain his strength. The lightning-collecting giant took one huge step towards them, and Kankurou deliberately leapt out into the enemys path. In a fight between shinobi and shinobi, jumping out and exposing yourself was, eight or nine times out of ten, an attempt to lure the enemy towards you and aim at their weak spots. Well, people like Gaara and Uzumaki Naruto were exceptions to the rule, but exceptions were exceptions. In this case, Kankurou was stepping out to lure the giant towards him, and their enemy naturally knew it too. But, the giant still turned towards Kankurou anyway. Every footfall rang out with a great thud. It looked like their enemy felt extremely confident about their Raijinga. This feels familiar. Kankurou thought. He was being reminded of his younger brother Gaara. Sand and electromagnets may look different, but at the end they both used an absolute defense jutsu. They protected their body with an invincible armour, and simultaneously used that armour as a weapon against others. If any difference was to be found, it was how Gaara didnt use his jutsu in such a flashy and gaudy way to turn himself into a towering giant. But then, being the size of a giant had its advantages beyond appearances. Hes fast! In the blink of an eye, the giant had already approached Kankurou. People usually expect large things to move slow. Be it whales or blimps, or monsters like the Ten Tails, huge things look like theyre moving slowly. But, that was just an optical illusion. When a creatures one step covered a large distance, then that creature was fast. It was something thatd be easily understood if one thought of a parent and child racing against each other. Large things are fast. Thinking that small beings could nimbly avoid large ones is nothing but a delusion. The giant casually raised its foot over Kankurou. Just the underside of one foot was bigger than the roof of a small house. If one stepped on you, youd be crushed to bits. Tak, tak, tak. Kankurou managed to leap out of the way three times in a row when the giant tried to step on him. But, the fourth time, Kankurou didnt leap away. He leapt up. He leap up aiming for the giants own knee, intending to climb all the way up to his face. Any shinobi of jounin class could quickly jump off scaffolding as meagre as leafy branches on trees. The giants legs were beyond ideal footholds for Kankurou to jump his way up. But, the Raijinga wasnt the giants only jutsu. Kankurou-sama! Amagi couldnt shout out loud, but his horrified shriek rang out inside his head. The instant Kankurou had touched the surface of the giants knee, the electromagnetic field that was the driving force behind the giants movement effected Kankurou too, and the mans entire body literally scattered to bits. The giant laughed. Every single part of his body was a weapon to be used against others. That was his absolute and defense, or rather the offensive strategy of his absolute defense. Any person who attacked him would be destroyed to tiny pieces the instant they touched him. The giant had probably never tasted failure in his life. And that was why Kankurou laughed. ! Kankurou didnt come out immediately. His continued existence had only been partially given away by the sound of his sneering. As for Kankurou who had shattered to pieces, his remains turned into countless sharp shards and flew back to pierce the giants body, a sharp woosh sound piercing out as the sand of the giants body was disturbed. The place on the ground where Kankurou shouldve fallen held only his black cloak. It was a rather simple trick. The Kankurou whod seemingly leaped up to the giants knee had, in fact, been the puppet that Kankurou carried on his back. Hed swapped places with the puppet at the last minute, diving underground himself as he sent the puppet up to meet the giant. The trick itself was rather simple, but the impeccable timing and exploitation of a humans psychological weak spots were all Kankurous originality. It wasnt surprising that the inexperienced Amagi had been fooled too. Amagi, and the giant too. The giant couldnt possibly observe the goings on at his feet with much diligence. It was a weak spot from his eyes being too high up. GAUUUUUUUUUUUUUUGHHHHHHH! The giant shrieked as it writhed in pain. From what Amagi could see, the giant was uselessly sending electromagnetic waves through the puppets threads. Well, that was to be expected. Going by his writhing, the giant was in unbearable pain. Hes not just suffering from being attacked by the fragments. Kankurou crowed as he watched the spectacle. There was an extremely delighted look on Kankurous face. It was the expression a performer would have after successfully pulling off a magic trick in front of a wide audience. He was talking about the giants Chakra Pathway System. The cornerstone of ninjutsu was the Chakra Pathway System that carried living beings energy Cie chakraC through its pathways. Kankurou had unmistakably launched his own chakra-laden strings towards the giant in his attack. He had, in a nutshell, turned the giant into a sort of living puppet. Of course, Kankurou didnt have a jutsu like the byakugan thatd let him perfectly see the chakra pathways of his opponents. But, if you studied the matter diligently enough, then you could easily send your chakra to invade the Chakra Pathway of your opponent, thus creating a countercurrent of chakra and throwing their jutsu into disarray. Unable to maintain his Raijiga jutsu, the giant fell to his knees. If he was an experienced shinobi, hed be able to stand back up after a few seconds. Their opponent definitely was an experienced shinobi, but, an unfortunate one. The second he fell down, Kankurou sent three chuunin flying to dogpile on him, and the giantor rather, the shinobi who used to be a giant, was instantly captured. Raijinga Kajuura, jounin terrorist from Ishigakure village, youre under arrest. Kankurou said, and not a second later, the runaway-nin Kajuuras mouth and hands were covered in shackles. It went without being said that the shackles were there to prevent the criminal from attempting suicide. Were not going to kill him, sir? Amagi asked. He had a vexed expression on his face. He killed all three of his own students. And in the process, ten citizens. Is that so? Kankurou asked. Kankurou was long past the stage where he felt emotionally overwhelmed with that number of deaths. In the war, dozens and hundreds more shinobi had died. Do you want to kill him? He asked Amagi. Yes. Alright then, you can kill him. Kankurou said, placing a kunai into Amagis hand, But, you can only kill him if you can guarantee that youll be able to bring back the genin and citizens that he murdered. How about it? Can you do that? Th- thats If you cant do it, then after you kill him, youll be killed as well. Putting aside what this bastards relations and village will do if you kill him, a dead shinobi doesnt carry the secret techniques people want returned. A dead shinobi is just a pointless chunk of flesh. I dont need a subordinate who creates such pointless things. I wont do it. Amagi said. I see. Amagi had given a good response. If he managed to survive a few more battles, hed definitely become a good shinobi. Amagi, Kankurou said. When it comes down to it, I want to kill him too. Captain. Hes a terrorist for hire, and even if were only looking at the number of victims we know, hes killed over a hundred little girls. Of course nobody wants to let him live. Kankurou was looking down at their captive as he spoke. Kajuuras eyes were blindfolded as well, just in case he could use doujutsu. But, if we kill him out of hate, then were not gonna be any different from him. We cant be like this guy. Shinobi are those who endure Amagi murmured. Exactly. Kankurou said, and gave a broad grin. Alright, lets go home! You guys safely completed an A-rank mission today. Its something to celebrate! Ill treat you guys to a heap of roast lamb! OOOOO! The young shinobi all let out a delighted cheer. And now I will mention the results of this strategy to capture Kajuura that was carried out three days ago. Kajuuras interrogation has revealed the existence of a larger organisation behind him. Our intention is to carry out a mass-arrest in a number of days. The matter of Kajuuras custody after that event will be discussed between the Five Kage. Gaara finished reading the long report to the elder Counsellors lined up in front of him. The leader of Sunagakure village may have been Gaara, but the really powerful influences were the elder shinobi who drew away from the frontlines. They were a group of representatives from several tribes who organised the village, and Gaara couldnt make a decision without running it by them first. The weekly meetings they had about reports were in reality occasions for Gaara and the Counsellors to come to mutual understandings on subjects. Ahum. One of the elders spoke. As expected of the kazekage. None of us have anything were concerned about. As he said that, the line of wrinkled faces nodded in unison. Ah, and now that you mention it Ebizou, the head of the Counsellors, gave Gaara a broad smile from where he sat in front of Gaara. About time you got there. Thats likely what Gaaras friend, Uzumaki Naruto wouldve said. He probably wouldve stuck his tongue out, too. But, Gaara couldnt say things like that. He just thought as I expected, and let the slightest of furrows come between his brow. From now on, this is just going be a friendly chat with some grandpas and grandmas. Ebizou continued, Alright, Kazekage? Yes. Friendly chat my foot. From now on, the counsellors were going to discuss the real reason behind the so-called report session. Every incident Gaara had reported until this moment was already long known to the Counsellors. His informing them was just for show, an empty ceremony. The fact that they were about to ask the Kazekage for a personal favour was just another show of how the Counsellors were the real power in Sunagakure. It was absolutely ridiculous. Sometimes itd be something about how someones genin grandchild was having bad luck in missions, and could he have a word with the chuunin in charge? Or other times itd be about how the sand piling up on the roads making things difficult, and oh cant you do us a favour and talk to the Daimyou about it? In those cases, they were talking as influential people in the village. Those cases were bearable. It was when they started speaking as shinobi that the situation turned awful. For example, My jutsu desperately needs a cactus that only appears every thousand years, but we dont have any. They say there are some medicinal stores in Snow Country that have them, so send some young ones to get them for me, will you? For example, Some shinobi from Amegakure have stolen a hiden scroll from us. We dont want to kick up a fuss, so, Kazekage, save our face and handle the situation behind closed doors. For example, Say that youre expanding the budget for medical users, and make a special jounin position for a few poison-users from my tribe. Everything the Counsellors asked of Gaara always had to do with dirty business or irrational personal favours. Gaara used to listen attentively when hed just become Kazekage, but lately hed learnt how to deflect or ignore their requests. If he just listened to everything they said, then his position as Kazekage, as well as the detente between the Five Great Shinobi Villages could both disappear. I wonder whats in store Gaara thought, filling his navel with chakra. This was no joking matter. Experienced shinobi were capable of loading chakra into their voices and instantly snatching away peoples will. There were people who could use the skills of instant hypnosis or paralysis even at simple meeting places like this. For shinobi, the location of any negotiation was no different from another battlefield. Now, Gaara. Yes? Youve steadily grown, and reached the age of twenty, havent you? Yes Youve quickly advanced. Toujuurou said from where he was sitting next to Ebizou, As to be expected from a jinchuuriki child, a genius shinobi who was called Gaara of the Desert! Toojuurou let out a great laugh. Ebizous health was weakening lately, and Toojuurou was being eyed as his successor, the Number Two of Sunagakures Counsellors. It had been several years since hed stopped working as an active shinobi, and as one would expect, his muscles had weakened, and his hair was white and balding. But, his power of insight hadnt weakened at all. The man was like a rock. During the Konoha Crush that genius of yours was tattered to shreds and fluttering in the wind, wasnt it? Ahahaha, well I suppose even monkeys can fall from trees. The end of that matter was embarrassing. In the past, Gaara probably wouldve killed them on reflex, but his present self had no intentions of doing that. Gaara knew that a persons world was built on spoken exchange like this, and it was precisely because he didnt kill every person he came across that the present world his mother and Naruto loved existed. For that reason, Gaara was even capable of lowering his head in apology. The Elders are taking a long time with their introductionjust what do they want to say? The looks on their faces didnt look like they had complaints about his work. Rather, the atmosphere around the elders was very relaxed. The atmosphere was calm. Most likely, the topic they were going to bring up was something theyd already laid the groundwork for, something nobody disagreed on. Twenty is a very good age. I see. And thats why, Gaara Ebizou shook his head, and grinned widely. The smile was like that of a childs. Take a wife. Huhuh? My voice sounds idiotic. Gaara thought to himself. He felt like hed been attacked from a blind spot. Hed had a blind spot outside of his consciousness. A person wasnt able to keep watch 360 degrees in every direction, but hed still be able to tell if, say, a friend was approaching from outside his field of vision, or if a pet cat was playing at his own feet. That was because a persons consciousness was able to reach out to their surroundings and see what was unseen. Shinobi forged and improved that consciousness, using even their intuition, until they were roughly able to sense all their surroundings with all their six senses. To still have something you hadnt been able to sense despite that consciousness was due to not being able to so much as imagine what to look out for. If you couldnt even imagine it, you definitely couldnt see it, and you couldnt sense it. It was a blind spot in every meaning of the word. And Gaara had been attacked completely unprepared. If Ebizou had been a genjutsu user, Gaara couldve died in battle. Cold sweat was running down Gaaras back. An ordinary person wouldve shuddered, but Gaara was a shinobi through and through. I still havent trained myself enough. With all due respect, Gaara said, Why me? You dont know? .is this possibly about my sister Temari? Yes. Ebizou nodded. Listen well. Our previous Kazekage had three children. Temari, Kankurou, and you, Gaara. You, who carried the power of a Jinchuuriki then became Kazekage. I assume you understand the grave importance of such a bloodline. Yes Most of the world of shinobi was built on heritage. Of course, that didnt mean shinobi were never succeeded by people from another clan who showed talent. For example, the Sarutobi clan who held such high authority in Konohagakure village never had another clan-member as Hokage beyond the Third. But, a large portion of jutsu used by shinobi was inherited, and furthermore, kept inside the clan as a guarantee of preserving their prosperity. And for that, one needed blood relations. Of course, if its only to preserve the existence of the house-name, then even an adopted child or son-in-law would do. But, in the end, if it isnt a blood succession, then the people will not accept it. Sunagakures roots lie in its tribes. And the tribes value blood ties. Gaara didnt have anything he could use to retort to the elders words. If he argued carelessly, theyd immediately pounce on him with retorts. He could see that, and thats why he was listening silently. Like an obedient grandchild. Now we come to the main point. Temari is marrying into Konohagakures Nara clan this is fine. We, too, have deemed it acceptable. However, One of the elders, Ikanago, slammed her fan against her knee. Lets say that in the future, a misfortune befell you and Kankurou. Lets say that Temari and Nara Shikamaru had a child at the time. In that casethat child would become the only remaining bloodline of the kazekage. I understand what youre trying to say. Gaara said, In that case, you would feel the need to approach the child, and bring them back here to protect the Kazekage bloodline. Isnt that right? What disgusting words I have to force out my mouth. Gaara thought. Even though he himself had been cursed to be used as a tool by his parent, here he was talking about a child his sister hadnt even given birth to yet, and rather than talking about congratulating her, they were talking about using the child as another political tool. The seat of political power might be great and mighty, but its also a cold and desolate place. But, if that happened, Gaara continued, Then the Nara Clan would be paternal relations to the Kazekage. Then, naturally, Konohagakure would become deeply intertwined with Sunagakures affairs. And this is the outcome that every single one of you elders fear. Thats what this is, isnt it? Exactly. But, if I got married first, the tradition of marrying off the eldest to youngest would be disturbed. First, you should look to settling down my elder brother Kankurou. Gaara said that, but he wasnt particularly looking to push this troublesome matter onto his elder brother. Kankurou had a smooth, glib tongue that Gaara didnt have. The one who was able to hang out with younger shinobi and listen to their troubles was Kankurou, not Gaara. Gaara had wanted to be able to do such things as well, but whenever he tried, things didnt work out well. The other shinobi respected Gaara a great deal, and didnt want to bother him by meeting his gaze. Of course youre not Kankurou. Gaara, youre you. Im not Kankuorou either, you know. Naruto had said sometime in the past, laughing. Like, there are friends who you go out and play with, but there are also friends who stand by you during hard times, the kind youre really grateful for. Gaara, if you ask me which type you are, youre definitely the second type. Those words might have been just part of an everyday conversation for Naruto, but for Gaara, they were like a salvation. Above all else, Naruto thought of Gaara as a friend, and the fact that he said those words without any hesitation made him extremely happy. But Kankurou did hold more popularity, and Kankurou did seem like the better option here. Nothing made Gaara think that other than his cool-headed disposition as a shinobi. We thought so as well. However, Kankurou refused. Oh. Gaara replied after a pause. He had abruptly realised that Kankurou had been the one to push the troublesome matter onto him. No matter how you looked at it, Kankurou was a very flighty person. Even though he had the same good looks as Gaara, Kankurou went to all the trouble of hiding it under makeup, and playing around. Kankurou was the kind of man who hated to be tied down to anything. When Gaara and Toujuurou had nominated Kankurou to be head of the Anti-Terror division, theyd had a very hard time getting him to accept. He said that getting married while the Kazekage didnt have a wife would be a sign of disrespect and that we should get you married off first. His reasoning was logically sound. Indeed. Gaara muttered. And thats not all. Several of the Daimyou have been saying things to criticise us about how you are still unmarried and without heir. You see, Gaara, Ebizous yellowed eyes held just the smallest glimmer of kindness in them. This isnt just all about politics or jinchuurikis. We ended up causing you to live an immensely harsh life. We want to give you a family. We want you to be happy. Your happiness would be our tribute to those who have passed. Gaara no longer held any ill feelings towards his deceased father. Those old feelings had been washed away by their second meeting brought about by the Edo Tensei, because he had found out that, even if it was just for a short amount of time, he had been born into this world loved by someone. So thats how it is, Gaara. Everyone in the villageno, probably even your friends from other villages, as well, everyone wants this for you. Your match has already been picked. Shes a nice girl. Indeed, indeed she is. They even brought out a photograph. It had already become clear that this wasnt something he could run away from. Kicking and screaming in the face of death was unsightly behaviour unsuited for a shinobi. A shinobi had to face death and keep thinking about how he was going to live. I understand. Gaara said, and bowed his head. Cold sweat dripped down his forehead without him realising. This was really just another mission, with just a different modus operandi. I respectfully accept the matter of having a marriage meeting, Gaara said. I would be pleased if you would pick a date and get into contact with the other side. He put all of his effort into saying those words. Translators Notes: *knives attached to sword scabbards, best seen rather than explained. ** Raijinga literally means Lightning God Self, but the jutsus frequently mentioned, so I felt like it read smoother with just the romaji instead of the full name. Volume 5 - CH 2 Section Two: Hakuto Shinobi are those who endure even the most unreasonable of circumstances. Shinobi are those who endure. Thats what people say. But then, there are also people who say that not going back on their word is their ninja way. Shinobi who say they live for the sake of sticking by what theyve said. Which saying was the right one? The man didnt know. If he absolutely had to say something, then all he could say was just that he knew he couldnt keep enduring the situation he currently found himself in. Even if that meant taking a path where he would not be someone who endured his circumstances. He just couldnt do anything other than make sure his principles were not broken. That sort of a man existed. The marriage meeting was going to be held in a high-end hotel that was located in a crescent-shaped oasis a little distance away from Sunagakure village. The oasis was a loud, flashy and gaudy place that was a gathering of eccentric rich folks who said they wanted to see the desert or tourists who wanted to experience the night clubs and gambling that werent available in the city of suna. It wasnt an area ruled by shinobi, but at the same time, it wasnt completely under the control of the Daimyou either. It was the perfect meeting spot for two families of shinobi. Of course, it without being said that Sunagakure had already told the employees to reserve the entirety of the hotel. The hotel was being run through a dummy company by Sunagakures leader precisely for situations like this anyway. This was Gaaras new battlefield. Tight and stiff. Gaara was wearing a three-piece suit for the first time in his life, and this was his honesty opinion on it. Bear with it, alright. Its for a marriage meeting after all. His elder sister said, tying a necktie around his neck. Okay? Youre the guest of honour today, so nobody can wear clothes of a higher level than yours. You understand the meaning behind that, right? Yes. Important ceremonial occasions were places where you were supposed to flaunt your familys status. It wasnt something any Kage could say no to. Sunagakures Fifth Kazekage was a shabby, seedy looking man. If any rumours like that got spread around, then it would wound the villages image. And, if any of the young shinobi in Suna caught wind of it, there was the possibility of them going out and starting a fight, too. At first, one might think it was strange for shinobi, who were constantly immersed in subversive activities or spying, could be bothered by rumours, however it was the very opposite of what one expected. The activities that shinobi carried out couldnt be made public. So for shinobi, it wasnt evidence or corpses that showed how many missions theyd taken or how fierce a warrior they were, but their reputation. It was their reputation that decided their fate. Most importantly, Daimyou could only assess a shinobi by their reputation, because there simply wasnt anything else. And that was precisely why every single village was very careful about the level of mission difficulty they set, and the amount of information they realsed in Bingo Books. But. Still. The clothes were tight. Im fine now,Temari. Ill do the necktie myself. Oh? Temaris eyes narrowed. Gaara, do you know what kind of knot youre going to tie? Knot? The tying method! Temari said, and went back to tightly tying the necktie around his neck again. Youre the guest of honour today, so you cant just tie your necktie any way you like. You need to more composed, and give it a dimpled shapeShikamaru doesnt understand a thing about this kind of stuff eitherI dont know why all you men are like this Alright, there we go! Gaara didnt understand what he didnt understand, or what his sister was happy about, but she looked satisfied with whatever shed done. Lets go with a silk handkerchief for your breast pocket. Silk has one of the ingredients for antidotes after all. But dont bring it out unless necessary. Theres a meaning behind even the slightest crease in your handkerchief, you know. Because of a secret code? Because of etiquette! Temari said, slapping her hands on Gaaras shoulders, and turning him around to look in the full-view mirror. Oh, I understand. It was strange but, he definitely did look different from his usual, everyday appearance. Gaara was handsome to begin with, but adding the dark blue material that had been specifically ordered from another country did indeed give him a special glow. His shoes were leather, and polished well. They had indiscreet iron plates for kicking. There were small shuriken on his jewelled tie pin and cuffs, but they didnt ruin the overall balance of his appearance. He was, in short,a fine figure of a man. Alright, there we go. Temari nodded, looking content. Well, this could be the last sisterly thing I can do for you, so, try not to think of it as a pain, okay? To think that Temari had been doing everything with that mindset made Gaara feel happy. There were so many people to give greetings to, it mightve been a tsunami made of human or an army full of zetsu. When Gaara finally had the chance to slip away, he closed his eyes. To think it wasnt even the day of the marriage meeting yet, just a banquet held on the day before, made a person feel flustered. At the end of the day, Sunagakure village was in the middle of the desert. The other side of the marriage meeting wouldnt come all the way out here and expect to be greeted by nothing but the weather. That was why theyd placed a sort of buffer on the days before and after the marriage meeting, sort of like an eve before an event. Gaara-sama, what an event. If the Kazekage ends up getting married, it will be an occasion to celebrate. When it comes to the wedding, please make it another grand event. It was a pain even greeting the wave of attacks from guests. It was thanks to Gaaras great memory that he was able to memorise each persons face, and speak to them tactfully. Among the guests, there were also people who had been ordered by his father, back in the previous age, to get involved in his assassination. Now, Gaaras battlefield was facing all sorts of people with a forced smile on his face. So when Gaara happened to spot the brother he hadnt seen for a while at a bar on the other side of the crowd, Gaara felt relieved. Kankurou hadnt taken off the usual hood on his head, however, he looked surprisingly at ease in his tuxedo. Yo, Kankurou greeted. Aa. Gaara replied. You look well. Kankurou said, holding out his alcohol filled glass for a little toast. Gaara clumsily clinked his own glass Cfull of cold teaC against his brothers. Youre not drinking alcohol same as usual, huh? It dulls my judgement. It hinders my speaking. Its also a burden on my internal organs. I dont understand why you choose to drink it. Well, its that kind of thing, yknow, Kankurou wryly smiled, hitting back the amber liquid till there was none left in his glass. People feel the urge to do things they know wont do them any good. Thats true. That was something that Gaara did understand. He wasnt a child who would deny that fact. At the very least, he thought that he wasnt someone who was qualified to criticise the irrational actions of others, considering he used to be someone who would keep killing everyone he came across. His position as Kazekage mightve made things a little different, but that position was one who had to stick to a certain law. Gaara was no longer someone who could put his emotions first and high-handedly judge others. So just think of spending some time with alcohol as another part of a mission. Kankurou said. Is thathow it is? Yeah. Kankurou grinned, and slid out a glass towards Gaara from somewhere. Gaara brought the glass to his mouth. ! It tasted awful. Why do Kankurou and the others drink something like this so happily? It seriously tasted terrible. All it did was warm up your stomach, leave a bitter and stinging taste in your mouth, and no matter how you looked at it, it was awful. Gaara thought maybe this was why he didnt like maron glace. Hed eaten some bad tasting soldier pills on the battlefield, and gotten wild grass and mud in his mouth during practice, but this was on a different level. It would be one thing to inhale something like this for medicinal reasons, but willingly drinking it for the taste was a completely different matter. Is it bad? His brother asked, grinning. He looked like he couldnt contain his amusement at the situation. Its notgood. Gaara replied. Its not supposed to be. Gaara didnt understand what it was supposed to be, but Kankurou was nodding earnestly. Then, Kankurou slid off his stool. Are you already going, Kankurou? In the first place, Im only meant to hand over the security here, and briefly show my face. Everything after this is making sure the marriage meetingll go smoothly, so I should be heading back. Temari will take care of everything else. Understood. Stay healthy. Youll do a good job, casanova. He hadnt seen his sibling for a long time, and that was the entirety of their conversation. But, it was the longest conversation theyd had in half a year. The younger brother was the Kazekage and the elder brother was the head of the Anti-Terror division, so while that gave them many occasions where they talked business, their talks in private had quickly lessened. The elder sister who used to stick to them like glue was leaving the village, and now those old days when the three of them would carry out missions like one unit already felt like a far away, fleeting dream. Shinobi were running through the dark of the night. Shinobi did use lightning trains* and steam trains or blimps when the situation called for their necessity, but they were simply faster at travelling by foot than other, normal people. Shinobi could go down a trackless path, and make a journey of a thousand miles without a single break. For them, their own two legs were the most reliable method of transport. And there was all the more reason to go on foot when travelling in the desert, where no reliable roads were guaranteed. Shinobi were more tenacious than camels, faster than horses, and they flew across the seas of sand with ease. The head of the group of travelling shinobi was Kankurou. By his side was Amagi, who had healed from his injuries sustained in his last battle. Theyd seen great improvements in the techniques used by their medical-nin, thanks to the engineering collaboration they had with Konoha. The results of the secret medical techniques passed down by the Fifth Hokage, Tsunade-hime, were remarkable, and Amagi had been able to return to carrying out missions after a few days, despite his entire body being scorched by lightning. Kankurou-sama. Amagi spoke. At the end, I dont understand it. Dont understand what? Kankurou knew the answer, but he asked anyway. The young ones around him Cwell, they werent actually all that youngC were all disgruntled about something. But, even if he knew what it was, he couldnt let it show that he did. Even if it is for appearances, was that sort of a luxurious celebration really necessary? Nobodyd want it being called a shabby celebration, would they? Kankurou said. Sunagakure has to show its power to the Daimyou, and the surrounding tribes. Even so. Sir. Amagi sounded angry. Our genin are dying in the midst of the Country of Winds limited arms policy, like theyre disposable. And in the middle of that situation, theres this. The shinobi gathered around them didnt raise a single objection. Looked like everyone had the same thoughts. Its precisely because were under the limited arms ban that we need to put on appearances. Kankurou said. And will those appearances effect the Daimyous decision? It was a difficult question. Shinobi had saved the world. It hadnt been the least bit glorious. But Amagi and the rest were young, and didnt know about that battle.They looked at their revered seniors, Gaara and Kankurou, and when they saw that their efforts in the war hadnt been rewarded, they started thinking that they wouldnt be compensated for their actions either. Right now, conflict between countries had dropped sharply, and there were no longer many opportunities for young shinobi to achieve distinguishments. Our roles are many, be it the anti-terror unit or hunting down runaway-nin. Kankurou said, Shinobis jobs arent just limited to finding missing dogs of cleaning Daimyou houses. But I cant see why we do those things for any reason other than trying to flatter the Daimyou and traders. Amagis words were heavy. Ive heard about how we shinobi have always been existences who are more than capable of manipulating the Daimyou or ruling the country. We leave politics to the Daimyou. Kankurou said. Thats the rule of shinobi. If we get entangled in politics, and drown in things like gold, alcohol, sex, then we wont be shinobi anymore. I keep the teachings of the Sage of the Six Paths close to my heart. Amagi replied. Youd find that one difference between the two chakra users, samurai and shinobi, was their method of receiving the teachings of ninshuu. Samurai had split off into a branch who were more spiritual and idealistic, while shinobi had taken a similar route to thinking how can we use our chakra to keep peoples bonds alive? Then, Amagi said, Isnt it all the more true that flattering the government goes against the ninja way? Amagi. Kankurous tone turned low. Hed allow general criticism. That was Gaaras policy. He thought that if he didnt allow general criticism, then nobody would want to follow him, due to his homicidal past. He thought that allowing criticism would make cooperation strengthen, since criticism allowed the citizens to blow off steam and him to fix his shortcomings. But, there was a limit to what Kankurou could allow. Gaara isnt the sort of man who goes back on his word. Kankurou said. Hes fighting for the sake of Sunagakure. Thats a fact. I know that. It was true. Amagi, and the other shinobi too, had placed their beliefs and hopes in Gaara, and that was why theyd signed up to be shinobi. Gaara was a hero to the youth, someone who was changing Suna from a village that was ruled by other seniors in power. And that was precisely why they couldnt stand it when it looked like Gaara was intertwining with the government. These young ones were really fastidious. Kankurou-sama, you risk your life in the front lines, so for us, youre our leader. Kankurou didnt like how heavy Amagis words felt. They werent spoken out of self-interest or calculation. It was just pure, simple faith. Thats exactly why Im troubled by it. Kankurou missed the days when all he had to think about was the mission. The moons reflection was shining on a lakes surface in the oasis. It looked sharp and clear, and terribly cold. Gaara was watching the moon from the roof of his suite room. At the end of the day, he hadnt been able to take a liking to alcohol, but it had been an unusual day where he hadnt had anything to do, so in a way he had relaxed. Well, actually hed wanted to try and find some work to do but Are you an idiot?! Temari had given a single roar that laid waste to the idea. Listen, okay? A marriage meeting is figuring out what kind of a household you want to make. How would it look if a guy said he preferred thinking about work at that time? Think about it. It was a long lecture. But, at the same time, it was also a fact that he didnt really mind entrusting others with work. Gaara had an absolute defence. In a nutshell, he could face a horde of enemy shinobi and still come out unscathed. It wasnt an exaggeration. In the old days, he had never hesitated when it came to hurting others. Now, it was the reverse. Now, Gaara understood the bitter pain experienced when others who didnt have an absolute defence were wounded. It might have been arrogance. But, even so, when Gaara was forced to send someone to chase after death while he remained safe, he felt incredibly pained. So you were here, Gaara. Very few people called the Kazekage by name. The middle-aged shinobi who showed up at Gaaras side with a gust of wind, Baki, was one of those few. He was a man like the desert granite that had been worn down by the wind for countless years, and unwaveringly loyal. Baki. Whats wrong? Baki had been Gaaras superior when he was younger and a genin. Now, Baki was technically Gaaras subordinate, but the truth that he was more of a guardian. That was why there was no need for any troublesome greetings between them. They had the trust of a teacher and student, as well as that of comrades in arms. There was no room for showy displays. Why was I called here to be in charge of security instead, and Kankurou told to return to the village? ? Gaara turned his head. Kankurou told me that that was the original plan. Id heard that Kankurou was personally handling the security since while this was a public official matter, it was also something that intimately concerned the Kazekage household. Then, I received word that I was suddenly replacing him. .thats strange. Even if it was family -no, precisely because it was family, strange happenings couldnt be overlooked. Should I call Kankurou back? It looks like its too late to do that now. My subordinates have already gone back. Either way, it looks like the chain of command was broken somewhere. if this is a plot, its a very poorly made one. Gaara said. As long as we check the order of command relay, the person responsible will immediately be exposed. Of course, it could just be an error in communication. Baki said. Baki didnt say that from optimism, or any intention of covering for Kankurou. Theyd lost a great number of key figure veterans during the last war, and every village now had a terribly wide ratio between the young and the old. As a result, the numbers of people who had the experience required for behind the scene work like office work or engineering adjustments had greatly decreased. One mistake would create another mistake, and things could even end up in chaos. Unfortunately, there isnt a single human who doesnt make mistakes, so rather than be unforgiving towards mistakes, they planned everything out with the assumption that there were already mistakes somewhere in there. It could be an error, Baki. Gaara said. But, it could also be a hastily made plot with people causing trouble before theyre detected. Affirmative. The marriage meeting is personal business, but, its too late to reschedule it. Strengthen security, please. And investigate. Gaara only hesitated for a moment before continuing. Call the Konoha shinobi, too. And Temari, as well, privately. Understood. Baki disappeared. For a while, Gaara stood there, running his hand down the gourd that he carried. His lips moved, but he didnt make any sound. The softly removed veil revealed beautiful, well-defined features that made you think if the wind took the form of a woman, this is what shed look like. She was a very beautiful woman. It was far too plain an explanation for her looks, but unfortunately Gaara didnt have a spacious enough vocabulary for any more than that. I am Hakuto, of the Houki Tribe. Her inky black hair shined like a black pearl, and came down to her shoulders. The kimono she wore looked simple and neat at first glance, but when you looked closer you could see the high quality of the material, and the smattering of just enough Cbut not too muchC gems woven between thread. Her skin was clear and fair, and she was slender but not too thin, and you could see faint outlines of muscle from a shinobis training under her skin. Beautiful. That was Gaaras honest first impression. There was no affection, or wicked thoughts. It was a specialty of his to look at things without preconceptions. It was plain fact that decoration-less Hakutos face looked as lovely as a golden rayed lily. She was in a league all her own. The Houki tribe was matrilineal, so the entourage of relatives on her side of the room were all old women, excluding one. Both her parents had passed away in the war. Gaaras side was in a similar state. Temari was his only attending relative. Gaara hadnt liked the idea of increasing the numbers, and disliked the idea of mediators. I am Gaara, successor of the Kazekage. I hope we get along today. Ah, yes! They were seated in the private room of a restaurant that held a fine view of the lake. It was the first time in Gaaras life that hed sat across a lovely woman in a place like this, She has a lot of openings in her stanceso, shes a medical-nin. Medical-nin were precious assets in the front lines for saving lines, but they couldnt really be compared to a shinobi of Gaaras class, because there would be an incredible difference in the skill of their taijutsu. Haruno Sakura of Konohagakure was the rare exception for that rule. But, it was a different case when it came to the kunoichi wearing very thick glasses that stood behind Hakuto. The way she carried herself spoke of mastery and betrayed her to be at least jounin-class. In the middle of all the old women, Gaara and Hakuto were the youngest, but it looked like both their guards were about equal. Well, anyway, since this is about marriage taijutsu isnt likely to be a problem. At that thought, Gaara found his face suddenly turn red. The idea that the woman in front of him could become his wife had finally linked to reality in his brain. Well, it would only happen if the marriage meeting went well, but still, thoughts were spinning around his head. Well then, well leave you young ones to talk. One of the old mediators casually said, and everyone else got up. This included the only relative on Gaaras side, Temari. Gaara. Temari said, moving to speak in his ear. There was a method used by shinobi when whispering where you mouthed shifts in pronunciation to ensure no one else would hear what was being said. You know, the women of the Houki tribe dont show their face without makeup to any man except the one theyre going to marry. ? Ah, youre so thick. Temari teasingly wrapped an arm around her brothers neck. I mean, youve got hope, do you understand? Oh. Gaara said. Ohh! Across from them, Hakuto gave a smile. According to ancient shinobi, there are younin who work out in the open, and innin who work under cover of camouflage. Younin worked in wars of information, analysing the links between people or public knowledge to guess the enemys intentions. Their work included Signal Intelligence and Human Intelligence. Innin, on the other hand, infiltrated enemy territory or caused destruction. Theyd also gain the enemys knowledge and then guide them to act in a way that their side would find favorable. When people generally thought about shinobi tactics, these are the kind they thought of. Of course Gaara, being a jounin, had seen various situations at various times. Experienced younin were capable of simply glancing at the iron and steel stock prices in an ordinary newspaper, and then figuring out on the spot whether the enemy was moving their soldiers or whether the rumours of the enemy building a new warship were true. Thus, there were also shinobi who were experienced diplomats. During A-B rank missions, there were many cases of making diplomatic negotiations between Daimyou, or large corporations, or negotiations for the release of hostages. And conversely, sometimes the diplomats sent by Daimyo were actually jounin class shinobi who were secretly gathering information. However, there was a condition. What allowed shinobi to do all that was the fact that their personal matters were not involved. It was different from this moment, where a young woman was sitting in front of him and looking at him with a nervous expression on her face. How was he supposed to initiate contact? Sunagakure village had a lot of kunoichi who adored Gaara. However, hed never developed a relationship with anyone, mostly because of Temaris stealthy handiwork in getting rid of unwanted admirers, and also partly because he was the superior of anyone who was interested in him. To begin with, Gaara had never really had any intentions for relationships, and all his subordinates feelings were, to honestly be more accurate, the sort of longing you had for a far-off idol. And that was why Gaara spent five minutes in silence, completely at a loss as to what would be a good thing to say to Hakuto. This is bad. If this was a battlefield, then his silence was the move that would lose him the war. Shinobi who drained their emotional strength while waiting for the opponent to make a move werent protecting themselves, they were driving themselves into a corner, and soon, they would die. Gaara knew that fact well. Uhm. They both spoke up at the same time, words crashing into each other in mid-air, and both hung their heads again. This is really bad. His sister had given him a furious lecture full of advice before they came here, but somehow, at this moment, Gaara couldnt remember a single thing shed told him. It felt similar to that moment when he had fallen under the Infinite Tsukuyomi. His mind wasnt under his control. But, this wasnt a genjutsu. It was completely different. Something else was affecting him. But, Gaara was a shinobi. And not just any shinobi. He was one of the Five Kage who stood at the summit of the shinobi world. He inwardly composed himself, using the concentration techniques he often practiced, and opened his mouth again. uhm, what are your hobbies? It was an extremely unoriginal question, possibly so unoriginal that it would never leave the mouth of anyone but him, but he had also learned by watching Naruto that sometimes the most unoriginal and tiny breakthrough could help you change your situation in a battle. Reading, Hakuto answered, Andthe harp, a little. And you, Gaara-sama? Raising cacti. Oh, that idiot. Temari was muttering from where she was keeping an eye on the proceedings in the ceiling. Theres a limit to how banal you can be. What part of that was encouraging to the other party? I told you, you listen to what the other person has to say, and then say enough to be encouraging, like passing a ball. She muttered. Good grief, Shikamarus like that and Gaaras like this, why is it that the men around me lose all common sense when it comes to these situations? Of course, Temari was supposed to be talking with Hakutos relatives and other persons of interest, but, slipping away from their company had been a piece of cake. She didnt feel the slightest doubt over whether she was qualified to say she had common sense compared to everyone else. Cacti? Hakuto asked. Yes, cacti. Gaara said. I started off with cultivating them in pots, but lately Ive been thinking about making a greenhouse. Up in the ceiling, Temari made a hopeless face. That had to be the killing blow. Who told you to talk only about yourself?! She thought. Let your partner speak! A man who holds a conversation well is a good man, I kept telling you that! However. Ive never been out of the village, Hakuto said, So I dont know, but, cacti, do they need the help of people to grow? Correct. Gaara said, Cacti may appear to be things of the deserts, but the truth is theyre plants that mostly sprout out of soil. Storing water is their specialty, but they cant grow without water, so one must devise a way to give them enough. Oh. Hakuto looked surprised. I always thought cacti could grow without being watered. I used to think so too, and they ended up drying out a lot. It turns out they need enough water to ensure their soil wont dry out completely. They grow slow, so just a little bit is fine. But, if you water them too much, the roots will end up rottingah, no, Im sorry. I ended up speaking too much about my own matters. No, its fine. Hakuto laughed sweetly. It wasnt fake or forced, Before we met, I heard you were the feared Gaara of the sand waterfall, and I wondered how much of a frightening person you might be. But after hearing about your cacti, my impression of you has changed. Oh, ohh?! Temari was momentarily stunned by the unexpected turn of events, but she immediately threw up a silent fist of victory. Yes, thats it! She thought. Keep going! Onwards assault! The look on her face was very similar to a spectator at a martial arts tournament. Things hadnt gone according to her definition of common sense, but in this case, Temari thought that was a good turn of events. Gaara-sama, Ive never seen a flowering cactus before, butdo they really sprout flowers? Yes, Gaara pulled out some sand from his gourd behind him, and made the sand take the shape of a cactus, with a large, indescribably pretty flower blooming on top. The flowers that bloom on my cacti look like this. Ive heard of cacti that only bloom once every twenty years, but I prefer the ones I raise that bloom once every year or so. It really is beautiful Thank you. Like any horticulturist, Gaaras face looked like a parent whose child had been praised. The smile on his face was the same one he once used to give his foster-parent Yashamaru. After a flower has bloomed, you absolutely cant move the cactus to another plot. Gaara continued, Its given all of its power to bringing a new life into the world. But, thats another enjoyable side to raising them Hakuto said, Youre really very kind, arent you? Kind? The word didnt suit him. His past self who had been so full of hatred towards the world wouldve never imagined the day would come where someone would call him kind. Well, it makes sense. Shes a young noble lady from the Houki tribe whos never left her village, so of course she doesnt know about how Gaara used to be. Human beings will form their impression of a person as they are now while dragging out the impression they had from the past. The reason the people in Gaaras surrounding were in awe of him was, as expected, a remnant of the days when he used to be cruel. So it wasnt that strange that Hakuto, whod seen nothing of Gaaras past, could look at the current him and easily, honestly call him kind. If that was the case, Temari thought, then it was something to be happy about it. It was something to be very, very happy about. After you became Kazekage, the Houki tribes daily lives became much more peaceful. Hakuto said, As you know, my tribe is a house that specialises in medical-nin and information gatherers. Were called the people who work behind the scenes. And, until recently, none of us has ever been placed in the centre of Sunagakures government. You know why, correct? Yes, Gaara replied. I heard it was because you were a clan who originally moved down from Konohagakure to Sunagakure. The reason such a clan was chosen as the partner for a possible marriage was due to Toujuurous strong insistence. The Houki tribe had shown deep loyalty for many years, and they were also on a neutral standing with most tribes, so their influence wouldnt be overpowering either. Exactly. Its because the Houki tribe is right between the boundary between the land of Fire and Wind that weve always been lead around between the two. But you didnt hold any prejudice against us, and employed us. Youre making too much of it. I just employed who could be of service, nothing more. That was, again, a single fact of reality. For the brittle Gaara, his political authority had felt like bonds of obligation tied to the past, and there hadnt been a single resource at his disposal he was content with not using. As the Kazekage, he had been frantically working for his villages sake, and the results of that had just happened to be fair Gaara recognised this truth. Even if that is so, Hakuto replied, Its certain that I thought I wanted to meet the person who had employed us. Is that so? It was a very ordinary conversation, but Gaara felt a sort of relieved emotion he had never felt before. He thought that this happiness was definitely because he had seen the benefits of the battle hed kept fighting on the battlefield of politics. The joy felt similar to the first time hed seen a flower bloom on one of his cacti. Extra Translator Notes: * This puzzle me quite a bit initially, because the kanji literally says thunder/lightening-car but theres no such kanji used to refer cars in rl!japan, so I initially just went with a verbatim translation. Later though, I figured it out. Train in Japanese is electric car. Electricity in the nardyverse is powered by lightning. Thus lightning car = electric car = lightning train lol. A lightning train is the equivalent of a rl electric train basically. Volume 5 - CH 3 Section Three - Moonlight The man had kept enduring. He endured for the sake of his family, he endured for the fate of blood. He thought that not being able to marry someone you loved was something that he couldnt avoid, as a shinobi. But the shadow that had appeared in front of him was too magnificent, too dazzling. He resented the shadow who had everything they wanted, felt jealous of it, broke his heart over it. Therefore, the man decided to stop enduring. The name of the shadow was the Kazekage. Suddenly, the sound of an explosion rang out. ! Gaara instinctively leapt across the table, his arms reaching out for Hakuto and throwing them both to the floor. Take cover! Dont speak! The young man who had been so frazzled by a young woman was nowhere in sight now. Without the slightest bit of hesitation, he was carefully keeping her down on the ground. The explosioncame from 200 metres to the West. Its probably a diversion, but There was no guarantee the next explosion wouldnt be inside the building. Gaara let his sand flow out of his gourd, making a large wall to act as a shield. He had to put it up, not necessarily for his own sake, but so Hakuto wouldnt get injured during a shockwaves thunderous roars. Is itan act of terror? Hakuto asked. Most likely. Hakuto looked a little pale from the shock, but there were no signs of panic. You could tell shed been disciplined to face situations like this. But, she didnt look like she was ready for a fight. Her face was already turning green, and you could acutely feel how scared she was. Baki and the others arent supposed to go towards the explosion. The problem with diversionary tactics was that even though you knew they were luring you out, you couldnt help but lose to the instinct to go and help. When it came to terror, the offensive side had an overwhelming advantage. Gaara and the others were on the defense, concentrating on guarding all places at all times, whereas the enemy could freely target any one place they desired. If it was his future brother-in-law Shikamaru, then hed say: Its like a game of shougi with an infinitely wide board, where the enemys king can go anywhere he likes. And, whats worse, since he can see all our battle formations, he can place his own pieces wherever he likes to avoid them too. And on top of all that, you dont even know where the enemys king is placed on the board. That was their current situation. What should I do? Gaara thought. Should I keep holding up the sand barrier? That would be faint-hearted, he decided in two seconds. The automatic protection he received from his sand was powered by his dead mothers chakra, so it would never stop occurring. However, anything more than the sand shielding him had to be powered by Gaaras own chakra. Movement, detection, counter attacksC Gaara was collecting the chakra necessary for all that right now. Right now. It would be best to assume the enemy knows how my abilities work. An attack that can get through my absolute defence will not come. In the last Shinobi World War, theyd gained many things, but they had lost things as well. One of those things was the hiden aspects of their jutsu. Shinobi has exposed their hiden jutsu again and again in front of many shinobi from other villages. The results were that the advantages of most hiden jutsu were now a moot point, and Gaaras absolute defence was no exception. I Gaara carefully squeezed Hakutos wrist. He did it because he vaguely remembered feeling comfort when Yashamaru, or maybe his mother, had done so in the past. Am going to protect you. He released the sand barrier around them. At the same instance, a shuriken flew towards them. It came from outside the window. I predicted youd do that! Gaara began gathering a wind release in the palm of his hand. There were two figures outside the window. Dont separate from my side. Gaara said. He kept hold of Hakuto with his left hand, and leapt towards the wall behind them. Then, with his right hand, he threw the shuriken theyd hidden beforehand towards the upper right, in a direction that was ninety degrees away from the window. Gugh! There was a short cry, and then a spray of blood. At the same time, the two shadows outside the window fell away. Just as he expected. It was a puppeteers jutsu. They had used chakra strings to control the puppets that were the shadows outside the window, and had planned to assault Gaara from behind when he turned to face them. It was an extremely see-through trick. Gaara slid across the room, back under the shelter of sand. Hakuto was light as a feather. She wasnt an obstruction to his movements, but, she made using his hands difficult. The guards outside havent come, so that means theyve likely been killed. He didnt get scared, and he didnt get angry. He just came to terms with the facts that reality presented. Deathwas death. I was careless! Up in the dark corners of the ceiling, all of Temaris limbs had gotten tied up thanks to the chakra strings that had burst out of the darkness. Both her feet, her abdomen, her right arm and left hand were all immobile, and she couldnt move her jaw either. The most she could do was slightly move her left shoulder. This was definitely karma biting her in the ass for spying. Hahaha! A ridiculing voice sneered from somewhere in the dark. The shinobi who was controlling the threads. Keep struggling, just keep on struggling. Shinobi only ever thought it was okay to give away their position when they were absolutely sure of their victory. Naturally so. Be afraid.and struggle on! But let me tell you, these threads have been made with the chakra of an ancient, giant spider. If you struggle, the threads tighten and steal your chakra. That mere wind release you bastards specialise in wont cut it, and wont unravel it. Temari twisted her abdomen a little, and found her breathing hindered. It didnt look like he was lying. Butthe bastards too caught up in his own words. There were a lot of male shinobi who got overconfident and ecstatic when they saw their opponent was a mere woman. Conversely, there were also kunoichi who got ecstatic when they saw their opponent was a man, so there was no difference in peoples stupidity. But, the ones who took advantage of that fact were always kunoichi. Ugh! Temari grunted. Just kill me quickly! She wondered whether her words sounded too forced, but she was still confident in her move. She made sure to will her voice to be pushed along with the wind so the enemy would definitely hear her. Ohh? Just as shed expected, there was a sign of movement in the darkness from the enemy. Found the prey. Now, all that was left was to reel him in. Gaara, whod gotten enclosed near the wall, didnt become aware of Temaris presence. To begin with, even if he had become aware of her, he would prioritise Hakuto. It went without being said that this wasnt because Gaara didnt love his sister, but because he had faith in her abilities. At the moment, Gaaras thoughts were first making sure Hakuto lived, and then figuring out how he would live. Gaara-sama. Hakutos eyes were looking at Gaara. Her eyes were wet. It wasnt surprising. She had just seen a person die in front of her for the first time in her life. Death in the battlefield was completely different from dying in a hospital bed. Someone who had been moving just fine a moment ago suddenly went completely still, a look of regret frozen on their face. You saw that and then in the next moment youd think: what if that happens to me too? The fear felt in those circumstances was severe. Fear was something brought about by the future you imagined, and the desperation of wanting to live. In short, it was because you had hope and kept thinking about tomorrow that you felt afraid. Gaara had seen many people who had past the brink of hopelessness to the point that nothing scared them anymore. So Hakuto being afraid was a sign of good mental health. But, this is a bad situation. She may have been a medical-nin, but it was precisely because she was still at genin-level that Hakuto was a true amateur. The most frightening was the possibility that, inexperienced as she was, Hakuto could lose to her fear and make a movement Gaara didnt expect, and get hurt. I apologise for this! Gaara said, grabbing Hakuto in his arms and leaping. He was aiming for the window where the sniper was positioned. The enemy should be expecting Gaara to make his escape from somewhere other than the window where a sniper had been positioned. There were most likely shinobi lying in wait there. Gaara exploited that fact. He kicked against the window sill, and jumped. Underneath him, he could see the hotels garden blur away. It was a poor move. Hed carried a charge he was meant to be protecting while jumping out into an open field where a sniper was waiting. If this had been an exam at the Academy, he wouldve gotten zero marks. But, that was exactly why the sniper took action just a second too late. Right before his eyes, a kunai was rushing towards him with supersonic speed. Its speed was pretty much equal to that of a wind or lightning release. If Gaara had been a normal shinobi, then his skull wouldve been pierced before he noticed it, and hed have died. But, Gaaras sand surged out of his gourd and casually deflected the kunai. His sand shield. It was an absolute defence concerned only with protecting him, one that wasnt even connected to his own will. Gaara cleared the shock wave from the supersonic speed of the kunai with his wind release. Even if he was carrying Hakuto, he could manage the hand seal movements with just a bit of shuffling. Gaara kicked off the top of a garden tree. He shaped the sand above him as a soft of glider, leaping towards the snipers direction. There. There were two camouflaged shinobi lurking on the steel scaffold of a building in progress. They were most likely spotters, shinobi who were guards for the sniper that were also supposed to keep an eye on their surroundings. Gaara saw them fly into a panic when they noticed his approach. Too late. You people always think the targets only going to try to escape. Most assassins who made surprise attacks on other people never thought about the possibility of someone surprise attacking them. That was something Gaara personally knew from surviving countless assassination attempts himself. Close your eyes, Gaara told Hakuto. Yes. He swooped down from above, a blade of sand beheading the spotters. Getting rid of the spotters before you target the sniper was the usual practice so as to get rid of the snipers protectors. What kind of shinobi had they been? What kind of lives had they led? To begin with, why had they set out with the intention of killing him? In this moment, Gaara didnt think about any of those things. Those thoughts were left for when he turned back to being the kazekage. In this moment he was just a man who wanted to protect the terrified woman he was carrying. He wasnt some naive youth who was caught up in the feelings of experiencing love for the first time. He was just a man who had a strong and unwavering will, like the wind that blew across the parched desert. The sniper had found his mark. Wind was moving. They were preparing a Vacuum Wave. It was a very fundamental technique where one formed a vacuum layer in the atmosphere with their chakra and then used the atmospheric differences to slice at their opponents. One didnt need an elaborate jutsu for destroying a human body. Using a highly reliable jutsu instead was very good judgement. If the snipers opponent was a normal shinobi. Gaaras sand shield easily deflected the Vacuum Wave. If his shield had been made of sand and nothing else, it wouldve been destroyed by the Vacuum Wave, but every grain of Gaaras sand was full of chakra and soul. In a way, his sand was alive. The cloud of moving sand took on the shape of a hand, and firmly moved to cover the snipers breathing tract. Gaara didnt have any intention of killing him. Dead bodies told no tales, after all. Are you alright? Gaara asked as he put the pale-faced Hakuto down beside the steel frame. I am alright. You, Gaara-sama? Im Gaara broke off, furrowing his brow. He broke off because the construction sites elevator had started working. Two shinobi stepped out of it, with identical awfully smug grins on their faces. At first glance, they looked like completely normal young men of medium builds. But, there was a presence around them that couldnt be ignored. The smell of blood. Youre the Kazekage, right? One asked. And you are? Im Konjiki Etoro. This is my elder brother Konjiki Metoro. It looks like youre having fun, so Im sorry to say thisbut please die. The man called Etoro had crimson killing-intent in his eyes. It was something hed been hoping to see. Heheyou look like someone whos sensible. The shinobi said, approaching Temari with a lewd laugh. Down below, Gaara had left the room, but the shinobi wasnt bothered by it. So that meant his job was to get rid of any protection Gaara would have. That being said, it was obvious that if she was defeated here, this shinobi would then go to face Gaara. Well, she doubted that Gaara would be defeated by this kind of chakra thread userbut still, facing him would take Gaara by surprise. Most importantly, it wouldnt do if she ended up dying. Even though I act like this, I am a man who knows compassion. The shinobi said. Hed gotten so close she could feel his breath on the back of her neck. Now! Temari unhesitatingly moved so that left shoulder Cthe only part of her she could moveC popped right out of its joint. !? You! Of course, just because her shoulder had popped and slipped out of the threads, that didnt mean the rest of her arm was free. But, thanks to that, the threads that had bound Temari momentarily warped. It was more than enough time for her to take out the explosive amulet she kept in her sleeve. Here we go! She wasnt thinking of doing something stupid like throwing the explosive at her opponent while she was tied up. No, Temaris target was her own body. The amulet exploded at point-blank range. The man jumped aside. But, he was too slow. She could now move her right arm, waist, and left leg. Just that much was more than enough. Her whole body ached like it was burning, but that was proof that she was alive. She avoided more threads the shinobi sent her way, and at the same time, used her right arm to slip her left shoulder back into its joint. The shinobi attacked a second time. Temari pulled out her war fan with her left hand, and released a blast of wind that repelled the threads. She was taking advantage of the threads being light in weight. She spun. Her right leg was still immobile, but she treated it like dancing around a pole, and spun herself around the fixed point where her leg still hung. While avoiding the third attack, she fluttered and jumped around, her war fan destroying the remaining threads. Now then She said. Im going to pay you back for the amusement! Even now, the enemy was focusing solely on using threads in his attacks, so while his threads had power, that meant he likely didnt have any other jutsu that were as effective. But, just to make sure! It was hard to rely on her specialty wind attack or summoning since they were indoors. Temari threw the shuriken shed had on her body up into the air like one would throw flowers. The man pulled back his threads and formed a shield. Temari swung her war fan downwards, aiming at the shuriken shed thrown. Fuuton, Flashing Fireworks! Like a shower of meteors, the shuriken her war fan had struck were enclosed in wind, hitting the floor and then springing back up. ! The man realised her true intentions. But, he was too slow. The ricocheting shuriken stormed back up through a blind spot in the mans shield, piercing his entire body. Blood splurted out of the man, and he collapsed. Good grief! Temari muttered. Shed won, but her own exhaustion was overwhelming her. I messed up! Temaris vision was turning shaky and dark. At this rateIm really going to look like an idiot! Somebodys arms were around her, supporting her exhausted body. Eh? In the midst of her fading consciousness, Temari could make out the persons face. Ah! It was a very unexpected face. But, at least it was an ally. Sorry about this, but Temari said, Can I ask you to look after Gaara for a bit? The two shinobi named Etoro and Metoro walked across the steel frame with flighty grins on their faces. Furthermore, there was no more movement from the elevator, or any other killing intent in the surrounding. It looked like all any other assassin had been subdued by Baki and the rest. But, for these two to keep approaching Gaara anyway, that meant they were confident that theyd win. So youre the Konjiki Twins from Ishigakure, huh. Ive seen your faces in the Bingo Book. Heh, Etoro said, For the Kazekage-sama to know our names, that means weve become really famous, huh Metoro? Compared to his talkative elder brother, the younger brother Metoro seemed taciturn. Anyway, Gaara understood that the one wearing the gaudy earrings was the elder brother, and the silent one wearing the flashy ring was the younger brother. The twin shinobi frequently used their similar appearances as a factor in tricks. It would be good to assume there was another wide variety of factors used too. I have heard of you. Gaara said, The pair of cowardly runaway-nin who specialise in destroying buildings or merchant ships. Haha. Well, we dont lose to you when it comes to the number of people weve killed. Be they tankers or buildings, weve destroyed countless numbers of them. Etoro smirked broadly as he touched his earring. But then, you know, we dont kill people like you do, Gaara of the Sand Waterfall*. ! Weve heard of you too. Were more or less from the same class, you know. We never got the chance to meet face to face since we became chuunin a little while before the Konoha Crush at the chuunin exams, but you were so famousSungakaures bloodthirsty devil. You killed anyone you didnt likeyou killed anyone who stood in front of youyou didnt care whether they were an enemy or an ally. Well, compared to you, us brothers kill people with our own intentions, so were not totally the same! Behind him, Hakuto was trembling from fear. She wasnt just afraid of the two in front of them. She was afraid of him, too. In that moment, Gaara understood. The things he had done back when he wasnt loved by anyone, back when he thought love was worthless. He understood the weight of those crimes now. In the same way that the love he received would never disappear, the crimes he had committed would never disappear either. Ever. Your boasting ends here. Gaara said. Oh, whats this? Did my words hit somewhere where it hurt, Kazekage-sama? He couldnt say it didnt hurt, but Gaara wasnt one for idle chatter or debates. Hed only been talking all this while because hed been buying time. Sand Binding Coffin! The sand that had been lurking at the feet of his enemies now surged up, swallowing the two in one swift movement. ! But, there was no response. So they were bunshin! Bunshin were an old trick, but what made the move brilliant was that they had combined the bunshin with a genjutsu. But, when Gaara realised what theyd done, he spread out the sand he was going to use for the coffin, and used it as a sensor instead. Spreading out his chakra-infused sand over a large area allowed him to verify where there were moving objects. He couldnt identify what was moving, but in this case, whatever was moving would be the enemy. Right above, huh. Right overhead. The brothers Etoro and Metoro had taken a position where they were standing on top of each other above Gaara, the sun hitting their backs. Lets get to it! The elder brother used lava release to expand a ring of fire, and the younger used steel release to form a steel ball. Well let you take a glimpse at it! The killing method of us Konjiki Twins! Even if they had created a giant steel lump of some kind, Gaara didnt think it would breach his absolute defence. However, the person the twins were aiming at was Hakuto. It was a very see-through move, but Gaara had no choice but to react. If the Kazekage lost his partner for marriage, his authority would decrease. No, that wasnt it. That wasnt the problem. That was just his official stance. The truth was that even if Hakuto had been the unknown wife of some villager, or even if she hadnt been a woman, Gaara still wouldve protected her. If someone without the power to fight wanted Gaaras protection, then they were already within the definition of those he would protect. Im relying on you! Gaara thought, and his sand raised into a giant wall, forming a shield around both him and Hakuto. So you went with that option after all! Etoro said. Its a bit late to be acting like a hero now! The huge steel projectile was flung through the ring of fire, hurtling towards them. Its speed wasnt as fast as Gaara had expected- for example, like the supersonic kunai from a while earlier. His shield would be more than enough for this kind of speed. The mass of the projectile as well, it can be easily withstood! Those were the facts. Impact! The projectile had hit against the shield of sand, and stopped. The chakra-laden sand shield repaired itself far faster than it was pierced. In the past, hed even used his sand shield to cover the entire village when they were being bombed. Gaara could confidently say that his shield could stop even one or two tonnes of boulder. But. Gaara-sama, danger! !! Hakutos warning allowed Gaara to react one second faster. The projectile had changed shape. Noits melted?! It was the effect of the Lava Release. When the steel ball was flung through the circle of fire, fire had been sealed inside it, and that lava release flame had exploded. The energy of the exploding fire inside the steel ball had released in a spiralling shape. The high pressure caused by the shock wave of that had melted the steel ball to a liquid, and, at the moment of impact, steel liquid had spurted past the area of impact on the sand shield. And the same thing happened with the shockwave. The steel ball had acted like a barrel head that had concentrated the shock wave onto that single pierced point in the sand shield. When such a thing happens, what do you think will be the result? Take cover!! Gaara raised his sand. But, the flame of the lava release that was being concentrated on that one point had great power, and it was drilling through. Gah! The flame pierced through his sand shield, and the sand collapsed, scattering to their surroundings. They didnt receive a direct hit. But, the storm of flame covered Gaara and Hakuto. Wind Release, Multi-layered Gale! Thanks to the wall of multiple layers of vacuum that stacked on top of each other like a mille feuille, they barely avoided a direct hit from the scorching attack. There was a burning pain in Gaaras upper right arm. It had been a while. Pain always did teach him a lesson. I hadnt intended to underestimate their attack, but! Hahaha! How was that now, how was that? Do you understand why we brothers are so famous now? Etoros scornful sounds were echoing on the other sound of the storm of dust. Indeed. The ninjutsu you use, its really overkill. Its a ridiculously exaggerated jutsu just to kill one person. Gaara said. Theres no body of mass it cant break, you know. And for you, this had the same value as a castle. Of course it did. Naturally, Gaara still had many options that would let him escape this situation. But, the problem was Hakuto getting hurt while he carried out those options. That was the one thing he couldnt allow to happen. Just a second would be enough, if I just had something to distract them! Hed expended too much chakra on their current defense. It was difficult to move for an aggressive attack when his opponents were two-on-one and both with jounin chakra. It wasnt a problem of winning. It was a problem of how to win. If youre relying on your group of guards, theyre not gonna come Metoro said. There are about 20 very skilled people keeping them company. My group wouldnt even lose to the Akatsuki. Lining their shinobi up with the Akatsuki was probably Etoros exaggerating, but looking at the brothers skill, there was no mistake that they were both very talented. Baki aside, if you compared the brothers to their chuunin subordinates, it would be sufficient to say theyd be evenly matched. And there wasnt a doubt that these two had an assassins large war potential. When their two kekkei genkai were combined, they could use it as a sort of pseudo-kekkei touta. You couldnt even dream up matching that sort of ability. I cant rely on the reinforcements. I suppose I should make them suffer a hit, even if its just one. It wasnt desperation or anything like that. All shinobi are realists. He had decided that his reinforcements werent going to cut it. And the largest factor for his victory here, was making sure he protected Hakuto. Hed sworn that he would. Doing anything that went back on his word wouldnt be his ninja way or anything worth mentioning. At that moment. A single shuriken ripped through the air and rushed towards Metoro. It was a houshuriken**, a kind of iron rod with no blades around it. Its cutting abilities were less, but thanks to its weight, if it was a direct hit, it could even bring down a horse. Metoro, who had reached out to brush away the houshirken with his hand, hadnt fully appreciated the weight of the weapon. It couldnt break the chakra-laden bone, but, thanks to its heavy weight, the houshuriken did cause Metoros arm to go slightly numb. It doesnt matter who threw the weapon. He believed it was an ally. Whatever will do! If he let this pass, he wouldnt get another chance. Wolf Corner Sand Castle!*** Sand began to swirl around in a vortex that enclosed his surroundings. Sand that had scattered from the previous attack was included as well. He hadnt just been recieving the attack when his sand scattered. He had deliberately let the sand scatter as a preparation for his counterattack Hed just needed one second, one moment of time to make his move come before his opponents. In the middle of the whirling sand, several eyes suddenly popped open. Every single one of those eyes were connected to Gaaras own optic nerve. If it was a normal person, the huge surges of information coming in from those eyes wouldve made them go insane, but Gaara could take it. Everything that was seen within the sand was immediately known to Gaara. There was a certain tranquility in this action. His tranquility was because Gaaras mothers soul resided in his sand. Her chakra operated the sand with her own will, separate from his own. Gaara, who was connected to that sand, felt tired, but not pained, and that was proof that his mother was supporting his decision to protect others. And that proof allowed Gaara to withstand the burden of having 10 or so fields of vision at once. There you are! Gaaras technique lived up to its name, and Metoro and Etoro were covered by a hail of sand bullets from all sides. Were in trouble, Metoro! The younger brother raised a steel shield to ward off the sand bullets. But, the attack couldnt be stopped with just that. After all, the sand bullets that Gaara had created attacked the enemy from all sides. He wasnt just randomly firing them either. He was firing them in synch with what his vision could see, and thats to that, the two were enwrapped in a war barrier of sand. Etoro and Metoro had their hands full with just barely avoiding taking a direct hit to a vital spot. I am here to give assistance. A voice said, and a figure unfamiliar to Gaaras eyes alighted next to him. She was a woman. The kunoichi was slim figured like Hakuto, in a way that reminded Gaara of a sharp crescent moon. If you excluded the ill-matchingly thick glasses she wore, you could easily call her beauty first class. Thats He remembered her. She was the kunoichi he had seen escorting Hakuto. He had the sort of impression that he mightve seen her somewhere before, but he hadnt thought there was anything to it other than the fact that she resembled Hakuto. Either way, now wasnt the time to think about it. Ive been sent here to help by Temari-sama. She said. You really helped out. He didnt ask how Temari had known where they were. He knew that either way it had been because shed been worried about him. I am Shijima of the Houki tribe. the kunoichi said. Houshuriken had appeared like a sleight of hand trick, eight of them held in between her ten fingers. She struck with all eight of them at the same time. It was fine to use the word throw for a rough barrage of shuriken, but that terminology couldnt strictly be used for this weapon. For a houshuriken, strictly speaking, one would use the word struck. For houshuriken, one needed to concentrate on one point on their target and move swiftly with energy to strike them and bring them down. It was a weapon that required killing intent, different from things like shuriken or smoke bombs. The kunoichi who had introduced herself as Shijima unmistakably struck with all her houshuriken, brimming with killing intent. All eight of her weapons flew like meteors towards Etoro. Dont look look down on me, dont underestimate me! Etoro looked angry. Using mere steel things like this! Etoros flame melted the houshuriken. ! Feeling a change in the atmosphere, Gaara gathered the wind around him. It was just as he expected. Wh-what is this?! The eight houshuriken had exploded. Their scattered fragments had pierced into Etoros entire body, and blood gruesomely spurted out of him. So it was compressed air! Shes a wind release user who shoots houshuriken with large amounts of compressed air inside. If the houshuriken get destroyed by the lava release, then the compressed air inside breaks out, and the fragments of the houshuriken burst apart and take down the opponent! Brother! The silent Metoro gave a flustered yell. Gaara wasnt one to overlook openings in ones guard. Where are you looking? Gaara asked. Im here. Dont take your eyes off your target, you scum. !! Gaaras storm of sand turned into a giant blade. It stretched and slipped past Metoros steel shield like a giant snake, slicing Metoros body. MEOTOROOOO! Etoro wailed, crying tears of blood. Metoros body fell off the ledge of the building. He fell from a height that was almost as tall as a skyscraper. On top of that, Gaaras attack had sliced clean through his vitals. He had no hope of being saved. AHHHHHHH! MURDERER, YOU MURDERER! Etoro used up his chakra, firing countless flaming bullets. He was no longer the cool-headed assassin who had come to kill Gaara. He was a resentful elder brother whose younger sibling had been snatched away. You really have a selfish way of thinking. Gaara said. The brother who had lost his younger sibling soon ran out of flaming bullets. He was no longer any match for Gaaras absolute defence. While protecting himself and Hokuto, Gaara attacked with his sand. The buildings that you scum destroyed, and the ships that you sunk, they all had people in them as well. Gaara said. But you didnt even consider that. That is your crime. AH- AHHHHH- MO- MONSTEC A huge lump of Gaaras sand swallowed the egotistical terrorist whole. It wasnt surprising that one would look at that spectacle and think it wasnt the work of a human being. Thats right. Grinding. Scraping. Grinding. It was a familiar feeling to him now. A persons life got smudged into sand, and disappeared. You, and me. Were the monsters called shinobi. Murderers. Crack. Crack. Crack. The thing that used to be Etoro, or maybe Metoro, was no longer moving. But were supposed to open our eyes to thatto live while controlling our power. Somebody who cant do that isnt even a shinobi. The body was gone. There wasnt even a trace. For Gaara, it was an everyday occurrence. Gaara-sama! The first thing Hakuto did when she rushed over to him was take out a beautiful small silk wrapper from the sleeve of her kimono, and move towards Gaara to use it as a make-do bandage for his arm. Im so sorryyou were shielding me and Hakutos eyes were wet. At least let me give you medical care. No, this kind of a wound isnt a problem, Gaara said, You dont need to trouble your hands with it That wont do! Hakuto looked up with her wet eyes to give Gaara a glare. When were in the middle of a battle, I will act according to the Kazekages orders. But, the fight is over now, so please listen to what the medical-nin is saying. If a burn is allowed to stay unclean, we dont know what kind of bacteria could get into it. A- alright Hakutos skill was excellent. She used wind release to cool down the burn, then rinsed it with a sterile liquid she carried with her, and then used her chakra to heal the cells, while rolling the make-do bandage around it. This silk wrapped is custom made so it can double as a bandage as well, Hakuto said. It aids your cells natural healing, so please dont unfasten it later. Im sorry. No, Hakuto gave a sweet, reassuring smile. Honestly speaking, Im still shaking in fear. But, if I do something like this that Ive practiced doing a lot, it helps me calm down. Me too. Eh? Im the same as well. Gaara said. If only during a time when youre using a practiced, familiar ninjutsu to protect someone, it helps make you forget your fear. Im- shinobi are all like that, arent they? Thinking that it was something Naruto would do, Gaara clumsily tried to give a smile. He saw his smiling face reflected in Hakutos pupils, and when he saw Hakuto smile back at him, Gaara felt a sense of accomplishment different from killing the enemy. Continuing the marriage meeting? Gaara felt bewildered by Bakis report. Continuing would be the customary reaction. Baki said. Baki was completely nonchalant, like nothing at all had happened. Gaara had heard that over half the attacking shinobi had been decapacitated by Baki. Even so, there wasnt so much as a drop of sweat on his face. As to be expected by one of his skill. If official business comes to halt thanks to terror, then many people will become active. Baki said. Its no different than dealing with yakuz threats. If you become faint-hearted once, then itll endlessly continue. Well, butIm fine, but Hakuto could get injured. Ohh? Baki gave a wide, sly grin. Does that mean you like her? No, thats But, you dont dislike her. Well, it is something like that. Baki laughed and clapped Gaara on the shoulder. Then thats all the more reason for the marriage meeting to continue. Now, I wanted to talk about Kankurou. Bakis eyes met Gaaras. They were the eyes of a vigilant man who lived in a world of schemes. Baki pulled out several photos. An unknown young shinobi was meeting with the counsellor Toujuurou. Toujuurou-dono? The shinobi hes meeting with is one of Kankurous subordinates, Maizuru. The past half-year or so, Kankurous been elevating in the eyes of young shinobi whore dissatisfied with you. As the eldest son of the Kazekage bloodline? Correct. There was no emotion interfering with Bakis words. His tone was that of one merely stating the facts. Compared to Gaara, who only orders them to face death from behind, the more worthy one is Kankurou, who risks his life alongside them in the frontlines.Thats what theyre saying. And they think Kankurou will turn betrayer? You could say theyre considering the possibility. Baki said. In the first place, this talk of a marriage meeting could have been a diversion for the sake of taking you out of the village. It was certainly a well-timed attack. If it wasnt from the outside, but the inside The foundation of Gaaras authority wasnt rock solid. He had been killed by the Akatsuki once, and during the time his survival had been unclear, his title of Kazekage had been immediately dropped. That was most likely because of the trauma the village had suffered when the previous Kazekage had been killed and replaced by Orochimaru. That was why Gaara had no choice but to keep investigating conspiracies. Even if, for example, he ended up having to deceive a dearly trusted ally. Gaara had entrusted the matters of security to Baki, and was heading back to his allocated room, when he ran into Hakuto in the hotel corridor. Her guard, Shijima, was with her. This has allsomehow turned into an unheard of situation, hasnt it? Gaara said. YesIve never seen circumstances like this either. My late father once said authority is like a staircase. Gaara said, and then felt surprised at himself for repeating something his father had said. The reason for his surprise was that while Gaara had believed his ill feelings towards his father had disappeared after their unexpected re-meeting in the Fourth Shinobi World War, he hadnt thought hed retained any specific memories of his father. A staircase? Hakuto asked. The farther you go up, the more youll be able to see, Gaara said. But, youll grow unable to see whats under your feet. I see. Hakuto smiled despite herself. It wasnt a discomforted smile at all. But Gaara-sama, you have plenty of people who are willing to look underneath for you, so I think thats something to be happy about. ! Gaara stared in wonder, and Hakuto bowed her goodbye and continued walking ahead in the corridor. He stared after her figure, stock still like a puppet Youre doing pretty well. Ah, Temari. His elder sisters characteristic silhouette hadnt changed at all when he came upon her at the corner of the hotel corridor, but when her figure came into sight, he saw that she was covered in bandages to the point that it felt painful to look at her. Are you alright now? Gaara asked. The Houkis medical-nin are really excellent. Temari said, Im fine. I see. Then, can I ask you a favour? Hmm? Is it about Hakuto? Yes. Gaara wasnt embarrassed or shy about it. He took out a letter. Im entrusting you with this. I see. Youve gotten to understand some things, havent you? Temaris lips curved into a smile. Does something amuse you? Youyouve taken after dad, too. I just had that sudden thought. Have I? You have. Temari looked up at the sky outside the corridor window. She looked up at the suffocating sky without a single cloud, and no rain. Suna wasnt blessed with trees or forests like the Country of Fire was. She was looking up at a sky that belonged to people who lived side by side with the desert. All three of us were born here, She said. As mom and dads kids. If Kankurou or I had just had the qualities necessary, then you wouldnt have had to be burdened with Shukaku Its alright, you know. Gaara said. Shukaku is a friend. Thank you. This time, Temaris smile wasnt sad. Honestly, I worried a little bit. Over whether it was okay if I was the only one of us who got to be happy. But, Im going to do as I like now. Please do so. Gaara knew very well just how much Temari had sacrificed herself up until now, to support Gaara and the village. She was already overdue to pursue her own happiness. Alright then, Temari said, Ill make sure to handle this letter well. Ill be relying on you. Gaara didnt say anything more than that, and went to rest in his allocated room. Sleeping whenever he felt capable of sleeping was a habit that had come into existence after his possession by Shukaku. Hakutos scent faintly lingered on the bandage around his arm, and something about it made Gaara remember something dearly missed from his past. The remote memory was likely from sometime after he was born. Maybe he was remembering his mother, worrying over his premature self? Or was he remembering his parental replacement, Yashamaru? Or he couldve been remembering something about Temari or Kankurou, or something about Naruto. Eventually, Gaara drifted off to sleep. Something bad has happened. Bakis voice interrupted Gaaras pleasant dream. The man had come inside his bedroom without permission and was standing by his bedside, so Gaara understood the urgency of the matter. He didnt expect to hear something small. Whats wrong?He asked shortly. Their relationship meant it was fine to keep things short when they talked. Hakuto has been kidnapped. ! For a moment, just one moment, Gaara cursed himself for being incapable. Then, he looked at the bandage wrapped around his arm, and changed his way of thinking. It wasnt the time to think like that. Both Gaara and Baki had thought the aim of the attack had been the Kazekage. Shinobi didnt need regret. What they needed was to endure, and carry on. Translator Notes: * Mixed up my kanji to write Gaara of the boiling Sand before lol, but nah, its Gaara of the sand waterfall XD ** Better shown than described. *** The kanji for this is ɰǽ which could literally mean both Sand Castle Wolf Corner and Sand Castle Wolf Horn. Corner seemed more fitting to me, since Gaara is pretty much throwing his opponents to the wolves in a corner Volume 5 - CH 4 Section Four - Sandstorm Dams and peoples hearts are the same in one sense. Once a certain limit is passed, they burst. But, the man had endured so many ridiculous things until now, so he thought that he would be forgiven for his bursting heart. The woman thought so as well. Howevera shinobi who has stopped enduring, is no shinobi. Then, what happens to a shinobi who is no longer a shinobi? Its obvious. They become prey. Youre going to go after Hakuto alone?! Baki couldnt hold back his bewilderment and confusion at Gaaras declaration. It was because that wasnt a normal thought for a leader to have. But, Gaara was resolutely saying that was what he was going to do. At the very least, take two of my subordinates with you. Baki said, But, thinking of it from an investigative perspective, there should be three teams. That wont do. The man who had once been Bakis subordinate shook his head without hesitation. If we do that, itll become a mission. We wouldnt have any way of leaving it off public record. !Baki finally understood what Gaaras aim was. If this matter got recorded, then it would get out to the public. Of course, this matter wouldnt be something thatd get out on the news on the tv or radio. It was a matter that would get leaked to Sunagakures upper brass. Even though there hadnt been an official marriage ceremony, yet, the young woman from the Houki tribe was the woman who was likely to become the Kazekages wife. And he hadnt been able to protect her. That would be a huge losing point, and a root for criticism. Obviously, Gaara wasnt the sort of small man who cared about his reputation. What Gaara was worried about was that if Sunagakures position swayed, then a milestone in the detente could also crumble. That was his only concern. If you called that someone who was obsessed with power Then say whatever you want. Thats what the resolute look on Gaaras eyes said. His face looked like that of a fully grown man. I understand. Baki said. Leave everything here to us. Well act as if nothing has happened. But only until morning. Yes. Ill bring Hakuto back by the time the suns out! Are you setting out? The woman who had been waiting for Gaara around the exit of the oasis was the one who asked that. She continued, If so, please let me come too. She look at the Kazekage with a strong and resolute gaze behind the thick lenses of her glasses. Im grateful for your intentions, but- Gaaras words were cut off by Shijimas look. This is my mission to begin with. Shijima said, Im supposed to go, since all the guards were taken down, and I received an injury. She showed him the wound on her side. She was talking about how the three chuunin of the Houki tribe who had been Hakutos guard envoy had fainted without a sound. Shijima, whod just barely held onto a bit of her consciousness, had been poisoned with a stinger, and defeated as well. Youll be a hindrance. Gaara said without pause, moving past her. But, Shijima grabbed onto his sleeve with a steel determination. The poison has been taken out, and there isnt any in my vital spots. She said. Ive received medical care, so I am capable of functioning. Gaara had intended to shake off and continue on his way, but for some reason, he found that he couldnt. Ah I see. He was remembering something. The voice of shinobi who was willing to throw away their own body, while deeply thinking of someone. He couldnt look into Shijimas eyes behind her thick glass lenses, but her words were full of sincerity. Theres a resemblance. Gaara said. Pardon? Theres an unconventional shinobi who says things the same way you do. Hes impossible to handle. The kind of person whod keep moving even if they died. I dont really understand what youre talking about. Im saying its become troublesome to send you away. Gaara said, and let out a small sigh. But, he didnt sigh because he felt discomfited. I see. The elder spoke when hed listened to the end of the report. He gave a very satisfied nod. The elder was Toujuurou. To sum it up, Toujuurou said, Everything is going according to plan. Yessir. The shinobi who was serving Toujuurou was one of Kankurous subordinates, Maizuru. Toujuurou liked it when young ones grovelled in front of him. Even more so when it was a good looking young man like Maizuru. It was because he was jealous. In the past, he had been a taijutsu user who was called the strongest in Sunagakure. And he hadnt just been taijutsu he excelled at. Be it wind release or summoning or genjutsu, he had stood above the rest in every sort of field. But more than anything, his lightly moving body had been his identity. But now he was old. His eyes could no longer capture the world as he wanted, his legs wouldnt let him fly, and his fingers couldnt move as he wanted them to. Even so, people still praised him as a superhuman, as a hero who was still hale in his old age. But, theyre wrong. That wasnt how it was. Getting old meant stepping down. Getting old meant slowly descending from his position at the top of the summit. Various shinobi surpassed his abilities in his old body. What did that mean? It means that unlike his younger self, he could no longer go stand at the top. Just that was unbearable. And that was why Toujuurou resented those with youth. Because while they werent as skilled as him now, one day, they were going to surpass him. Thats why Im going to continue proving that I am someone this village needs. Toujuurou gave Maizuru a few instructions, and then leaned against his sofa, satisfied. Night in the desert was cold. This was because the desert had no clouds or humidity, rivers or oceans or forests, that could serve as to conserve the heat gained from the sun shining all day. That was why despite daytime being so hot you could fry a sunny side up egg on a rock, the night was cold enough to give you frostbite. Its not that the Country of Fire couldnt conquer the Country of Wind. Its that we didnt want it. The daimyou of the Land of Fire tended to say that. The words werent unreasonable. Right now, Gaara and Shijima were determinedly running through that freezing cold desert. They werent flying with Gaaras sand because he was worried about them being detected. Running also helped them follow the kidnappers footprints more accurate, and it helped save up chakra. Look to the right of that sand dune. As expected, theyre heading towards the border with the Country of Fire. The shinobi whod defeated Hakuto had been one. You could tell by his footprints. Itd be best to think of him as very skilled. The enemy hadnt so much as had to catch his breath while bringing down Shijima and the other guards. It looked like he was skilled enough to erase his footprints with wind release while he was running as well. Its his bad luck that Im tracking him. Gaara muttered to himself, but not out of pride. The sand of the desert lived alongside Gaara like family. If it hadnt been Gaara who had been tracking the shinobi, then they definitely wouldve gotten away, with no one being able to track him across the large desert. The technique the shinobi had used for getting rid of his footprints was first class. As Gaara walked, the sand under his feet shifted with a rustling sound, and before you knew it, the grains had shifted away like theyd been sung to, revealing the footprints that had been covered. Sand didnt lie to Gaara. If hes heading towards the border, then hell be passing by the Houki tribes land. Shijima said. Ah, thats right. Your people were originally from the land of Fire, werent they? yes. Shijimas face darkened a little bit. Dont be bothered. Gaara said, Im not looking to rebuke you. Im just checking the facts. Youll be more familiar with the plot of the land. Is there any area ahead of here where someone would hide? Theres a place thats about an hour away with a shinobis stride. Its the ancient ruins of a town. Its a cursed plot of land, so neither runaways nor thieves go there. I see. There were many ruins of ancient towns lying idle in the desert. It made a person wonder whether those towns had been built a long time ago, before the desert was a desert. But, there were no definite details. The theory was that the ruins had been left from the time of the Sage of the Six Paths and Ootsutsuki Kaguya. Alright, lets take a break. Why, sir? We should be hurrying to return Hakuto-sama. In his head, Gaara went over the file on Hakuto that Baki had given him. Most of her missions had been infiltration, assassination, and guard duty. Since she was involved in the Hokuto tribes secret, internal affairs, her file didnt have many details, but Shes hasnt had much experience in mission on the outside. Gaara found a sand dune that looked like it would be good for resting, and, laying out a piece of cloth, sat down. Take a break. He said. Your body temperature has fallen lower than youd think. But- Sit. This is an order from the Kazekage. Gaara didnt like having to use his authority, but managing to bring Hakuto back was the most important thing. Understood. Shijima sat down slowly, but a little reservedly, by Gaaras side. It will be good for you. Gaara said. He took out a portable stove, and hung a small kettle over the fire. He added water from the canteen, sugar cubes, mint leaves, and tea leaves. While waiting for the kettle to let out the pleasant sounds to show that it was ready, Gaara looked up at the stars. He didnt particularly like or dislike stars. Stars were indispensable tools for confirming your location in the landmark-less desert by looking up to observe their position. That was why shinobi of the desert like Gaara habitually looked up at to watch the stars. The Country of Winds sky was vast without end. At ground level in the desert, there were clouds of dust and dirt, but the sky was clear and transparent. It was because there werent any city lights, or any clouds to block the view. Stars were like grains of sand caught in the sky. They were cold, didnt give off any heat to warm you, and just simply hung there, beautifully, without dirt. Compared to that, us humans who keep fighting each other are the dirty ones. The tea in the kettle had come to a boil. Gaara poured the brewed tea into some portable tea cups from a height. He was doing so to make sure the dust stayed in the bottom of the kettles foam. If he didnt pour it from a height, the tea would taste powdery. You had to drink tea without the dust from the leaves. Drink this. Gaara said, Warm up your body. Yes sir. When he passed the teacup to her, Gaaras fingers briefly brushed against Shijimas. They really look alike. The stars gave enough light for him to see that, excluding her thick glasses, Shijima looked incredibly similar to Hakuto. Theyre not just from the same tribe. Gaara concluded, but didnt assume any more than that. His own family had been complex, and hed gained wounds because of that, so Gaara didnt like asking about the family matters of others that didnt have anything to do with him. Its warm. Shijimas glasses had fogged up a little from the teas steam, and her voice sounded like she was comforted by the tea. As it should be, Gaara said, taking a sip too. The tea tasted like sweet sugar, tea leaves and mint. It was a familiar taste that belonged to the desert. At night in the desert, humans body temperatures fall quickly, and they lose the sugar in their body quickly too. Whats more frightening is that it happens without us noticing. Without noticing? Had I been like that too? Nobody notices. Myself included. Gaara took one more sip of his tea. The desert isnt an environment where people can live. Thats why our survival instincts go out of control here. Ive seen many shinobi from foreign countries who became unable to feel hot or cold, and died on the side of the road. Even Gaara, who was protected by his Absolute Defence, wasnt an exception to that possibility. His absolute defence would repel any attack that came his way, but naturally, it wouldnt help him obtain victory. So that we dont die like this, its necessary to cope mechanically. You take a break every two hours. While resting, you drink sweet tea. If you can do that resolutely, the break will stop you from suffering, and help you cope. The wind unfurled, and the desert changed colours again. The shinobi who took Hakuto hasnt taken a break. But that kind of a forced march onwards wont last long. Soon, hell have to abruptly take a rest. Whats necessary for shinobi to continue enduring isnt idealism. Its skill. May I ask you one question? Shijima asked. She was gazing into her half empty cup of tea like her eyes were somewhere far away. What is it? Gaara asked. Why are you doing so much? For the dignity of Sunagakure. Gaara said. Because Im the Kazekage thats responsible for its future. Is that all that it is? Hakuto is important, of course. I have no intention of leaving her rescue to others. The order probably shouldve been switched so Hakuto came first, but Gaara was too serious of a man to let lies mix into his words. Why? Gaara asked. No. Its nothing. I see. Then, we should start going now. We should catch up with the shinobi. Gaara got up, gathering the tea leaves that had been left in the kettle into the small tea left in his cup, and then threw them with a series of exaggerated motions into the deserts wind. Is that some type of ninjutsu? Its a charm. Gaara said, with a very serious look on his face. A charm? My elder sister, Temari, taught it to me. Its something thats been handed down the Kazekage clan. Its an incantation that lets you borrow the power of the deserts spirits to save your lover. Is that so? A small, affectionate smile had passed over Shijimas face. Well then, I hope the spirits lend their power, and the wish is granted. Ill dedicate the little power I have as well. Ill be relying on you. The pairs shadows began to walk again. I never thought things could get to this state so quickly. Kankurou had returned to Sunagakure, and the look on his face at this moment was that of someone whod bitten a sour lemon. Kankurou-sama. Around twenty young shinobi had come to see him. Every single one of them had been brought up after the Fourth Shinobi World War, and raised under his care. You could call them innocent. They were all teenage boys and girls. Weve deliberated for a while, and in the end, weve decided that we cant go along with the current regime. Look at you guys pulling out such a big thing. Kankurou shook his head like they were joking, but all their eyes were serious. They really had pulled out something large, he thought. Under the pretty label of a detente, all that happens is that the budget is reduced, and we are no longer being given a place to work. We cant go along with the current regime, with Gaara-samas weak-hearted policies any longer! While were forced to live a harsh lifestyle, he goes out and has a flashy marriage meeting. We think that the one who should lead us is you, Kankurou-sama, the eldest son of the previous Kazekage! He could understand their feelings. The daimyou thought of Sunagakures shinobi as interchangeable tools. And response to the detente, they kept outsourcing their missions to other, cheaper villages so as to save on costs. But of course, it was only right that those who were entrusted with the citizens taxes thought carefully about how it was used. And, still, the agreement ever since ancient times was supposed to be that shinobi would protect the country, and the daimyou would supervise the country. Gaara wasnt incompetent. His younger brother was thinking of a path that would let the people of Sunagakure, and the Country of Wind, and everyone in the entire continent to live their lives well. And, step by step, he was walking towards that goal. But, he couldnt please everyone with that. Gaaras chosen road was that of peace. It wasnt the prosper of Suna only. If another shinobi world war began, and Suna defeated other villages and took over their abundant and fertile land, then, yes, that might have compensated and rewarded the shinobi, just as the young shinobi said. But, they would be prospering on top of a mountain of corpses, and they would have been achieving glory that was sustained by hatred. And furthermore, what would they do if they lost the war? If Sunagakure was knocked down once more, then this time around, they might not be able to get back up again. And that was why Gaara had chosen the road of peace. Not because of any idealisim, but because he had been thinking realistically for the good of his country. Cooperation with other villages wouldnt give immediate results, but eventually, thanks to those reciprocal relationships, Sunagakure would prosper like it never had before. Gaara had chosen this path thinking of that. Doesnt this mean, Kankurou said, That you guys are intending to kill Gaara? ! Unrest spread through all the young shinobi. Although none of them had personally witnessed the Fourth Shinobi World War, they all knew of Gaaras legendary fighting style. Gaara had gone through a fight on the level of gods with Ootsuki Kaguya and her family, as well as fighting the puppets sent from the moon. He was a Kazekage among Kazekage. Even now, when they spoke of a coup detat, all the young shinobis faith in Gaara was absolute. Thats- we have no intentions of doing that. Were just thinking that Gaara-sama could take the position of a counsellor, and Kankurou-sama could become the Kazekage. We just want to pull Gaara-sama away from the field of politics. I seeyou guys have been thinking about this. If the young shinobi did that, then it would be hard for external forces to see this as a coup. If the political changes in Suna were carried out in that way, then other villages wouldnt have a reason to lend assistance or intervene. Kankurou-sama! Sunagakure was a relatively poor village. Of course, there were even poorer villages. Kankurou thought the improvements that had come to Suna under Gaaras rule were incredibly great. However, when the young shinobi interacted with other villages, they realised that Suna was still poor in comparison. And thus, they began feeling resentment. For example, if you asked Kankurou or Temari, then theyd say compared to the time during the Konoha Crush, everyones daily lives now are seriously so much better. But, the young shinobi only knew now. Kankurou-sama! Kankurou-sama! Please, tell us your decision! Twenty pairs of earnest eyes pinned their gazes onto Kankurou. He had no choice but to give them an answer. Gaara felt like he was seeing a mass of grave stones lined up side by side. He could understand why even robbers didnt approach these ruins. The sand here was a beautiful pure white, to the point that you wondered if they werent the crystal remains of shattered bones. The concrete buildings that rose out of that sand had to be skyscrapers those old people had built. Even now, you could feel that people used to live here. Chairs that were no different now than they were then, metal pillars that had once been street lamps, awfully spacious roads, lightning trains* lying on top of rails with no one riding them, computers buried in the sand There was no way of knowing where the people who lived here had gone. There was only the moonlight and starlight shining down, and the heavy feeling of death. It was a dazzlingly white cemetery of sand. In the middle of that landscape, there was Hakuto. Next to her was an unknown shinobi. If you had to guess his age, he didnt look much older than Gaara. He had a medium build, but one that had obviously been disciplined, with shorn back black hair. He looked similar to Gaara. So youre the one who abducted Hakuto. Hakuto wasnt tied up, and she wasnt being carried. Whether he could still call her situation abduction was something Gaara hesitated over, but he had no other words to use. One man, and one woman. Youd think it was a certain sort of situation. However, there were words Gaara had to say because of where he stood. I am Shigezane of the Houki tribe. The man spoke without hesitation. He walked towards Gaara with a clear gaze in his eyes. His steps were firm on the sand, letting out thudding sounds. Ive heard of you, the master of Metal Mining. Its an honour if youve heard of my name at all. Shigezane replied. I would be opposed if I was poorly skilled in the technique handed down to me by the Fourth Kazekage. My father used to praise your skill. Gaara said. There were no lies in what he said. He hadnt met the man before, but Shigezane of the Houki was known as a man who used a unique ninjutsu to take out metal crystals from the earth below, a pro in mineral mining and fort destruction. Similar to the magnet release, the technique also allowed the user to take out gold dust from the ground. It had been taught to Shigezane by Gaaras father, whod been concentrating on the villages financial situation. How ironic. Gaaras jutsu had been influenced by his father as well, however it was mostly characterised by the ability to manipulate sand that hed been born with as a Jinchuuriki. The truth was that neither of the three sand siblings had inherited the Fourth Kazekages jutsu. That was why knowing the man in front of his eyes was his fathers disciple made strong, strange emotions rise inside Gaara. I dont know whos instigated you to do this, Gaara said, But what youre doing right now is being nothing more than a decoy. Do you really intend to uselessly die doing that sort of task? Im fully aware of Im doing. Shigezanes eyes were unwavering. Only people who intended to walk right into the arms of death had that look in their eyes. The look in his eyes was the same as Hakuto who stood next to him. And with that, Gaara understood. Gaara-sama! Shijima yelled, Ill start ahead of you! ! Shijima was running towards them. She clutched houshuriken in her hands and, while creating a feint kage bunshin, kicked against the crystal powder-like sand, leaping into the air. Shigezane! She yelled, You who kidnapped the Lady despite being part of the Houki tribe, take your punishment! Shijima?! Shigezane quickly made a seal. It was the water release. That was a technique unsuited for the desert, with few users. But, were also scarce of techniques that can deal with the water release. The sand beneath Gaara was shaking. Its from underneath! Gaara made a shield of sand, but he couldnt reach to protect Shijima. The attack was made of water. A column of underground water burst out of the ground beneath Shigezanes feet. It was a high-pressured water blade. Tunnels were full of combustible mine dust and gas, so such a technique was necessary for digging through bedrock without creating igniting sparks. But it was also a fact that if you took a direct hit from a water blade, it would cut clean through flesh and bone. Shijimas houshuriken were pulverized by Shigezanes water attack. The wind sealed inside her houshuriken burst and exploded but, while it did weaken the waters pressure, the water attack still had enough power to cut and scrape Shijimas skin and clothes. Tch! Gaara clicked his tongue, and started running. He didnt want to see the kunoichi whod come along to help him cruelly killed. The correct action to take in this situation was probably to sacrifice Shijima so he could witness Shigezanes technique in action and see through it, but that kind of a correct answer was a bullshit one. Gaara had never, not even once, been a man who lived for doing the correct thing. He was a man who lived for the sake of love. And love, love was holding out your hand for anyone at all, without expecting anything in return. That was why Gaara ran. Ill be taking your life! Shigazane sent out another geyser of water. But, thats too simple an attack. Gaara said. He turned his sand shield at an acute angle, and rather than receiving the attack, deflected it to the side. No matter how high-pressured of a water blade it was, if you gave an angle to its kinetic energy, then it lost its cutting efficiency. The white sand surrounding Gaara shifted, like a blooming flower. It almost looked like he was in the middle of a white rose. Another rush of water, and another, and another. The rushing water became a storm surrounding Gaara, but it was quickly soaked up by his sand and wind, and never managed to reach him. A long-distance fight had a high likelihood of endangering Hakuto. Hed be able to end things in close range combat, Gaara decided, and moved to close the distance between him and the enemy. At that moment, Hakuto, who had been doing nothing until now other than watching the fight with a sad look in her eyes, let out a shout: Gaara-sama, Shijima, run! Hakuto! For a single instant, Shigezane looked over his shoulder, just as surprised as the others. And with that instant, Gaara had time to get ready for the next attack. Shigezane had been making a new seal. You could feel that he was gathering large amount of chakra. A large attack, huh. Gaara instantly started preparing to defend himself. But then, with a low groan, the sand under Gaaras feet starting to swirl. Quicksand?! Quicksand was a phenomenon that occurred when sand had become full of water, and thanks to that water saturation, started behaving like a faux-liquid. His earlier water attacks had been a strategy to saturate the sand around me with water! Like a ship being dragged down under a giant whirlpool, in no time at all, Gaaras body had sunk all the way to his abdomen. If he didnt do something to save himself, he was going to be swallowed up whole by the quick sand. But, dealing with this kind of sand was tricky. He couldnt repel it with a shield of sand, because in this situation, the sand was his very enemy. The sand was being manipulated by Shigezanes chakra, so he couldnt regain full control of it either. Hes got methis whole plot of land was a trap! But, that didnt mean escape was impossible. The truth was that he was perfectly capable of escaping. He could regain control of a small amount of sand, wrap it around himself and fly out. But, Gaara didnt do that. It was because hed seen Shijima had been pulled into the midst of the quicksand as well. Shijima had been injured in the previous attack. It didnt look like she could escape. If she was dragged down into the sand, then she would inevitably die of suffocation. Even if Gaara defeated Shizegane, he wouldnt be able to reach her in time. Even Gaara wouldnt be able to find her quickly if she sunk into such a large area of sand. And so, Gaara used his sand to leap towards the sinking Shijima. Gaara-sama?! She cried, Why are you?! Dont speak. He said, grabbing her by the hands and pulling her to him. At the same time, he pulled a shield of sand all around them. It looks like we wont be able to escape in time with flight! Hold your breath. He said to Shijima, and the whirlpool of sand swallowed them both whole. Gaara had enclosed the both of them in a dome of his own sand, and as they sunk down into the darkness, he frantically tried to maintain the air. I understand. Kankurou said. He had come out of his careful deliberating to give a firm nod. Ahh! Kankurou-sama! Kankurou-sama! When me and the others installed Gaara as Kazekage, we didnt do it with any usual methods either, Kankurou said. You could say this is just a repetition of that, couldnt you? Thank you very much! Their jubilant voices cried. There was no turning back anymore. So, have you finished drawing up a specific plan? Of course. Kankurou looked at the protocol hed been handed, and inwardly sighed. It was the exact same type of plan to seize control of a city that was taught in textbooks. It covered the main points, but there was no imagination. More precisely, there was nothing accounting for surprise developments. Developments like, say, Uzumaki Naruto. Kankurou altered a few things with a red pen, and handed the protocol back. I got it. He said. But, promise me this. No blood will be spilled. If any blood is spilled, there will be retribution. Until the very end, this is going to be a peaceful operation to suppress the upper brass, and take Gaaras position. Yessir! Who drew up this plan? Kankurou asked. I did. Maizuru stepped forwards, looking proud. His cheeks were red. I see. Kankurou said. Ive understood all your feelings well. Youre not going to do anything bad, will you? In the middle of the second round of their cheering, Kankurou looked up at the ceiling, searching for a sky he wouldnt be able to see. He couldnt return to those peaceful, easy days anymore. . . . Darkness. . . . Deep darkness. Something thick and red was spreading around him. Blood. The smell of blood had always been surrounding the young Gaara. Whyam I different from everyone? He had been born as a Jinchuuriki. He had been the child of the Kazekage, but even though that person was his father, he had tried to have Gaara assassinated. And so, Gaara didnt know any other way of interacting with people besides hurting them. He wondered how many people he had killed. There were people hed killed just because he didnt like them, and there were people hed killed en-route to a mission. His uncle Yashamaru had been like a parent to him, but then he had become an assassin, and Gaara had killed him. He had killed others like him too. Gaara couldnt judge between good and evil. He justkilled. He killed and killed and killed, and built up a literal pile of bodies in streams of blood. He thought thathad been loving himself. When Gaara woke up, he saw the face of a beautiful woman in front of his eyes. Hakuto? Have you woken up, Gaara-sama? Shijima was the one who was nursing him. Its you, Shijima. I apologise. Mixing up the face of one woman with another could be taken as insincerity. Even Gaara, as ignorant of the ways of the world as he was, knew that. No, its fine Shijima said. You regaining your consciousness is more important than anything else. It looked like hed used up a surprising amount of chakra. His body felt very heavy. Where are we? It looks like an underground cavern. Shijima said. It seems the sand has streamed down to the cavern where the underground water came from. Gaaras eyes finally adjusted to the darkness. Shijima had an emergency light stick in her hand, and he could see the shapes of ancient buildings surrounding them in the glow it gave off. He couldnt see the sky. It looked like theyd been dragged down somewhere very deep. How much time has passed? Around three hours. I see. Gaara adjusted his breathing, and began to wait for his chakra to restore. Hakuto hadnt looked injured. She likely wouldnt be killed straight away, right? There was still time until dawn. He had to stay calm. Shijima spoke, May I ask you something? If its something I can answer. Gaara said. Why did you save me? Shijima was genuinely puzzled. She had probably expected him to abandon her back there. She wouldnt have gotten sad about it either. Thats what shinobi were like, after all. First, there was the mission, and then, there was yourself. It was natural to think that way. No reason. Gaara said. No reason?! Shijima exclaimed. You saved me by abandoning not only the Lady intended to be your wife, but your own well-beingC there isnt any merit in that! Im just a shinobi-! Oi. Gaara felt a little irritation rise in him at those words. Dont speak as if the value of life changes according to the person in question. Eh? No matter whose life it is, the value of it is the same as any other. Not to mention, if youre a citizen of Sunagakure, then youre part of my family. Gaara himself didnt understand why he felt so angry. Certainly, there are times when a higher-up has to order his subordinates to die, but thats while hoping to the very last moment that they have a possibility of living. Facing certain death is different from suicide, and entrusting someone you believe in with a difficult mission is different from standing by and watching them die. I understand that. Shijima said, But, this was a fight with your honour on the line. If it comes to light that you let the woman you were going to marry be snatched away- I know. The colleagues who think poorly of me will use this for their propaganda -no, they probably plotted this for that purpose to begin with. Then why? Because I I wanted to save you. Gaara turned so he could meet Shijimas eyes through her glasses. A long time ago, in the middle of the fighting during the Konoha Crush, I met a man. Uzumaki Naruto. He was an incredibly strange shinobi. That legendary? His techniques, and his knowledge were both awful.Gaara said, Different from me, allowed to live like a human being despite being a jinchuurikiI thought he was a complete idiot. He had still been young, back then. It was a memory from the chuunin exams. At that time, Gaara had been sent to participate in the chuunin exams as a spy to crush the village of Konohagakure from within. But Gaara said, That Naruto came to fight me face to face. What it meant to live, how much merit there was in painand what it meant to love someone, those are all things that he taught me. It was a very precious memory. And it hadnt just been Naruto. Rock Lee. Haruno Sakura. Nara Shikamaru, who would eventually become his brother-in-law. Temari and Kankurou, who had supported him even when they were afraid of him. Everyone had been so young. I met him, and I learnt how to love a world beyond myselfAnd, I wanted to one day love someone the way my mother and brother and sister had loved me. The reason I was able to think like thatwas because Naruto existed. A light that had illuminated that deep, eternal darkness. That light had been Naruto. There was a dream that Gaara still remembered to this very moment. The dream he had seen in the middle of the Infinite Tsukuyomi. His father, mother, and Yashamaru had been there. He had been there, young and unstained with blood. And there was also Naruto, his friend. Curiously, he hadnt seen any things like a lover, or a high status, or glory as a shinobi. He had just felt terribly, terribly happy. Gaara didnt regret throwing away that dream. He believed that living as they did now, not in dream, but in reality, was the future that they had picked for themselves. But, the one who had made it so Gaaras dream was so blissful had been Naruto. If he hadnt met Naruto, he wouldnt have been able experience that genjutsu with the bliss of friendship. Plus, it was a certain fact that right now, Gaara really did have friends and family by his side. Naruto had nothing to gain from what he did. It wouldve been good if hed killed a hateful enemy like me. But, he didnt. Thats why Gaara gave a wry smile. I thought I wanted to try and do something illogical too. When he said it out loud, it certainly sounded silly. But, it also sounded strangely refreshing. Something illogical? Shijima asked. Yes. Like the wind that crosses the desert. Not restricting anything, and loving everyonethe truth is, I thought that I wanted to try living in that manner. yes, I see. Shijima nodded, her eyes looking like she was looking at something very far away. But, I cant really do it. Gaara said, I have too many things I cant throw away, and far too many things I have to protect. You are the Kazekage, after all. Shijima said. She smiled. Shijimas smile was different from Hakuto or Temaris. For a moment, Gaara vaguely felt like it resembled his mothers smile which hed seen so long ago. Then he wondered whether this wasnt the mother complex that Temari talked about. Im like that as well. Shijima said. She lifted a finger, tracing the edges of her glasses. I. Shijima took off her glasses. Her eyes were closed. She looked just like Hakuto, but, Shijimas smiling face it was filled with much more sadness. I sacrificed myself, Shijima said. For the sake of researching how to replicate the secret Sharingan of Konoha. Was it Orochimaru? Yes. Orochimaru was a legendary shinobi of Konoha who had fallen onto an evil path. He had killed Sunagakures Kazekage and pretended to be him for a period of time, while carrying out awful experiments. The details of what had happened back then hadnt been clarified to this day, but to think that one of those test subjects had been right next to him. The experiment ended in failureand I put a seal on my own eyes. Shijima said, I had to, because I didnt have the jutsu to restrain the Eye Technique. And I entrusted the matter of becoming the clan successor to my little sister, Hakuto. Shijima put her thick, bulky glasses back on again. So that was the reason. Now Gaara understood why Shijima wore those glasses so unsuited for the battlefield. They were a restraining tool used to curb the unrestrainable doujutsu. Whydid you tell me that? Gaara asked. Even if they were from the same village, one should never carelessly reveal details about their own jutsu. That was an iron-clad rule of shinobi. Because revealing the secrets of your own jutsu to someone was no different than entrusting that person with your life. I, toowanted to try doing something a little illogical. Shijima said, smoothly standing up. Is that bad? Her figure was dimly illuminated by feeble light. She looked terribly beautiful. No, Gaara stood up too, Its not bad at all. We can find the path to getting out of this cavern with wind release. Shijima said, Ill guide us out. Ill be relying on you. Gaara said, I want to conserve as much chakra as possible. His fatigue had gone somewhere very far away. It was time to continue their pursuit. Extra Translator Notes: * This puzzle me quite a bit initially, because the kanji literally says thunder/lightening-car but theres no such kanji used to refer cars in rl!japan, so I initially just went with a verbatim translation. Later though, I figured it out. Train in Japanese is electric car. Electricity in the nardyverse is powered by lightning. Thus lightning car = electric car = lightning train lol, which is the same as an electric train in the real world. Volume 5 - CH 5 Section Five - Chance Meeting Every thing in this world is part of a pair. Man and woman, night and day, yin and yang, shadow and light. The, there are beings that live in the space between those pairs. Those beings are shinobi. Gaara and Shijima found Hakuto and Shigezane near the border of the Country of Fire, in a region where the desert came to an end. Rather, prairie would be a more accurate word than desert. There were short trees growing here and there, a telling sign that this area was blessed with rain. It might have been a dreary sight for people from other countries, but for those who were born in the desert like Gaara and the others, anywhere that simply had rainfall was like a paradise. Over the horizon, you could faintly see a dark green forest. In short, that meant the people who lived there were blessed with plenty of water, and didnt hate the sun as if it was a red hot demon. Shigezane and Hakuto were holding each others hands, staring at the approaching sunrise over the horizon. It was almost like they were looking a hopeful future that lay ahead of that sunrise. Should I just turn a blind eye? Just for a moment, that thought entered Gaaras head. But, at the end of the day, Gaara was Sunagakures leader. And he couldnt stop being their leader. Shigezane. We will have you return Lady Hakuto. Gaara pulled the injured and exhausted Shijima slightly behind him and called out from behind the pair, severing all his hesitation. He refrained from making a surprise attack out of respect for Hakuto. Gaara-sama?! Hakutos voice was bewildered and also had traces of a guilty conscience. Hakuto, get back. Shigezane said, stepping forwards. His face didnt look as composed as it did last time. As it should be. They had run all the way to the country border without any breaks. And then thered been the quicksand that had covered the ruins. His body couldnt put up with all that. Gaara didnt see him as unsightly. A shinobi who had lead around the Kazekage by the nose couldnt be seen like that. All Gaara thought of was how much he regretted not being able to find his talent earlier. You have magnificent skills. As the Kazekage, I feel very proud of you. You dont have any intention to return to Sunagakure? He wasnt pretending to aid the enemy to move along his own agenda. Those were Gaaras true feelings. From the bottom of his heart, he thought Shigezanes talent was precious. And even more so when Gaara saw the resolute look in Shigezanes eyes, and understood he wasnt intending to kill a target for money like the group of assassins from before. Im honoured to hear that. Shigezane said, and gathered water release shuriken inside the palm of his hand. So that was his answer. Well, it would be, Gaara thought. Shigezane was that kind of a man, and that was why things had come to this. Gaara-sama! Hakuto was walking towards them, looking like she couldnt stand this any longer. Hakuto?! Gaara-sama, please, somehow, stop what youre doing! Hakutos eyes looked desperate. Like Naruto, back on that day. Shigezane is myC You dont have to say it. Gaara said, cutting Hakuto off. Even Gaara understood that the relationship between Hakuto and Shigezane was that of a man and woman. The plot may have been drawn up by someone else, but the two who were caught up in that scheme were in a relationship. In the same way that Gaara had his own life, Hakuto had hers too. You couldnt learn about a persons life in just one or two days of acquaintance. Shijima and the rest werent attacked at full force. And Shijima wasnt killed. Your footprints in the sand as you followed Shigezane were neat and calm. All of those signs point to the fact that you knew you were going to be to be kidnapped. Gaara had decided to play the role of the bad guy. I dont know who instigated you, but they moved things along until there was a talk of a marriage meeting. You were to take on the role of my betrothed in the public eye, and then elope. It would be a great blow against the Kazekages authority. Hakuto, who had never stepped out of Houki tribes lands, was going to run away with the Houki tribes Shigezane and disappear. Thats the general gist of it, isnt it? Why would come after her while knowing all that? Shijima was the one who asked that question. I told you. Gaara told her, Im the Kazekage. I cant be anything other than that. Thats no different from how I couldnt do anything else other than act as a Lady of the Houki Tribe, Hakuto said. Her eyes were wet as she looked at Gaara. It wasnt a lie that she had cared about him. It was just that she cared about the man by her side, Shigezane, more. So I could leave the place I was born and raised in, so I could be free, I didnt have any chance other than being your marriage partner. I apologise for using you. But- Leave the apology. Gaara said, sand shifting out of his gourd. It was a signal that he was ready to fight. I have no thoughts of interfering with your romance. Gaara said, We never agreed to an engagement. It just publicly looked like we did. Im not someone with the right to tie you down. However The sand from Gaaras gourd morphed into a sword. I cannot turn a blind eye to shinobi who abandon their village. He said, Shinobi who use their power without following the lawtheyll eventually harm more and more people. Gaara knew this for a fact, from his personal experience of fighting the terrorist Akatsuki. One single shinobi could destroy a fortress, a whole city, if they only felt like it. It was because that fact restricted them that Shinobi had come to coexist with society. No, they had no choice but to coexist. And that was why. Now Im coming for you! Gaara said. Come. Shigezane replied. The land under his feet was full of pebbles. His opponent could no longer make quicksand. However, Gaara couldnt afford to use large, eye-catching techniques either. It was because he couldnt afford this fight being noticed by the public. If he used flashy, wide-area attacks, then naturally it would raise unnecessarily alarm in the foreign shinobi in this region. In a nutshell, they were both equally handicapped A water blade pierced through the dark towards him. But Gaara had already understood everything about that technique. Its useless. He told Shigezane. Gaaras shield of sand deflected the attack completely, or absorbed it. No matter how much water you had, water wasnt superior to sand. It was the same as how an underground channel couldnt water the desert. Shigezanes storms of water attacks kept disappearing in front of Gaara. The sad look Hakuto had every time it happened did not pain him. Theres nothing that sand cannot do. Gaara said, closing the distance between him and his opponent. If he got in close, he should be able to put an end to this with taijutsu. He thickened his shield, moved forwards, and it was at that moment A particularly huge water javelin was launched towards him. Gaara twisted his body aside. ! A burning pain ran through his side. The water javelin that had broken through his sand shield had pierced through. I didnt think he was to this level! Shigezane wasnt the first person to have pierced Gaaras Absolute Defence. However, he could count the number of people who had managed to pierce through with such sharpness. Why!? Why could you avoid it?! It looked Shigezane had been very confident in that jutsu. His voice was confused. The reason those sorts of words could come out of Shigezanes mouth was that no matter how much of a master Metal Miner he was, he wasnt a soldier of his skill. That was the difference between the worlds Gaara and Shigezane lived in. It didnt mean that one way of life was better than the other, but it was a deciding factor when it came to survival of the fittest on the battlefield. It was Hakuto. Gaara said. Huh? I was looking at Hakutos eyes. What are you saying?! Shigezanes tone was coloured in confusion and jealousy. Well, that was natural. But, Gaara hadnt been looking at Hakutos eyes out of any lingering feelings or regret. Shinobi are those who will fight on the battlefield while noticing, observing and analysing every piece of information. The look on Hakutos eyes changed when you threw that last javelin. She looked like she was afraid of someones death. For her to feel that while she knew about my fighting style meant that she believed your jutsu, Shigezane, would defeat my Absolute Defence. So thats how you avoided a fatal wound! Shigezane looked markedly in awe. I am the Kazekage. Gaara said, The wind and sand that run over this desert cant be caught by anyone! Gaara stepped forward like a god of death that had taken on human form. Troops have been deployed to the main facility. I see. Toujuurou listened to Maizurus** report, and gave a satisfied laugh. Hed thought Kankurou mightve noticed something was up when he made alterations to the plan, but it didnt look like he had. How ironic, that the shinobi Gaara had trained and raised for rebuilding Suna would sweep the rug from under his feet. The sweet irony made Toujuurou very satisfied. CBut I, on the other hand, am not going to explain about how I broke through your shield! I wonder, Gaara said, avoiding another water javelin by sliding to the side. Since he knew the water javelin were being aimed at his body, all he had to do was make sure he wasnt anywhere expected. Gaaras level of taijutsu allowed him to do that. Of course, Shigezane was also throwing the water javelins while expecting that Gaara would avoid them in that manner. But, none of his throws ever hit the target. It was because thanks to his sand that hed stretched and laid out across the ground, Gaara could sense the movement of water underground before they burst above. If you knew where the attack was going to originate from, you could also make a rough guess as to where it could land. As long as he quickly evaded them while mixing in some feints, it would be fine. Gaara drew closer. Closer. Avoided a water javelin. Avoided another. Closer. He jumped back. The he drew forward again. Forwards, avoid, forwards, avoid avoid avoid, forwards, forwards, forwards, slide, leap, run, avoid, advance forwards again, jump back in avoidence, turn around, jump forwards, advance forwards, forwards, close, closer, deflect an attack, avoid, closer, closer, avoid, deflect! Gaara-sama, please stop! Hakuto yelled. He couldnt afford to stop. He shouldnt stop. He wasnt able to stop. For the sake of remaining himself, he couldnt bend his principles. Gaara swung a blade of sand down towards the man who was beloved to a woman hed once thought he wouldnt mind marrying. Gr, but! A stream of water burst out in a javelin shape from underneath Shigezanes feet, along with a shrill battle cry, If its at point blank range, then-! The water javelin split apart into several other javelins. He couldnt avoid them. But, Gaaras sand shield deflected every single one of those javelins. It was because this time, Gaara had used the magnet release he had inherited from his father. His shield had faint, sparkling bits of metal compromised in it, that had let it deflected the javelin. Gaara had known the secrets of his sand shield technique had been exposed. One of his countermeasures to make up for that weakness, was this: his fathers technique. He hadnt used it at all until now, but when he did, he used his fathers magnet release along with the sand his mother had given him to make his current shield. Wha-?! My principle is to act before I boast. Gaara said. A sword of sand stretched out of his shield, standing against the back of Shigezanes neck. Ive theorised as to how you managed to pierce through my shield, Gaara said, But I didnt have time to confirm it. Either way, the fact that you managed to break through is something praiseworthy. I take out hydrated calcium and volcanic rock from the underground water, and mix it with the water javelin. When it hits your sand, it changes the sand into concrete, and then I can break through your shield, Shigezane said, both pride and envy in his voice, Its a technique the Fouth Kazekage came up with, and yet you Is it a technique my father came up with to kill me? It is. In the end, he never used it since a more efficient solution than using the magnet release was found, but . Gaara no longer had any intention to condemn his father. The dangerous potential of a jinchuuriki was endless. It was natural to prepare a jutsu to stop one in case they went on a rampage. Flames were useful, but you had to prepare water, just in case a wildfire broke out. Gaara and the other jinchuuriki were like sentient flames. If it was the old me, it probably wouldve killed me. But you cant kill the current me with that.. Why? Shigezanes voice was so heartbroken, it sounded like he was wringing blood from his heart. Are you saying the Kazekage bloodline is special? Is the chakra of jinchuuriki and the chakra of us normal humans so different? Are you saying that no matter how hard we try, those of us with weak bloodlines have no right to be happy?! Blood has nothing to do with it. Gaaras voice was hot like sand, and cold like sand. It was true that in the shinobi world, there were many situations where bloodlines meant everything. The technique Gaara had just used to defeat Shigezanes technique, the metal release was one of those situations. The magnet release was a kekkai genkai hed inherited from his father, and if he hadnt had the genes for it, he wouldnt have been able to use it. It was using that kekkai genkai that Gaara had been able to change the nature of his sand and defend himself against the attack that would change his sand to cement. It wasnt something he could say hed mastered, but it was more than enough for when two clever tricks were facing off against each other. But then, take Konohas Haruno Sakura for example. She didnt come from an unusual bloodline, but her strength made her an outstoundingly great shinobi. In fact, there were a great number of normal people who, by polishing their techniques or with pure strength alone, had surpassed others. Gaara had seen many people who had relied only on their bloodline, and yet been unable to produce any real results. Siblings who were all excellent shinobi like Gaara, Temari and Kankurou were few in number. And it wasnt the result of luck, but their own hard work. And then, more than anything else Bloodlines are chains that tie down people like me or Hakuto. They arent a blessing. Gaara said, Shigezane, dont you already know that? Thats-! I never wanted this power. Gaara said, What I wanted was the power to be friends with someone as equals. What I wanted was the power to just spend time with my family. People like you, who werent born into the Kazekage line, who werent made jinchuurikifrom where Im standing, its you who feels like a special chosen one. He had honestly spoken from his heart. Gaara himself didnt understand why he ended up saying all that either. It was just that he thought it was common courtesy to fight someone honestly. Weve taken control of the communications department. The lightning train station* is under control. Dispatch. The Sixth Ninja Weapon Workshop has been taken over. Dispatch. Several monitors were placed around a dark room, showing the situation as the young shinobi led by Kankurou slowly took over important locations in Sunagakure. Things were progressing even faster than Toujuurou had expected. But, Toujuurou didnt attribute that to the excellence of the young shinobi. Instead, he was deliriously proud, thinking that it was all due to the plan that he had drawn up. Now, all thats left is! It could very well bethat normal people are the chosen ones. However, sacrifices are needed for happiness. Shijima said from behind him. Gaara could feel indications that she was getting ready to attack him. He wasnt surprised. As I thought, was the only thing that crossed his mind. Stop what youre doing. Gaara had known from the start that Shijima had helped Hakuto and the others escape. The guards hadnt been killed. And then Shijimas guidance had lead them to that trap of quicksand. If he looked, there was far more evidence to be found. But, more than anything, he had known the truth because Shijima was Hakutos elder sister. Gaara-sama, prepare yourself. Shijima said. You wont be able to beat me with your techniques. He told her. Thats certainly so. Shijima agreed. She dropped her houshuriken. They rolled across the earth with dry, rasping sounds. If its a jutsu I need, then I know which one. Shijima raised her hand to her glasses. ! Shigezane yelled, Shijma, dont do it! Thats- you cant do that, big sister! The sound of Hakuto and Shijmas voices had changed. It was very likely that Shijma was about to use a technique that would risk her life. No, not a technique. Something more basic that would put her life at risk The doujutsu! Shijima took off her glasses. Shijimas pretty, bare face was finally out in the open with nothing to obscure it. So that who she looked like. Gaara finally realised who Shijima so strongly resembled. She looked like Yashamaru. The man who had raised Gaara like a father would. The man Gaara had loved more than anyone else, and who had been ordered to kill him precisely because of that reason. Shijimas face looked just like Yashamarus had, back in that critical moment. It was full of the same hope, and resignation, and something else that Gaara still didnt understand. Her eyes were open. Those eyes werent a humans. They were a whirlpool of nothingness, that shined with seven prismatic colours. Her control over the doujutsu was disordered because of the artificial measures put in her chakra channels. It was a mark of her crime in unnaturally altering herself in the past to become something inhuman, similar to that of Orochimarus other subordinates, and Sasuke. My bodyits feverish! It was far stronger than hed expected. Gaara felt like his consciousness was being pulled out by the roots by that cavern of emptiness. Sand rolled around him. It was moving beyond the scope of Gaaras control. No, maybe it was even beyond the control of his mothers chakra, embedded within the sand. But, even still, Gaara didnt undo the sand blade he held at Shigezanes throat. If he let him go now, everything wouldve been for nothing. At this rate! Shijima said, My and Gaara-samas chakra will both go completely out of control, and well die from the strength of both our jutsu! That is my last power.! You could call it a sort of parting gift from Orochimaru, huh? Gaara replied. The activator of the jutsu, Shijima, looked like she was in far more pain than Gaara was. Gaara had already died once. He was used to physical pain. Physical pain wasnt what was frightening to him. Just sadness was. The seven colours of nihility reflected in Shijimas eyes looked like tears to Gaara. Do you intend to die for your sister? Gaara asked, his voice staying calm to the very end. It wasnt that he didnt feel pain. His whole body was enwrapped in pain, like all the meridians in his body were being ripped out, like his teeth were being pulled out without anaesthesia. He was desperately burdened with how his insides felt fevered, like he was about to explode with his own chakra. But, Gaara was the Kazekage. Even if they were runaway-nin, he couldnt forgive himself for doing something as unsightly as wailing in pain in front of his subordinates. If Ihadnt been taken in by Orochimarus cajoling Shijima answered, If mylittle sister hadnt been forced to become the clan head, then she wouldnt have been put in a position where she was faced with giving up on her love! So then why, Gaara asked, Didnt you kill me back in the cave? ! For one moment, the doujutsu became disturbed. It was natural that he would ask Shijima that question. At that time when Gaara had collapsed, Shijima mustve thought countless times about giving him a killing blow. While Gaaras defense operated even as he slept, if Shijima had activated her doujutsu, she wouldve been more than enough of an opponent for him even while he was awake. Even if she couldnt give him a fatal wound, she couldve injured him enough to make his pursuit impossible. There could only be one reason that she hadnt. Shijima had likely seen Gaara cry while he was asleep. If a young man risked his life to save you, and tears leaked out of his eyes while he lay unconscious in your arms, of course you couldnt kill him. Killing him wouldve been going against the last principle that Shijima believed in as a shinobi. That was why. Because thats my ninja way. Shijima answered. I see. Gaara was content with that answer. Other people may have called it grotesque, but for Gaara, the Shijima who had sacrificed her own body for a cause was very beautiful. The fact that someone as noble as that, as high minded as Naruto was, had been born in the village of Sunagakure made Gaara think that all his efforts as the Kazekage hadnt been in vain. Because in his village, there was a person who would sacrifice themself for someone else. Shinobi are no longer just machines who carry out missions. In that case, your principles shouldnt be twisted. Gaara rolled up the sand that he had laid out under Shijimas feet. It encased her body, restricting her. No way! Shijima gasped. Gaara turned towards the restrained Shijima, and stretched out his left hand. Ever since I was born, I have always lived fearing that Shukaku would take over my consciousness, and fought against it constantly. Compared to every other shinobi in the worldI have had the most practice in retaining my consciousness. A tiny glimpse of the large chakra that lay within Gaara had woken up. Shijima finally, truly understood what she had- who she had come up against in battle. In the same way the wind couldnt be tied down, the Kazekage would not be dominated into submission again. Never again. By anyone. This is goodbye. Gaaras blade of sand flashed out like a needle. Sunagakure village was silent as death. Nobody noticed the shinobi who had taken it over from the shadows. Now all that was left was for Kankurou to give the signal. Kankurou-sama. Amagi was muttering in Kankurous ear as if he couldnt bear staying silent anymore. Sir, is this truly what you want? What are you saying now? Kankurou asked, Didnt you have the same opinion as the others? I dont know anymore. Amagi lightly shook his head. Youre the one who taught me that shinobi must endure. It somehow feels that what were doing might be something that cant be undone. Kankurou wondered what he should say, but decided to just give a strained laugh. The things he was thinking about inside his head werent simple enough to be spoken out loud. It wasnt easy to say the things he thought in his head out loud. He didnt want to think that hed gotten so old that hed one-sidedly lecture someone when theyd finally stepped towards the right path by themselves. Its gonna be alright. Sir? Well, just leave it to me. Kankurou said. He swallowed down the words: leave it to Gaara. Uugh Blood had sprayed across the desert. Drip, drip, it fell, staining the parched desert floor. Gaarasama?! Hakuto was stunned too. It wasnt a surprise that she was. Gaara hadnt pierced Shijima with his blade of dand. He had pierced the small lump of sand that was behind her. It was from that lump that human blood was spraying out into the air. Whydid youknow I wasthere The person who crawled out of the sand and said that in a pained voice was none other than one of the siblings who had attacked the marriage meeting: Metoro. His whole body was covered in bandages and he was suffering from a life-threatening injury, but Metoro was still alive. Most likely, after that fall, he had pretended to die while following Gaara around the whole time in order to take his revenge and indict this scandal. I knew you were following me, Gaara said, I just didnt want you to know that I knew. Scattering sand during their break, as well as scattering the sand during his large techniques while fighting Shigezane, they were all for this purpose. Thanks to being able to sense things through his sand, Gaara had been able to roughly pinpoint Metoros location as he watched Gaara, Hakuto and the rest. And then just a while ago, Gaara had decided that rather than waiting for Metoro to launch a surprise attack, it would be better if he pierced him while pretending he was subject to Shijimas doujutsu. Was it Toujuurou who instigated you? Gaar asked. Metoros body seized up with a jolt. That was answer enough. The taciturn shinobi seemed to have finally realised that he had been the one who had been drawn into a trap. So, it was him after all, Gaara said. He intended to instigate Hakuto, draw me away from the village, make up a scandal and then premeditatedly kill me. Its just what an elder would think of. Ill takerevengefor my brother! Metoro kept persistently trying to move his body. He let out a scream when Gaaras sand enwrapped him. He was still under the influence of Shijimas doujutsu, so being in in control was hard. But, when it came to simply imploding the sand and crushing someone, it didnt require much effort. In one instant, Metoros body had disappeared without so much as a bone left behind. Ah, ahh After witnessing such an overwhelming sight right in front of their eyes, Shijima, and Hakuto and Shigezane too, had already lost their fighting spirit. This was what the Kazekage was. Hed taken on two jounin opponents, on top of that, he endured Shijimas doujutsu while injured, and in the midst of all that, he killed another hidden jounin. His talent, his strength, his fighting experience. He exceeded them in everything. Just who did we pick a fight with? As dawn approached in that moment, under the desert sky, Gaara was the exact embodiment of a god of death in human form. Gaara picked up Shijimas glasses from the dirty ground, wiped them, and put them back on her face. The sand restraining Shijima relaxed, and let her loose. Then, he turned back to Hakuto and Shijima. Gaara-sama Hakuto and Shijima werent attempting to hide their feelings anymore. They held hands, looking at Gaara with facial expressions that expected the worst. Sand slowly wrapped around the pair. Stop, please stop! Shijima threw herself to cling at Gaaras body, Its alreadythe winner of the battle is already clear. There isnt anyone watching, either. I told you, Shijima. Gaara replied, I cant turn a blind eye to runaway-nin. And Hakuto and Shigezane dont want to return to the village. And, more than anything, Gaara didnt want Hakuto to return to the village and become a caged bird again, much less be forced into becoming his wife. It wasnt because he thought she was a bad person. Rather, it was the opposite. It was because it was the opposite, that Gaara couldnt swallow the idea of forcing her back. People who are swallowed in my sandnot even a bone will be left of them. Gaara said, The Sand Waterfall Funeral sends people to the other side without even the slightest pain. His sand began to wrap around them but- Being straightforward, and never going back on our word. Thats our ninja way! That was true. Gaaras promise to protect Hakuto hadnt been a lie. Ah At that moment, Shijima clearly saw it: Hakuto was smiling. Her little sister was smiling like they she going to be released. It wasnt because shed given up. It was because she had faith. It was the same thing that had happened when she, Shijima, hadnt killed Gaara. Hakuto had seen that warm something inside Gaaras eyes. Those eyes that made people trust him. And so, that day, all Shijima had to do was see her off her little sister. The entire village of Sunagakure was now already under the control of Kankurous subordinates. Toujuurou was very, very satisfied with the reports streaming in from the monitors and communications systems. He was nodding to himself in satisfaction. Alright, and now, all thats leftMaizuru. Go and arrest Kankurou. Pardon? As expected, Maizuru looked surprised. Its obvious, isnt it? We cant let the leader of a Coup get away. Toujuurou said, Arrest him, and exile the rest of the members of the Kazekage clan. And then, after that, we just need to make you the Kazekage, and the reform will be complete. You tricked Kankurou-sama? Its nothing new for shinobi to use every trick up their sleeve. Sometimes, you have to trick your allies, too. Although, in this case, you couldnt really call me that guys allyEither way, this is a fitting stage for an old-fashioned puppeteer like him. Isnt it just? Suddenly, Maizurus body crumbled. His limbs, his neck, his abdomen, they all crumbled into pieces and fell to the floor along with his clothes. Wha-, Touujuurou stuttered, Wha- wha- what- Whats this about, you ask? A relaxed voice came out of the darkness. A shape was moving in the shadows. White face. Red markings. Kankurou. Im-impossible, Toujuurou was stunned. The monitors were clearly showing that Kankurou was taking control in the Kazekage office. But, the Kankurou in front of him wasnt a genjutsu. He wasnt supposed to be here. No matter how old he was, they shouldnt be able to trick a jounins eyes. Obviously, its not a genjutsu. Kankurou said. Puppets?! Bingo. Kankurou gave a sly, wide grin. Thanks to the reports about that group from the moon, I got a lot of new ideas. I used threads too thin to see with the human eye, and suckered you in with a long distance puppet manipulation technique. There never was a shinobi named Maizuru. You were having a ball talking to my puppet this whole time. Thanks to that, I was able to collect plenty of evidence and testimonies on you. A jutsu I dont knowyou say?! Toujuurou was backing away. He was feeling something he had forgotten about for a long time: fear. Th-then Gaara as well? Obviously, he knew about it from the start. Kankurou said, If he didnt how do you think I couldve gotten made such good fake videos? Fake!? Then, it is a ninjutsu? Its more science and technology than a ninjutsu. Though we do have to use lightning release to power it. Kankurou said, and then snapped his fingers with a theatrical flair. Amagi appeared from behind him, and restrained Toujuurou. As for your forces at the oasis, Kankurou continued, Temaris contacted me to let know that Bakis crushed them completely. In a word, I guess you could call this checkmate, huh? Times have changedis that what it is. Toujuurou heartbrokenly hung his head. He hadnt been able to admit it. Time had passed, and people had changed. Ninjutsu he didnt know had been created, shinobi he didnt know had been born. That was certainly because he was old. I wont resist. Toujuurou said, I understand it now. Understand what? That Sunagakure is heading out to meet a new future. I always kept looking back at the sight of the previous Kazekages back, so I never noticed how you were all growing behind me.Id intended to make Gaara the Kazekage and manipulate him but this is how everything turned outBut,you know, Toujuurou lifted his eyes sharply, fire burning within, One day, you too will feel the sting of times passing. One day, new shinobi are going to surpass you as well. Well you know, Kankurou clapped a hand on Amagis back, a big, proud grin on his face, Im really looking forward to that! Ten or so shinobi had collapsed around Bakis feet. They were all Toujuurous subordinates. Every single one of them had arrived with the intention of aiming for Gaaras life. And every single one of them had bowed down to the earth thanks to Bakis sword. To think that Gaara would even play dumb in front of me to pull of a trap He didnt feel the slightest bit angry about being left in the dark. Rather, he was happy. The era was really changing. Fourthit looks like my job is finally over. Baki started seriously considering the old offer people had repeatedly giving him to be inaugurated as a counsellor. Alright, the Konoha shinobi whod been staying in the shade of a rock came out into the open, Its over. Finally. Gaara replied. Shijima recognised the Konoha shinobis face too. Shed seen his photo in documents. Nara Shikamaru. He was the fiancee of Gaaras sister, Temari. It went without being said he was also the recipient of the letter that Gaara had entrusted to Temari. Good grief Shikamaru grumbled, You call people out to help you at every little thing. It looks like Ive gotten myself a troublesome little brother. Shikamaru scratched his forehead, his face so relaxed that youd never think he was an authority over at the Shinobi Union. Shikamaru had been the one to rescue Temari back at the battle at the venue of Gaaras marriage meeting. He had also received Gaaras letter from Temari, and started making preparations. It also went without being said that Gaaras letter had anticipated trouble and asked for his help. Youd been watching over my marriage meeting right from the start, hadnt you? Gaara replied, So that makes us even, elder brother. Tch Shikamaru mustve been holding himself back a lot during his hidden surveillance, because he took out a cigarette and started smoking. The runaway-nin Shigezane, attacked and killed Lady Hakuto. You Gaara, killed Shigezane in return, and mourned for the Ladys losswell, itll be sufficient if we keep the story like that. Your quick-thinking has been very helpful. Its a common story. Shikamaru said, exhaling. The white tobacco smoke drifted up into the morning sky. The minute I heard what was happening from Temari, I guessed something like this could be the cause. The Sand Waterfall Funeral doesnt leave anything, even bones, behind. That, along with your testimony about what you saw happen from where you were watching, brother, will make sure that nobody objects. Gaara said, And, after that, if two new shinobi came to exist Konoha, that wouldnt have anything to do with me. It definitely wouldnt. Shikamaru replied to Gaaras words with a broad grin. Ah Shijima looked like she was near tears. It was because she could definitely see the two people moving under Gaaras sand. The sand was simply wrapped around them to hide them from plain sight. This is an old tactic of subterfuge, Gaara said, Im a little embarrassed for you to see it. Established strategies are things to be used when the circumstances call for them, Shikamaru replied. There isnt anyone in the Houki tribe whos seen Hakutos face without makeup, so that wont be a problem. We will have to change Shigezanes face a little bit though. Since thats so, well leave that to Hakuto. Thats true. And if you can, take Hakuto to my sisterto see Temari. The customs and ways of life in Konohagakure and Sunagakure are different. Hakuto will feel relieved to have someone she knows around. I get it already, I get it. I wont do anything poorly, you know. Shikamaru said, quickly turning around. That was his way of saying leave everything else to me. Lets go, Shijima. Gaara said. Eh Shijima didnt know how to answer. Im a betrayed, so wont I be erased? No matter what, that thought hadnt been erased from her head. It wasnt that she didnt trust Gaara. It was just that she hadnt ever known a world other than the kind where traitors were gotten rid of, she she honestly didnt know how to behave towards Gaara. Gaara looked at Shijimas state for several seconds, and then scratched his head like he was troubled. He suddenly noticed that Shikamaru was constantly sneaking peaks towards him and Shijima, with a strangely delighted grin on his face. It looked like hearing gossip had made him curious. Gaara sighed, and kept talking. Whats wrong? Youve achieved your mission, he said, Returning to the oasis before sunrise. Is that really okay? The truth is what weve just stated earlier. If I were to get rid of you here, it would contradict that truth. Gaaras tone wasnt cold. Rather, his words were warm. Sunagakure needs shinobi like you from now on, too. Yes, sir. Shijima took off her glasses, bowed with her eyes closed, and then, once more, looked at him from behind her sealed and closed eyes.From now on, Id like to serve the Kazekage, if I could. Ill stake my life. Ill be relying on you. Gaara said only that as a reply, and leapt onwards. Shijima leapt forwards too, following him. After watching the pair head off in clouds of dust, Shikamaru had a satisfied look on his face as he started his work to break through the sand barrier that was hiding Hakuto and Shigezane so the two could get out. Its finally over, huh. The three siblings were standing on a hill that overlooked all of Suna, watching over the village that had finally regained its serenity. Processing the uproar after the coup had gone fairly smoothly. Kankurou had ordered his subordinates to suppress any other elders who sympathised with Toujuurou, so in a way, it felt like an infection had been purged. After that, Gaara had just silently carried out the villages law. Toujuurou and the rest had acquired names and been driven out of the villages centre. Ugh man, I really wanna sleep. There were bags under Kankurous eyes that had nothing to do with his makeup. Hed spent his time after the fake coup constantly giving orders to his subordinates. Youre not going to say something Shikamaru-like? Temari asked. The face that Kankurou made was so hilarious that Temari pointed and let out a laugh. Gaara gave a small smile too. Something about the three siblings smiling faces looked alike. Bloodlines may be chains that tie people down. But, they were also bonds. Even if they separated, they were still siblings, and he was gaining a new brother. And before long, a nephew, a niece, he would be able to go and meet new family members like that, too. You two dont ever change, do you? Gaara noted. Che. Kankurou grumbled. Fufu, could be. Temari replied. There were many things that changed. But, there were also things that didnt change. Like the desert, Gaara thought. The wind was constantly blowing in the desert hed been born in, creating new forms all the time. But, it was still the desert. Gaara believed that they would be like that, as well. Shinobi are those who endure. They endure absurdity. They endure hardships. They keep fighting. And, shinobi prevail under the most impossible of circumstances. Even if swords rain down on them, their spirits never disappear. That was enduring. That was a shinobi. And that, was Gaara. And that was why from now on as well, the wind that blew over Sunagakure was always kind. Translators Notes: *So, after puzzling over the term raisha literally lightning/thunder cars for almost the whole novel, i finally figured out what it meant. Train in Japanese is densha electric car. The Nardy universe probs uses lightning instead of electricity. Hence, lightning/thunder car = electric car = lightning train = ELECTRIC TRAIN! I admit Im a bit sheepish as to how long it took me to figure that out lol. **Some of you mightve noticed that the other chapter I made a few typos on Maizurus name (in my defence I was sleepy, but I apparently wrote Maizuru and Maijuru in rotation lol) but yeah, the correct versions Maizuru. Apologies for that XD And, heres an extra explanation for anyone who missed out the clues that resulted in that AWESOME TWIST. Remember the unexpected ally who saved Temari in chapter three? We thought it was Shijima because she said Temari told her to go help, BUT NO, IT WAS SHIKAMARU. Shikamaru who is apparently such a worrywort over his brother in law he was secretly keeping an eye on the marriage meeting the whole time just like Temari wow you two wow. Match made in heaven XD So yeah, Shikamaru saved Temari from collapsing, and he probably helped her get back to her senses before she went looking for Shijima and asked her for help. Second, the letter Gaara entrusted Temari with wAS FOR SHIKAMARU. Thats why she made the youve gotten to understand some things comment because sHE KNEW HE KNEW SHIKAMARU WAS THERE, MY DAYS. Third, the comment Gaara made about having to decieve a trust ally wAS ABOUT BAKI. BECAUSE GAARA WAS IN ON THE PLOT WITH KANKUROU THE WHOLE FREAKING TIME. Im just. smh. SMH THAT TWIST WAS BRILLIANT. And, since there seem to be a few people who were confused about this, Gaara stopped his sand waterfall funeral technique at the last moment, and wrapped the sand around Hakuto and Shigezane to hide them from plain sight instead. His conversation with Shikamaru was about sneaking Hakuto and Shigezane into Konoha so they could live there from now on, while telling everyone in Suna that theyd died.